User manual | Avaya Integral Enterprise System Manual

Add to My manuals
718 Pages

advertisement

Avaya Integral Enterprise System Manual | Manualzz

System Manual

Integral Enterprise

6 - English

June 2009

© 2009 Avaya Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

Notice

While reasonable efforts were made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing, Avaya Inc. can assume no liability for any errors. Changes and corrections to the information in this document may be incorporated in future releases.

For full support information, please see the complete document,

Avaya Support Notices for Software Documentation

, document number

03-600758.

To locate this document on our Web site, simply go to http://www.avaya.com/support and search for the document number in the search box.

Documentation disclaimer

Avaya Inc. is not responsible for any modifications, additions, or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications, additions, or deletions were performed by Avaya. Customer and/or End User agree to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya, Avaya's agents, servants and employees against all claims, lawsuits, demands and judgments arising out of, or in connection with, subsequent modifications, additions or deletions to this documentation to the extent made by the Customer or End User.

Link disclaimer

Avaya Inc. is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced elsewhere within this documentation, and Avaya does not necessarily endorse the products, services, or information described or offered within them. We cannot guarantee that these links will work all of the time and we have no control over the availability of the linked pages.

Warranty

Avaya Inc. provides a limited warranty on this product. Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty. In addition, Avaya’s standard warranty language, as well as information regarding support for this product, while under warranty, is available through the following Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support .

Copyright

Except where expressly stated otherwise, the Product is protected by copyright and other laws respecting proprietary rights. Unauthorized reproduction, transfer, and or use can be a criminal, as well as a civil, offense under the applicable law.

Avaya support

Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your product. The support telephone number is 1-800-242-2121 in the United States. For additional support telephone numbers, see the Avaya Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support .

Contact in Germany and EMEA

Avaya GmbH & Co. KG

Kleyerstraße 94

D-60326 Frankfurt am Main

Mail:[email protected]

Germany

EMEA

Telephone 0800-2661000 Fax 0800-2661219

Telephone +49 (69) 7505 2833 Fax +49 (69) 7505 2841

Conformity Information

Conformity Information

© 2008 Avaya Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

GB

Permission and Conformity

We, Avaya GmbH & Co. KG, declare that the product line Integral Enterprise concurs with the basic requirements and other relevant provisions of EU Directive 1999/5/EU concerning radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.

Intended use

This equipment is intended for connection to analogue (PSTN) and digital (ISTN) interfaces of public telecommunication networks within the European Union. Moreover it supports radio interfaces according to the standards DECT, Bluetooth, and WIFI (IEEE 802.11). It is compliant with the essential requirements of the

EU-Directive 1999/5/EU (Radio and Telekommunication Terminal Equipment, R&TTE).

Due to the differences of the individual public networks and network operators this compliance does not by itself give an unconditional assurance of successful operation at every network termination point. For the time being we are not aware of any network on which the equipment will not work due to its design.

In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier or your Avaya service.

The conformity declaration can be accessed at the following Internet address: www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/ includedcontent/conformity.htm

or search the index using the key term "Conformity".

D

Zulassung und Konformität

Wir, Avaya GmbH & Co. KG, erklären, dass die Produktlinie Integral Enterprise übereinstimmt mit den grundlegenden

Anforderungen und anderen relevanten Bestimmungen gemäß der EG-Richtlinie 1999/5/EU über Funkanlagen und

Telekommunikationsendeinrichtungen und die gegenseitige Anerkennung ihrer Konformität.

Vorgesehener Verwendungszweck

Diese Systeme sind zum Anschluss an analoge (PSTN) und digitale (ISDN) Schnittstellen öffentlicher

Telekommunikations- netze innerhalb der Europäischen Gemeinschaft bestimmt. Außerdem unterstützen sie

Funkschnittstellen nach den Standards DECT, Bluetooth und WIFI (IEEE 802.11). Sie erfüllen die grundlegenden

Anforderungen gemäß der EG-Richtlinie 1999/5/EU (Radio und Telekommunikation Terminal Equipment, R&TTE).

Wegen der Unterschiede zwischen den öffentlichen Telekommunikationsnetzen verschiedener Staaten und

Netzbetreiber kann die Konformität mit der genannten EG-Richtlinie allein nicht den erfolgreichen Betrieb der Systeme

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

3

an jedem Netzabschluss- punkt garantieren. Derzeit kennen wir aber keine Telekommunikationsnetze, an denen die

Systeme bauartbedingt nicht betrieben werden können.

Falls trotzdem Probleme auftreten sollten, wenden Sie sich bitte zunächst an Ihren Fachhändler oder an Ihren Avaya

Service.

Die Konformitätserklärung kann auf folgender Internetadresse angefordert werden: www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/ includedcontent/conformity.htm

oder suchen Sie unter Index das Stichwort: "Konformität".

F

Agrément et conformité

Au nom de la société Avaya GmbH & Co.KG, nous certifions que la ligne de produit Integral Enterprise est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres prescriptions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EU (R&TTE) concernant les installations radio, les terminaisons de systèmes de telecommunications correspondantes et la reconnaissance mutuelle de leur conformité.

Utilisation prévue

Cette ligne de produits est conçue pour être raccordée aux interfaces analogique (PSTN) et numérique (RNIS) de réseaux de télécommunications publics à l’intérieur de la communauté européenne. Cette ligne de produits est destinée à être connectée aux interfaces radios répondants aux standards DECT, Bluetooth et WIFI (IEEE 802.11).

Elle satisfait aux exigences fondamentales de la directive CE1999/5/CE (Equipement de terminaux radio et télécommunication, R&TTE).

En raison des différences entre les réseaux de télécommunications publics des différents pays et les opérateurs réseau, la conformité à la directive européenne ci-dessus ne garantit cependant pas le fonctionnement sans problème de l'appareil à chaque point de raccordement au réseau. A l'heure actuelle, nous n'avons pas connaissance de réseaux de communications sur lesquels cet appareil ne peut pas être exploité en raison de sa conception. Si vous observez toutefois des dysfonctionnements lors de l’exploitation, veuillez contacter votre revendeur habituel.

En cas de problèmes lors de l'utilisation, veuillez vous adresser à votre revendeur ou à votre administrateur système.

Vous pouvez obtenir la déclaration de conformité sur l'adresse Internet suivante : www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/ includedcontent/conformity.htm

ou chercher dans l'index le mot-clé : "conformité".

E

Permiso y conformidad

En nombre de Avaya GmbH & Co. KG, declaramos que la línea de productos Integral Enterprise coincide con los requisitos básicos y otras disposiciones pertinentes de la directiva de la UE 1999/5/EU relativa a equipos de radio y equipos de terminales de telecomunicaciones, así como el reconocimiento mutuo de su conformidad.

Uso final

Este equipo se ha diseñado para utilizar con interfaces analógicas (PSTN) y digitales (ISTN) de las redes de telecomunicaciones públicas en la Unión Europea. Asimismo, admite interfaces de radio, de acuerdo con el estándar

4

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Conformity Information

DECT, Bluetooth y WIFI (IEEE 802.11). Cumple con los requisitos esenciales de la directiva de la UE 1999/5/EU

(Equipos terminales de telecomunicaciones y radio, RTTE).

Debido a las diferencias de las redes públicas individuales y operadores de red, este cumplimiento no otorga por sí mismo una seguridad absoluta sobre el funcionamiento correcto en cada terminal de la red. En estos momentos no tenemos conocimiento de ninguna red en la que el equipo no funcione debido a su diseño.

En el caso de que haya problemas, debe ponerse en contacto con su distribuidor o el servicio técnico de Avaya.

Puede acceder a la declaración de conformidad en la siguiente dirección de Internet: www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/ includedcontent/conformity.htm

o buscar el índice mediante la palabra clave "Conformidad".

I

Autorizzazioni e conformità

Avaya GmbH & Co. KG dichiara che la linea di prodotti Integral Enterprise soddisfa i requisiti di base e le altre disposizioni applicabili della Direttiva dell'Unione Europea 1999/5/UE relativa alle apparecchiature radio e ai terminali per le telecomunicazioni, nonché i relativi requisiti di conformità.

Uso previsto

La presente periferica è progettata per essere collegata ad interfacce analogiche (PSTN) e digitali (ISTN) di reti di telecomunicazione pubbliche nell'ambito dell'Unione Europea. Supporta inoltre le interfacce radio conformemente agli standard DECT, Bluetooth e WIFI (IEEE 802.11) ed è conforme con i requisiti fondamentali della Direttiva dell'Unione

Europea 1999/5/UE (Apparecchiature radio e per le telecomunicazioni, R&TTE).

A causa delle differenze tra le singole reti pubbliche e gli operatori di tali reti, questa conformità non assicura incondizionatamente il funzionamento corretto sui punti terminali di tutte le reti. Al momento attuale, Avaya non è a conoscenza di reti su cui il dispositivo nella configurazione attuale non funzioni.

In caso di problemi, è opportuno rivolgersi al fornitore della periferica o al Centro di assistenza Avaya locale.

La dichiarazione di conformità è disponibile alla pagina Web www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/includedcontent/conformity.htm

oppure ricercare la parola "conformità" nell'indice analitico.

NL

Goedkeuring en Conformiteit

Wij, Avaya GmbH & Co. KG, verklaren dat de productlijn Integral Enterprise overeenkomt met de basisvereisten en andere relevante bepalingen van EG Richtlijn 1999/5/EG betreffende eindapparatuur voor radio- en telecommunicatie

(ERTC) en de wederzijdse erkenning van hun conformiteit.

Bedoeld gebruik

Deze apparatuur is bedoeld voor aansluiting op analoge (PSTN) en digitale (ISTN) interfaces van publieke telecommunicatienetwerken in de Europese Unie. Bovendien ondersteunt het ether-interfaces in overeenstemming met de DECT, Bluetooth en WIFI normen (IEEE 802.11). Het komt overeen met de essentiële vereisten van EG

Richtlijn 1999/5/EG (Eindapparatuur voor Radio- en Telecommunicatie Eindapparatuur, ERTC).

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

5

Op grond van verschillen tussen de individuele publieke netwerken en netwerkexploitanten betekent dit op zichzelf geen onvoorwaardelijke garantie voor succesvolle werking op ieder netwerkaansluitpunt. Momenteel zijn ons geen gevallen bekend van enig netwerk waar de apparatuur op grond van het ontwerp niet werkt.

In geval van problemen dient u contact op te nemen met de leverancier van uw apparatuur of met Avaya service.

De conformiteitsverklaring kan worden ingezien op het volgende internetadres: www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/ includedcontent/conformity.htm

of zoek in de index onder de zoekterm "Conformiteit".

SLO

Odobritev in skladnost

Mi, Avaya GmbH & Co. KG, izjavljamo, da je linija izdelkov Integral Enterprise v skladu z osnovnimi zahtevami in drugimi pomembnimi določbami Direktive EU 1999/5/EU o radijski opremi in telekomunikacijski terminalski opremi ter medsebojnem priznavanju skladnosti te opreme.

Namen uporabe

Ta oprema je namenjena za priključitev na analogne (PSTN) in digitalne (ISTN) vmesnike javnih telekomunikacijskih omrežij v Evropski uniji. Poleg tega podpira tudi radijske vmesnike v skladu s standardi DECT, Bluetooth in WIFI (IEEE

802.11). Linija izdelkov je skladna s temeljnimi zahtevami Direktive EU 1999/5/EU (radijska in telekomunikacijska terminalska oprema - R&TTE).

Zaradi razlik med posameznimi javnimi omrežji in omrežnimi operaterji ta skladnost sama po sebi ni brezpogojno zagotovilo za uspešno delovanje na vsaki omrežni priključni točki. Trenutno ne vemo za nobeno omrežje, kjer oprema zaradi svoje oblike ne bi delovala.

V primeru težav se obrnite na svojega dobavitelja opreme ali servis Avaya.

Do deklaracije o skladnosti lahko pridete prek naslednjega internetnega naslova: www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/ includedcontent/conformity.htm

ali pa tako, da iščete po kazalu s pomočjo ključne besede "skladnost".

PL

Zezwolenie i zgodność

Firma Avaya GmbH & Co. KG oświadcza, że linia produktów Integral Enterprise jest zgodna z podstawowymi wymogami oraz innymi odpowiednimi przepisami Dyrektywy 1999/5/WE w sprawie urządzeń radiowych i końcowych urządzeń telekomunikacyjnych oraz wzajemnego uznawania ich zgodności.

Przeznaczenie użytkowe

Urządzenie przeznaczone jest do połączenia z analogowymi (PSTN) i cyfrowymi (ISTN) publicznymi sieciami telekomunikacyjnymi w Unii Europejskiej. Ponadto obsługuje ono interfejsy radiowe zgodnie ze standardami DECT,

Bluetooth, and WIFI (IEEE 802.11). Jest ono zgodne z podstawowymi wymogami Dyrektywy 1999/5/WE (w sprawie urządzeń radiowych i końcowych urządzeń telekomunikacyjnych).

Ze względu na różnice między poszczególnymi sieciami publicznymi oraz operatorami sieci, zgodność niniejsza nie stanowi bezwarunkowej gwarancji prawidłowego działania w każdym punkcie końcowym sieci. W chwili obecnej nie są znane sieci, z którymi urządzenie to nie współpracuje ze względu na jego budowę.

W razie ewentualnych problemów, należy skontaktować się z dostawcą urządzenia lub z biurem obsługi Avaya.

6

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Conformity Information

Deklaracja zgodności dostępna jest pod następującym adresem internetowym: www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/ includedcontent/conformity.htm

Można również wyszukiwać w indeksie hasła „Zgodność”.

H

Engedély és megfelelőség

Mi, az Avaya GmbH & Co. KG kijelentük, hogy az Integral Enterprise termékcsalád megfelel a rádióberendezések és távközlési végberendezések, valamint a megfelelőség kölcsönös elismerésére vonatkozó 1999/5/EU európai uniós irányelvnek.

Rendeltetésszerű felhasználás

Ezt a berendezést az Európai Unióban található nyilvános telekommunikációs hálózatok analóg (PSTN) és digitális

(ISTN) interfészeihez történő csatlakoztatásra tervezték. Ezenkívül támogatja a DECT, Bluetooth és WIFI (IEEE

802.11) szabványnak megfelelő rádiós interfészeket. Megfelel az 1999/5/EU (Rádió és távközlési végberendezések,

R&TTE) EU-irányelv lényeges követelményeinek.

Az egyes nyilvános hálózatok és szolgáltatók közötti különbségek miatt ez a megfelelőség nem biztosítja feltétel nélkül, hogy a készülékek sikeresen működnek minden hálózati végponton. Mindmáig nem találkoztunk olyan hálózattal, amelyen a berendezés a kialakítása miatt ne működött volna.

Ha problémába ütközik, vegye fel a kapcsolatot a berendezés szállítójával vagy az Avaya szervizzel.

A megfelelőségi nyilatkozat megtalálható a következő internetcímen: www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/includedcontent/ conformity.htm

vagy keressen a tárgymutatóban a "Conformity" kulcsszóval.

GR

Άδεια χρήσης και Συμμόρφωση

Εμείς, η ετερόρρυθμος εταιρεία Avaya GmbH & Co. KG, δηλώνουμε ότι η γραμμή προϊόντων Integral Enterprise

πληροί τις θεμελιώδεις απαιτήσεις και λοιπές σχετικές διατάξεις της κοινοτικής οδηγίας 1999/5/EΕ όσον αφορά τον

ραδιοεξοπλισμό και τηλεπικοινωνιακό τερματικό εξοπλισμό και την αμοιβαία αναγνώριση της πιστότητας των

εξοπλισμών αυτών.

Προοριζόμενη χρήση

Ο παρών εξοπλισμός προορίζεται για σύνδεση σε αναλογικές (PSTN) και ψηφιακές (ISTN) διεπαφές δημόσιων

τηλεπικοινωνιακών δικτύων εντός της Ευρωπαϊκής Ένωσης. Επιπλέον, υποστηρίζει ραδιοδιεπαφές σύμφωνα με τα

πρότυπα DECT, Bluetooth και WIFI (IEEE 802.11). Συμμορφώνεται με τις ουσιώδεις απαιτήσεις της κοινοτικής οδηγίας

1999/5/ΕΕ (περί Ραδιοεξοπλισμού και Τηλεπικοινωνιακού Τερματικού Εξοπλισμού, ΡΕ&TTE).

Λόγω των διαφορών στα επιμέρους δημόσια δίκτυα και τους παρόχους δικτύων, η παρούσα συμμόρφωση δεν

παρέχει, από μόνη της, άνευ όρων διαβεβαίωση για την επιτυχή λειτουργία του εξοπλισμού σε κάθε σημείο απόληξης

του δικτύου. Επί του παρόντος, δεν γνωρίζουμε κάποιο δίκτυο στο οποίο δεν θα λειτουργεί ο εξοπλισμός λόγω της

κατασκευής του.

Εάν προκύψουν προβλήματα, πρέπει να επικοινωνήσετε με τον προμηθευτή του εξοπλισμού ή το τμήμα τεχνικής

εξυπηρέτησης της Avaya.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

7

Η πρόσβαση στη δήλωση περί συμμόρφωσης είναι εφικτή μέσω της ακόλουθης ηλεκτρονικής διεύθυνσης: www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/includedcontent/conformity.htm

ή μέσω της αναζήτησης του όρου-κλειδί "Συμμόρφωση".

8

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Content

Content

Conformity Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Integral Enterprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

MG1000 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Delivery and transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Protective grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Required Servicing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Connections to V.24 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

EC Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

MG1000 base system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Expansion options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Standing casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

19" cabinet / 19" frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Other weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Traffic handling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Single and twin module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Procedure for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Board slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

General information on boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Access to the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Inserting the Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Switch on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

ICS (multi-module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Rack and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

General information on boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

B3 module(multi module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

9

Board slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

General information on boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

19" cabinets and thermal offtake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Standing casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

33 HU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

42 HU 500 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

42 HU 730 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

42HE dismountable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Overview of components (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Overview of components (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Cabinet selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Intrinsic convection, heat transmission through the cabinet surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Intrinsic convection with issue of the hot air from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Forced convection, direct heat exchange using fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Thermal offtake by cooling device: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Forced circulation due to heat exchanger (air/air) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Calculation formula for the effective cabinet surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Flow chart: Air conditioning in a 19"cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Universal installation aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Power supply units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

PS350 adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

FPE in cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

B3 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Fuse Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

FPE in the B3 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

PSL Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

PS280A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

PS350A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

ISPS (IMTU Supplementary Power Supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Uninterrupted Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Online UPS systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Line-Interactive UPS systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Supplementary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Installation and service concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

IEarthing measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Grounding concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

General Requirements and Explanations for the Decision-Making Diagram . . . . . . 146

Explanations for the terms SELV, TNV1, TNV2 and TNV3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

10

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Content

Annex 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Annex 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Annex 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Annex 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Annex 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Single module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

PS Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

doubling CF* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

*CB doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Twin module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

PS Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

CF* doubling (within a module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

*CB doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Multi-module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Coupled systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

MLB (Module Link Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

ISMx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

ICF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

IVZ on *CB boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

IVZ on separate *CB boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Doubling the PS in the B3 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Complete doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

General Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

MG1000 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Control, Central Functions and Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

ASM3 Announcement Module 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

CBI1A3 CBus Interface 1 Adapter Version 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

CF22 Central Functions 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

CFIML, CFIML1 Central Functions Inter Module Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

CL2ME Clock 2 Module Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

DSPF Digital Signal Processing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

DSPF1 Digital Signal Processing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

EOCPF Electrical Optical Converter Plastic Fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

EOCSM/MM Electrical Optical Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

HSCB High Speed Computer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

ICF IMTU Central Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

ISMx Switching Matrix x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

MLB Module Link Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

MLBIML Module Link Board, Inter Module Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

R1RC connecting the MG1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

S5500/ACB1/ACB Advanced Computer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

V24I/NI Insulated/Non-Insulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

V24M Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Connector technology and signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

AEV24B adapter Ethernet / V24 B module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

11

AV24B Adapter V24 B Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

CA Cable Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

CA1B cable adapter 1 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

CA2B cable adapter 2 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

CA3B cable adapter 3 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

CA3B/T cable adapter 3 for B-modules TAREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

CA4B cable adapter 4 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

CA6B cable adapter 6 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

CF22 Central Functions 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

EDU Error Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

EES0B Emergency Extension Switch S0 B Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

EESS0 Emergency Extension Switch S0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

EESxB emergency extension switch B module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

ESBx External signaling B Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

HSCB High Speed Computer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

ICF IMTU Central Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

OFA2B/OFAS Optical Fiber Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

TER Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Analog interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

ABSM1 Analog Subscriber Submodule 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

ACSM Alternating Current Signaling Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

ADM Analog Digital Mixboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

ALSM Active Loop Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

ALSMF Active Loop Submodule France . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

ASC21 Analog Subscriber Circuit 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

ATA Analog Trunk Interface A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

ATA2 Analog Trunk Interface A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

ATB Analog Trunk Interface B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

ATC Analog Trunk Interface C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

ATLC Analog TIE Line Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

PLSM Passive Loop Sub Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

SIGA Signalling Unit A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

SIGB Signalling Unit B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

SIGC Signalling Unit C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

SIGD Signalling Unit D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

SIGE Signalling Unit E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

SIGF Signalling Unit F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

SIGG Signalling Unit G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

SIGH signaling Unit H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

SSBA Signalling Sub Board A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

SSBB Signalling Sub Board B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

SSBC Signalling Sub Board C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

SSBD Signalling Sub Board D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

SSSM Simplex Signaling Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

SUPA Supplement A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

SUPB Supplement B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

SUTC Signaling Unit Trunk C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

SUTD signaling Unit Trunk D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Digital interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

ADM Analog Digital Mixboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

CAS Channel Associated Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

12

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Content

CL2ME Clock 2 Module Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

DECT22 ICU for DECT applications 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

DS03 Digital Linecard S0 Variant 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

DT22 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

DUP03 Digital Subscriber UP0 HW Variant 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

DUPN Digital Subscriber UPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

EEADM Emergency Extension Analog Digital Mixboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

EES0B Emergency Extension Switch S0 B Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

EESS0 Emergency Extension Switch S0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

EMAC Extended Multi Access Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

IPN Intelligent Private Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

MAC Multi Access Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

MULI Multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

OFA2B/OFAS Optical Fiber Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

STSM1 S0/T0 Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

UIP Universal Interface Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

UKSM UK0 Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

UPSM, UPSM1 UPN submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

IP Telephony Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

VOIP Voice over IP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

IP Media Resource 256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Discontinued modules and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

ABSM Analog Subscriber Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

ALSMH Active Loop Submodule Hong Kong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

ASC2 Analog Subscriber Circuit 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

ASCxx Analogue Subscriber Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

BVT2 Motherboard, Voice Transmitting Module 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

CARUB Cable Adapter Russia B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

CF2E Central Functions 2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

CL2M Clock 2 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

DCON Digital Protocol Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

DDID Direct Dialling Inward Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

DECT21 ICU for DECT-Applications 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

DS02 Digital Linecard S0 Variant 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

DT0 Digital Linecard T0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

DT21 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

HAMUX - Home Agent Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

IMUX Integrated Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

JPAT JISCOS Public Analog Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

STSM S0/T0-Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

V24M Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

MG100 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

Required Servicing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

MG1000/MG100 comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

MG100 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

13

Front side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

Opening the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550

Desk unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Installation in a cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Wall-mounting the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

Standing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

ACBO Advanced Computer Board Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

ATA Analog Trunk Interface A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

CAS Channel Associated Signallin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

DECT22 ICU for DECT-Applications 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

DSPF Digital Signal Processing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

DSPF1 Digital Signal Processing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

DT22 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

IPN Intelligent Private Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

MBO1 Motherboard Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598

SBAO System Board Adapter Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607

VOIP Voice over IP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

PSO Power Supply Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

PE or FPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614

Module view in the ISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618

Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

Patch cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

MG100 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

Discontinued modules and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

DECT21 ICU for DECT-Applications 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

DT21 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633

HSCBO High Speed Computer Board Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

BS Confidata: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

GCU configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

Package S1 for a single module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

Package S2 for a twin module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

I1 Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644

I2 Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

I3 Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

I4 Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

Single module S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

Twin module S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

Multi-Module I1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

Multi-Module I1 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

Multi-module I2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

Multi-Module I2 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654

Multi-Module I3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Multi-Module I3 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656

Multi-module I4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

Multi-Module I4 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

14

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Content

Cable network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660

Connections from CSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660

Main Distribution Frame or Network Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660

Service panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676

Line lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680

Contact occupation of the modular plug connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682

Notes on DECT: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

Intermodule handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

Application in the Multi-Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

Application in the Twin module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

Configurations not allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

Connection of the external clock normal to the Integral Enterprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689

Supplying power to the DECT-Net base station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689

Suitable cable types for connection of DECT RBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Cable layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

Notes on VolP and IPMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693

IPMR and VoIP in comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695

VoIP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696

IPMR mode with 16 slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698

IPMR mode with 8 slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

Replace a VoIP by an IPMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702

Replace a VoIP by an IPMR in IPMR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702

Cable adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703

Operator sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704

Measuring and Testing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705

BA Board Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705

SP1 Spy Probe 1 (SP1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707

V24IA V24 Interface Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708

List of attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711

Last Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

15

16

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Integral Enterprise

Integral Enterprise

Integral Enterprise is an intelligent communications solution tailored specifically to the needs of mid-sized and large companies.

The system consists primarily of media gateways (MG100 and MG1000), which can be customized with different media modules to meet customer requirements.

The product is designed in 19" technology and fits perfectly into an existing IT environment. A specially developed standing case is also available when the system is used outside of 19" environments.

This system manual contains information for sales executives, service engineers and technicians in relation to the acquisition, installation, maintenance and expansion of Integral Enterprise.

In this manual, abbreviations of modules and module groups marked with an "x" apply to specific variations of modules and/or module groups.

Updated: 06/2009

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

17

MG1000 Media Gateway

The MG1000 Media Gateway is the basic framework for the Integral Enterprise communication solution. It contains eight slots for different media modules and two slots for connection modules (media modules) and two slots for controller modules (media servers). It also contains slots for the power supply.

The MG1000 can be connected to additional MG1000 gateways using different connection interfaces, enabling even highly complex network scenarios.

The modular design enables applications for systems up to around 50,000 users.

18

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Important notes

Important notes

Safety Information

Do not connect the mains voltage until after you have finished and checked all wiring.

System service and repairs are the exclusive domain of an authorized specialist.

The MG1000 Media Gateway must be connected to a properly installed, grounded mains socket. The power supply voltage must correspond to the mains voltage. The provided mains cables must be used.

When connecting devices to the V.24 interfaces, only use the supplied shielded cables.

Each module must be connected to voltage compensation.

The occurrence of strong magnetic fields in the vicinity of the MG1000 Media Gateway must be prevented.

The Media Gateway MG1000 must not be exposed to shock, impact or vibrations.

ESD precautions must be followed when working with modules susceptible to electrostatic shock.

For reasons of EMC, vacant slots should be covered with front plates.

Prior to removing power supply modules, they must be separated from the mains voltage.

Prior to commissioning, pull the protective hoods over the power supply modules on the front side.

Subsequent to system startup, the MG1000 Media Gateway must be closed (dust covers and rear panels depending on hardware configuration and module types).

The following regulations or guidelines must be considered during system installation, startup and operation:

• DIN VDE 0100 Setting up heavy current systems

• DIN VDE 0105 Operating heavy current systems

• DIN VDE 0132 Fire countermeasures in electrical systems

• DIN VDE 0298 Use of cables and insulated wiring for heavy current systems

• DIN VDE 0800 Telecommunications engineering

• DIN VDE 0891 Use of cables and insulated wiring for telecommunication and information processing systems

• DIN 4102 Combustive properties of building materials and components

• DIN 5035 Interior lighting with artificial light

• VDI 2054 Air conditioning systems for data processing environments

Additional regulations or guidelines may apply in special or individual circumstances.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19

Environmental Conditions

The following placement guidelines must be followed to ensure trouble free operation of the Integral Enterprise:

• The room must be dry and provide options for ventilation.

• Weight when fully equipped. See Technical data.

• The floor covering should possess antistatic properties. It should be easy to clean and abrasion resistant.

• If the system is to be installed in tight quarters, sufficient ventilation should be ensured. The MG1000

Media Gateway must not be exposed to sources of heat (e.g. radiator).

• If the PSL is doubled, the mains connections should be established using separate circuits (phase and fuse).

• An additional number of grounded mains sockets must be provided for service purposes.

Climatic conditions for operation, storage and transport. See Technical data.

Access to the cabinet or standing casing must be guaranteed from the front and the back.

Delivery and transportation

Only transport the MG1000 Media Gateway in its original packaging.

Check that the system is complete by referring to the delivery note and the accompanying installation documents.

Protective grounding

All modules must generally be grounded using a separately routed protective conductor. Grounding using the protective conductor of the power cord does not suffice.

The protective conductor must have a green-yellow insulating jacket and a minimum cross-section of 2.5

mm

2

if mechanical protection is present, or 4 mm

2

if this is not the case. More detailed information can be found in the chapter

Grounding concept

[

→ 146 ]

.

Ready solutions can be found in the following sections:

19" cabinet

[

→ 112 ]

,

Standing casing

[

→ 114 ]

and

Housing/cabinet solutions

[

→ 116 ]

.

The following information is generally applicable:

• The lockable grounding connector with cable (49.9804.5750) is only used in the standing casing with

one rack.

• The FPE conductors in the cabinet are made with green-yellow wires with a minimum cross-section of

2.5 mm

2

. The PA conductor outside the cabinet is protected and made with a minimum cross-section of 6 mm

2

.

20

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Important notes

• Two cables are specified for the permanent connection of the cabinet:

• 49.9906.7592, 5 m, with blue CEE connector

• 49.9906.7593, 10 m, with blue CEE connector

• If additional devices are installed then it must be checked whether the leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA. If this is the case then these devices must also be equipped with a fixed connection to the PA rail.

• If the leakage current is greater than >3.5 mA then a ground connection must be established before the connection is made to the supply circuit.

• The leakage currents of UPS systems also need to be considered. If the currents exceed 3.5 mA then the UPS must be equipped with a fixed FPE connection.

• If a cabinet is supplied from an external UPS system then the cable 49.9906.8660 (3 x 1.5 mm

2

with grounded safety plug and wire end ferrules) is specified for the connection.

• If a redundant power supply is provided then it must be ensured that the power supplies are fed from different supply circuits. (This means that the cabinet will need two multiple socket outlets.)

• If the MG1000 Media Gateway is to be installed in an external cabinet without a PA rail then it must be ensured that the FPE of the rack is either connected to the PA conductor via a subsequently installed

PA rail or that it is connected directly to the PA conductor.

• Flexible connecting cables (cords) should generally be used in cases where mobile cabinets on rollers are connected.

• If the computer board is used with a V24 interface, then the insulated interface V24I (28.7640.3242) or similar should preferably be used.

The chapters

FPE in cabinets

[

→ 110 ]

and

FPE in the B3 module

[

→ 125 ]

contain a description of how to install and connect the ground conductor.

Required Servicing Procedures

When service assistance is required, the helpdesk can be called by:

• the customer,

• the technician/service engineer,

• remote fault signaling,

• TNS (during the night).

In most cases, the helpdesk will already have located the fault through the use of remote diagnostics. If this is the case, it may be sufficient to simply replace the faulty board. It should be stated, however, that not every fault can be located with the aid of remote diagnostics.

If this is the case, you will need to:

• Summarize the available information,

• Interpret fault printouts and fault indications/displays

• Locate the fault using the service PC,

• Perform diagnostics with the aid of the helpdesk.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

21

Connections to V.24 Interfaces

To prevent the destruction of the V.24 interface drivers and receiver components when connecting circuits, it is imperative to use cables that are shielded on both ends

(e.g. 27.5630.0561, .0562, .0564, .0565 or similar).

EC Declaration of Conformity

Permission and Conformity

We, Avaya GmbH & Co. KG, declare that the product line Integral Enterprise concurs with the basic requirements and other relevant provisions of EU Directive 1999/5/EU concerning radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.

Intended use

This equipment is intended for connection to analogue (PSTN) and digital (ISTN) interfaces of public telecommunication networks within the European Union. Moreover it supports radio interfaces according to the standards DECT, Bluetooth, and WIFI (IEEE 802.11). It is compliant with the essential requirements of the

EU-Directive 1999/5/EU (Radio and Telekommunication Terminal Equipment, R&TTE).

Due to the differences of the individual public networks and network operators this compliance does not by itself give an unconditional assurance of successful operation at every network termination point. For the time being we are not aware of any network on which the equipment will not work due to its design.

In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier or your Avaya service. The conformity declaration can be accessed at the following Internet address: www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/includedcontent/conformity.htm http://www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/includedcontent/conformity.htm

or search the index using the key term "Conformity".

22

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Product overview

Product overview

Integral Enterprise is a product designed with in 19" technology, which can be customized to the data technology environment using this technology. It is made up of uniform racks, which can be cascadable in any way. Accordingly, it can handle port numbers of less than 30 to over 32,000 within a multi-modular configuration.

When combined with ICC application integration, the result is a highly flexible product, which will satisfy any customer. The system offers a large range of opportunities in order to make use of all aspects of modern telecommunications. These include e.g. voice over IP, call identification, least cost routing and many more.

No regular maintenance is required. The technician requires no system specific tools. Special tools are available for factory trained technicians.

Structure

Integral Enterprise is made up of uniform MG1000 Media Gateway racks, built in 19" technology. These can be installed in standard 19" cabinets or in 19" frames. In addition, the MG1000 can be installed in specially developed, more cost-efficient standing cases (see the Standing cases chapter).

Up to four MG1000 Media Gateways cam be combined to create a single module using CAT6 8-wire copper cables up to 30 m long. This means that the MG1000 can be assembled flexibly, e.g. divided into several 19" cabinets. The following provides a more detailed explanation of the HW components.

MG1000 base system

One MG1000 consists of 8 slots for connecting device modules (ISUs) and 2 slots for the control modules

(HSCB/ACB, CF2E/CF22). It also includes additional slots (outside right and left) for the power supply.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

23

Cross-sectional drawing MG1000

Integral Enterprise, MG1000 Media Gateway for installation in a 19" cabinet or in a standing casing (max.

256 ports), view from the front.

1. Left side

2. Upper part

3. Back plane

4. Fan (a fan must be installed in the MG1000 with ACB/HSCB and CF22/CF2E)

5. Right side

6. Module support for eight connecting device modules

24

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Product overview

Integral Enterprise, MG1000 Media Gateway for installation in a 19" cabinet or in a standing casing (max.

256 ports), view from the rear.

1. Right side

2. Connecting modules on the back plane

3. Upper part

4. Module support

5. Left side

6. Back plane

7. Rear cover

8. Fastening groove

9. Fan (a fan must be installed in the MG1000 with ACB/HSCB and CF22/CF2E)

Dimensions: 485x400(9 HU)x418 (WxHxL)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

25

Modules

A module in Integral Enterprise is comprised of up to 4 individual uniform racks. In this way, a single module that is initially made up of one rack can be expanded later on simply by adding additional racks.

One module of the Integral Enterprise can be made up of up to four racks.

Up to three additional racks can be connected to the base rack using the R1RC R1 Rack Connector connecting module.

Depending on the number of racks in use, the configurations have the following names:

• C1: consists of one rack

• C2: consists of 2 racks

• C3: consists of 3 racks

• C4: consists of 4 racks

The control modules are only used in the base rack. The additional racks (2nd to 4th rack) are connected with the base rack via an 8-wire copper cable in a star-shaped pattern and do not require any separate control. The slots for HSCB/ACB and CF2E/CF22 are not used beyond the second rack and are covered by front plates.

Several modules (C1 to C4) can also be joined together to form a twin or multi-group system.

Different sized modules (C1 to C4) or a combination of MG1000 Media Gateways and I33 and Integral

Enterprise systems can be used.

26

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Product overview

Single module

A single module can be made up of up to 4 racks, thus enabling a maximum of 1,024 ports with only one control. This number of ports is achieved in that each subscriber receives a B-channel for the transmission of speech and a D-channel for signaling. The maximum possible number of ports may be reduced, depending on the number of participants with 2B+D configuration. In extreme cases, in which each subscriber has a 2B+D connection, the maximum number of ports is reduced to 512.

The expansion racks are connected by 8-wire CAT6 copper cable up to 30 m long, which transmits all information (signal pulse, CBus, highways, etc.). They are a form of separate modules without control, and can be stacked or arranged in star shapes.

Single module table

Modules:

Module types:

One module is made up of 1-4 racks (R1, R2, R3, R4). The CF22/CF2E is only connected with the R1 in slot 10. The ACB/HSCB module is only connected with the R1 rack, usually slot 9 (unless there is doubling CF22/CF2E).

The following names have been defined for the various module types:

C1: Module with one rack

C2:

C3:

Module with 2 racks

Module with 3 racks

Rack number:

C4: Module with 4 racks

The racks in the modules are numbered. The base rack is numbered R1, and the others are numbered

R2 through R4.

The following slots and CBI addresses have been defined for racks R1 to R4:

R1: Slot 1-10/CBI-address 06 - 0F + 40

R2:

R3:

Slot 11-18/CBI-address 10 - 19 + 41

Slot 19-26/CBI-address 46 - 4F +42

Back plane:

Power supply:

Maximum subscribers:

R4: Slot 29-36/CBI-address 50 - 59 + 43

The back plane used in racks R1-R4 is always the same. The bus terminal resistances are integrated on the back plane. Additional submodules are not necessary.

2 power supplies can be connected to each rack. The 1st power supply is connected to the right-hand power supply slot. The 2nd power supply can be connected to the left-hand power supply slot for redundant operation or to increase power.

Alternatively you can install a PS350A unit on the left-hand side of the rack. The

PS350 adapter kit is available for this purpose.

• 960 digital/analog subscribers (assumption: at least two assembles per module are not reserved for subscribers)

• 640 analog subscribers (restriction due to available DSP resources)

• 864 subscribers with Stimulus terminals (restriction due to available processing capacity on the PCB)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

27

Twin module

Twin module configurations consist of two single modules, coupled with each other. The are connected directly to the CF2E/CF22 module by fiber optic cables using the EOCSM, EOCMM or EOCPF submodules. The individual modules can be put together and assembled in any way. The maximum number of ports with a twin module configuration is 2,048 (per subscriber 1B+D).

The fiber optic cable connection between two modules can be up to 15 km long. Greater distances are also possible. In this case the modules can, for example, be connected by QSIG. Connections of this kind are installed very often in corporate networks.

1. Fiber optic cable

2. 8-wire CAT6 copper cable up to 30 m long

28

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Product overview

Multi-module

Multi-modules are formed to create large systems. A multi-module is used to connect individual modules.

For up to 16 modules, the multi-module can be an ICS Interconnection Server. If you want to connect more than 16 modules, you can connect up to 32 single modules (up to 128 racks using C4 modules only) to a system using a B3 module. This type of system will have 32,768 ports.

The system module side is connected to the multi-module using the CF2E/CF22 module with the EOCSM,

EOCMM or EOCPF submodules and an optical fiber cable.

The optical fiber connections mean that the individual modules can be installed at large distances from each other (up to 15 km: larger distances via QSIG). In this way, for example, individual modules or module systems can be distributed across the company grounds. This is possible either across several floors within one building or even in different buildings.

1. Fiber optic cable

2. 8-wire CAT6 copper cable up to 30 m long

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

29

Power supply

The MG1000 Media Gateway is supplied with voltage from a specially designed power supply unit, the

PSL

Power Supply

[

→ 127 ]

.

In order to enable optional doubling of the power supply, two slots are provided. The mains units can be used for redundant operation and also in order to double capacity. In redundant operation, the second mains unit takes over the functions in the event of the first unit failing. Connect a second mains unit to the left-hand slot in the event of technical reasons (more than 5 DECT modules in one rack) necessitating an increase in capacity.

Note that redundant operation will not be possible in this case.

Slot assignment in R1 rack

1. AO modules

2. Control modules

3. PSL Power Supply (mandatory)

4. PSL Power Supply (optional)

Alternatively you can install a PS350A unit on the left-hand side of the rack. The

PS350 adapter

[

→ 100 ]

kit is available for this purpose.

Configurations

Like the Integral 33 and Integral Enterprise communications servers, the MG1000 Media Gateway also enables single, twin and multi-modular configurations. It offers high flexibility, thus enabling systems with few ports as well as systems with up to 32,000 ports.

It does not require an exchange of modules for any system expansion! All you need to do is connect a new rack. If a customer still has an I33 or Integral Enterprise system, the system can be expanded using the new MG1000 rack, mixing the old and new systems.

MG1000 Media Gateways can be operated together with I33 and Integral Enterprise systems in a system network.

30

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Product overview

Expansion options

A single MG1000 Media Gateway is a fully functional system. The MG1000 can be installed in a standard

19" cabinet or in a standing casing.

One MG1000 consists of 8 slots for connecting device modules (ISUs) and 2 slots for the control rack

(ACB/HSCB, CF22/CF2E). This results in the following expansion options:

• One single MG1000 Media Gateway.

• One single MG1000 Media Gateway in a 19" standing casing.

• One or more MG1000s for assembly in an existing 19" cabinet or 19" frame.

• One or more MG1000s in a provided 19" cabinet 19" frame.

• Up to four MG1000s (standing casing, in 19" cabinets, in 19" frames or any combination thereof) can form a single module distributed over 30 m and connected by flexible cables.

Standing casing

In this assembly option, one MG1000 can be installed in a specially developed standing casing.

The special construction means that there are two height units available for additional components such as a 19" server or UPS systems.

The dimensions of the standings casings are 550 mm x 550 mm x

11 HU; they stand on four lockable wheels. No more than two standing casings may be stacked.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

31

19" cabinet / 19" frames

The MG1000 Media Gateways are installed in standard 19" cabinets or in frames. A maximum of 3 racks (one rack has 9 HU) can be installed in one

19" cabinet with 33 HU, which can be transported vertically through a standard door on a transport pallet.

However, this does assume that the cabinet will be sufficiently ventilated or air conditioned.

When you install additional components (data technology, servers, UPS), check the climatic conditions for each individual case according to the guidelines described in the

Technical data

[

→ 32 ]

chapter.

Additionally, single or several racks can be installed in a 19" assembly frame. Like the 19" cabinets, these frames are also supplied new, but the racks can also be installed in frames owned by the customer.

Technical Data

Connection options, interfaces

Network interfaces

Administration network management

Subscriber interfaces

Maximum number of subscribers

T

0

S

0 a/b U

PN

T

2

V.24

U

S0

U

PD

U

K0

Analog/ module

640

Digital/ module

960

Stimulus/ module

840

Total/ module

960

IP clients/ system

5000

DECT subscr./ system

2000

32

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Product overview

Modules

Connection options in ports: 1B+D per port

Connection options in ports: 2B+D per port

Connecting device modules (max.)

Control module

Power supply

C1

256

128

8

2

1-2

C2

512

256

16

2

2-4

C3

768

384

24

2

3-6

C4

1024

512

32

2

4-8

Rack

Dimensions WxHxD

Weight, empty

485x400(9HE)x418

16,6 kg

Weight, equipped with one PSL Power Supply and with all board slots occupied 22.9kg

Weights of individual components

other weights

[

→ 34 ]

Color

Media Gateway MG1000

Mains connection

Mains voltage

Mains frequency

Circuit fuses

RAL 7024

230 V ± 10%

50 Hz -6% +26%

16 A automatic circuit-breaker, type C (slow response)

Further information

Sound pressure level

At a distance of 1 m in accordance with EN ISO 3744

In the rack

Reliability and traffic flow

Technical reliability

Traffic flow

< 39 dB(A)

45 dB(A)

Reliability

[

→ 35 ]

Traffic handling capacity

[

→ 35 ]

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

33

Telephones/terminals

Various devices can be connected, such as the series T93, T1 or T3, as well as a number of IP phones which can be connected in conjunction with our IPV solution.

Ambient conditions/climate control

Storage:

Transport:

Operation:

Climate control

DIN ETS

300.019-Kl.1.1

300.019-Kl.2.2

300.019-Kl.232

Temperature range

-5°C to +45°C

-25°C to +70°C

-5°C to +45°C

Relative humidity

5 to 95 %

For the installation of up to 2 racks, passive ventilation (e.g. supply air vents in the base or door) are sufficient. Active ventilation is required if more than 2 racks or additional active components are installed.

Other weights

Other weights

two modules R1RG a fan assembly set

PSL Power Supply

Standard cable 16x2, length: 5 m

Mains connection cable, length: 3 m

0.278 kg

0.338 kg

3.600 kg

0.800 kg

0.240 kg

The weight of a rack was determined for a single rack equipped with the following:

Rack without cable with: a fan a module HSCB incl. a Calluna disk drive a module CF2E one DT21 or DT22 board a module DUPN a module DUPN a module ADM with a submodule ABSM and a submodule STSM1 two ASC2 modules two modules ATA, each with four submodules SIGA eight cable adapters CA1B a AV24W module a module ESB as well as one PSL 55 power supply

22.920 kg

34

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Product overview

Reliability

Reliability values (MTBF, availability, downtime per year) for the MG1000 Media Gateway are in examined in different system sizes.

Total system failure is considered. Total failure means that none of the functions in the entire system can be used. This corresponds with a failure of all subscribers.

In all of the values stated herein, the power supply devices were also taken into consideration. However, the failure of power supply devices is less frequent than the failure of mains voltage due to the the power plant. If UPS (uninterrupted power supply) is not used, this will lead to total system failure in both cases.

This must be taken into account during the use of the values.

If invitations to tender specify that the system reliability values must be stated without power supply devices, the tables for the system can be applied with the power supply doubled.

Reliability MG1000

Single module configuration

Not redundant

Redundant power supply

Redundant power supply and central functions

MTBF (years) Availability (%) Failure time p.a.

34

59

147

99.9993

99.9996

99.9998

3.5 min.

2 min.

< 1 min.

Twin module configuration

Multi module configuration

Not redundant

Redundant power supply

Redundant power supply and central functions

MTBF (years) Availability (%) Failure time p.a.

2 548 151 99.9999

< 1 s

7 724 300

47 176 407

99,9999

99,9999

< 1 s

< 1 s

Not redundant

Redundant power supply

Redundant power supply and central functions

MTBF (years) Availability (%) Failure time p.a.

2 548 151 99.9999

< 1 s

7 724 300

47 176 407

99.9999

99.9999

< 1 s

< 1 s

Traffic handling capacity

The term "traffic handling capacity" is divided into dynamic and static traffic handling capacity.

The dynamic traffic handling capacity is the capacity provided by the system. The unit it is quoted in is

BHCA, Busy Hour Call Attempts, which describes the number of attempts to connect a call which can be processed during an hour of busy traffic. For ACD systems the unit BHCC is used, i.e. Busy Hour Call Connected, or the number of calls connected during the hour of busy traffic which reach at least one queue with announcement.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

35

The static traffic handling capacity describes the performance capability of the coupled network. It is specified with the unit Erlang (Erl).

The basis for the dimensioning of telephony systems is FTZ directive 12TR3 (FTZ = German telecommunications engineering authority). This indicates a traffic handling capacity of 0.3 Erlang for digital subscribers

(2B+D) (see BAPT regulations for traffic values).

The following values apply to the :

Traffic handling capacity up to E070V08:

Single module

Twin module

Multi-module

Single module

Twin module

Multi-module

Dynamic

8000 BHCA

16000 BHCA

24000-350000 BHCA depending on configuration

Static

Free of blocking (1 Erlang/B-channel)

Free of blocking (1 Erlang/B-channel)

0.88 Erlang with exclusively digital connections and 50% module-internal and 50% cross-module traffic

Traffic handling capacity with IEE2:

Single module

Twin module

Multi-module

Single module

Twin module

Multi-module

Dynamic

20000 BHCA

40000 BHCA

60000 - 750000 BHCA depending on configuration

Static

Free of blocking (1 Erlang/B-channel)

Free of blocking (1 Erlang/B-channel)

0.88 Erlang with exclusively digital connections and 50% module-internal and 50% cross-module traffic

36

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Modules

Modules

A module is a complete and fully functional unit. The smallest module is an MG1000 Media Gateway. The following table provides a rough overview of the possible modules:

Module

Module overview

Description

4

MG1000 max.

Single module Consists of 1 to 4 MG1000s

Connection: CAT6 8-wire copper cable <30 m

Twin module Two connected single modules

Optical fiber <15 km or QSIG for greater distances

Multi-module 3-16 modules with ICS, up to 32 modules with B3

Connection: Optical fiber <15 km.

8

64 or 128

Single and twin module

One module can be made up of up to four racks.

The following restriction on the number of subscribers per module must be assumed for various reasons:

• 960 digital/analog subscribers (assumption: at least two assembles per module are not reserved for subscribers)

• 640 analog subscribers (restriction due to available DSP resources)

• 864 subscribers with Stimulus terminals (restriction due to available processing capacity on the computer board HSCB)

These restrictions only take effect with the use of the new ratio modules (twice the number of ports).

Twin module configurations consist of two single modules, coupled with each other.

Procedure for Installation

Depending on the configuration, the racks are, or must be, installed in standing casings or in 19" cabinets.

Board slots

Vacant board slots must be covered with shielding plates in order to minimize EMC-related problems.

Board slot Part no.: 49.9901.9774

Power supply unit Part no.: 49.9903.1809

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

37

The shielding plates must be kept parallel to the front panel when pressing them in place, as there is otherwise a risk that a contact to the housing could be established.

In the view shown on the left you can see a

C4 module with board slots, together with the corresponding slot numbers in decimal notation and the CBI addresses in hexadecimal notation.

The addresses and slot numbers for smaller modules are identical - simply imagine the diagram without the additional expansion modules (e.g. only consider R1 and R2 for

C2).

Please note:

The slots with CBI addresses 19; 4F; 59 (slots

20, 28 and 38) are not suitable for use with an

ACB/HSCB, as the power fail signal is missing from these slots.

38

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Modules

General information on boards

The boards used in the module are listed hereafter:

Boards for connection technology and signaling

AEV24B

AV24B

ESBx

CAxB

OFA2B

OFAS

CARUB

EESxB

Adapter, Ethernet V24 B Module

Adapter V.24 for B Modules

External Signaling B Module

Cable Adapter

Optical Fibre Adapter 2 B Module

Optical fiber adapter, single mode

Cable Adapter Russia B Module

Emergency Extension Switch B Module

Boards for control, central functions and transport

ACB Advanced Computer Board

ACB1 oder ACBO Advanced Computer Board

S5500

HSCB

Server 5500 (successor of ACB and ACB1)

High Speed Computer Board

DSPF1

DSPF

CF22

CF2E

Digital Signal Processing Function, variant1

Digital Signal Processing Function

Central function 22 (used in all expansion levels)

Central Function 2E (used in all modules)

Boards for analog interfaces

ASCxx

ATLC

ATxx

DDID

JPAT

ADM

Analog Subscriber Circuit

Analog Tie Line Circuit

Analog Trunk Interface

Direct Dialing Inward Circuit

JISCOS public analog trunk

Analog/Digital Mixboard

Boards for digital interfaces

DUP03

DUPN

DT0

DT21

DT22

DS02

DECT21

DECT22

Digital Linecard UPN

Digital Linecard UPN

Digital Linecard TIE/T0

Digital Linecard TIE/T2 (S2M)

Digital Linecard TIE/T2 (S2M)

Digital Linecard S0

Digital enhanced cordless telecommunication var. 2 version 1

Digital enhanced cordless telecommunication var. 2 version 2

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

39

CAS

IPN

IMUX

DCON

MAC

HAMUX

BVT2

MULI

UIP

ADM

Channel Associated Signaling

Intelligency Private Network

Integrated Multiplexer

Digital Protocol Converter

Multi Access Circuit Board

Home Agent Multiplexer

(part of a PC, Home Agent)

Multiline

Universal Interface Platform

Analog/Digital Mixboard

Boards for IP telephoning

VOIP

IPMR

Voice over IP board

Internet Protocol Media Resource 256 (successor of VoIP)

Boards for power supply

PSL power supply in R1-R4 rack

PS350A in R1-R4 rack (optional)

Power Supply Low 55

Power supply 350A

Access to the system

The available and familiar service programmes can be accessed in the following ways:

• Via V.24 with a connected terminal/PC in MML dialogue.

• Using the operator position in MML dialogue.

• Using S

0

access via protocol stack.

The V.24 and S

0 interfaces can be accessed on the Service Panel.

Although this communication level presupposes the availability of a PC with corresponding software, it corresponds only to a conventional MML dialogue (transparent mode).

File Transfer

File transfer PC <---> HGS (Background Memory)

Traffic measurement

The VEME traffic measurement can be activated by one of the aforementioned methods; the resulting data however is output via the file handling system to the V.24 interfaces.

Central Call Charge Data Recording (ZGDE)

The ZGDE generally outputs data via the file handling system to the V.24 interfaces.

Callback

It is possible to set up an automatic connection to a PC or a service centre.

40

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Modules

Inserting the Connecting Cables

The connection of the MG1000 Media Gateway with the MDF or NT is implemented using the supplied connecting cables. The connectors for these cables are located on the adapter modules (cable adapters), which can be reached from the rear side of the rack.

Example: 19" cabinet

Open the 19" cabinet

Mark the cable at both ends (server and MDF) using the supplied labels.

Attach the connecting cable at the main distribution frame first, and then at the TC system.

Feed the ends of the connecting device cable into the console and then into the modules. The cable guides are illustrated.

System Manual Integral Enterprise

Rear side of cabinet with wiring

June 2009

41

Insert the Champ plug of the connecting cable into the plug sockets of the adapter modules according to the configuration. The adapter modules are held in place by set-squares.

Attach the connecting cables to the provided fastening clamps in the racks using cable ties.

Cover the area with the CA cover.

Rack in standing casing, rear side with CA cover.

Each connecting device of a connecting device module is fitted with an overvoltage protection device to

4kV on the output side. Make sure that removed modules are placed back into the same slot (various configuration of the connecting device modules with submodules).

Connectivity

No more than four racks can be connected to form a module during the installation of a 19" cabinet.

In addition, it is also possible to directly connect a maximum of two of these modules to each other with the aid of fiber optic cables.

• Four racks (one module) and four racks (second module).

The requirement for this is that the groups are equipped with CF22/CF2E modules. This module must also be supplemented by the Sub LP EOCSM/MM/PF.

If three or more such groups are to form a telecommunication system then they must be connected via a

Multi Module B3 or ICS.

This is done with the aid of fiber optic cables at the MLB board of the Multi Module. Here again, the groups must be equipped with CF22/CF2E boards.

An R1 rack can also be used as part of a network. The connection is implemented via S2M on one of the

DT21 or DT22 boards, or via S

0

on the DT0 or ADM boards.

42

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Switch on

Single module

Check the stable position of the power supply devices and power supply cables.

Cover all slots with the slot covers.

Insert all required covers over the front panels of the ACB or HSCB and CF22 or CF2E modules.

Modules

R1 rack in the standing casing

1. Slot cover

2. Covers for ACB or HSCB and CF22 or CF2E

3. Protective bracket for the mains connection cable

Pull the protective hoods over the slots of the mains connection cable on the front of the power supply devices.

Insert the grounded mains plug(s) of the mains connection cable(s) for the racks in their designated grounded mains sockets.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

43

Switching on with ACB board:

The module is now switched on and is loading the programs (loading duration less/equal 15 min).

If the green L1 to L2 LEDs for the Advanced Computer Board ACB module light up, the module is operational.

Switching on with HSCB board

The module is now switched on and is loading the programs (loading duration less/equal 10 min).

If the illustrated yellow LEDs L7 to L10 of the High Speed Computer Board HSCB are off, the module is ready for operation.

44

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Modules

Twin module

Check whether only one ESU is active in the MG1000 Media Gateway (DIL switch to CF22/CF2E).

Switching on with ACB board:

To be added.

Switching on with HSCB board

In twin operation, the S3 switch of the HSCB module without HGS should be placed in the right-hand position.

Switch on both modules of the server.

The loading phases shown in the modules (LEDs of the HSCB modules) may differ from time to time.

Having switched on both modules, first run through loading phases 15 to 6.

From this point, the HSCB module without HGS is held at loading phase 6 while the HSCB with inserted

HGS runs through the remaining loading phases 5 and 4 (access to HGS).

The HSCB module without HGS subsequently runs though loading phases 5 and 4.

Finally both HSCB modules run through loading phases 3 to 0.

3

2

5

4

1

0

7

6

9

8

HSCB loading phases

No.

L7 L8 L9 L10 Phase name

15 1

14 1

1

1

1

1

1

0

Start reset phase

Test flash-PROM

13 1

12 1

11 1

10 1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

Test QUICC

Test real time clock

Test C-bus interface

Test DUART (V.24 ports)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

Test dynamic RAM

Output hardware image

End reset phase

Initial program loading (IPL)/IPL ready flag

STIN program loader is loaded and started

Operating system has been loaded and started (restart)

User programs (have been dispatched) have been loaded

Start of customer data loading in the user programs

All customer data loaded Start commissioning of module(s)

Module(s) in operation

1 = LED on, 0 = LED off

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

45

Troubleshooting

Power supply

Fault

Yellow LED on the PS350A power supply unit does not light up

Green LED on the power supply unit does not light up

Action

Check the mains voltage.

If mains voltage is present, replace the power supply unit.

Check the mains voltage.

Check the battery voltage (for PS350A only). Observe the battery switch function on the PS350A!

First check whether the malfunction can be rectified by removing the module(s).

If this is the case, replace with new module(s).

If this is not the case, replace the power supply unit.

General

Fault with ACB

Loading procedure failed during first startup

Fault with HSCB

Loading procedure failed during first startup (single module)

Action

To be added.

Loading procedure failed during first startup (twin module)

Small reset (restart)

Switch S2 (HSCB module) in left position, switch S1 (HSCB) in left and then back to middle position

Large reset

Switch S2 in right position, switch S1 in left and then back to middle position, switch S2 to left position after loading has finished

(loading phase 0)

In the module with the HSCB module without HGS, check whether the L8 LED is flashing on the CF22/CF2E module.

If not, check the fiber optic cable connections. Create any missing fiber optic cable connections.

If subsequently necessary for these modules:

Small reset (restart)

Switch S2 (HSCB module) in left position, switch S1 (HSCB) in left and then back to middle position

Large reset

Switch S2 in right position, switch S1 in left and then back to middle position, switch S2 to left position after loading has finished

(loading phase 0)

Further course of action with HSCB

First check the displays of the HSCB module with inserted HGS.

Then check the displays of the HSCB module without HGS (Twin Module).

Note down the status of the LEDs on all modules.

Inform your service control center.

46

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Modules

ICS (multi-module)

Mains voltage

The ICS is operated with the PSL Power Supply. Accordingly, it is designed for connection to a supply with

230 V; ±10 %, 50 Hz -6% +26% (47 to 63 Hz). For further information, see

PSL Power Supply

[

→ 127 ]

.

Power dissipation

Maximum power loss for a system expanded to 8 groups

(an MLB board fully equipped with 8 x EOCs)

Maximum power loss for a system expanded to 12 groups

(two MLBs, one with 8 x EOCs, one with 4 x EOCs)

Maximum power loss for a system expanded to 16 groups

(full expansion with two MLBs, each equipped with 8 x EOCs)

95 W

115 W

130 W

Board slots

The slots in the ICS are arranged as follows:

The slots for the ICF and ISM2 boards have a spacing of 27.5 mm. The two slots for the MLB boards have a spacing of 68.75 mm. as the MLBs are laid out with EOC subboards.

The slots for the individual boards have the following C-bus addresses:

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

47

Rack and assembly

To set up the ICS, you must also order assembly kit 49.9904.4791.

Shielding

Since the front of the rack is also the EMC limit, a closed cover must always be created. The slots for the

ISM, ICF and PSL Power Supply are always assigned. The front panels of the modules are responsible provide shielding.

The slots for the module must be covered with the same panels for shielding when they are in use and when they are empty. The panels are included with the rack.

Table of part numbers for the MLB or Power Supply slot cover panels:

Slot Cover Part number

MLB empty and assigned slots 49.9906.2856

Power Supply (empty slot) 49.9903.1809

Installation of fiber optic cables

The fiber optic cables are led in via an opening in the back plane, which is located behind the MLB slots.

They are linked to the EOCXX boards on the front side and these are then fitted to the MLB or MLBIML board (as applicable) and locked in place.

48

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Modules

Module MLB board with EOCx subboards

1. Tool for locking and unlocking subboard EOC *

2. MLB board

3. Fiber optic twin cable

4. Isolating hose facility *

5. Duct for fiber optic cable

6. Send

7. Receiving

8. EOCPF subboard

9. EOCMM/SM subboard

10. locking

11. unlocking

* Component of tool kit for B3 module (fiber optic cable/EOCxx)

Contacting the fans, ESB installation; CA3B

The multipoint connectors for installation of the ESB and CA3B boards are located under the rear cover hood. The slot TP1E is designed for the ESB board and the slot TP1C for the CA3B board. To connect them, the fixing screws on the rear ICS hood are loosened and the hood is removed. The boards are pressed into the slots designed for them.

The connections on the fans are linked to the connections on the ESB board for fans (see too

Pin Strips on the ESB

[

→ 267 ]

). The cables for this are laid out so that they go through the cover hood.

Then the hood is replaced and screwed on firmly using the two screws at the lower end.

Ground connection

The protective ground connection is achieved via the grounding terminal on the rear side of the housing.

The grounding terminal is mounted between the grounding sign and the ICS type plate.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

49

Doubling

To increase the stability of communications in a multigroup system, two ICS can be linked to one another and to the corresponding modules via fiber optic cables (twin cables). One ICS performs the normal function, while the second goes into ’hot standby’ mode. The second ICF takes over the function of the first as soon as it reports a malfunction.

For more information please refer to the description of ’Complete doubling’.

General information on boards

The modules used in the B3 module and the ICS are listed below:

Service modules

CBT CBus tester (B3 module only)

Modules for connection technology and signaling

CA3B

AV24B

Cable Adapter 3 B Module

Adapter V.24 B Module

ESB

TER

External Signaling B Module

Termination 2 and 3 (B3 module only)

Modules for control, central functions and transport

CL2M/CL2ME Clock 2 module (if using CL2ME, see also Intermodule handover)

50

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Modules

Modules for power supply

ISPS IMTU supplementary Power Supply (B3 module only)

PS Power Supply (PS280A or PS350A in the B3 module, PSL Power Supply and PS350A in

MG1000, PSL Power Supply in ICS)

Check the correct positioning of TER2 and TER3 before switching on the B3 module! Make sure that any removed modules are reinserted in the same slot!

Switching on

Check the stable position of the power supply devices and power supply cables.

Pull the protective hoods over the slots on the front of the power supply devices.

Check whether only one ESU is active in the MG1000 Media Gateway (DIL switch to CF22/CF2E/ICF).

Insert the grounded plug of the mains connecting cable into the protection unit or grounded mains socket provided.

If necessary, connect the battery connector (e.g. inserting the -48 V fuse in the battery unit, etc).

If required, move the battery switch on all inserted PS350A power supply units to position 1 (front panel).

The MG1000 Media Gateway is switched on and loading programs (the loading time will depend on the number of modules).

Switching on with ACB board:

To be added.

Switching on with HSCB board:

In multi-module operation, the S3 switch of the HSCB boards without background memory should be placed in the right-hand position.

The loading phases shown in the HSCB modules (LEDs L7-L10) may differ from time to time.

Having switched on modules, the HSCB modules first run through loading phases 15 to 6.

From this point, the HSCB module without HGS is held at loading phase 6 while the HSCB with inserted

HGS runs through the remaining loading phases 5 and 4 (access to HGS).

The HSCB modules without HGS subsequently run though loading phases 5 and 4.

Finally all HSCB modules run through loading phases 3 to 0.

The L7 LEDs of the CF22/CF2E boards flash in the modules during the loading phases (signaling input of the valid module address).

If the yellow LEDs L7 to L10 (loading phase 0) of the HSCB boards shown are off in all modules, this indicates that the MG1000 Media Gateway is ready for operation.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

51

LEDs on the front panel of the HSCB board

3

2

5

4

1

0

7

6

9

8

HSCB loading phases

No.

L7 L8 L9 L10 Phase name

15 1

14 1

1

1

1

1

1

0

Start reset phase

Test flash-PROM

13 1

12 1

11 1

10 1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1 1

0

0

Test QUICC

Test real time clock

Test C-bus interface

Test DUART (V.24 ports)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

Test dynamic RAM

Output hardware image

End reset phase

Initial program loading (IPL)/IPL ready flag

STIN program loader is loaded and started

Operating system has been loaded and started (restart)

User programs (have been dispatched) have been loaded

Start of customer data loading in the user programs

All customer data loaded Start commissioning of module(s)

Module(s) in operation

1 = LED on

0 = LED off

52

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Modules

Troubleshooting

Power supply

Fault

Yellow LED on the PS350A power supply unit does not light up

Green LED on the power supply unit does not light up

Action

Check the mains voltage.

If mains voltage is present, replace the power supply unit.

Check the mains voltage (for PS280A only).

Check the battery voltage (for PS350A only). Observe the battery switch function on the PS350A!

First check whether the malfunction can be rectified by removing the module(s).

If this is the case, replace with new module(s).

If this is not the case, replace the power supply unit.

Malfunctionwith ACB: Loading procedure failed during first startup

Action: To be added.

Malfunctionwith HSCB: Loading procedure failed during first startup

Action:

In all modules containing HSCB modules without HGS, check whether the L8 LEDs on the CF2x modules are flashing.

If not, check the fiber optic cable connections for these modules. Create any missing fiber optic cable connections.

If subsequently necessary for these modules:

• Small reset (restart):

Switch S2 of the HSCB board in left-hand position, switch S1 of the HSCB board in left-hand and then back to middle position.

• Large reset:

Switch S2 in right position, switch S1 in left and then back to middle position, switch S2 to left position after loading has finished (loading phase 0).

First check the displays of the HSCB module with inserted HGS.

Then check the displays of the HSCB module without HGS (twin module).

Note down the status of the LEDs on all modules.

Inform your service control center.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

53

B3 module(multi module)

MG1000 Media Gateway - Installation Module B3 in the

1

/

2

K rack

1. Status display and service device connection

2. Console

3.

1

/

2

K rack

4. B3 Built-In-Module

5. Empty B module

Procedure for installation

The installation module B3 is accommodated in the

1

/

2

K rack The rack is on rollers.

Remove the covers of the console.

• Release the quick-action closures on the front side and remove the cover

• Press up and remove the remaining covers

The four rollers in the console can be locked into place.

Console, position of rollers

1. Lock the rollers using 13 mm socket wrench

2. Connect the consoles with M8 screw (two or more racks)

54

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Modules

Board slots

Slot

1. Slot

2. External module number, decimal

3. A second PS350A and a ISPS are required if more than 14 groups are installed.

General information on boards

The modules used in the B3 module and the ICS are listed below:

Service modules

CBT CBus tester (B3 module only)

Modules for connection technology and signaling

CA3B Cable Adapter 3 B Module

AV24B Adapter V.24 B Module

ESB

TER

External Signaling B Module

Termination 2 and 3 (B3 module only)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

55

Modules for control, central functions and transport

CL2M/CL2ME Clock 2 module (if using CL2ME, see also Intermodule handover)

Modules for power supply

ISPS IMTU supplementary Power Supply (B3 module only)

PS Power Supply (PS280A or PS350A in the B3 module, PSL Power Supply and

PS350A in MG1000, PSL Power Supply in ICS)

Check the correct positioning of TER2 and TER3 before switching on the B3 module! Make sure that any removed modules are reinserted in the same slot!

Connectivity

Inserting the connecting cables

The B3 module is connected to the other modules belonging to the MG1000 Media Gateway (twin cables).

Open the quick-action closures of the cover plates. Remove the cover plates.

Open the rear panels of the Media Gateway MG1000 using the supplied keys.

1

/

2

K rack: one rear panel without ventilation holes

Lift out the covers.

Feed the ends of the twin fiber optic cable into the console and then into the module (bending radius min.

35 mm!).

Remove the covers of the fiber optic cable ducts on the rear side of the back plane.

When the MG1000 Media Gateway is switched on and unprotected coupling, there is a risk of short-circuiting when assembling the twin fiber optic cable!

For each twin fiber optic cable, insert the two insulating tubes (auxiliary item, part of the tool kit for the B3 module) through the respective cable duct of the back plane. Also refer to

Insert the twin fiber optic cable in the insulating tubes. Pull the insulating tubes containing the twin fiber optic cable through the cable ducts toward the front.

Insert and secure the connections of the twin fiber optic cable to the connectors of the EOCx submodule.

Make sure that the transmitting section of the EOCx submodule belonging to the B3 module is connected to the receiving section of the EOCx submodule. Conversely, the receiving section of the EOCx submodule belonging to the B3 module is to be connected to the transmitting section of the EOCx submodule.

56

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Modules

EOCSM/EOCMM

The fiber optic cable wire with the red plugs is to be inserted in the transmitting socket of the EOCSM/

EOCMM and in the receiving socket of the B3 module. The opposite applies to the fiber optic cable wire with the black plugs.

EOCPF

The fiber optic cable wire with the gray plugs is to be inserted in the gray sockets of both EOCPF submodules. The fiber optic cable wire with the blue plugs is to be inserted in the blue sockets.

Insert the EOCx submodules onto the MLB and lock the submodules into place (hook the tool on the lokking rail of the EOCx and lock or unlock).

The slot addresses of the MLB/EOCx modules are defined in TIP.

Insert the edge protector into the fiber optic cable duct and fasten the connecting cable using cable ties on the fastening grooves provided (fiber optic cable duct and side wall) in the B3 module.

Cable guide of the twin fiber optic cable, rear view of a

1

/

2

kilo racks with a B3 module

1. Twin fiber optic cable

2. Fastening groove

3. Twin fiber optic cable

4. Edge protector

5. Fiber optic cable duct

6. B3 module

7. Cover

8. Bending radius min. 35 mm!

9. Twin fiber optic cable

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

57

MLB connections

Module MLB board with EOCx subboards

1. Tool for locking and unlocking subboard EOC *

2. MLB board

3. Twin fiber optic cable

4. Isolating hose facility *

5. Duct for fiber optic cable

6. Send

7. Receiving

8. EOCPF subboard

9. EOCMM/SM subboard

10. locking

11. unlocking

* Component of tool kit for B3 module (fiber optic cable/EOCxx)

Doubling

For greater data security within the system, two B3 modules can be connected with each other and with the corresponding modules using fiber optic (twin) cables. This presumes that the B3 modules are fitted with the MLB modules.

Refer to the TIP documents for the required slots and assignment.

58

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Modules

Doubling B3 modules

AO = connecting device

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

ICF = IMTU central functions

ISM = IMTU switching matrix

ISPS = IMTU supplementary power supply

LWL = fiber optic cable

MLB = multi-link board

PS = only PS350A

PSL = Power Supply Low 55

Wall-mounted and built-in modules can also be connected.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

59

Switching on

Check the stable position of the power supply devices and power supply cables.

Pull the protective hoods over the slots on the front of the power supply devices.

Check whether only one ESU is active in the MG1000 Media Gateway (DIL switch to CF22/CF2E/ICF).

Insert the grounded plug of the mains connecting cable into the protection unit or grounded mains socket provided.

If necessary, connect the battery connector (e.g. inserting the -48 V fuse in the battery unit, etc).

If required, move the battery switch on all inserted PS350A power supply units to position 1 (front panel).

The MG1000 Media Gateway is switched on and loading programs (the loading time will depend on the number of modules).

Switching on with ACB board:

To be added.

Switching on with HSCB board:

In multi-module operation, the S3 switch of the HSCB boards without background memory should be placed in the right-hand position.

The loading phases shown in the HSCB modules (LEDs L7-L10) may differ from time to time.

Having switched on modules, the HSCB modules first run through loading phases 15 to 6.

From this point, the HSCB module without HGS is held at loading phase 6 while the HSCB with inserted

HGS runs through the remaining loading phases 5 and 4 (access to HGS).

The HSCB modules without HGS subsequently run though loading phases 5 and 4.

Finally all HSCB modules run through loading phases 3 to 0.

The L7 LEDs of the CF22/CF2E boards flash in the modules during the loading phases (signaling input of the valid module address).

If the yellow LEDs L7 to L10 (loading phase 0) of the HSCB boards shown are off in all modules, this indicates that the MG1000 Media Gateway is ready for operation.

60

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Modules

LEDs on the front panel of the HSCB board

3

2

5

4

1

0

7

6

9

8

HSCB loading phases

No.

L7 L8 L9 L10 Phase name

15 1

14 1

1

1

1

1

1

0

Start reset phase

Test flash-PROM

13 1

12 1

11 1

10 1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1 1

0

0

Test QUICC

Test real time clock

Test C-bus interface

Test DUART (V.24 ports)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

Test dynamic RAM

Output hardware image

End reset phase

Initial program loading (IPL)/IPL ready flag

STIN program loader is loaded and started

Operating system has been loaded and started (restart)

User programs (have been dispatched) have been loaded

Start of customer data loading in the user programs

All customer data loaded Start commissioning of module(s)

Module(s) in operation

1 = LED on

0 = LED off

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

61

Troubleshooting

Power supply

Fault

Yellow LED on the PS350A power supply unit does not light up

Green LED on the power supply unit does not light up

Action

Check the mains voltage.

If mains voltage is present, replace the power supply unit.

Check the mains voltage (for PS280A only).

Check the battery voltage (for PS350A only). Observe the battery switch function on the PS350A!

First check whether the malfunction can be rectified by removing the module(s).

If this is the case, replace with new module(s).

If this is not the case, replace the power supply unit.

Malfunctionwith ACB: Loading procedure failed during first startup

Action: To be added.

Malfunctionwith HSCB: Loading procedure failed during first startup

Action:

In all modules containing HSCB modules without HGS, check whether the L8 LEDs on the CF2x modules are flashing.

If not, check the fiber optic cable connections for these modules. Create any missing fiber optic cable connections.

If subsequently necessary for these modules:

• Small reset (restart):

Switch S2 of the HSCB board in left-hand position, switch S1 of the HSCB board in left-hand and then back to middle position.

• Large reset:

Switch S2 in right position, switch S1 in left and then back to middle position, switch S2 to left position after loading has finished (loading phase 0).

First check the displays of the HSCB module with inserted HGS.

Then check the displays of the HSCB module without HGS (twin module).

Note down the status of the LEDs on all modules.

Inform your service control center.

62

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

The Integral Enterprise is marketed in a 19" cabinet or integrated in the existing customer infrastructure.

The RJ45 slot connection system is used for the panels.

The following cabinet versions are available:

Standing casing

Standing casing S1 (part no.: 49.9902.0611)

A rack can be installed in a standing casing S1. It can accommodate no more than one MG1000 Media

Gateway. In addition, two HU (height units) are available for the server and/or service panel (part no.:

49.9904.8477).

The standing casing S1 is fitted with hidden rollers.

The front panel (plastic panel) can be ordered as a spare part.

Standing casing S1

1. Grounding clamps (max. 3)

2. The standing casing S1 is locked using a no. 13 nut key

Dimensions

• Width = 550 mm

• Length = 550 mm

• Height = 11 HU

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

63

Cabinet color RAL 7035

Two standing casings S1 can be stacked on each other. Three standing casings must not be stacked on each other.

1. Hexagonal screw M6x30

2. Spacer roller

3. Covering plate

The two standing casings are connected using two M6 screws (1.). Spacer rollers (2.) must be fitted in between for each screw.

The two standing casings must be connected to each other using a grounding wire.

64

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Cable routing

The MG1000 Media Gateway is placed on the ground in the standing casing S1 and then screwed tight on the guides.

The cable adapters are accessible from the rear. This is where the connecting device cables must be connected.

Extracted standing casing, cable on cable adapter

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

65

33 HU

19" cabinet 33 HU

Dimensions

• Width (external) = 600 mm

• Depth (external) = 600 mm

• Height (external) = 1650 mm

• Height (internal) = 33 HU

• Profile rail = 495 mm

The color of the cabinet and accessory parts is RAL 7035.

Description

The cabinet can hold up to three MG1000 Media Gateways. An additional 6 HU are available for the application server, which is separated thermally from the MG1000 Media Gateways.

Features:

The cabinet is fitted with hidden rollers.

Vertical profile rails in 2 levels

Front level 120 mm clearance between front door in the MG1000 Media Gateway area

No clearance in the application server area

Lockable glass front door

Closed lockable rear door

Cable infeed back under the door and/or through the roof

The server panel is equipped with strain relief for the cables.

1 multiple socket outlet with 8 sockets

1 grounding rail for connecting the 2.5-16 mm

2

grounding cable

Sliding rails for 1 application server

50 cage nuts, 50 loose fastening screws included

Delivery on a pallet; supplier packaging used as the packaging.

The back door contains a document pouch.

Options from the ECONET product range

Roof with 2 fans

Multiple socket outlet with 8 sockets

Device floor, fixed

19" keyboard insert type A

1 HU patch panel

49.9905.9115

49.9904.8474

49.9904.6386

27.9798.2413

Required if 3 MG1000s are installed

Required if double power supply is used

66

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Dummy panel 1 HU

Dummy panel 2 HU

Dummy panel 3 HU

Dummy panel 6 HU

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

27.9798.2404

27.9798.2406

27.9798.2407

27.9798.2408

Dummy panels are intended for covering unused height units

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

67

19" cabinet 33 HU

68

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Detail of the 19" 33 HU cabinet on the palette

42 HU 500 mm

19" cabinet 42 HU

Dimensions

• Width (external) = 800 mm

• Depth (external) = 800 mm

• Height (external) = 2150 mm

• Height (inside) = 42 HE

• Profile rail = 500 mm

The color of the cabinet and accessory parts is RAL 7035.

Description

This system is variable, and can be fitted with several MG1000 Media Gateways (four maximum) and several application servers.

Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) can be installed in the cabinet as needed.

The profile rail level clearance from front to back is 500 mm.

Features:

Vertical profile rail in one level, front level 125 mm clearance to the front door

Base 100 mm high with 3-part floor panel (can be removed)

Leveling feet to compensate for uneven floors

Ventilated, lockable glass front door

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

69

Closed lockable rear door

Lockable side panels

Roof panel for rear cable entry

Air vents and prepared for active ventilation (fan kit can be retrofitted)

Cable entry through floor, base and/or roof

Jumpering clamps for left and right, front and back cable entry

2 multiple socket outlets with 7 sockets on 2 distribution boxes.

1 horizontal grounding rail for connecting the 2.5-16 mm

2

grounding cable

50 cage nuts, 50 loose Torx fastening screws included

Delivery on a pallet; supplier packaging used as the packaging.

The back door contains a document pouch.

Options from the ECONET product range:

Active fan kit with two 18 W 140 m

3

/h fans

Fan expansion kit consisting of one fan

49.9808.0869

is required if more than two MG1000s are used.

27.9798.2258

is required for expanding the fan kit and for replacement.

1 HU patch panel

Dummy panel 1 HU

Dummy panel 2 HU

Dummy panel 3 HU

Dummy panel 6 HU

Device floor, fixed 19.69 in

Telescopic rail for device floor

27.9798.2413

27.9798.2404

Dummy panels are intended for

27.9798.2406

27.9798.2407

27.9798.2408

27.9798.2474

27.9798.2553

Sliding rail for second and additional servers 27.9798.2289

covering unused height units

42 HU 730 mm

19" cabinet 42 HU

Dimensions

• Width (external) = 800 mm

• Depth (external) = 800 mm

• Height (external) = 2150 mm

• Height (inside) = 42 HE

• Profile rail = 730 mm

The color of the cabinet and accessory parts is RAL 7035.

70

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Description

This cabinet is used when the E200 application server is used. An installation kit with a telescopic rail and cable cutter is preinstalled in the cabinet.

This system is variable, and can be fitted with several MG1000 Media Gateways (four maximum) and multiple application servers.

Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) can be installed in the cabinet as needed.

The profile rail level clearance from front to back is 730 mm.

Features:

Vertical profile rail in one level, front level 120 mm clearance to the front door

Base 100 mm high with 3-part floor panel (can be removed)

Leveling feet to compensate for uneven floors

Ventilated, lockable glass front door

Closed lockable rear door

Lockable side panels

Roof panel for rear cable entry

Air vents and prepared for active ventilation (fan kit can be retrofitted)

Cable entry through floor, base and/or roof

Jumpering clamps for left and right, front and back cable entry

2 multiple socket outlets with 7 sockets on 2 distribution boxes

1 grounding rail for connecting the 2.5-16 mm

2

grounding cable

50 cage nuts, 50 loose Torx fastening screws included

Delivery on a pallet; supplier packaging used as the packaging.

The back door contains a document pouch.

Options from the ECONET product range:

Active fan kit with two 18 W 140 m3/h fans 49.9808.0869

is required if more than two MG1000s are used.

Fan expansion kit consisting of one fan 27.9798.2258

is required for expanding the fan kit and for replacement.

1 HU patch panel 27.9798.2413

Dummy panel 1 HU

Dummy panel 2 HU

Dummy panel 3 HU

Dummy panel 6 HU

27.9798.2404

Dummy panels are intended for covering

27.9798.2406

unused height units

27.9798.2407

27.9798.2408

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

71

42HE dismountable

ICC cabinet 42HE dismountable

• Width (external) = 800 mm

• Depth (external) = 900 mm

• Height (external) = 2150 mm

• Height (internal) = 42 height units (HU)

• Profile rail = 730 mm

Cabinet same as 19" 42HU 730mm, but with separable depth struts for easier dismantling of the cabinet

(depending on the local conditions it may become necessary to dismantle the cabinet).

Overview of components (1)

Updated:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name without pallet and pakkaging

HU Wei ght in kg

ICC cabinet 6+27 HU

W X D X H

600 X 600 X 1650

Schroff Proline

<1900

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 800 X 2150

Rittal TS8 System

2295

Comment

<1900 2402 with pallet and pakkaging

Transport on pallet with racks fitted

25 per rack

120

X

1-3 racks

(max. 27 HU)

X

X

1-4 racks

4.999.059.049 ICC-XXL 6+27 HU

W 600 X D 600 X H 1680

Schroff Proline

4.999.059.117 ICC-XXL 42 HU with side panels

W 800 X D 800 X H 2150

Rittal TS8 System

DK 7995.453

4.999.070.388 ICC-XXL 42 HU without side panels

W 800 X D 800 X H 2150

Rittal TS8 System

DK 7995.561

240

187

X

X

72

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Updated:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

4.999.070.418 1 pair of side panels

2000 X 800 for cabinet

4.999.070.388

DK 7824.208

4.999.059.120 ICC-XXL 42 HU with side panels

W 800 X D 900 X H 2150

Rittal TS8 System

DK 7995.454

4.999.070.399 ICC-XXL 42 HU without side panels

W 800 X D 900 X H 2150

Rittal TS8 System

DK 7995.563

4.999.070.419 1 pair of side panels

2000 X 9000 for cabinet

4.999.070.399 and

4.999.070.411

DK 7824.209

4.999.065.258 ICC-XXL 42 HU with side panels

W 800 X D 900 X H 2150 dismountable

Rittal TS8 System

DK 7995.455

4.999.070.411 ICC-XXL 42 HU without side panels

W 800 X D 900 X H 2150 dismountable

Rittal TS8 System

DK 7995.564

4.999.070.420 Locks for 1 pair of side panels (4x)

DK 7824.500

4.998.081.260 Mounting plates incl. fastening materials, pack size = 4 units

2 packs are required for each cabinet connection

PS 4582.500

HU Wei ght in kg

53

ICC cabinet 6+27 HU

W X D X H

600 X 600 X 1650

Schroff Proline

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 800 X 2150

Rittal TS8 System

O

260

205

55

260

205

O

O

X bezels

Comment

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

73

Updated:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name HU Wei ght in kg

ICC cabinet 6+27 HU

W X D X H

600 X 600 X 1650

Schroff Proline

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 800 X 2150

Rittal TS8 System

X

Comment

Floor panel, divided 3 ways, movable

Sliding rail (Rittal) for server 2.797.982.289

Sliding rail (Schroff) for server

Telescopic rail for server

E200 4.999.020.096

DK 7063.900

Adjustable-depth rail (Rittal) DK 7063.880 for installation of server

E120

2X

1X

(for server)

(for server +

MG1000)

Lockable glass front door with air vents

Closed lockable rear door

Lockable side panels

Profile rails, front

Profile rails, rear separation, front-rear profile rail

Cable infeed from the rear

X

1X 8-way strip with

5m cable and grounded safety plug

X

Stop, left-hand side

X

Stop, left-hand side

X

X

33 HU divided into 2 levels,

6 HU for server and

27 HU for MG1000 and other devices

X

2X 7-way strip on distribution box

X

Stop, right-hand side

X

Stop, right-hand side

X

X

42 HU

X

42 HU

Patch cable length

100-125 mm to front door.

X

6 HU at the bottom in the server area

X

495mm in the server area

X

X

500mm

X through base

74

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Updated:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

Cable infeed from the bottom

Cable infeed from the top

Ground bar with terminal

HU Wei ght in kg

ICC cabinet 6+27 HU

W X D X H

600 X 600 X 1650

Schroff Proline

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 800 X 2150

Rittal TS8 System

X

Comment

X

X

X

X

X

Terminals in accessories pack

12 jumpering clamps at front,

12 jumpering clamps at rear

Document wallet X X

Roles

Grounding cable 2.5 mm2. Wire end ferrules at both ends..

x Cage nuts, M6 fastening bolts and plastic washers.

MG1000

4.998.034.799 E120 Standard application server

4.999.034.798 E120 Professional application server

4.999.027.925 E200 Enterprise application server

4.998.095.981 Conversion kit for E120

9

5

5

6

25

X

Height-adjustable X

X

2

X

(50x)

O

3 max.

O

O

O

X

X

4

X

(100x)

O

4 max.

O

O

O on rear door

Included in the accessories pack

Voice server

1X per

E120Serv er, sliding rail present in the cabinet.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

75

Updated:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

2.797.982.289 Sliding rail for server

DK 7063.500

4.999.020.096 Telescopic rail for server

E200

DK 7063.900

4.999.069.426 Adjustable-depth sliding rail (Rittal) DK 7063.880 for installation of

MG1000

4.999.059.115 Roof with ventilator plate

4.998.080.869 Fan insert with 2 fans

TS 7886.000

HU Wei ght in kg

ICC cabinet 6+27 HU

W X D X H

600 X 600 X 1650

Schroff Proline

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 800 X 2150

Rittal TS8 System

O

2X part of cabinet

Comment

Required if additional servers are used.

Required if additional servers are used.

required additionally if several

MG1000 are installed but not positioned one above the other

O Required if 3 x

MG1000 are installed.

O Required if 3 or 4

MG1000 are installed.

76

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Updated:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

2.797.982.258 Fan expansion kit

DK 7980.000

4.999.048.474 Device floor, fixed

2.797.982.474 Device floor 500

DK 7145.035

4.999.063.238 Variable-depth installation kit for device floor

DK 7063.860

2.797.982.553 Telescopic pull-out for device floor (50 kg)

DK 7081.000

4.999.046.386 19" keyboard insert

2.797.982.413 Jumpering clamp

2.797.982.404 Dummy panel

2.797.982.406 Dummy panel

2.797.982.407 Dummy panel

HU Wei ght in kg

ICC cabinet 6+27 HU

W X D X H

600 X 600 X 1650

Schroff Proline

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 800 X 2150

Rittal TS8 System

O

Comment

Required if 3 or 4

MG1000 are installed.

Kit comprises a fan for installation in the roof with ventilator plate

O

O additional devices

1

1

1

2

3

O

O

O

O

O

O

+Device floor 500

O

O

O

O

O

Extendable rack

For covering unused slots

For covering unused slots

For covering unused slots

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

77

Updated:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

2.797.982.704 Dummy panel

4.999.046.814 Internal patch field

3X8WE (4-wire)

4.999.046.813 Internal patch field

48WE (2-wire)

4.999.048.477 Service panel

4.998.045.619 External telecommunications patch field 24WE

2.797.982.353 External patch field

CAT5 16WE

2.797.982.354 External patch field

CAT5 32WE

2.797.982.357 External patch field

CAT5 48WE

4.999.065.625 Multiple socket outlet

HU Wei ght in kg

6

ICC cabinet 6+27 HU

W X D X H

600 X 600 X 1650

Schroff Proline

O

1 O

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 800 X 2150

Rittal TS8 System

O

O

Comment

For covering unused slots

1

1

1

1

2

3

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O doubling

4.998.079.986 C-profile rail 482.6 (6 packs)

4.998.079.987 Cable strain relief rail

4.999.067.592 Mains cable with CEE connector, 5m

4.999.067.593 Mains cable with CEE connector, 10m

4.998.080.012 19" frame for LSA Plus rails, series 2 (10 for 150

DA)

3 O

O

O

O

O

X = standard O = optional Not possible

78

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Overview of components (2)

Updated:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name HU Wei ght in kg

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 800 X 2150

Rittal TS8 System

2330 without pallet and pakkaging with pallet and pakkaging

Transport on pallet with racks fitted

4.999.059.049 ICC-XXL 6+27 HU

W 600 X D 600 X H 1680

Schroff Proline

4.999.059.117 ICC-XXL 42 HU with side panels

W 800 X D 800 X H 2150

Rittal TS8 System

DK 7995.453

4.999.070.388 ICC-XXL 42 HU without side panels

W 800 X D 800 X H 2150

Rittal TS8 System

DK 7995.561

4.999.070.418 1 pair of side panels

2000 X 800 for cabinet

4.999.070.388

DK 7824.208

4.999.059.120 ICC-XXL 42 HU with side panels

W 800 X D 900 X H 2150

Rittal TS8 System

DK 7995.454

25 per rac k

120

240

187

53

260

2438

X

1-4 racks

X

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 900 X 2150 dismountable

Rittal TS8 System

2330

Comment

2438

X

1-4 racks

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

79

Updated:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name HU Wei ght in kg

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 800 X 2150

Rittal TS8 System

X 4.999.070.399 ICC-XXL 42 HU without side panels

W 800 X D 900 X H 2150

Rittal TS8 System

DK 7995.563

4.999.070.419 1 pair of side panels

2000 X 9000 for cabinet

4.999.070.399 and

4.999.070.411

DK 7824.209

4.999.065.258 ICC-XXL 42 HU with side panels

W 800 X D 900 X H 2150 dismountable

Rittal TS8 System

DK 7995.455

4.999.070.411 ICC-XXL 42 HU without side panels

W 800 X D 900 X H 2150 dismountable

Rittal TS8 System

DK 7995.564

S4.999.070.4

20

Locks for 1 pair of side panels (4x)

DK 7824.500

4.998.081.260 Mounting plates incl. fastening materials, pack size = 4 units

(2 packs are required for each cabinet connection)

PS 4582.500

205

55

260

205

O

O

O

X

X bezels

Floor panel, divided 3 ways, movable

Sliding rail (Rittal) for server 2.797.982.289

Sliding rail (Schroff) for server

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 900 X 2150 dismountable

Rittal TS8 System

Comment

O

X

X

O

O

X

X

80

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Updated:

Material number

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

01.06.2002

Name HU Wei ght in kg

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 800 X 2150

Rittal TS8 System

Telescopic rail for server

E200 4.999.020.096

DK 7063.900

rail (Rittal) DK 7063.880 for installation of server

E120

1X

(for server)

1x

(for MG1000)

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 900 X 2150 dismountable

Rittal TS8 System

1X

(for server)

2X

(for server +

MG1000)

Comment

Lockable glass front door with air vents

Closed lockable rear door

Lockable side panels

Profile rails, front

Profile rails, rear separation, front-rear profile rail

Cable infeed from the rear

Cable infeed from the bottom

Cable infeed from the top

Ground bar with terminal

X

2X 7-way strip on distribution box

X

Stop, right-hand side

X

Stop, right-hand side

X

X

42 HU

X

42 HU

X

730mm

X through base

X

X

2X 7-way strip on distribution box

X

Stop, right-hand side

X

Stop, right-hand side

X

X

42 HU

Patch cable length

100-125 mm to front door.

X

42 HU

X

730mm

X through base

X

X

X

X

X Terminals in accessories pack

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

81

Updated:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name HU Wei ght in kg

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 800 X 2150

Rittal TS8 System

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 900 X 2150 dismountable

Rittal TS8 System

X

Comment

12 jumpering clamps at front,

12 jumpering clamps at rear

X

X X door

Roles

Grounding cable 2.5 mm2. Wire end ferrules at both ends.

X

4

Height-adjustable X x Cage nuts, M6 fastening bolts and plastic washers.

2.797.982.289 Sliding rail for server

DK 7063.500

4.999.020.096 Telescopic rail for server

E200

DK 7063.900

X

(100x)

MG1000

4.998.034.799 E120 Standard application server

4.999.034.798 E120 Professional application server

4.999.027.925 E200 Enterprise application server

4.998.095.981 Conversion kit for E120

5

6

9

5

25 O

4 max.

O

O

O

X

X

4

X

(100x)

O

4 max.

O

O

O

Included in the accessories pack

Voice server

O

1X part of cabinet

O

E120Serv er, sliding rail present in the cabinet.

Required if additional servers are used.

O

1X part of cabinet

Required if additional servers are used.

82

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Updated:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

4.999.069.426 Adjustable-depth sliding rail (Rittal) DK 7063.880 for installation of

MG1000

4.999.059.115 Roof with ventilator plate

4.998.080.869 Fan insert with 2 fans

TS 7886.000

2.797.982.258 Fan expansion kit

DK 7980.000

HU Wei ght in kg

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 800 X 2150

Rittal TS8 System

O

2X part of cabinet

O

O

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 900 X 2150 dismountable

Rittal TS8 System

O

2X part of cabinet

Comment

Required if 3 x

MG1000 are installed.

O Required if 3 or 4

MG1000 are installed.

O required additionally if several

MG1000 are installed but not positioned one above the other

Required if 3 or 4

MG1000 are installed.

Kit comprises a fan for installation in the roof with ventilator plate

4.999.048.474 Device floor, fixed

2.797.982.474 Device floor 500

DK 7145.035

O

+ variable-depth installation kit

O

+ variable-depth installation kit additional devices

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

83

Updated:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

4.999.063.238 Variable-depth installation kit for device floor

DK 7063.860

2.797.982.553 Telescopic pull-out for device floor (50 kg)

DK 7081.000

4.999.046.386 19" keyboard insert

2.797.982.413 Jumpering clamp

2.797.982.404 Dummy panel

HU Wei ght in kg

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 800 X 2150

Rittal TS8 System

O

1

1

1

O

+ variable-depth installation kit

+ device floor

O

O

O

2.797.982.406 Dummy panel

2.797.982.407 Dummy panel

2.797.982.704 Dummy panel

2

3

6

O

O

O

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 900 X 2150 dismountable

Rittal TS8 System

O

Comment

O

+ variable-depth installation kit

+ device floor

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

Extendable rack

For covering unused slots

For covering unused slots

For covering unused slots

For covering unused slots

4.999.046.814 Internal patch field

3X8WE (4-wire)

4.999.046.813 Internal patch field

48WE (2-wire)

4.999.048.477 Service panel

4.998.045.619 External telecommunications patch field 24WE

2.797.982.353 External patch field

CAT5 16WE

2.797.982.354 External patch field

CAT5 32WE

2.797.982.357 External patch field

CAT5 48WE

1

1

1

1

1

2

3

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

84

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Updated:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

4.999.065.625 Multiple socket outlet

HU Wei ght in kg

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 800 X 2150

Rittal TS8 System

O 4.998.079.986 C-profile rail 482.6 (6 packs)

4.998.079.987 Cable strain relief rail

4.999.067.592 Mains cable with CEE connector, 5m

4.999.067.593 Mains cable with CEE connector, 10m

4.998.080.012 19" frame for LSA Plus rails, series 2 (10 for 150

DA)

3

X = standard O = optional Not possible

O

O

O

O

ICC cabinet 42 HU

W X D X H

800 X 900 X 2150 dismountable

Rittal TS8 System

Comment doubling

O

O

O

O

O

Cabinet selection

The MG1000 Media Gateway is designed in such a way that it can be installed in any standard 19" cabinet, regardless of the other components. In order that components can be inserted in the rack from the front

(EOC, cable etc.), there must be a gap of at least 150 mm length between the front of the rack and the cabinet door. Depending on the size of the cabinet, several racks or other 19" components can be installed stakked on top of each other.

Selecting lockable doors can prevent unauthorized access to the modules.

Selecting cabinets taking into account thermal offtake

How do I select a suitable 19" cabinet or how do I assess the suitability of an existing 19" cabinet for installation of an MG1000 Media Gateway (1-n racks and/or additional devices), taking into account the thermal requirements?

Why is heat offtake so important?

Temperature is public enemy number one for the sensitive microelectronic components. A rule of thumb suggests that each increase in temperature by 10 °C (based on the recommended operating temperature) cuts the life-expectancy in half. Accordingly, it is very important that this energy is kept away from the components and is taken off outwards.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

85

Thermal offtake concept for the 19" cabinet

The following options are available for thermal offtake from the 19" cabinet:

Passive ventilation

Passive ventilation of the cabinets is the simplest method. Using incoming air apertures in the base and/or the door and waste air apertures in the roof plate and/or door, the air exchange is managed on the basis of the principle "front bottom for incoming, cool air" and "top back to let the hot air out." Whether this option can be used is dependent on the power loss of the installed components and on the max. inner cabinet temperature (dependent on the equipment in use).

Active ventilation

Active ventilation (forced ventilation) is another possibility. Using incoming air apertures in the base and/or the door and waste air apertures in the roof plate and/or door, the air exchange is managed on the basis of the principle "suck in incoming, cool air from the front bottom" and "blow out hot air at the top back." The number of fans is dependent on the power loss of the installed components and on the max. inner cabinet temperature (dependent on the equipment in use). As a standard, manufacturers offer roofs with 2 fans (air output per fan from 120 m3/h upwards). In general, additional fans can be retro-fitted. Furthermore, the fans can be controlled and monitored by thermostat or electronic, remote monitoring.

Solution: Integral Enterprise in the 19" cabinet:

Specifications for selecting a cabinet for installing the MG1000 Media Gateway:

19" cabinet with

MG1000 in a 19" cabinet without additional active components

Passive ventilation No fan

Active ventilation with min. 2 fans min. 3 fans min. 4 fans min. 5 fans

1 rack (9 HU) 2 racks (18 HU) 3 racks (27 HU) 4 racks (36 HU)

X X -

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

-

X

X

X

19" cabinet with

Passive ventilation No fan

Active ventilation with min. 2 fans min. 3 fans min. 4 fans min. 5 fans

X

X

X

X

X

MG1000 in a 19" cabinet with additional active components -> determine power loss Pv up to 500 W 501 W

-750 W

751 W

-1000 W

1001 W

-1250 W

1251 W

-1500 W

>1500

W

-

X

X

X

X

-

-

X

X

X

-

-

-

X

X

-

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

.

Exact calculation is required

86

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Explanation/help:

• Passive ventilation: incoming air apertures in the base and/or door at the front and waste air apertures in the roof and/or door at the back

• Active ventilation: forced ventilation using a fan, incoming air apertures in the base and/or door at the front and fans in the roof/side wall

• Power loss Pv rack: 250 W is assumed per rack

• Determine total power loss = Pv (rack) x number of racks + Pv plus components + Pv plus components + .......

• Volume flow of the fans min. 120 m

3

/h

• An exact calculation is required if the power loss is greater than 1500 W

• The max. ambient temperature is +113 F (+45 °C), i.e. the max. ambient temperature outside of the

19" cabinet should not exceed 113 F.

Option: thermostat for fan control, remote monitoring of the fans.

In view of the extremely varied possibilities, manufacturers of 19" cabinets ensure a flexible design of the cabinet systems, so that the cabinets can be adjusted to suit the thermal requirements retrospectively.

Air conditioning

Overview

Taking into consideration the following ambient conditions

• Power dissipation P v

of the MG1000 Media Gateway in the cabinet

• Power dissipation P v

of additional equipment in the cabinet

• Ambient temperature T u

(outside of the cabinet)

• Temperature inside the cabinet T i

• Temperature difference Delta T i

-T u

• IP protection

• Cooling performance Q k

• Type and location of assembly and cabinet size (height HU, width, length) the following options are available for the ventilation and cooling of the 19" cabinet:

• Intrinsic convection, heat transmission through the cabinet surface

• Passive ventilation, intrinsic convection with issue of the hot air from inside

• Active ventilation, forced convection, direct heat exchange using fans

• Heat offtake through the cooler (is not taken into consideration)

• Heat offtake through the cooler (is not taken into consideration)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

87

Intrinsic convection, heat transmission through the cabinet surface

• Closed design, no apertures for incoming or outgoing air

• Max. feasible power dissipation between 300 and 500 W, depending on cabinet size, form of installation and temperature difference

• The feasible power loss is reduced by approx. 15 % in the event of series assembly

• IP protection max. IP55 possible

Calculation of the power loss that can be taken off

P o

= k x A x (T i

- T u

) [W]

P k

A

T

T i o u power that can be taken off via the cabinet surface

Heat transfer coefficient (steel plate 5 W/m

2

K)

Effective cabinet surface, depending on the form of installation, for calculation see "Calculation formula of the effective cabinet surface"

Inner temperature of cabinet

Ambient air temperature

88

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Intrinsic convection with issue of the hot air from inside

• Open design, incoming air apertures on the base or door, waste air apertures in the roof

• Max.feasible power loss between 600 and 700 W, depending on cabinet size, form of installation and temperature difference

• The feasible power loss is reduced by approx. 10 % in the event of series assembly

• IP protection max. IP54 possible

Incoming air in the base, waste air in the roof

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

89

Incoming air from the front (side of door), waste air at the rear (aperture in door)

90

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Forced convection, direct heat exchange using fans

• Open design

• Max. feasible power loss 1500 W, depending on fans in use (size, number) and temperature difference

• IP protection max. IP54 possible a) Filter fans

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

91

b) Fan operation c) Roof fans

92

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Calculation of the required volume flow

V = 4 x P v

/ (T i

- T u

) [m

3 h]

V

P v

T i

T u

Required volume flow dissipation in the cabinet (heat output on the surface of the cabinet has been neglected)

Inner temperature of cabinet

Ambient air temperature

Thermal offtake by cooling device:

• Closed design

• Max. feasible power loss approx. 1000 W, depending on cabinet size, form of installation, air conditioning system and temperature difference

• IP protection max. IP54 possible

Calculation of the required cooling performance

P o

= k x A x (T i

- T u

) [W]

Q k

= P v

- P o

[W]

P k

A

T

T

Q i o u k

Power that can be taken off via the cabinet surface

Heat transfer coefficient (steel plate 5 W/m

2

K)

Effective cabinet surface, depending on the form of installation, for calculation see "Calculation formula of the effective cabinet surface"

Inner temperature of cabinet

Ambient air temperature

Required cooling performance of the cooling device

Forced circulation due to heat exchanger (air/air)

• Closed design

• Max. feasible power loss approx. 1500 W, depending on cabinet size, form of installation and heat exchanger

• IP protection max. IP54 possible

Calculation of the required cooling performance

P o

= k x A x (T i

- T u

) [W]

Q k

= P v

- P o

[W]

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

93

P o k

A

T i

T u

Q k

Power that can be taken off via the cabinet surface

Heat transfer coefficient (steel plate 5 W/m

2

K)

Effective cabinet surface, depending on the form of installation, for calculation see "Calculation formula of the effective cabinet surface"

Inner temperature of cabinet

Ambient air temperature

Required cooling performance of the cooling device

Calculation formula for the effective cabinet surface

Individual casing, free-standing on all sides

A = 1.8 x H x (W+D)+1.4 x W x D

Individual casing for wall mounting

A = 1.4 x W x (H+D)+1.8 x D x H

Start-end casing, free-standing

A = 1.4 x D x (H+W)+1.4 x W x H

Start-end casing for wall mounting

A = 1.4 x H x (W+D)+1.4 x W x D

94

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

W = cabinet with

H = cabinet height

D = cabinet depth

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Central casing, free-standing

A = 1.8 x W x H + 1.4 x W x D + D x H

Central casing for wall mounting

A = 1.4 x W x (H+D) + D x H

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

95

Flow chart: Air conditioning in a 19"cabinet

96

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

19" cabinets and thermal offtake

Universal installation aids

The universal installation aid consists of two round bolts with a groove running around and a M6 thread.

Section of cabinet, round bolts (1) and M6 thread (2)

This pins are screwed by hand into the upper mounting nuts on the left and right of the cabinet. Then grasp the rack by the bracket with one hand and underneath the rack with the other hand and place the cabinet on to the pins.

The mounting screws are screwed into the rack on the left and right sides, but are not tightened.

The round bolts are then crewed out of the upper part; the rack is raised slightly by the bracket in order to facilitate the removal of the bolts. Now screw in the upper screws and tighten, the lower screws are also tightened.

The upper mounting screws are removed and the bolts are fastened in order to remove a rack from the cabinet. The lower screws are then removed and the rack is raised carefully by the bolts.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

97

Take care that the lower section of the rack suspended from the bolts is always pressed with one hand against the cabinet, as the rack is only held by the nut on the bolt when on the pins.

The bolts are not enclosed with the system. They can be ordered separately.

The material number is: 4.999.054.358

The installation aids work in any cabinet in which the installations are attached using cage nuts M6.

There is no counterpressure exerted against the insert screws M6 that run in the tracks (e.g. for

Knürr cabinets), so that the screws may fall out.

The bracket used to collect the cable is also used as a grip. It is a standard part of each rack and remains attached.

The bracket used to collect the cable should not be used as a grip for carrying during transport.

98

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

Power supply

General

In principle, all modules can be connected to a

230 V, 50 Hz and 60 Hz

. The fuse protection for every electric circuit consists of a C Type 16 A automatic circuit breaker. Power must be supplied to double PS using separate circuits (phase and fuse).

Four different power supply modules are available, used according to module or application. The same power supply unit is used for both devices in the MG1000 Media Gateway and in the ICS Interconnection

Servers.

MG1000 and ICS power supply unit

• PSL Power Supply

For projects there is also an adapter module - see

PS350 adapter

[

→ 100 ]

kit is available for this purpose.

This kit cannot be used in the ICS.

Power supply units for the B3 module

• Direct feed PS280A (only B3 module)

• PS350A for reserve battery operation, doubling (for B3 module)

• Additional ISPS power supply for B3 module with more than 10 connected modules.

The power supply modules PS280A and PS350A are connected to the designated slots on the B3 module.

Redundant doubling of the PS in the B3 module is only possible with PS350A.

In the B3 module, the supplementary ISPS power supply may only be used in the appropriate slot.

The supplementary ISPS power supply module is made up of two similar DC/DC converters. It is supplied with -48 V from two PS350As.

Power supply units

The following power supply units are used in the MG1000:

• PSL Power Supply

• PS350A in conjunction with the PS350 adapter kit (not in the ICS)

The PS350 adapter kit is available for installation of the PS350A.

Please also remember about connection of the FPE in cabinets.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

99

PS350 adapter

A special adapter kit is available for installing a PS350A in the MG1000 Media Gateway. The PS is installed on the left side (front). The first connection device slot cannot be used.

The PS350A can be operated with 48 V and 230 V, 50/60 Hz or 115 V, 60 Hz mains voltage. For the electrical values of the PS350A, see

PS350A, Technical data

[

→ 129 ]

The PS350A can be operated as a redundant power supply unit in combination with the PSL Power Supply with a 50 Hz ringing voltage frequency.

To install the PS350A, you must also order kit 1 or 2, which contains the cover panel, filter, internal wiring and assembly materials.

1. PS350 adapter

Six kits are available:

1. Kit for 48 V power supply with 50/25 Hz call AC voltage, part no.: 49.9907.8083

2. Kit for 230 V/115 V AC power supply with 50/25 Hz call AC voltage, part no.: 49.9907.6490

3. Fuse terminal kit for 19" cabinet, part no.: 49.9907.7417

4. Fuse terminal kit for standing casing, part no.: 49.9907.7416

100

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

5. Fuse terminal kit for expansions (19" cabinet and standing cabinet casing, part no.: 49.9907.7419

6. Assembly kit, part no.: 49.9904.4791

The installation procedures while the system is running differ for different applications:

Failure and replacement of the PS350A with double power supply or retrofitted PS350A

System with 230 V/115 V mains voltage only

Type of work

Disconnect the 230 V/115 V

Remove the defective PS350A

Comment/tools required

Connect the 230 V/115 V to a new PS350A Mains cable with protective conductor required.

Kit contains 2.

Insert the precharged PS350A

Disconnect the 230 V/115 V by unplugging the mains cable

Install the cover kit

Connect the 230 V/115 V to the PS350A cover

Install kit 2

Mains cable without protective cover (included in kit 6) or previous combination of mains cable with protective conductor and adapter cable

Failure and replacement of the PS350A with double power supply or retrofitted PS350A

System with 48 V battery power supply unit

Type of work

Switch to OFF

Comment/tools required

Disconnect the -48 V

Remove the defective PS350A

Switch on the new PS350A to OFF

Switch on the -48V battery power supply unit; screw the cable on to the cover terminals

Plug the battery connection plug on the cover into the PS350A

Switch to ON, precharge the PS350A

Insert the precharged PS350A

Install the cover kit Install kit 1

Failure and replacement of the PS350A with double power supply or retrofitted PS350A

System with 230 V and 48 V battery power supply unit

Precharge using the 48 V battery power supply unit first.

Kit 1 is used for installation/replacement.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

101

Installation

Procedure for activating a PS350A in the MG1000 Media Gateway:

1. Single power supply with PS350A

• Install the PS350A

• Connect the 230 V

• Switch to off

• Connect the -48 V

• Switch to on

2. Double power supply with PS350A and PSL Power Supply

• Install the PS350A

• Connect the 230 V

• Switch to off

• Connect the -48 V

• Switch to on

• Install the PSL Power Supply

• Connect the 230 V

3. Failure and replacement of the PS350A with double power supply

• Switch to off

• Disconnect the -48 V

• Disconnect the 230 V

• Remove the defective PS350A

• Switch on the new PS350A to off

• Connect the -48 V (precharging the PS350A); must be precharged with -48 V since the 230 V cannot be used due to disconnected ground connection

• Install the PS350A

• Connect the 230 V

102

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Installing the PS350 adapter

1. Insert the PS350A in the slot

2. Screw the top and bottom spacers (1.) into the rack.

Power supply

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

103

3. Connect the connections for the

• 230V (1.)

• -48 V to the PS350A (2.) and

• -48 V to the terminals (3.).

Place the cover on the rack and tighten the top and bottom screws to secure it in place (1.).

104

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

105

PSL Power Supply ring tripping

The PSL Power Supply can be operated in parallel operation with the PS350A version 02.

If it is necessary to call with 72VAC/25Hz, then the call output at the PSL Power Supply needs to be switched off (’ring tripping’) so that the call generator of the PS350A 72VAC/25Hz can be activated - see Call switchover PS350A.

This is done with the aid of the switch located on the underside of the PSL Power Supply. Here, the switch must be moved toward the connector strip.

1. Ringer switch

The supplied sticker should be attached to the PSL Power Supply.

106

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

Call switchover PS350A

The PS350A version 02 can be operated in parallel operation with the PSL Power Supply.

If it is necessary to make a call with 72VAC/25Hz, then at the PS350A the call output will need to be switched from a ringing voltage frequency of 50 Hz to 25 Hz, see also Ring tripping PSL Power Supply.

This is done using the switch located on the underside of the PS350A.

PS350A, underside

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

107

1. Switch for ringing voltage frequency

Instructions are displayed on the the side of the housing.

PS350A

1. PS350A

2. Sticker with instructions

108

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

48 V in the cabinet

The cabinet contains a fuse terminal for 19" cabinets for connecting the -48 V power supply.

Power supply

The fuse terminal can be expanded to up to four connection options.

Connect the fuse terminal in the standing casing as shown.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

109

Special aspects

Note the following if you have a redundant power supply with the PS350A:

• You cannot double the 48 V power supply in a rack. Only a PS350A can be used.

• The ringing voltage generator changeover time if one generator fails is around 20 ms from the

PS350A to PSL Power Supply and around 200 ms from the PSL Power Supply to PS350A. This could cause an analog connection in call status to be disconnected.

• Redundant call voltage is not possible with the 25 Hz setting (when the power supply is doubled, the call voltage must be deactivated on the PSL Power Supply).

• There is no unique error assignment to the power supply unit. Duplicate signals can be generated.

• The 1st connection device slot must be configured and marked specially when using the PS350A in

CAT and IMS.

• Follow the activation procedure when plugging in or unplugging the PS350A.

FPE in cabinets

Connect the copper wire (FPE=green/yellow, greater/equal 2.5 mm

2

) to the grounding rail in the 19" cabinet.

There is a clamp on the base of the standing casing for the copper wire.

All racks must be grounded via a separately routed protective conductor. Grounding using the protective conductor of the power cord does not suffice.

The protective conductor has a green-yellow insulating jacket and a minimum cross-section of 2.5 mm

2

.

110

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

It is clamped to:

• The grounding rail (19" cabinet) or grounding clamp (standing casing).

• The grounding clamp on the rear side depicted in the following diagram.

Power supply

Auszug der Rackrückseite

1. Grounding clamp

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

111

19" cabinet

Follow the general specifications from the grounding concept. The following pages contain illustration of the different assemblies and grounding measures.

Arrangement in the 19" cabinet without UPS or with UPS outside of the cabinet

1. Multiple socket outlets

2. Cabinet junction boxes

3. Mains connection:permanent connection that can be disconnected e.g. cable 49.9906.7592 with CEE plug

USV: UPS system/cabinet connection cable 49.9906.8660

4. PA conductor to the house installation PA rail minimum 6 mm

2

5. Cabinet PA rail

6. Cabinet housing

112

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Arrangement in a 19" cabinet with UPS systems in the cabinet

Power supply

1. UPS system multiple socket outlet

2. UPS system

3. Cabinet multiple socket outlet

4. Cabinet junction box

5. Permanent connection that can be disconnected e.g. cable 49.9906.7592 with CEE plug

6. PA conductor at least 6 mm

2

to the house installation PA rail

7. Cabinet PA rail

8. cabinet

MG1000 Media Gateways and other equipment such as servers can be connected to the outlets on the upper or lower configuration.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

113

To connect the PSL Power Supply, you must use an intermediate cable with part number

29.4752.3540.

The mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003 is connected to this intermediate cable, which only has L and N lines.

The mains cable has L, N and PE lines.

The mains cable can be connected to the mains connection using the multiple socket outlets in the cabinet for example.

Standing casing

Connecting a rack in a standing casing (C1 module)

1. Intermediate cable 29.4752.3540

2. Mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003

3. Mains connection circuit or UPS connection

4. Lockable grounding connector with cable 49.9804.5750

5. Cabinet

The lockable grounding connector with cable 49.9804.5750 is used only with C1 modules.

114

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Connecting two racks in a standing casing (C2 module)

Power supply

1. Intermediate cable 29.4752.3540

2. Mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003

3. Mains connection circuit or UPS connection

4. FPE conductor at least 2.5 mm

2

5. PA bolts on the standing casing

6. PA conductor to the house installation PA at least 6 mm

2

7. Cabinet

To connect the PSL Power Supply, you must use an intermediate cable with part number

29.4752.3540.

The mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003 is connected to this intermediate cable, which only has L and N lines.

The mains cable has L, N and PE lines.

The mains cable can be connected to the mains connection using the multiple socket outlets in the cabinet.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

115

Housing/Cabinet solutions

Follow the general specifications from the grounding concept. The following pages contain illustration of the different assemblies and grounding measures.

Arrangement in the 19" cabinet without UPS or with UPS outside of the cabinet

1. Multiple socket outlets

2. Cabinet junction boxes

3. Mains connection:permanent connection that can be disconnected e.g. cable 49.9906.7592 with CEE plug

USV: UPS system/cabinet connection cable 49.9906.8660

4. PA conductor to the house installation PA rail minimum 6 mm

2

5. Cabinet PA rail

6. Cabinet housing

116

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Arrangement in a 19" cabinet with UPS systems in the cabinet

Power supply

1. UPS system multiple socket outlet

2. UPS system

3. Cabinet multiple socket outlet

4. Cabinet junction box

5. Permanent connection that can be disconnected e.g. cable 49.9906.7592 with CEE plug

6. PA conductor at least 6 mm

2

to the house installation PA rail

7. Cabinet PA rail

8. Cabinet

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

117

To connect the PSL Power Supply, you must use an intermediate cable with part number

29.4752.3540.

The mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003 is connected to this intermediate cable, which only has L and N lines.

The mains cable has L, N and PE lines.

The mains cable can be connected to the mains connection using the multiple socket outlets in the cabinet for example.

Connecting a rack in a standing casing (C1 module)

1. Intermediate cable 29.4752.3540

2. Mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003

3. Mains connection circuit or UPS connection

4. Lockable grounding connector with cable 49.9804.5750

5. Cabinet

The lockable grounding connector with cable 49.9804.5750 is used only with C1 modules.

118

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Connecting two racks in a standing casing (C2 module)

Power supply

1. Intermediate cable 29.4752.3540

2. Mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003

3. Mains connection circuit or UPS connection

4. FPE conductor at least 2.5 mm

2

5. PA bolts on the standing casing

6. PA conductor to the house installation PA at least 6 mm

2

7. Cabinet

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

119

B3 module

The following power supply units are used in the B3 module:

• PS280A

• PS350A

• ISPS (IMTU Supplementary Power Supply)

The 230V and 48V supplies are connected in the fuse panels.

Please also refer to the connection of the FPE in the B3 module.

Fuse Panels

Connection to the supply circuit

The B3 module is suitable for connection to 230 Volt alternating mains voltage or 48 Volt direct voltage or both. The modules may have more than one connection to the supply circuit.

Operation with battery or external 48 Volt direct current voltage

The connecting cables for the battery or the external 48 Volt direct current voltage supply to the

1

/

2

kg rack must have a minimum cross-section of 6 mm

2

.

Depending on the cable length, higher cable cross-sections may be required to prevent the voltage drop from exceeding the permissible values.

If the system is supplied by an external 48 Volt direct current voltage source, this must be safely isolated from the mains voltage and correspond with the classification for SELV. A suitable, easily accessible disconnecting device which corresponds to the current values above is to be provided in the supply circuit.

Protective grounding

All modules must generally be grounded using a separately routed protective conductor. Grounding using the protective conductor of the power cord does not suffice.

The protective conductor must have a green-yellow insulating jacket and a minimum cross-section of 2.5

mm

2

if mechanical protection is present, or 4 mm

2

if this is not the case. More detailed information can be found in the "Grounding concept" section.

120

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

Fuse panel -48 V 1/2 K rack

Fuse panel -48 V

1

/

2

K rack

1. Fuses F1 to F2 DIAZET Type USED 16, S16 A/500 V, time-lag

2. From primary current supply

F 1 F 2

PS 1 o

PS 2 o

PS 3

PS 4 x x o = Single PS x = Doubled PS

Sequence pattern of PS1 to PS4 (front view)

Text on label:

Use fuses of the same type to protect from fire and power hazards.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

121

Rear view of the 1/2 K MG1000

1. first B3 module

2. second B3 module

3. Mains supply module B1, B3 230 V 29.5630.8061

or

Mains supply module B3 230 V 29.5630.8071

for power supply second B module (PS2)

4. UPS operation module B1, B3 -48 V 29.5630.8081

or

UPS operation module B1E -48 V 29.5630.8091 for power supply second B module (PS2) or

Module -48 V doubling of B modules 29.56300.830

5. Mains supply module B1, B3 230 V 29.5630.8061

for power supply first B module (PS1)

6. UPS operation module B1, B3 -48 V 29.5630.8081

for power supply first B module (PS1) or

Module -48 V doubling of B modules 29.5630.8301

122

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

Connecting the Battery

Move the battery switch to position 0 on all inserted PS350 power supply units. The battery switch is located on the front panel of the unit.

Disconnect the battery connection (e.g. remove the -48V fuse in the battery compartment).

Strip the end of the cable (approx. 15 cm). Feed the connecting cable from the battery into the console.

Strip the ends of both wires.

Clamp the red wire (GND) and the blue wire (-48 V) to the terminals on the locking plate illustrated.

1. Console, section of the front side

Line cross-section between the B3 module and the battery

Simple removal

2 m

4 m

6 m

8 m

10 m

12 m

14 m

16 m

16 A

2.5 mm

2

2.5 mm

2

4 mm

2

6 mm

2

6 mm

2

10 mm

2

10 mm

2

10 mm

2

20 A

2.5 mm

2

4 mm

2

6 mm

2

6 mm

2

10 mm

2

10 mm

2

16 mm

2

16 mm

2

Fuse as per standard value

25 A 32 A 50 A

2.5 mm

4 mm

2

6 mm

10 mm

16 mm

16 mm

2

2

2

10 mm

2

2

16 mm

2

2

2.5 mm

6 mm

10 mm

2

2

2

10 mm

2

16 mm

2

16 mm

2

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

4 mm

2

10 mm

16 mm

2

16 mm

25 mm

25 mm

35 mm

35 mm

2

2

2

2

2

2

63 A

6 mm

2

10 mm

2

16 mm

2

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

50 mm

2

80 A

6 mm

2

16 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

123

Simple removal

18 m

20 m

22 m

24 m

26 m

28 m

30 m

32 m

34 m

36 m

38 m

40 m

42 m

44 m

46 m

48 m

50 m

52 m

54 m

56 m

58 m

60 m

62 m

64 m

66 m

68 m

70 m

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

16 A

16 mm

2

16 mm

2

16 mm

2

16 mm

2

16 mm

2

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

20 A

16 mm

2

16 mm

2

16 mm

2

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

35 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

70 mm

2

Clamp cross-section: B3 module 16 mm

2

Intermediate distribution will be required for larger supply conductor cross-sections.

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

Fuse as per standard value

25 A 32 A 50 A

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

25 mm

25 mm

2

2

35 mm

50 mm

2

2

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

25 mm

2

35 mm

2

35 mm

35 mm

35 mm

35 mm

2

2

2

2

50 mm

50 mm

50 mm

70 mm

2

2

2

2

35 mm

50 mm

50 mm

50 mm

50 mm

50 mm

50 mm

70 mm

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

2

70 mm

70 mm

70 mm

70 mm

70 mm

2

2

2

2

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

95 mm

2

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

2

120 mm

2

120 mm

2

120 mm

2

120 mm

2

120 mm

2

120 mm

2

120 mm

2

150 mm

2

150 mm

2

95 mm

2

120 mm

2

120 mm

2

120 mm

2

120 mm

2

150 mm

2

150 mm

2

150 mm

2

80 A

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

2

150 mm

2

150 mm

2

150 mm

2

185 mm

2

185 mm

2

185 mm

2

185 mm

2

185 mm

2

185 mm

2

240 mm

2

240 mm

2

240 mm

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

2

95 mm

2

120 mm

2

120 mm

2

63 A

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

50 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

70 mm

2

120 mm

2

120 mm

2

120 mm

2

150 mm

2

150 mm

2

150 mm

2

150 mm

2

150 mm

2

150 mm

2

150 mm

2

185 mm

2

185 mm

2

124

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

FPE in the B3 module

The standing casings, 19" cabinets and possibly also the standing cabinets must be connected to a FPE.

The dimensions of the copper wire are dependent on the installations (sum of the amperage of the individual devices). The exact procedure is described in the chapter

Grounding concept

[

→ 146 ]

.

Feed the copper wire (FPE=green/yellow, greater/equal 2.5 mm console.

2

) through one of the cable openings in the

Strip the end of the wire.

Direct supply

Use a cable lug to clamp the wire to the screw with toothed lock washer illustrated.

Integral Enterprise console, detail of the front

Uninterrupted power supply

Clamp the wire on the screw terminal shown into the locking plate.

Check whether the FPE is properly connected to the equipotential bonding strip, distribution battery and server!

Clamp the wire on the screw terminal shown into the locking plate.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

125

1. Console, detail of the front side

To protect against fire and energy hazards, fuses must only be replaced with fuses of the same type. Fuses F1 to F4 DIAZET Type USED 16, S16 A/500 V, time-lag

126

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

PSL Power Supply

The PSL Power Supply features the following:

• Harmonics as per EN 61000 (PFC).

• Noise immunity input 4 kV (1.2/50).

• Delayed disconnection of outputs -28 V, -48 V, -60 V during overload/short-circuit

• Delayed disconnection of device during overload/short-circuit of +5 V output.

• Board ID data

• I

2

C bus connection

Technical data

Voltages and frequencies

Mains voltage

Mains frequency

Reduced voltage

AC ringing voltage

Ringing voltage frequency

Protection class

Radio interference suppression

PSL Power Supply

230 V; ±10% (single phase alternating current)

230 V, 50 Hz -6% +26%;

-5 V, +5 V, -28 V, -48 V, -60 V

~72 V

50/60 Hz

1 (in accordance with VDE 0100)

Limit class B (in accordance with EN 55022 and VDE 878)

Device input, power and currents

PSL Power Supply

P prim

325 VA

I prim

1.52 A

Device output, power and currents

PSL Power Supply

P

+ 5 V

262 W

18 A

-5V

-28 /48V

-60V

72 V ~

1 A

*#2.2 / 3.2* A

1.3*# A

0.18 A

* = total performance max. 154 W

# = total performance max. 140 W

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

127

PS280A

The power supply module PS280A has the following performance features:

• Harmonics as per EN 61000 (PFC).

• Noise immunity input 4 kV (1.2/50).

• Delayed disconnection of outputs -28 V, -48 V, -60 V during overload/short-circuit

• Delayed disconnection of device during overload/short-circuit of +5 V output.

Technical data

Voltages and frequencies

Mains voltage

PS280A

Mains frequency

Reduced voltage

AC ringing voltage

Ringing voltage frequency

Protection class

230 V; plus/minus 10 % (single phase alternating current), switchable to 115 V; plus/minus 10 %

230 V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz; plus/minus 3 Hz; 115 V, 60 Hz; plus/minus 3 Hz

-5 V, +5 V, -28 V, -48 V, -60 V

~72 V

50/60 Hz

1 (in accordance with VDE 0100)

Radio interference suppression Limit class B (in accordance with EN 55022 and VDE 878)

Device input, power and currents

PS280A

P prim

450 VA

I prim

1.82 A

Device output, power and currents

PS280A

P

+ 5 V

337 W

23 A

-5V

-28 /48V

-60V

72 V ~

1.5 A

3.2* A

0.8 A

0.18 A

* total performance max. 154 W

128

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

PS350A

The power supply module PS350A (Frako) has the following performance features:

• Harmonics as per EN 61000 (PFC).

• Noise immunity input 4 kV (1.2/50).

• Power increase of outputs compared to PS280 (see table).

• Delayed disconnection of outputs -28 V, -48 V, -60 V during overload/short-circuit and power increase

28 V/5 A

• Delayed disconnection of device during overload/short-circuit of +5 V output.

• Call generator synchronization when power supply is doubled (PS350A/PSL Power Supply only with

50 Hz ringing voltage frequency)

Technical data

Voltages and frequencies

Mains voltage

Mains frequency

Battery voltage

Reduced voltage

AC ringing voltage

Ringing voltage frequency

Protection class

Radio interference suppression

PS350A

230 V; plus/minus 10 % (single phase alternating current), switchable to

115 V; plus/minus 10 %

230 V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz; plus/minus 3 Hz; 115 V, 60 Hz; plus/minus 3 Hz

-48 V

-5 V, +5 V, -28 V, -48 V, -60 V

~72 V

50 Hz redundancy with PSL; 25 Hz no redundancy with PSL

1 (in accordance with VDE 0100)

Limit class B (in accordance with EN 55022 and VDE 878)

Device input, power and currents

PS350A PS350A with battery operation

622 VA 622 VA P prim

I prim

I bat

2.7 A at 230 V

13 A at 55.2 V

Device output, power and currents

PS350A PS350A with battery operation

P 435 W 435 W

+ 5 V

-5V

-28 /48V

-60V

72 V ~

I bat

23 A

1.5 A

5.0/5.0* A

2.5* A

0.18 A

1.8* A

23 A

1.5 A

5.0/5.0* A

2.5* A

0.18 A

* = Total power less/equal 300 W

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

129

ISPS (IMTU Supplementary Power Supply)

The supplementary power supply module ISPS is used for the direct feeding of B3 modules with more than

10 connected modules.

The 2 DC/DC converters work parallel to the B3 module’s PS350A power pack. They convert the superfluous capacity of the -48 V rail to +5 V.

Extension limit 1 x ISPS per B3 module

Technical data

Voltages and frequencies

Mains voltage

ISPS

-48 V direct current voltage from PS280 or PS350

Mains frequency

Reduced voltage

DC

+ 5 V

Device input, power and currents

P prim

I prim

Device output, power and currents

P

+ 5 V

ISPS

122 VA

2.55 A

ISPS

100 W

20 A

130

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

Fuses

To protect against fire and energy hazards, fuses must only be replaced with fuses of the same type.

Remove the cooling plate (four screws on conductor path side), fuses F1 and F2 with G fuse link 6.3 x 32 mm, 20 A, 250 V, medium lag, fuses F3 and F4 with G fuse link 5 x 20 mm, 4 A, 250 V, slow-acting

ISPS module, location of fuses

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

131

Uninterrupted Power Supply

Stand-alone and built-in (19" technology) devices are available for the uniterrupted power supply (UPS).

The procedures that are relevant to assembly and commissioning are described in the manufacturer documents. These documents are enclosed with the products.

A distinction is made between online technology and line-interactive technology. The application fields of each type are partly different. While the line-interactive family is able to compensate

• Power failures

• Voltage oscillations

• Voltage peaks

• Undervoltage

• Overvoltage

.

online USP systems are also capable of compensating

• Voltage surges

• Alternating voltages

• Voltage bursts

• High harmonic oscillations

Online USP systems must always be used for customers with increased safety requirements such as Hospitals, Police, Fire Brigade or energy supply companies. In addition to that, online UPS systems will continue to be used in cases where a poor quality of the mains supply must be expected, for example near railway lines, sawmills etc.

The selection criteria are shown below.

Disturbances in the mains supply

1. Power failures

2. Voltage oscillations

3. Voltage peaks

Time

> 10 ms

< 16 ms

4 - 16 ms

4. Undervoltage

5. Overvoltage continuous continuous

EN 50091-3/

IEC 620403

VFD

Voltage+

Frequency

Dependent

VI

Voltage+

Interpendent

UPS solution

Discharge solu-

Classification 3 passive standby operation

(offline)

Classification 2

line interactive

operation

tion

----------

----------

----------

----------

----------

132

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

Disturbances in the mains supply

6. Lightning strikes

7. Voltage surges

8. Frequency oscillations

9. Voltage bursts

10. High harmonic oscillations

Time sporadic

< 4 ms sporadic periodic continuous

EN 50091-3/

IEC 620403

VFI

Voltage+

Frequency

Independent

UPS solution

Discharge solu-

tion

Classification 1 double conversion operation

(online)

Lighting and over voltage protection

IEC

(60364-5-534)

----------

----------

----------

----------

Online UPS systems

Off.-Pos.

#.218.310.100

#.218.310.101

Material number or T-Mat. No.

4.999.085.468

4.999.085.469

Name

Online

Pulsar Extreme 1000 C UPS

Pulsar Extreme 1000 C battery pack

MGE

Item nr.

Material number

66346 4.999.084.360

66349 4.999.084.361

#.218.310.104

4.999.085.472

Pulsar Extreme 1000 C Rack 66352 4.999.084.364

#.218.310.105

4.999.085.473

Pulsar Extreme 1000 C Rack Battery pack 66355 4.999.084.365

#.218.310.102

4.999.085.470

Pulsar Extreme 1500 C UPS

#.218.310.103

4.999.085.471

Pulsar Extreme 1500 C battery pack

66347 4.999.084.362

66350 4.999.084.363

#.218.310.106

4.999.085.474

Pulsar Extreme 1500 C Rack 66353 4.999.084.366

#.218.310.107

4.999.085.475

Pulsar Extreme 1500 C Rack Battery pack 66356 4.999.084.367

#.218.310.108

4.999.085.476

Pulsar Extreme 2000

#.218.310.109

4.999.085.477

Pulsar Extreme 2000 Battery LA

#.218.310.110

4.999.085.485

Pulsar Extreme 2000 Battery XLA

#.218.310.114

4.999.085.489

Pulsar Extreme 2000 Rack

#.218.310.115

4.999.085.490

Pulsar Extreme 2000 Rack Battery LA

#.218.310.116

4.999.085.491

Pulsar Extreme 2000 Rack Battery XLA

#.218.310.111

4.999.085.486

Pulsar Extreme 3000

#.218.310.112

4.999.085.487

Pulsar Extreme 3000 Battery LA

67747

67960

67961

67767

67980

67981

67827

67964

4.999.084.368

4.999.084.369

4.999.084.370

4.999.084.374

4.999.084.375

4.999.084.376

4.999.084.371

4.999.084.372

#.218.310.113

4.999.085.488

Pulsar Extreme 3000 Battery XLA

#.218.310.117

4.999.085.492

Pulsar Extreme 3000 Rack

#.218.310.118

4.999.085.493

Pulsar Extreme 3000 Rack Battery LA

#.218.310.119

4.999.085.494

Pulsar Extreme 3000 Rack Battery XLA

#.218.310.120

4.999.085.495

Comet Extreme 4500

#.218.310.121

4.999.085.496

Comet Extreme 4500 battery pack LA

#.218.310.122

4.999.085.497

Comet Extreme 4500 Rack

#.218.310.123

4.999.085.498

Comet Extreme 4500 Rack Battery LA

67965 4.999.084.373

67847 4.999.084.377

67984 4.999.084.378

67985 4.999.084.379

67865 4.999.084.380

67970 4.999.084.381

67875 4.999.084.382

67990 4.999.084.383

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

133

Autonomous time table 1

Watt 100

10 min.

P.EX 2000

64 min.

30 min.

60 min.

90 min.

P.EX 1000 C

51 min.

P.EX 2000

64 min.

P.EX 1000 C

51 min.

P.EX 2000

64 min.

P.EX 1500 C

60 min.

P.EX 2000

EXB LA

160 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB1

200 min.

200

P.EX 2000

55 min.

P.EX 1000 C

28 min.

P.EX 2000

55 min.

P.EX 1000 C

28 min.

P.EX 2000

55 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB1

100 min.

P.EX 2000

EXB LA

132 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB1

100 min.

300

P.EX 2000

45 min.

P.EX 1000 C

19 min.

P.EX 2000

45 min.

P.EX 1500 C

25 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB LA

100 min.

P.EX 1000 C EXB1

72 min.

400

P.EX 2000

36 min.

P.EX 1000 C

14 min.

P.EX 2000

36 min.

P.EX 1000 C EXB1

51 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB LA

80 min.

P.EX 1000 C EXB2

90 min.

500

P.EX 2000

28 min.

P.EX 1000 C

11 min.

P.EX 2000

28 min.

P.EX 1000 C EXB1

38 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB LA

65 min.

P.EX 1000 C EXB2

68 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB LA

100 min.

P.EX 1000 C EXB2

119 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA1

120 min.

P.EX 1000 C EXB2

90 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA1

95 min.

P.EX 1000 C EXB3

90 min.

PULSAR EXtreme C PULSAR EXtreme COMET EXtreme

Abbreviations: P.EX = PULSAR EXtreme / C.EX = COMET EXtreme

Watt 600

10 min.

P.EX 2000

23 min.

30 min.

P.EX 1000 C

8 min.

P.EX 3000

37 min.

60 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB1

33 min.

P.EX 2000

EXB LA

55 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB2

55 min.

700

P.EX 2000

17 min.

P.EX 1000 C

6 min.

P.EX 3000

35 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB1

24 min.

P.EX 2000

EXB XLA1

75 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB3

64 min.

800

P.EX 2000

15 min.

P.EX 1500 C

9:30 min.

P.EX 3000

32 min.

P.EX 1500 C EXB1

41 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA1

67 min.

P.EX 1500 C EXB2

72 min.

900

P.EX 2000

13 min.

P.EX 1500 C

8 min.

P.EX 3000

30 min.

P.EX 1500 C EXB1

30 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA1

58:40 min.

P.EX 1500 C EXB2

57 min.

1000

P.EX 2000

12 min.

P.EX 1500 C

5:30 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB LA

30 min.

P.EX 1500 C EXB2

43 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA1

75 min.

P.EX 1500 C EXB3

65 min.

134

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

90 min.

P.EX 2000

EXB XLA1

83 min.

P.EX 1500 C

EXB2

100 min.

P.EX 2000

EXB XLA1

75 min.

P.EX 1500 C

EXB2

85 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA2

115 min.

P.EX 1500 C EXB3

102 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA2

102 min.

P.EX 1500 C EXB3

80 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA2

90 min.

Watt 1100

10 min.

P.EX 2000

10 min.

30 min.

P.EX 2000

EXB LA

27:50 min.

60 min.

90 min.

P.EX 3000

EXB XLA1

66 min.

P.EX 2000

EXB XLA2

80 min.

t

Wat

10 min.

1600

30 min.

60 min.

90 min.

P.EX 3000

11:30 min.

11 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

LA

28:25 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

80 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

80 min.

1200

P.EX 2000

8:50 min.

P.EX 2000

EXB XLA1

40 min.

P.EX 3000

EXB XLA1

62 min.

P.EX 3000

EXB XLA2

108 min.

1700

P.EX 3000

10 min.

LA

28 min.

XLA2

72 min.

1300

P.EX 2000

8:15 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA1

37 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA1

57 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

102 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

P.EX 3000 EXB

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA2

97 min.

1800

P.EX 3000

9 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA1

40 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

71 min.

1400

P.EX 3000

16:20 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB LA

35:15 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

95 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

95 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA2

92 min.

1900

P.EX 3000

8:20 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA1

39 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

66 min.

1500

P.EX 3000

14 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB LA

31:40 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB XLA2

87 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB XLA2

87 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA2

88 min.

1950

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA1

37 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

64 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA2

85 min.

PULSAR EXtreme C PULSAR EXtreme COMET EXtreme

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

135

Autonomous time table 2

Watts 100

120 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

LA

160 min.

150 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB1

200 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

LA

160 min.

180 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB1

200 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA1

260 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB1

200 min.

PULSAR EXtreme C PULSAR EXtreme

200

P.EX 2000 EXB

LA

132 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB2

180 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA1

210 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB2

180 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA1

210 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB2

180 min.

300

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA1

145 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB2

119 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA1

145 min.

P.EX 1000 C

EXB3

165 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA1

210 min.

P.EX 1500 EXB 2

184 min.

400

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA1

120 min.

P.EX 1500 C

EXB2

170 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA1

157 min.

P.EX 1500 C

EXB2

170 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA2

215 min.

P.EX 1500 EXB 2

170 min.

500

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA2

170 min.

P.EX 1500 C

EXB2

135 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA2

170 min.

P.EX 1500 C

EXB3

180 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA2

170 min.

P.EX 1500 EXB 3

180 min.

COMET EXtreme

Abbreviations: P.EX = PULSAR EXtreme / C.EX = COMET EXtreme

Watts 600

120 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA2

145 min.

150 min.

P.EX 1500 C

EXB3

150 min.

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA2

145 min.

180 min.

P.EX 1500 C

EXB3

150 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

212 min.

700

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA2

125 min.

P.EX 1500 C

EXB3

120 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

180 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

180 min.

800

P.EX 2000 EXB

XLA2

115 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

160 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA2

205 min.

900

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

145 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

145 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA2

179 min.

1000

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

130 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA2

160 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

285 min.

136

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

Watts 1100

120 min.

P.EX 3000 EXB

XLA2

118 min.

150 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA2

146 min.

180 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

268 min.

1200

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA2

135 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

237 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

237 min.

1300

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA2

124 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

220 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

220 min.

1400

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA2

118 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

204 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

204 min.

1500

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA2

110 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

190 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

190 min.

PULSAR EXtreme C PULSAR EXtreme COMET EXtreme

Abbreviations: P.EX = PULSAR EXtreme / C.EX = COMET EXtreme

Watt s

120 min.

1600 1700 1800

150 min.

180 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

180 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

180 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

180 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

170 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

170 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

170 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

160 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

160 min.

C.EX 9000 EXB

LA2

185 min.

1900

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

150 min.

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

150 min.

C.EX 9000 EXB

LA2

177 min.

1950

C.EX 4500 EXB

LA4

146 min.

C.EX 9000 EXB

LA2

173 min.

C.EX 9000 EXB

LA2

173 min.

PULSAR EXtreme C

Abbreviations

P.EX = PULSAR EXtreme

C.EX = COMET EXtreme

PULSAR EXtreme COMET EXtreme

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

137

Line-Interactive UPS systems

Off.-Pos.

Overall material no. or

T-mat.-no.

Name

Interactive

#.218.310.124

4.999.085.499

Pulsar Evolution 500 Combination Unit

#.218.310.126

4.999.085.501

Pulsar Evolution 800 Rack

#.218.310.125

4.999.085.500

Pulsar Evolution 800 Tower

#.218.310.128

4.999.085.503

Pulsar Evolution 1100 Rack

#.218.310.127

4.999.085.502

Pulsar Evolution 1100 Tower

#.218.310.130

4.999.085.505

Pulsar Evolution 1500 Rack

#.218.310.129

4.999.085.504

Pulsar Evolution 1500 Tower

#.218.310.131

4.999.085.506

Pulsar Evolution 2200 Combination Unit

#.218.310.132

4.999.085.507

Pulsar Evolution Battery Pack 2200

MGE article nr

Material number

66225 4.999.084.384

66227 4.999.084.386

66226 4.999.084.385

66229 4.999.084.388

66228 4.999.084.387

66231 4.999.084.390

66230 4.999.084.389

66232 4.999.084.391

66235 4.999.084.392

Line-interactive autonomous times

200

W

300

W

100

W

400

W

500

W

Autonomous time table for Pulsar Evolution 500 to Pulsar Evolution 2200-EXB 3

10 min.

P.Ev. 500

30 min.

P.Ev. 500

60 min.

P.Ev. 1500

90 min.

P.Ev. 1500

120 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

180 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

25 min.

P.Ev. 500

10 min.

P.Ev. 800

15 min.

25 min.

P.Ev. 1100

30. Min

P.Ev. 1500

32 min.

P.Ev. 1100 P.Ev. 1500

100 min.

P.Ev. 2200

56 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

168 min.

100 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

185 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

168 min.

285 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

185 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

168 min.

285 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

185 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

245 min.

12 min.

24 min.

P.Ev. 1100 P.Ev. 2200

9 min.

29 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

150 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

120 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

150 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

120 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

150 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

120 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

238 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

215 min.

138

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

700

W

800

W

600

W

Autonomous time table for Pulsar Evolution 500 to Pulsar Evolution 2200-EXB 3

P.Ev. 1500

12 min.

P.Ev. 2200

24 min.

P.Ev. 1500 P.Ev.

9 min.

2200-EXB1

100 min.

1100

W

1200

W

900

W

1000

W

P.Ev. 2200 P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

12 min.

80 min.

P.Ev. 2200

11 min.

10 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

73 min.

P.Ev. 2200 P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

59 min.

1300

W

1400

W

P.Ev. 2200 P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

9 min.

51 min.

P.Ev. 2200 P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

8 min.

45 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

42 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

39 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

42 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

39 min.

1500

W

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

35 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

35 min.

Subject to technical modifications

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

116 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

100 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

80 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

73 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

59 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

51 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

90 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

84 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

80 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

75 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

116 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

100 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

80 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

138 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

113 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

96 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

90 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB3

130 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB3

120 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB3

105 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB1

116 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

174 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

144 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

138 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

113 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB3

150 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB3

141 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB3

130 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB3

120 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

190 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB2

174 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB3

210 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB3

198 min.

P.Ev.

2200-EXB3

175 min.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

139

Supplementary components

Off.-Pos.

Material number or T-Mat. No.

Name

Accessories

#.218.312.633 4.999.046.989 Status information kit card Pulsar

Extreme C

#.218.312.632 4.999.046.988 Status information kit card Pulsar/Comet

Extreme

#.218.310.003 4.999.077.567 WEB/SNMP card 10/100 BASET

(Extreme)

#.218.310.004 4.999.077.565 WEB/SNMP card 10/100 BASET (ExtremeC)

#.230.001.368 4.999.100.382 Management Pac 2

#.218.312.634 4.999.046.990 Mains earthed CEE input cable

IEC 320-USE Adapter cable

MGE

Item number

66246

66060

66074

66244

Material number

4.999.046.989

4.999.046.988

4.999.077.567

4.999.077.565

66923

Mains earthed

CEEADAPT

4.999.100.382

4.999.046.990

4.999.092.960

4.999.093.055

Explanations

Name

Pulsar Extreme

1000 C UPS

Pulsar Extreme

1000 C Battery

Pack

Pulsar Extreme

1500 C UPS

Pulsar Extreme

1500 C Battery

Pack

Pulsar Extreme

1000 C Rack

Material number

Successor Mat.

No.

Parts list

4.999.085.468

4.999.084.360

4.999.084.360 Pulsar Extreme 1000 C Rack

4.999.046.990 Earthed CEE Safety Input Cable

4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE Adapter Cable

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.085.469

4.999.084.361

4.999.084.361 Pulsar Extreme 1000 C Battery

Pack

4.999.085.470

4.999.084.362

4,999,084,362 Pulsar Extreme 1500 C Rack

4.999.046.990 Earthed CEE Safety Input Cable

4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE Adapter Cable

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.085.471

4.999.084.363

4.999.084.363 Pulsar Extreme 1500 C UPS

Battery Pack

4.999.085.472

4.999.084.364

4,999,084,364 Pulsar Extreme 1000 C Rack

4.999.046.990 Earthed CEE Safety Input Cable

4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE Adapter Cable

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

140

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

Name

Pulsar Extreme

1000 C Rack

Battery Pack

Pulsar Extreme

1500 C Rack

Pulsar Extreme

1500 C Rack

Battery Pack

Pulsar Extreme

2000

Pulsar Extreme

2000 Battery LA

Pulsar Extreme

2000 Battery XLA

Pulsar Extreme

3000

Pulsar Extreme

3000 Battery LA

Pulsar Extreme

3000 Battery XLA

Pulsar Extreme

2000 Rack

Pulsar Extreme

2000 Rack Battery

LA

Pulsar Extreme

2000 Rack Battery

XLA

Pulsar Extreme

3000 Rack

Pulsar Extreme

3000 Rack Battery

LA

Pulsar Extreme

3000 Rack Battery

XLA

Comet Extreme

4500

Comet Extreme

4500 Battery Pack

LA

Material number

4.999.085.473

Successor Mat.

No.

4.999.084.365

Parts list

4.999.084.365 Pulsar Extreme 1000 C Rack

Battery Pack

4.999.085.474

4.999.084.366

4,999,084,366 Pulsar Extreme 1500 C Rack

4.999.046.990 Earthed CEE Safety Input Cable

4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE Adapter Cable

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.085.475

4.999.085.476

4.999.085.477

4.999.085.485

4.999.085.486

4.999.085.487

4.999.085.488

4.999.085.489

4.999.085.490

4.999.085.491

4.999.085.492

4.999.085.493

4.999.085.494

4.999.084.367

4.999.084.368

4.999.084.369

4.999.084.370

4.999.084.371

4.999.084.372

4.999.084.373

4.999.084.374

4.999.084.375

4.999.084.376

4.999.084.377

4.999.084.378

4.999.084.379

4.999.084.367 Pulsar Extreme 1500 C Rack

Battery Pack

4.999.084.368 Pulsar Extreme 2000

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.084.369 Pulsar Extreme 2000 Battery LA

4.999.084.370 Pulsar Extreme 2000 Battery XLA

4.999.084,371 Pulsar Extreme 3000

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.084.372 Pulsar Extreme 3000 Battery LA

4.999.084.373 Pulsar Extreme 3000 Battery XLA

4.999.084.374 Pulsar Extreme 2000 Rack

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.084.375 Pulsar Extreme 2000 Rack Battery

LA

4.999.084.376 Pulsar Extreme 2000 Rack Battery

XLA

4.999.084.377 Pulsar Extreme 3000 Rack

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.084.378 Pulsar Extreme 3000 Rack Battery

LA

4.999.084.379 Pulsar Extreme 3000 Rack Battery

XLA

4.999.085.495

4.999.084.380

4.999.100.502 Comet Extreme 4500 Basic Unit

4.999.084.381 Comet Extreme 4500 Battery Pack

LA

4.999.085.496

4.999.084.381

4.999.084.381 Comet Extreme 4500 Battery Pack

LA

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

141

Name

Comet Extreme

4500 Rack

Comet Extreme

4500 Rack Battery

LA

Pulsar Evolution

500 Combination

Unit

Material number

Successor Mat.

No.

Parts list

4.999.085.497

4.999.084.382

4.999.100.503 Comet Extreme 4500 Rack Basic

Unit

4.999.084.383 Comet Extreme 4500 Rack Battery

LA

4.999.085.498

4.999.084.383

4.999.084.383 Comet Extreme 4500 Rack Battery

LA

Pulsar Evolution

800 Tower

Pulsar Evolution

800 Rack

Pulsar Evolution

1100 Tower

Pulsar Evolution

1100 Rack

Pulsar Evolution

1500 Tower

Pulsar Evolution

1500 Rack

Pulsar Evolution

2200 Combination

Unit

Pulsar Evolution

Battery Pack 2200

4.999.085.499

4.999.084.384

4.999.084.384 Pulsar Evolution 500 Combination

Unit

4.999.046.990 Earthed CEE Safety Input Cable

4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE Adapter Cable

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.085.500

4.999.084.385

4.999.084.385 Pulsar Evolution 800 Tower

4.999.046.990 Earthed CEE Safety Input Cable

4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE Adapter Cable

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.085.501

4.999.084.386

4.999.084.386 Pulsar Evolution 800 Rack

4.999.046.990 Earthed CEE Safety Input Cable

4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE Adapter Cable

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.085.502

4.999.084.387

4.999.084.387 Pulsar Evolution 1100 Tower

4.999.046.990 Earthed CEE Safety Input Cable

4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE Adapter Cable

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.085.503

4.999.084.388

4.999.084.388 Pulsar Evolution 1100 Rack

4.999.046.990 Earthed CEE Safety Input Cable

4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE Adapter Cable

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.085.504

4.999.084.389

4.999.084.389 Pulsar Evolution 1500 Tower

4.999.046.990 Earthed CEE Safety Input Cable

4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE Adapter Cable

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.085.505

4.999.084.390

4.999.084.390 Pulsar Evolution 1500 Rack

4.999.046.990 Earthed CEE Safety Input Cable

4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE Adapter Cable

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.085.506

4.999.084.391

4.999.084.391 Pulsar Evolution 2200 Combination Unit

4.999.046.990 Earthed CEE Safety Input Cable

4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE Adapter Cable

4.999.092.960 Multiple Socket Outlet

4.999.085.507

4.999.084.392

4.999.084.392 Pulsar Evolution Battery Pack 2200

142

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

Installation and service concept

IEarthing measures

Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, standing casing

For leakage currents greater than 3.5 mA, see

Annex 5

[

→ 150 ]

you must connect a grounding wire to

Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, standing casing.

Signal this as follows:

Extract Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, standing casing

1. Grounding clamp

• Clamp the grounding wire to the grounding terminal (1.).

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

143

Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, rack version

For leakage currents greater than 3.5 mA, see

Annex 5

[

→ 150 ]

You must connect a grounding wire to

Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, rack version, for discharge current greater than 3.5 mA.

Signal this as follows:

Extract Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, rack version

1. Grounding clamp

• Clamp the grounding wire to the grounding terminal (1.).

144

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

Pulsar Extreme 1500 - 3000

For leakage currents greater than 3.5 mA, see

Annex 6

[

→ 151 ]

, you must connect an grounding wire to

Pulsar Extreme 1500-3000 for discharge current greater than 3.5 mA.

Signal this as follows:

Extract Pulsar Extreme 1500 -3000

1. Cover

2. Opening for connecting cable

3. Connecting clamps

• Unscrew the cover (1).

• Insert the grounding wire through the designated opening (2.).

• Clamp the grounding wire to the grounding terminal (3.).

• Screw the cover back on to the device (1).

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

145

Grounding concept

Telecommunications systems generally required protective grounding (E) and often functional grounding

(FE).

Both protective grounding (PE) and functional grounding (FE) can be implemented by means of a functional and protective grounding conductor (FPE).

Grounding of telecommunications systems is based on EN 60950 and DIN VDE 0800, Part 2, "Telecommunications Engineering - Grounding and Potential Equalization".

The PE supplied via the grounding-pin plug can then also be used as FE, provided that the operating current flowing via functional grounding from the telecommunications system is no more than 9 mA alternating current and/or more than 100 mA direct current from a direct voltage source with 60 V or more than 50 mA from a direct voltage source with 120 V. If this limit is exceeded, a permanently connected functional grounding conductor, that can also be used as FPE, must be fitted.

The question of when, how and which devices are to be grounded (PE) for reasons of electrical safety, as well as device-specific information, is dealt with in the decision-making diagram in the sections titled

"Grounding concept for devices / systems" and "Grounding concept for devices/systems operating via a

UPS".

If a device/system has leakage current of greater than 3.5 mA, the protective-conductor terminal must always be permanently connected to ground. The leakage currents exhibited by MG1000 Media Gateways, also in combination with various UPSs, are listed in the tables in Annex 4 to Annex 6.

Housing and cabinet solutions have been defined to ensure simple and safe handling for grounding measures.

General Requirements and Explanations for the Decision-Making Diagram

• A permanently connected protective earthing (PE) conductor for several devices is to be implemented in such a way that removal of one device does not lead to the PE connection for one or several other devices being interrupted at any point. This can be achieved, for example, by star-shaped routing of the PE connection from a local earth terminal to the individual devices. (DIN VDE 0800 part 2 Section

6.2.2.5.2)

• The protective earthing (PE) conductor is insulated in green/yellow or is bare (DIN VDE 0100, Part

540, Section 5.2).

• The minimum cross-section of the functional earthing (FE) conductor depends on the nominal current strength of the assigned safety device (e.g. automatic circuit breaker), but is at least 2.5 mm

2

. More detailed specifications can be found in Table 1 of DIN VDE 0800, Part 2, Section 6.2.2.5.5 (Annex 1).

• The absolute minimum cross-section of the separate earthing wire is: 2.5 mm

2

if mechanical protection is provided (e.g. conductors sheathed in a cable, cable duct or conduit), 4 mm

2

if this is not the case (see DIN VDE 0100 Part 540 Section 5). It also specifies that the minimum cross-section is proportionate to the operating current of the safety device and its response time as well as to a material coefficient. By way of providing a guideline, the minimum cross-section of the protective conductor must be same as the cross-section of the external conductor (mains supply cable) of the system. If the protective conductor comprises a conductor in a multi-wire cable (see DIN VDE 0100, Part 540,

146

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

Section 5.2.1), the minimum cross-section is the same as the cross-section of the external conductor

(see DIN VDE 0100, Part 540, Section 5.1.2). If the supply cable comprises a cable with flexible conductors, its minimum cross-section is 0.75 mm

0100, Part 520, Section 524.3, Table 52 J).

2

(depending on the supply current) (see DIN VDE

• The minimum cross-section of the functional and protective earthing conductor (FPE) is subjected to the same high requirements as for FE and E.

Explanations for the terms SELV, TNV1, TNV2 and TNV3:

In an SELV electric circuit, limited voltages only (max. 42.4 V peak value or 60 V direct voltage) may occur (both in standard operation and after a single fault), with the exception of temporary exceptions in the event of faults. SELV voltages are regarded as contact-safe. (refer to EN 60950, Section 2.3 for more detailed specifications).

In a TNV2 electric circuit limited voltages only may occur in standard operation: Uac/70.7+Udc/120 V<1

(except for telephone ringing signals). Temporary exceptions in the event of single faults are permissible within defined boundaries. (refer to EN 60950, Section 6.2 for more detailed specifications).

TNV1 electric circuits are SELV circuits that are subjected to overvoltage surges of the telecommunications network.

TNV3 electric circuits are TNV2 circuits that are subjected to overvoltage surges of the telecommunications network.

Annex 1

Minimum cross-sections for sections of the functional earthing conductor (from DIN VDE 0800, Part 2,

Section 6.2.2.5.5)

Nominal current strength of the assigned safety device 1) in A up to 25 up to 35 up to 50 up to 63 up to 125 up to 160 up to 224 up to 250 up to 630 up to 800 up to 1000

Minimum cross-section of the copper conductor in mm

16

25

35

50

2,5

4

6

10

70

95

120

2

1) The safety device must not be located in the course of the earthing conductor.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

147

Annex 2

Earthing concept for devices/systems of protective class I

Protective earthing (PE) required due to TNV/SELV #1 yes

Discharge current >3.5 mA #3,5 no

Discharge current >3.5 mA #3,5 yes

Fixed access via:

Potential equalisation bar in the building

or

Oven connection socket

no

Fixed access via:

Potential equalisation bar in the building

or

Oven connection socket

or

Lockable two-pole earth plug

yes

Fixed access via:

Potential equalisation bar in the building

or

Oven connection socket

no

PE via earthing-pin plug of device

Earthing concept for devices/systems in protective class II

Protective earthing (PE) required due to TNV/SELV #1 yes no

Fixed access via:

Potential equalisation bar in the building

or

Oven connection socket

or

Lockable two-pole earth plug

No PE required

Explanations for the decision-making tables:

#1

If a device is connected to both TNV2 / TNV3 circuits (e.g. analog a/b connection or Uko interface) and also SELV or TNV1 circuits (e.g. V24, S0, UPo, S2m) (DIN EN 60950, section TNV circuit)

148

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

Annex 3

Earthing concept for devices/systems in protective class I operating via a UPS system

Protective earthing (PE) required due to TNV/SELV #1 yes

Discharge current >3.5 mA #2 no

Discharge current >3.5 mA #2 yes

Fixed access for all devices and UPS via:

Potential equalisation bar in the building

or

Oven connection socket

no

Fixed access for all devices and

UPS via:

Potential equalisation bar in the building

or

Oven connection socket

or

Lockable two-pole protection pin plug

yes

Fixed access for all devices and UPS via:

Potential equalisation bar in the building

or

Oven connection socket

no

E via earthing-pin plug of the UPS and devices

Earthing concept for devices/systems in protective class II operating via a UPS system

Protective earthing (PE) required due to TNV/SELV #1 yes

Fixed access for all devices and UPS via:

Potential equalisation bar in the building

or

Oven connection socket

or

Lockable two-pole earth plug

The PE for the UPS can be supplied via its earthing-pin plug if its leakage current is <3.5 mA.

A fixed access is necessary if the discharge current is

>3.5 mA.

no

PE is not necessary for devices in protective class II.

The PE for the UPS can be supplied via its earthing-pin plug if its leakage current is <3.5 mA.

A fixed access is necessary if the discharge current is >3.5 mA.

Explanations for the decision-making tables:

#1

If a device is connected to both TNV2 / TNV3 circuits (e.g. analog a/b connection or Uko interface) and also SELV or TNV1 circuits (e.g. V24, S0, UPo, S2m) (DIN EN 60950, section TNV circuit)

#2

Sum total of leakage currents from UPS and connected devices

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

149

Annex 4

MG1000 leakage currents

Module type

C1 (R1)

Power supply unit

1 x PSL Power Supply

2 x PSL Power Supply

C2 (R1-R2) 2 x PSL Power Supply

4 x PSL Power Supply

C3 (R1-R3) 3 x PSL Power Supply

6 x PSL Power Supply

C4 (R1-R4) 4 x PSL Power Supply

8 x PSL Power Supply

Leakage current

< 0.8 mA

< 0.8 mA

< 0.8 mA

< 0.8 mA

< 0.8 mA

< 0.8 mA

< 0.8 mA

< 0.8 mA

Input filter leakage current

None

None

None

Total leakage current

< 0.8 mA

< 1.6 mA

< 1.6 mA

< 3.2 mA

< 2.4 mA

< 4.8 mA

< 3.2 mA

< 6.4 mA

A fixed ground connection is certainly necessary for all extensions, as the lockable grounding plugs are insufficient in this case to handle the high leakage current (>3.5 mA).

Power supply unit Total leakage current Module type

B3 1 x PS280A 49.9807.6163

1 x PS350A 49.9807.6164

2 x PS350A 49.9807.6164

PS leakage current

< 0.5 mA

< 0.7 mA

< 0.7 mA

Input filter leakage current

< 0.3 mA < 0.8 mA

< 1.0 mA

< 1.7 mA

Annex 5

Leakage currents of the MG1000 with UPS Pulsar Extreme 700C, 1000C, 1500C

Module type

C1 (R1)

Power supply unit

1 x PSL Power Supply

2 x PSL Power Supply

C2 (R1-R2) 2 x PSL Power Supply

4 x PSL Power Supply

C3 (R1-R3) 3 x PSL Power Supply

6 x PSL Power Supply

C4 (R1-R4) 4 x PSL Power Supply

8 x PSL Power Supply

Leakage current

< 0.8 mA

< 1.6 mA

< 1.6 mA

< 3.2 mA

< 0.8 mA

< 4.8 mA

< 3.2 mA

< 6.4 mA

UPS Pulsar Extreme

700C, 1000C, 1500C

< 0.4 mA

< 0.4 mA

< 0.4 mA

< 0.4 mA

Total leakage current

< 1.2 mA

< 2.0 mA

< 2.0 mA

< 3.6 mA

< 2.8 mA

< 5.2 mA

< 3.6 mA

< 6.8 mA

150

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Power supply

A fixed ground connection is certainly necessary for all extensions, as the lockable grounding plugs are insufficient in this case to handle the high leakage current (>3.5 mA).

Module type

B3

Power supply unit PS leakage current

1 x PS280A 49.9807.6163

< 0.5 mA

1 x PS350A 49.9807.6164

< 0.7 mA

2 x PS350A 49.9807.6164

< 0.7 mA

Input filter leakage current

< 0.3 mA

Total leakage current

< 0.8 mA

< 1.0 mA

< 1.7 mA

If an MG1000 Media Gateway is used in connection with a B3 module (IMTU), the values of the "total leakage current" must be added to the values "total leakage current" for the MG1000.

Annex 6

Leakage currents of the MG1000 with UPS Pulsar Extreme 1500, 2000, 3000

Module type

Power supply unit Leakage current

UPS Pulsar Extreme

1500, 2000, 3000

Total leakage current

C1 (R1) 1 x PSL Power Supply

2 x PSL Power Supply

< 0.8 mA

< 1.6 mA

< 2.7 mA < 3.5 mA

< 4.3 mA

C2 (R1-R2) 2 x PSL Power Supply

4 x PSL Power Supply

< 1.6 mA

< 3.2 mA

< 2.7 mA

< 4.3 mA

< 5.9 mA

C3 (R1-R3) 3 x PSL Power Supply

6 x PSL Power Supply

C4 (R1-R4) 4 x PSL Power Supply

8 x PSL Power Supply

< 2.4 mA

< 4.8 mA

< 3.2 mA

< 6.4 mA

< 2.7 mA

< 2.7 mA

< 5.1 mA

< 7.5 mA

< 5.9 mA

< 9.1 mA

A fixed ground connection is certainly necessary for all extensions, as the lockable grounding plugs are insufficient in this case to handle the high leakage current (>3.5 mA).

Module type

Power supply unit PS leakage current

Input filter leakage current

Total leakage current

B3 1 x PS280A 49.9807.6163

1 x PS350A 49.9807.6164

2 x PS350A 49.9807.6164

< 0.5 mA

< 0.7 mA

< 0.7 mA

< 0.3 mA < 0.8 mA

< 1.0 mA

< 1.7 mA

If an MG1000 is used in connection with a B3 module (IMTU), the values of the "total leakage current" must be added to the values "total leakage current" for the MG1000.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

151

Power consumption

-48 V power consumption of the MG1000 in maximum configuration

Module/rack

R1 rack

1

/

2

K rack (B3)

I (A)

1.5 A

14 A

Power supply parameters for the activated terminals in the T13 families

Analog terminals via ASCEU 48 V/7 mA (350 mW)

Analog terminals via ASC2

Digital terminals via S

0

or U

PN

28 V/9 mA (250 mW)

48 V/7 mA (350 mW)

DECT for each RBS radio base station 48 V/70 mA (3.5 W)

152

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Doubling

Doubling

There are two reasons for doubling:

• As an option, the central functions of the MG1000 Media Gateway may be doubled redundantly in order to increase the security against failure.

• In addition to the redundant doubling, it may be necessary within the system to double certain functions in order to enhance the performance (e.g. processor performance or electrical output)

Because these functions have been created with the aid HW units (modules, equipment), this means that if doubling occurs, a unit will be used not once, but several times in the system.

Single module

Up to four racks (standing casing, racks in 19" cabinets, racks in 19" frames or any combination thereof) can form a single module, spread over any area and connected by flexible cables.

Module types:

The following names have been defined for the various module types:

C1:

C2:

C3:

C4:

Module with one rack (R1)

Module with 2 racks (R1+R2)

Module with 3 racks (R1+R2+R3)

Module with 4 racks (R1+R2+R3+R4)

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

153

PS Doubling

Doubling of the PS within one module is possible for each individual rack (R1, R2, etc.)

The PSL Power Supply occupies the right-hand slot in the rack. A PSL Power Supply is also connected to the left-hand side of the rack in the event of PS doubling.

AO = connecting device

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

C4 Module with PS doubling

The doubling of the PSL Power Supply may be necessary for reasons of:

• Redundancy

• Performance increase

.An adapter kit is also available for projects - see PS350 adapter kit.

doubling CF*

Mixed operation CF22/CF2E in one module is not permitted.

CF doubling within one module is only possible in the R1 rack.

154

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Doubling

An additional CF22/CF2E board, which is normally operated by hot stand-by, can only be inserted there.

In the event of trouble on the active CF22/CF2E side, a complete automatic switchover to the previously passive CF22/CF2E takes place. Individual messages may be lost here.

The slot for the second CF22/CF2E board is reserved and must be set up during system configuration.

AO = connecting circuit

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

R1 rack (C1 module) with CF doubling

The switching matrix facilities of a recently inserted CF22/CF2E are updated automatically by adopting the current information from the active CF22/CF2E, while at the same time entering all connections made since insertion.

CF doubling is possible in the R1 rack.

AO = connecting circuit

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

C4 module with CF doubling

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

155

*CB doubling

Mixed ACB/HSCB operation in a module is not possible (different operating systems).

Although doubling of the ACB/HSCB board is possible, technical reasons dictate that it is not necessary in the single module.

Twin module

A twin module is made up of any two single MG1000 Media Gateways (C1, C2, C3 or C4), which, connected to each other by a transmission channel (fiber optic cable), form a Integral Enterprise system. The equipment of single modules with central modules is the same as that of the single module.

Each module has its own CF22/CF2E and ACB/HSCB.

AO = connecting device

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E e.g. a twin module consisting of 2 C1 modules

156

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Doubling

PS Doubling

The power supply (PS) can generally be doubled in any rack of any module that forms a twin module together with an additional module.

The purpose of the PS doubling may be to establish redundancy or to increase performance.

AO = connecting device

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E e.g. a twin module consisting of 2 C1 modules

For projects there is also an adapter module - see

PS350 adapter

[

→ 100 ]

.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

157

CF* doubling (within a module)

Mixed CF22/CF2E operation in a module is not permitted. The other module (twin) can be equipped with two other CF modules that must be the same, e.g. two CF2E.

If the central functions of both modules are to be doubled redundantly, the CF22/CF2E modules will then be doubled in the R1 rack of the connected, single modules. This also includes an additional transmission link. For a transmission link to be operable however, it must not only have a fiber optic cable, but also the function unit CFIML or CFIML1 on the CF22/CF2E module.

In principle, the active CF22/CF2E module transmits on both available fiber optic cable lines. This means the MTU functions operate respectively on the CF22/CF2E module which is active at that time. This also operates the optic cable cable line of the hot stand-by CF22/CF2E board however. In the event of a failure on the active side, a complete switchover to the hot stand-by CF22/CF2E side will take place.

AO = connecting device

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

A twin module consisting of 2 C1 modules with CF22/CF2E doubling

If failure of a transmission link occurs without redundancy (double fault!), the two modules are separate and no longer form a joint unit, they each remain operable, if only in a limited sense.

The switching matrix facilities of a recently inserted CF22/CF2E are updated automatically by adopting the current information from the active CF22/CF2E, while at the same time entering all connections made since insertion.

158

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

*CB doubling

Mixed ACB/HSCB operation in a module is not possible (different operating systems).

Doubling

Although doubling of the ACB/HSCB board is possible, technical reasons dictate that it is not necessary.

If an ACB/HSCB in the twin module fails, it is linked to the failure of the corresponding module. The second module continues to run without restrictions. The second intact ACB/HSCB board cannot take over the tasks of the failed ACB/HSCB boards.

AO = connecting device

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

Twin module consisting of 2 C1 modules

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

159

Multi-module

Coupled systems

A multi-module system consists of multiple Integral Enterprise, I55 or I33 modules connected using a multi-module either using ICS (3-16 modules) or a B3 module (17-32 modules).

When an Interconnection Server ICS (3-16 modules) is used, it can be installed in the same cabinet as the

Integral Enterprise modules. If you connect more than 16 modules, you must use a B3 module, which cannot be integrated into the Integral Enterprise 19" technology.

Multi-module without MTU/IMTU doubling with ICS

AO = connecting device

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

160

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Multi-module without MTU/IMTU doubling with B3 module

Doubling

AO = connecting device

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

PS = only PS350A

The following modules are used in the multi module, among others:

• MLB Module Link Board

• ISMx IMTU Switching Matrix

• ICF IMTU Central Functions

The following chapters describe how operation with the multi module can be carried out in various ways.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

161

MLB (Module Link Board)

• Modules for optic cable cable connection; 8 modules can be connected by one MLB. Up to 2x MLB boards can be used in an ICS (16 groups).

• Up to four MLB boards can be used in a B3 module (system with 17-32 groups).

• The optic cable cable connectors can be distributed as desired onto the MLB module.

• see also MLB Module Link Board

Example:

4 required optic cable cable connections can be installed on one MLB, although they are distributed over 4

MLB modules.

ISMx

• Switching matrix with controller

• see also ISMx Switching Matrix x

Four of these boards are present in every Multi Module. Should one module fail, the remaining connected modules continue working. Connections which have been made via the failed IMTU module will be disconnected.

When doubled, all of the ISMx boards in both Multi Modules must be of the same type.

ICF

• Inter module manager, clock generation

• An optical fiber pair can be connected to form a connection path between the IMTUs during doubling.

• see also ICF IMTU Central Functions

162

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Doubling

IVZ on *CB boards

The IVZ is always doubled and is placed onto the ACBs/HSCBs of 2 participating modules. This variant is suitable as long as the number of modules is not too high (normal limit is 8 modules).

The I1 package can be configured with a maximum of 20 groups.

IVZ on ACB/HSCB boards

AO = connecting circuit

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

1. IVZ

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

163

IVZ on separate *CB boards

IVZ and RIVZ slots can be freely assigned.

Installation of an ACB/HSCB (with IVZ function) in a B3/ICS module is generally not possible for software reasons.

Das I2-,I3- oder I4-Paket kann bis auf maximal 32 Gruppen ausgebaut werden.

Other functional units of the I3 and I4 packets are assigned to separate ACB/HSCB boards.

IVZ on separate ACB/HSCB boards

AO = connecting device

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

1. IVZ

164

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Doubling

Doubling the PS in the B3 module

The failure of a non-doubled PS in a B3 module is synonymous with the failure of the entire multi module.

This means that communication between the individual, connected modules is no longer possible. Accordingly, all modules fail completely for communication between modules excepting the two modules with

IVZ functions.

This risk can also be reduced by doubling the PS (PS350A only) in the B3 module redundantly.

Complete doubling

Doubling of the transmission link

In a multi-module system, only one transmission link per module can ever be connected to a multi module

(ICS or B3 module). Connecting two transmission links for one module to just one multi module contradicts the redundancy concept and is therefore not technically possible - it would lead to erratic behavior in the system.

Transmission links can therefore only be doubled in complete double multi-module systems.

Complete double system

In a complete double system, the CF22/CF2E board is present twice over in the individual connected modules for redundancy purposes, and likewise the multi module (ICS or B3 module).

Depending on the slots, one of the two CF22/CF2E modules in each module is connected with one of the two multi modules by transmission link.

In this, each of the two multi modules forms one half of the system together with the CF22/CF2E modules they are connected to. One of these is the "active" system half, in which all user data is processed, as for a non-doubled system. The other is the "hot standby" half, which the system will fall back on in various different ways in the event of failure in the "active" half.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

165

1. Optical fiber cable for connecting the Interconnection Server

2. Optical fiber connection for hot standby half of the system

3. Optical fiber connection for the active half of the system

4. CF22/CF2E of the hot standby half of the system

5. CF22/CF2E of the active half of the system

Complete IMTU doubling

In the event of one of the functional units on one of the two CF22/CF2E or one optic cable cable connection failing, the missing information is brought over to the module in question from the inactive to the active side, and therefore is replaced. This alternative route will remain in existence for the duration of the failure.

Following repairs, the active CF22/CF2E in the "default" active side should take over the information flow again. This is brought about by a manual service changeover on either one of the two CF22/CF2E boards of the affected module. This automatically releases the surrogate channel between the two ICS/B3 modu-

166

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Doubling

les in order to be available in the event of a fault within one of the two connected modules.

If another error occurs in a different module on the active side while the first error is still in existence (failure on active CF22/CF2E or its transmission link), the system will react by completely switching over to the other system half, that is to say, all modules in the system switch to their "hot standby" side.

The complete system half will also switch over in the event of failure of functional units within an active

IMTU (see above).

If the hot standby side fails, the flow of information is unaffected.

Message loss is to be expected in all cases where a switchover occurs.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

167

Boards

A board is a physical unit within the Integral Enterprise system. It is made up of a multilayer, a socket connector, electronic components and a front connector bar with low force on/off connectors.

The MG1000 Media Gateway contains 8 to 32 slots to accommodate various boards.

Plug connectors are used to secure the boards to the board frame.

General Points

The boards may be removed and inserted during system operation.

Please note:

• ESD protective measures.

• All existing connections of the board are disconnected if it is removed.

For reasons of EMC, vacant slots should be covered with frontplates.

More information about removing and inserting should be noted for the following boards

• ACB

• HSCB

• CF22

• CF2E

• ICF

• ISM

• CBT (see Measuring and Testing Tools)

• V24IA V24 Interface Adapter (see Measuring and Testing Tools)

You will find the information in the subchapter "Removing and Inserting Boards" for the boards mentioned above.

Removing and inserting

Using the latch fasteners on the front panel, boards can be inserted and then interlocked into the board frame, or be detached and removed from it.

168

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Board locking levers

1. Latch fasteners

2. Board

Bridges and Breakpoints

In some boards, it is possible to make hardware adjustments (e.g. for setting the current strength). This can be done by inserting or removing bridges and breakpoints.

The diagram opposite shows the coordinates which enable bridges and breakpoints to be located.

Board co-ordinates

1. Soldering side

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

169

Configurations

Configuration example with ICS as the multi-module

1. Single module

2. Twin module

3. Multi-module

4. Cable for back plane connection

5. Fiber optic cable

6. ICS

170

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

There is also an adapter module - see

PS350 adapter

[

→ 100 ]

kit is available for this purpose.

Configuration example with B3 module as the multi-module

1. Single module

2. Twin module

3. Multi-module

4. Cable for back plane connection

5. Fiber optic cable

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

171

6. B3 module

Mixed operation of ISMx and ISM2x boards is not permissible.

172

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG1000 block diagram

Boards

1. Central functions, control and power supply

2. Analog

3. Digital

4. IP

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

173

MG1000 block diagram with IEE2 software and later

1. Central functions, control and power supply

2. Analog

3. Digital

4. IP

174

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Control, Central Functions and Transport

Board

S5500/ACB1/ACB

[

→ 222 ]

HSCB

[

→ 199 ]

in all modules with E0x SW not with Integral Enterprise Edition

CF22

[

→ 178 ]

Subboard

V24I

[

→ 230 ]

V24NI

[

→ 230 ]

V24I

[

→ 230 ]

V24NI

[

→ 230 ]

CBI1A3

[

→ 177 ]

CFIML, CFIML1

[

→ 186 ]

ICF

[

→ 204 ]

ISMx

[

→ 209 ]

DSPF1

[

→ 191 ]

DSPF

[

→ 188 ]

MLB

[

→ 212 ]

R1RC

[

→ 216 ]

Special interface connection

Submodule

V24M

[

→ 231 ]

CL2ME

[

→ 187 ]

ASM3

[

→ 176 ]

MLBIML

[

→ 215 ]

Module

UIP

[

→ 435 ]

Connection

AEV24B

[

→ 233 ]

AV24B

[

→ 236 ]

ESBx

[

→ 266 ]

ESBA

[

→ 266 ]

ESBB

[

→ 266 ]

EOCSM/MM

[

→ 197 ]

EOCPF

[

→ 196 ]

CA3B

[

→ 241 ]

EOCSM/MM

[

→ 197 ]

EOCPF

[

→ 196 ]

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

175

ASM3 Announcement Module 3

Short description

The ASM3 announcement module is a submodule of the DSPF.

The variant ASM3 is used in the MG1000 Media Gateway for recording and playback of ACD spoken announcements and for hotel applications. The corresponding hotel messages are pre-programmed in the hotel application.

Samples and announcements

Maximum number of saved samples

Maximum total time saved

Maximum number of simultaneous announcements

Samples in one announcement

1000

32 minutes of announcements (PCM)

30 up to 10

A sample is a recording with varied contents (music or spoken text).

An announcement can be repeated several times, or even infinitely.

The 30 announcement channels are handled and managed as a digital port with 30 channels.

Each ASM3 also provides two additional channels for the recording of samples for ACD application. These samples are initially available as WAV files, and are loaded to the ASM3 by means of PC application (ACD user interface). The 2 recording channels are handled and managed as a digital port with 2 channels.

Current requirement +5V

Other features

300 mA

Each ASM3 can occupy up to 32 channels.

Location of the ASM3 on the DSPF module

1. ASM3 Module

2. DSPF Module

3. Connecting device slot

176

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

CBI1A3 CBus Interface 1 Adapter Version 3

Short description

The CBI receives a message (data packet) from the micro processor and stores it internally in a buffer memory. Once the message has been completely entered from the micro processor (cyclic recording), the

CBI sends the packet via the C-bus to the specified destination CBI. This CBI stores the packet internally and offers it to its micro processor (typ. per interrupt). The micro processor then receives the packet via cyclic readout from the CBI. The CBIs receiving and transmitting parts work independently of each other.

The CB1A3 is used on the HSCB board. Only one package for transmission and reception can be stored internally at any one time.

CBI1A3 submodule on the BG HSCB

1. BG HSCB module

2. CBI1A3 Module

3. HSCB slot

LED Denotations

L1 on: flashing:

High data traffic

Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor

L2 flashing: Packet loss in transmission buffer because of transmit time-out or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro processor

L3 flashing: Packet loss in receiver buffer because of receive time-out or reset

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

177

L4 on: flashing weakly:

Abnormal operating status e.g.:

• CBI cannot be used to transmit and receive

• Reset status

1 MBit of data has been transmitted on the C-bus.

CF22 Central Functions 22

Short description

The central board CF22 is the basic equipment in all modules. It replaces the CF2E board.

It supports:

• the dealer functions

• intermodule handover functions for DECT

and

• call number display for incoming calls to analogue terminals ("CLIP" Calling Line Identification Protocol).

As opposed to CF2E it only features one DSP system.

Ports

B channels (time slots)

ILMx

DECT

Internal traffic flow

External traffic flow

Features

+

+

544

1088

1088 Erl.

225 Erl.

Features

Clock Supply and Module Synchronization

External synchronization via network nodes (S0, S2M).

Master function in multi-module systems can be set up using software.

Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking)

Module Switching Matrix

Bit rate 4,096 MBit/s

Module internal non-blocking

11 DTMF receiver sets, 4 DTMF transmitters (only for dialling)

178

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Call Progress Tones

A maximum of 16 call progress tones can be generated as customer-specific or country-specific and can be cyclically repeated. At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

In addition, a maximum of 3 tones with burst character can be supplied.

Short Voice Messages

Up to 8 voice messages or "music on holds" can be used. The total duration of all brief voice messages must be no longer than 64 sec.

Long Voice Messages

4 voice messages with unspecified time limits and confidata can be set up (connecting message devices via analogue subscriber line circuits). At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

Tone Injection in Two-Party Conversations

Up to 3 various cyclic tones can be generated which may be fed into a maximum of 15 two-party conversations (e.g. call waiting tone, rolling tone etc.).

Conferences

The system software only allows three-party conferences.

Only dealer terminals support conferences with more participants.

Call number ID

8 DTMF transmitters for CLIP (call nummer indication on analogue terminals for incoming calls)

Power demand +5V

Other features

1400 mA

A high precision reference clock is required for the intermodule handover functions. This can be carried out through the use of the CL2M submodule on the UIP or ICF. See also Intermodule Handover section.

If fibre-optic links are used, the CF22 board is to be fitted with the submodule CFIML or CFIML1 Central

Function Inter Module Link.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

179

Jumper and DIL Switch Functions

Configuration switches are located on the component side of the module. The functions and positions of these switches are described below:

CF22 module, module side

1. DIL switch, 8-part

2. DIL switch, 4-part

3. Fuse F2 for the power supply EOC, 500 mA replaceable

4. LED red:

Loadable module hardware not functioning

Module function not possible

5. FPGA boot/load PROM

180

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

6. Fire protection fuse 7A

If the fire protection fuse is defective (burned out), the module must be replaced by a new one.

7. LED green: R/T active on: high data traffic flashes: Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor.

8. LED yellow: TFAIL flashes: Packet loss in transmission buffer because of transmit timeout or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro processor

9. LED red: RFAIL flashes: Packet loss in receiver buffer because of receive timeout or reset

10. CFIML or CFIML1 submodule Central Function Inter Module Link

Functions of the DIL switches 8-part

System configuration for MMG

Single module system

Two module system, first module

Two module system, second module

Two module system, systems with more than two modules

Specification of highest scan address

35

55

87

126 (Default)

switch

1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

2

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

switch

3

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

4

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Battery status query (AIC)

Testing of -48 V battery is not possible

5

ON

(Default)

Testing of -48 V battery active OFF

When using PS350 with a connected battery (only Integral 33): Switching on the battery voltage monitoring

Error signaling unit

with ESU without ESU

6

ON

OFF

In order to get the correct signaling direction ATA with EE8B in an MG1000 Media Gateway with ESBA instead of ESB, switch 6 must be placed to ON (with ESU).

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

181

Download

Download inactive

Download possible (default)

Module Manager Watchdog

Watchdog inactive

Watchdog active (default)

Switch

7

ON

OFF

8

ON

OFF

Functions of the DIL switches 4-part

Intermodule handover

in twin and multi module configuration: intermodule handover active across modules in twin and B3 configuration: intermodule handover inactive across modules

Fiber optic cable length compensation (only with doubled CF2E)

Activation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot

Deactivation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot

Switch still without function

Switch still without function 4

3

Switch

1

ON

OFF

2

ON

OFF

182

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

LEDs and Switch Functions

Boards

CF22 module, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1

S2

Middle position

Middle position

Switch Function

S1

S2

Reset switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Service Switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Operating state

Reset module, locking

Reset module, keying

Operating state

No function, locking

With doubled CF2x: Initiate switchover, keying

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

183

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1 ACTIVE

On:

Flashing:

Off:

MSMC active/inactive

MSMC (switching matrix processor unit) resetting/inactive

MSMC download in progress or MSMC waiting for commissioning

MSMC active

L2 CLKUA

On:

Clock unit active

Normal operation: Active module clock unit

L3 IMHOSYNC

On: Module is synchronized for DECT operation

Flashing:

Off:

Resynchronization (flashes for 30 seconds)

Module is not synchronized for DECT operation

This operating mode can also occur if switch 1 of the DIL switch 2 is in the position

ON (IMHO active) and the LED L4 is on.

L4 MAFREI

On: Free running of master (internal clock pulse) or external synchronization (if L10 is also on)

Flashing:

L5 AMEX1S

On:

L6 DSP-LED1

On:

Flashing:

Off:

Internal free running (internal clock pulse) after failure of synchronous clock via fiber optic path

Alarm message ext. synchr. clock 1 sec.

Synchronizing clock pulse has failed for more than 1 second (for master module: clock cycle from OVST, network node; for slave module: clock cycle via fiber optic cable)

Status - LED

Boot phase after board reset or DSP system permanently faulty

Temporary synchronization fault on a DSP highway

DSP system in operation

L7 TFAIL

On or flashing: One or more C-bus transmission faults

Off:

L8 MMG

On:

L9

Flashing:

Off:

CLKUSYN

On:

L10 MANK

On:

L11 IDR

L12 ECLKU

On:

Flashing:

C-bus in operation. Sub-board CFIML or CFIML1 not plugged at CF22.

MMG status

MMG not in operation (no module operation) or faulty fiber optic connection (after

CF reset in multi-module system)

MMG in operation, but module logon not yet possible

MMG in operation

Clock unit synchronization

Module clock system is synchronized

Master network nodes

External synchronous clock switched on for synchronization by the system software

IDR fault from IMLA (e.g. fiber optic path not OK)

Error clock unit

Clock system error

After failure of synchronous clock pulse via fiber optic path

184

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

L13 DSP-LED2

On:

Flashing:

Off:

Status - LED

Boot phase after board reset or DSP system permanently faulty

Temporary synchronization fault on a DSP highway

DSP system in operation

L14 RFAIL

On or flashing: One or more C-bus receive faults

Off: C-bus in operation. Sub-board CFIML or CFIML1 not plugged at CF22.

Doubling

It is possible to double the CF22 module in the R1 rack.

See

Doubling

[

→ 153 ]

.

Removing and Inserting the board

ESD-measures must be accomplished when working with boards susceptible to electrostatic shock.

The CF22 board can be removed or inserted during system operation. However, the module will not operate if the CF22 is not doubled.

Removal of the board is followed by a restart without loading customer data.

When doubling, the CF22 board may only be removed when in passive status (LED 2 off). If

LED 2 is on, place switch S2 into the right position. LED 2 Off The board can now be removed.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

185

CFIML, CFIML1 Central Functions Inter Module Link

Short description

The subboard CFIML or CFIML1 is inserted in the CF22/CF2E board if this is connected via fiber optic cable in twin or multi-module operation.

It is connected with the CF22/CF2E via two SMD pin strips.

CFIML board, soldering side

CFIML1 board, soldering side

LED denotations

L1 on: flashing:

L2 flashing:

L3 flashing:

High data traffic

Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor

Packet loss in transmission buffer during regulatory transmit timeout or reset.

Packet loss in receiver buffer during regulatory receive timeout or reset.

186

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

L4 on: flashing weakly:

L5 on:

L6 on:

L7 on:

L8 on:

L9 on:

• CBI cannot be used to transmit and receive.

• Warm start or master reset.

• FIFO is full (100%) in transmission or receiver direction

Further data has been transmitted with 1 MByte/sec capacity.

IML path is frame synchronous.

IML path is ready to transmit C-bus data.

IML path is not ready to receive C-bus data in receiving direction.

IML path is not ready to receive C-bus data in transmitting direction.

ASICS loading procedure incomplete. CFIML or CFIML1 out of operation

CL2ME Clock 2 Module Extended

Short description

The CL2ME submodule supplies an external clock pulse using a normal clock (TAREF). This is required when DECT intermodule handover is used in twin and multi-module configuration.

Use on

UIP/ICF 2048 kHz receiver

Other features

Current requirement +5V 100 mA

If the CL2ME is positioned on slot 1 of the UIP, the connection of the line can be made via the CA3B/T module.

Location of CL2ME on the UIP module

1. Connecting device slot

2. UIP module

3. CL2ME module

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

187

DSPF Digital Signal Processing Function

Short description

The DSPF is the base board for the ASM3 announcement subboard. The announcement board lets you record and play voice announcements for ACD and hotel use. Depending on the application, the DSPF can be equipped with up to:

4 ASM3

2 ASM3 for access to 128 time slots for access to 64 time slots in MG1000 in MG100

Other features

Region of application National and international

Current requirement +5V 850 mA

Inserting the submodule

The used ASM3 modules are inserted in the submodule slots "submodule 1" - "submodule 4" of the DSPF.

DSPF board, component side

1. Submodule 1

2. Submodule 2

3. Submodule 3

4. Submodule 4

188

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

The position must correspond to the setting in the confidata. The following allocation must be observed:

"Submodule number" parameter in the ICU Editor

2

3

0

1

Labelling

Submodule 1

Submodule 2

Submodule 3

Submodule 4

Labelling on the

DSPF board

SUB1

SUB2

SUB3

SUB4

Time slot management

Each ASM3 submodule represents an ICU. This means that one DSPF module can implemented a maximum of 4 ICUs. The ICU of the physical slot of the module logs on with the ICU type DSFM (DSPF

Master). The other (up to 3) ICUs are implemented on the same hardware by means of logical address entries in the CBI, and log on with the ICU type DSFS (DSPF Slave).

This means that the DSPF must have access to a total of 128 time slots. Because the slots in the MG1000

Media Gateway generally only have 32 time slots, access must be enabled as follows.

The DSPF uses:

Time slots of the DSPF slot

Time slots of the Auxiliary Highway, Part 1 - AUX1

Time slots of the Auxiliary Highway, Part 2 - AUX2

Time slots of the slot to the right of the DSPF

ICU TYPE DSFM

ICU TYPE DSFS

1)

ICU TYPE DSFS

1)

ICU TYPE DSFS

2)

1)

Access to AUX1 and AUX2 is possible in each module to the left of the CF module. The time slots of the

Auxiliary Highway are available only once per module.

2)

In order to gain access to the time slots of the right slot, the DSPF must be configured on an odd slot.

These events provide the following framework conditions:

One DSPF with four submodules

• must use the AUX1 and AUX2

• can be configured only once in each module

• must be set up on an odd slot to the left of the CF circuit board

Every other DSPF (within the same module)

• has access to a maximum of 64 time slots (DSPF slot and slot to the right of the DSPF)

• can consequently supports two modules only

• must be set up on an odd slot (to the right of the CF also possible)

In accordance with the above conditions, each submodule slot and thus an ICU can be assigned an application (ACD or HOTCOM). This means that it is also possible to operate different applications on a DSPF.

For example, four submodules could be set up for ACD, three for ACD and one for HOTCOM or two for

ACD and two for HOTCOM, as well as any other possible configuration.

Setting up of the DSFM and DSFS ICUs prior to operation of the TC system is implemented using the

KAD/CAT application and during operation using the ICU Editor service and management program.

A connection to the MDF is not implemented at present.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

189

LEDs and Switch Functions

DSPF module, front panel

Meaning of the switch on the front panel of the DSPF module

Up to 4 ICUs (1* DSFM and 3 * DSFS) can be implemented on the DSPF module. The common status of the ICUs can be controlled via the S1 front panel switch as follows:

S1 Reset and blocking switch

Middle position All ICUs in operation status

Left-hand position All ICUs in preparatory disabling

Right position All ICUs in reset

Left position after module reset

Master ICU DSMF (DSPF module) receives a forced ICU download. After commencing the loading process, the switch must be returned to the middle position.

Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the DSPF module

Up to 4 ICUs (1* DSFM and 3 * DSFS) can be implemented on the DSPF module. The common status of the ICUs is displayed via the two front panel LEDs L1 and L10 according to the following pattern:

The display appears according to priority, i.e., if several functions of the scheme are represented by one

LED, the one with the highest priority is implemented. Prio 1 is the highest priority, and prio 5 the lowest. In the cases with priority 1, the module is still in the reset or download phase, whereby the additional ICUs

(DSFS) are not yet active.

190

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

L1

Flashing 5Hz At least one ICU is still in startup, waiting for "Switching On" message

Flashing 1Hz All ICUs are preparatory disabled, the module is removable on At least one ICU is switchboard-occupied in at least one channel.

All ICUs (entire module) are in reset processing (if L10 is also on)

Prio 2

Prio 3

Prio 4

Prio 1 off All ICUs are in a resting state with their ports, the module is not occupied Prio 5

L2

Flashing 5Hz At least 1 ICU is still waiting for startup Prio 2

Flashing 1Hz /

Master ICU DSFM (DSPF module) ICU download in progress on off

Master ICU DSFM (DSPF module) in reset processing (if L1 is also on)

Master ICU DSMF (DSPF module) Programming procedure in ICU download

All ICUs in operation

Prio 1

Prio 3

Prio 1

Prio 1

Prio 4

DSPF1 Digital Signal Processing Function

Short description:

The board DSPF1 is used to record and to play voice announcements, for example as alarm announcement in hotel applications or as voice messages for ACD (eg for queue announcements).

The board DSPF1 is the successor of DSPF, but doesn’t have any subboard.

Compared with the predecessor one board DSPF1 corresponds with a board DSPF with one subboard

ASM3. It offers access to 32 time layers. Several boards DSPF1 must be used, if a higher capacity is required.

Example:

Two boards DSPF1 correspond with one board DSPF equiped by two subboards ASM3, that are 64 time layers. The second board can use the neighbor slot, which has to be spared anyway in the original

DSPF-Configuration.

Other features

Region of application

Current requirement +5V

National and international

850 mA

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

191

Configuration

The DSPF1 is easier to configure in the ICU editor than the DSPF, because subboards are not to be considered. Do the following settings:

• for the port type,

• for the port number (mostly "0"),

• for the application and

• for the DSP function (similar as with the DSPF).

Important:

DSPF and DSPF1 do have the same ICU type from the telephone system’s point of view. When an existing DSPF is to be replaced by a DSPF1, the DSPF1 type must be set for this slot using the ICU-editor!

Otherwise, the telephone system will try to load the ICU-software of the existing DSPF into the DSPF1.

The DSPF1 will ignore that and won’t go into operation (the system console will display an error message).

Moreover, the expansion of the existing DSPF has to be considered, when replacing it by a DSPF1. If more than one ASM3 was plugged, several DSPF1 boards are necessary for the full replacement.

Time slot management

The DSPF1 does not have any restrictions due to the slot. It uses solely the 32 layers of its own time slot.

Set the ICU type DSFM when commissioning the DSPF1. Before the system is in operation, this is done with the application of CAT and during operation with the usual management and maintenance programs.

External connections

Connections to the main distribution frame are not implemented. A cable adapter is not required for the slot of the DSPF1.

192

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Jumpers at the DSPF1 board

A 2x3-pin connector with the name X35 is placed near the lower front panel latch. With the help of two jumpers a copy function of voice messages can be carried out there.

This functionality is only provided for the production!

These two jumpers may not be available for the use of the customer or must be plugged in the normal position, - otherwise, the operation of the DSPF1 not possible. Two red LEDs at the bottom of the front panel must be off as visual check in the normal operation.

Partial view of the DSPF1 board with the position of the pin connector X35.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

193

LEDs and Switch Functions

A switch (with three positions) and four LEDs are housed at the front panel of the DSPF1 board. front panel of the DSPF1 board

Meaning of the switch on the front panel of the DSPF1 board

An ICU is implemented at the DSPF1 board. Its status can be controlled via the S1 front panel switch as follows:

S1 Reset and blocking switch

Middle position The ICU is in operation status.

Left position

Right position

Left-hand position after board reset

The ICU is in preparatory disabling.

Reset of the DSPF1 board.

The DSPF1 board receives a forced ICU download.

After commencing the loading process, the switch must be returned to the middle position (otherwise endlessly forced download).

194

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

The status of the ICU - implemented on the DSPF1 - is signaled by means of the LEDs L1 and L2:

L1

L2

L3

L4

Signaling idle, busy, blocking status

Flashing 5Hz The ICU is in its commissioning phase and is waiting for the message "switching on".

Flashing 1Hz The ICU is in preparatory disabling, the board can be reset.

on The ICU is busy in terms of exchange functions (play announcement or voice recording).

off

The ICU reset is in progress (if L2 is on also).

All ports of the ICU are idle, the board is not busy at all (the board can be reset).

Signaling operation status (reset, download, in operation)

Flashing 5Hz The ICU is wating for commissioning.

The ICU download is in progress (download of new ICU software).

Flashing 1Hz --- on The ICU download is in progress, data are being programmed into the flash.

The ICU reset is in progress (if L1 is on also).

off The ICU is in operation.

Signaling the recording (for the production solely), following the normal position

- record at X35

Flashing 5Hz ---

Flashing 1Hz --- on off

Announcements for the hotel application are being copied from the playback

DSPF1 to the record DSPF1 (for the production solely). The jumper X35 is plugged in "record" position. The DSPF1 board expects protocol-oriented data on its PCM highway to store them.

The DSPF1 board is in normal operation status.

The LED must be off for the proper operation of the DSPF1, i.e. if a jumper X35 is there, its position must be "normal".

Signaling playback (for the production solely), following the normal position

- playback at X35

Flashing 5Hz ---

Flashing 1Hz --- on off

Announcements for the hotel application are being copied from the playback

DSPF1 to the record DSPF1 (for the production solely). The jumper X35 is plugged in "playback" position. The DSPF1 board supplies protocol-oriented data to its PCM highway for the record board to store them.

The DSPF1 board is in normal operation status.

The LED must be off for the proper operation of the DSPF1, i.e. if a jumper X35 is there, its position must be "normal".

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

195

EOCPF Electrical Optical Converter Plastic Fibre

Short description

EOCPF is an electrical optical interface for the connection of modules via PF conductors in both transmitting and receiving directions and can be installed onto the CF22, CF2E, MLB and ICF boards.

EOCPF submodule on the CF2E board

1. PF Connector

2. EOCPF Module

3. CF2E module

Fibre-optic cable length

EOCPF max. 40 m

Other features

Country of application

Power demand +5V

National and international

180 mA

EOCPF submodule, can be inserted on the front side of the boards mentioned above.

Max. transmission rate: aprox. 40 MBit/s

Observe the color coding when inserting the PF cable into the EOCPF submodule.

196

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

EOCPF, connectors for LWL

1. blue

2. grey

3. Transmitter

4. Receiver

EOCSM/MM Electrical Optical Converter

Short description

Both the EOCSM module (SM = single-mode) and the EOCMM module (MM = multi-mode) are interfaces intended for use in the twin module and in multi-module systems.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

197

EOCSM/MM module on the CF2E module

1. Fiber optic cable connector

2. EOCSM or EOCMM Module

3. CF2E module

Fiber optic cable lengths

EOCSM

EOCMM

15 km (single-mode graded-index fiber)

7 km (multi-mode graded-index fiber)

Other features

Region of application National and international

Current requirement +5V 180 mA

When inserting the fiber optic cable into the EOCSM/MM submodules, it must be remembered that the "transmit" connector of one EOCSM/MM connects to the "receive" connector of another

EOCSM/MM and vice versa.

EOCSM/MM, connectors for the fiber optic cable

1. Send

2. Receiving

3. Fiber optic cable

198

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

HSCB High Speed Computer Board

Short description

HSCB is the basic equipment in all modules. It is a computer board with dynamic RAM.

Features

Optionally with parity

128 kByte ERROR flash-PROM

512 kByte Boot flash-PROM

Buffered real time clock

Two-level hardware watchdog

Hardware status register

C-bus interface

4 B channel accesses

2 V.24 interfaces

Downloadable

2x PC card/ATA interfaces for 1.8" PC card driver with ATA mode. Hard disk drives with 260 MB or 1 GB

(for large systems) are available for these interfaces.

Other features

Application

Power demand

+5V

Basic equipment in all modules

1900 mA

2400 mA

2900 mA without HGS with 1 HGS (startup current) with 2 HGS (startup current)

The drives can be replaced during operation.

The V24NI submodule is used as standard when connecting circuits to the V.24 interfaces. If necessary, it is also possible to use the DC isolated V24I.

Additional Memory If additional memory submodules (PS2) are inserted into the HSCB, it should be taken into account that the first memory slot must always be occupied. The inserted PS2 memory modules must have an access time of 60 ns.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

199

HSCB board, component side

1. Memory 4

2. Memory 3

3. Memory 2

4. Memory 1

5. HGS

6. Battery

The HSCB is equipped with one of the following V.24 submodules:

• V.24I Insulated

• V.24NI Non-Insulated (basic configuration)

The following signals are available for the V.24:

• RXD

• TXD

• DTR

• GND

• DSR

• RTS

• CTS

200

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

LEDs and Switch Functions

Boards

HSCB board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

S2

S3

S4

Left position

Left position

Left position

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

201

Switch Function

S2

S3

S1 Reset switch and MI button

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Reset board, locking (see S2)

Memory test switch

Left: (Standard)

Right:

No memory test when resetting/restarting

Memory test when reseting/reloading the TC system

Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR)

S4

Left:

Right:

Operating status: PC-CARD-ATA-interfaces in operation

Service position: Removing and inserting the HGS(s)

System console connected (SCOCON)

Left:

Right:

No device connected (Default), or printer or video terminal connected

Meanings of LEDs

L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7-

L10

Fault indication from the control (group statement)

Indicates module data transfer via the C-bus (e.g. call at subcriber)

Indicates access to the inserted background memory

Indicates that the HGS(s) can be removed

Indicates that the S4 switch is in the "right" position, and that the system terminal can be connected to the first V.24 interface on the AV24B/W (service)

Unused

The LEDs flash to indicate the status from reset to operation. The display remains lit for about 5 seconds if a fault is found in the loading phases 15 to 7 (see following table). If a fatal fault occurs, the reset process is repeated from the beginning (loading phase 15).

6

5

8

7

4

No.

L7 L8 L9 L10 Phase name

15 1 1 1 1 Start reset phase

14 1 1 1 0

13 1 1 0 1

Test flash-PROM

Test QUICC

12 1 1 0 0

11 1 0 1 1

10 1 0 1 0

9 1 0 0 1

Test real time clock

Test C-bus interface

Test DUART (V.24 ports)

Test dynamic RAM

1 0 0 0

0 1 1 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 0 0

Output hardware image

End reset phase

Initial program loading (IPL)/IPL ready flag

STIN program loader is loaded and started

Operating system has been loaded and started (restart)

202

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

3

2

1

0

0 0 1 1

0 0 1 0

0 0 0 1

0 0 0

User programs (have been dispatched) have been loaded

Start of customer data loading in the user programs

All customer data loaded Start commissioning of module(s)

0 Module(s) in operation

1 = LED on

0 = LED off

Changing the HGSs

The HGS may be removed or inserted during system operation without the prior removal of the HSCB.

The following procedure must be adhered to:

• Remove static charge from the module frame

• Move S3 switch to the right

• Wait for L4 to light up

• Remove the appropriate HGS

Do not touch the components!

Take hold of the drive from above and below.

• Insert the new HDD

• Move S3 switch to the left

• L4 will go out in a short time

Removing and Inserting the board

The HSCB board may be removed or inserted during system operation, if the S1 switch handle has been moved to the left.

In single module systems, removing the HSCB board will result in a total breakdown.

In multi-module systems, removing the HSCB board will result in the failure of this module.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

203

ICF IMTU Central Functions

Short description

The central board of the B3 module or ICS is the ICF.

Features

Clock Supply and

Synchronization

Clock frequency precision for DECT.

Remotely synchronizable by system clock and master module

(with CL2M or CL2ME)

Master function for multi-module systems, adjustable using software.

External interfaces

128 send/receive highways

Outputs for ext. signaling

Remote control for power supply

Fiber optic cable connector

Ref. clock supply (CL2M)

Clocks

Micro processor bus

Interface to other modules

Through MLB, with possible MLBIML

Transfer of C-bus data.

256 PCM channels.

Inter module manager (IMMG)

Fault Management using Inter Module Manager

Other features

Use

Current requirement +5V

Basic equipment in B3/ICS

3210 mA

Battery status query

Memory doubling e.g. for downloading

Fire protection fuse

Difference between ICF .1321 and .1331

CBI and IMLA are on the board on the .1331.

The ICF with the part no. 49.9905.9146 can be used in both the B3 module and in the ICS.

204

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Jumper and DIL Switch Functions

ICF module, module side

1. DIL switch

2. Jumper

3. Fire Protection Fuse

Jumper Functions

Total breakdown (system not in operation) via ESB

1 - 2

2 - 3

Normally closed contact for message

Normally open contact for message

Battery status query

4 - 5

5 - 6

Testing of -48 V battery not possible (default)

Testing of -48 V battery active

When using PS350 with connected battery: Activation of the battery voltage monitoring option

Fire Protection Fuse

If the fire protection fuse is defective (burned out), the module must be replaced by a new one.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

205

Functions of the DIL Switches

S1

ON: with ESU

OFF: without ESU

S2 System configuration for IMMG

ON: IMMG passive

OFF: IMMG active

S3

ON

OFF

S4

ON

ON

Specification of highest scan address

16

32

ON OFF 64

S5

S6

Inter module manager watchdog

ON: Watchdog inactive

OFF: Watchdog active (default)

CBI master mode switching

ON: Test mode

OFF: CBI master (default) For testing and servicing purposes. Do not change

S7

ON: Enable NMI

OFF: NMI disable (default) For testing and servicing purposes. Do not change

S8

ON: 2 MHz

OFF: 4 MHz (default)

206

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

LEDs and Switch Functions

ICF module for B3 module, front ICF module for IC and B3 module, front

Switch functions

S1

Reset

Left:

Mean:

No function, locking

S2

Right: Reset module, keying

Service switch

Left:

Mean:

No function, locking

Right: With double star coupler: Initiate switchover, keying

LED denotations

L1

L2

No function

Clock unit active on: Active module clock unit

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

207

L3

L4

L5

L6

When doubling, IMTU status on: off:

IMTU active

IMTU hot stand-by flashing quickly: IMTU active and alternate path switched flashing slowly: IMTU hot-standby and alternate path switched

IMMG status on: flashing: off:

IMMG not in operation (no module operation)

IMMG in operation, but module logon not yet possible

With doubled multi module, also failure of the fiber optic cable path

ICF <--> ICF.

IMMG in operation

Clock unit synchronization on: Module’s clock system is synchronized

Master/Freewheel on: Module prepared by system software for master operation

or

Module in master freewheel

Removing and Inserting the board

The board may be removed and inserted during system operation.

All existing connections are disconnected if the board is removed. Exception when doubling.

If the active ICF board of a doubled pair is to be removed, the service switch must be used to change it over to the hot stand-by side. After the ICF has been reinserted, the service switch must be switched back again.

Doubling

Only one ICF board can be inserted for each B3 module.

A doubling of the system can only be implemented by using a second ICS or B3 module.

See

Complete doubling

[

→ 165 ]

External clock pulse input

First V.24 interface of the CA3B (Cable Adapter 3 for B modules)

PIN 1

PIN6

A1

B1

External clock pulse input 2.048 MHz (high precision reference clock / TAREF)

208

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

ISMx Switching Matrix x

Short description

The ISMx board is used in the basic configuration in the ICS and B3 module. Its task is to switch inter-module connections with a bit rate of 4 MBit/s.

In order to ensure the total availability of the IMTU switching matrix function, 4 ISMx modules of the same variant are required. Mixed operation of ISMx and ISM2x boards is not permissible.

Variants for the B3 module

ISMA

ISMB

ISMC

IMTU Switching Matrix variant A, item number: 28.5630.1512

4x per B3 module, up to 8 modules in conjunction with one MLB in slot 1

IMTU Switching Matrix variant B, item number: 28.5630.1522

4x per B3 module, up to 16 modules in conjunction with two MLBs in slots 1 and 2

IMTU Switching Matrix variant C, item number: 28.5630.1532

4x per B3 module, up to 32 modules in conjunction with three or four MLBs in slots 1, 2 and 8 or 1, 2, 8 and 9

ISM2A

IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 A, item number: 49.9805.5675

4x per B3 module, up to 8 modules in conjunction with one MLB in slot 1, supersedes ISMA 28.5630.1512

ISM2B

IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 B, item number: 49.9805.5676

4x per B3 module, up to 16 modules in conjunction with two MLBs in slots 1 and 2, supersedes ISMB 28.5630.1522

ISM2C

IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 C, item number: 49.9805.5677

4x per B3 module, up to 32 modules in conjunction with three or four MLBs in slots 1, 2 and 8 or 1, 2, 8 and 9, supersedes ISMC 28.5630.1532

Variants for the ICS

ISM2A

IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 A, item number: 49.9905.9147

4x per rack ICS, up to 8 system modules in conjunction with one MLB in slot 1, supersedes ISM2A 49.9805.5675

ISM2B

IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 B, item number: 49.9905.9148

4x per rack ICS, up to 16 modules in conjunction with two MLBs in slots 1 and 2, supersedes ISM2B 49.9805.5676

B3 module slot

Module

ISMA It No: 28.5630.1512 or

ISM2A Part no.: 49.9805.5675

ISMB It No: 28.5630.1522 or

ISM2B Part no.: 49.9805.5676

ISMC It No: 28.5630.1532 or

ISM2C Part no.: 49.9805.5677

1

MLB MLB ICF MLB MLB x x x

2 x x

3 o o o

4 o o o

5

+

+

+

6 o o o

7 o o o

8 x

9 x

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

209

ICS slot

Module

ISM2A It No: 49.9905.9147

ISM2B It No: 49.9905.9148

1 2 3

MLB MLB ISM2 x x x o o

4

ISM2 o o

5 6

ICF ISM2

+

+ o o

7

ISM2 o o

For each switching matrix, four switching matrix modules of the same type must be inserted (e.g. four

ISMAs).

With doubled IMTU, all eight switching boards (2x4) must be of the same type.

o = plugged switching matrix module x = supported by switching matrix modules

+ = fixed allocation

Other features

Current requirement +5V ISMA

ISMB

ISMC

Download board software

Board identification using board ID data

Maintenance function

840 mA

980 mA

1460 mA

210

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

LEDs and Switch Functions

ISMx board, front side

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Meanings of LEDs

L1

on:

ISM2x board, front

No function, locking

Reset board, keying

Switching matrix processor unit flashing slowly: Waiting for startup

off: active

L2

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

211

Doubling

Redundancy of the modules for the system’s switching matrix function is enabled by doubling the multi-module.

The ISMx module variants must be the same for both IMTUs. Mixed operation of ISMx and

ISM2x boards is not permissible.

Removing and inserting the module

The board may be removed and inserted during system operation.

All existing connections are disconnected if the module is removed.

In doubled systems, a service switchover (service switch S2 on ICF) should be carried out before removing an ISMx from the active multi-module. On completion of repairs, the service switch must be switched back in order to resume operation of the default active side.

MLB Module Link Board

Short description

Module The MLB board is used to connect modules to the multi-module. It can be fitted with the MLBIML submodule and is designed for a maximum of 8 modules.

In standard configuration, the module is equipped with components for a max. of 3 modules. The MLBIML is used from the fourth module onward.

The module connection is managed using the EOCMM, EOCSM or EOCPF modules.

Features

Adaptation to C-bus and coupler interface.

Multiplexes and demultiplexes of the various types of data to be transmitted (C-bus data and Highway).

Line coding/decoding.

Clock generation.

Optical transmitting and receiving.

Test and maintenance function.

The following notes must be observed when using the MLB module:

• IMLE3 submodules with IML software 28.7637.8533 or IMLASB must be inserted in the connected

CFx modules.

• A maximum of 13 modules can be connected (on two MLB) to the B3 module without the ISPS module. No CBT must be inserted under these circumstances. These may only be inserted if only

one MLB module is installed.

The ISPS module is generally required from the 14th module on. In this case, the CBT may be inserted without restriction.

212

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Other features

Current requirement +5V 1830 mA 3 MLBIMLs on the module and 330 mA for MLB logic and 0 EOC

LEDs and Switch Functions

Switch Function

MLB module, front side

S1* Middle: Operating state

Left:

Right:

No function

Module RESET

* Depending on the configuration, adjusting the switch can result in a restart of the entire system.

S2

S3

S4

S5

Middle:

Left:

Operating status, Link 7/8

RESET Link 7

Right: RESET Link 8

Middle: Operating status, Link 5/6

Left:

Right:

RESET Link 5

RESET Link 6

Middle: Operating status, Link 3/4

Left: RESET Link 3

Right: RESET Link 4

Middle: Operating status, Link 1/2

Left:

Right:

RESET Link 1

RESET Link 2

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

213

LED Denotations

MLB module, component side

L1

L2

L3

L4

On:

Flashing:

Flashing:

Flashing:

On:

High data traffic

Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor

Packet loss in transmission buffer during regulatory receive time-out or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro processor.

Packet loss in receiver buffer during regulatory transmit time-out or reset.

• CBI cannot be used to transmit and receive.

• Warm start or master reset.

• FIFO is full (100%) in transmission or receiver direction

Further data has been transmitted with 1 MByte/sec capacity.

L6

L7

L8

flashing weakly:

L5 On:

On:

On:

On:

IML path is frame synchronous.

IML path is ready to transmit C-bus data.

IML path is not ready to receive C-bus data in receiving direction.

IML path is not ready to receive C-bus data in transmitting direction.

214

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

MLBIML Module Link Board, Inter Module Link

Short description

The board MLBIML a sub-board which is plugged into the MLB board from the fourth module onwards. It can optionally take an EOC.

Variants

EOCMM

EOCSM

EOCPF

Other features

Power demand +5V 500 mA

Meanings of LEDs

MLBIML board, component side

L1 on: flashing:

L2 flashing:

L3 flashing:

High data traffic

Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor

Packet loss in transmission buffer during regulatory receive time-out or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro processor.

Packet loss in receiver buffer during regulatory transmit time-out or reset.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

215

L4 on:

• CBI cannot be used to transmit and receive.

• Warm start or master reset.

• FIFO is full (100%) in transmission or receiver direction flashing weakly: Further data has been transmitted with 1 MByte/sec capacity.

L5 on: IML path is frame synchronous.

L6 on:

L7 on:

L8 on:

IML path is ready to transmit C-bus data.

IML path is not ready to receive C-bus data in receiving direction.

IML path is not ready to receive C-bus data in transmitting direction.

R1RC connecting the MG1000

Short description

Up to 3 other MG1000 can be connected to one MG1000 in a star-shaped pattern. You will require the adapters R1RG2 and R1RE2 for the connection between the back planes.

R1RG2

R1RE2

Variants for use in the first MG1000 for any further MG1000 (three maximum)

The adapters are connected to each other using cables and must always be replaced in pairs. An

MG1000-MG1000 connection kit, which contains an R1RG2 and R1RE2, is also available. This connection transmits CBus information, highway information, status signals and I2C bus data, so that the connected

MG1000 act as a single module.

The adapters R1RG2 and R1RE2 are attached to the module frame from the rear.

Other features

Use

Current requirement +5V for connecting MG1000 Media Gateways

400 mA

216

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

S0

The connection between the MG1000 is made using a double-screened Ethernet cable "category 6"

(8-pin). The maximum length is 30 meters. Connection is implemented via a Western socket RJ45 (8-pin).

A cable is required between the first and any further MG1000 in order to transmit the system data. The connection is made to the Western socket 1 (see under Function of the switches and LEDs).

The following view of the rear shows the connections:

1. first MG1000

2. MG1000 expansion rack 1

3. MG1000 expansion rack 2

4. MG1000 expansion rack 3

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

217

LEDs and Switch Functions

R1RC (R1RG/R1RG2, R1RE/R1RE2) front side with LEDs and switches

1. Fan slot 1

2. Fan slot 2

3. Western socket RJ45 1

S1

Switch 1

Left:

Middle:

Right:

No function

Operating state

Reset

LED Name

L1

Status on:

L2

L3

RTActive on:

RFail on:

L4

L5

TFail on:

TMFail on:

Description

Send and receive active

Transmission is not synchronous

218

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

L6

L7

L8

IDR

TXTC

RXTC on: on: on:

Data transfer possible

Greater traffic from the rack

Greater traffic into the rack

Fault signaling

The following fault monitoring is implemented:

1. There are two equipment variations for the modules, one for the basic rack (R1RG/R1RG2) and one for the expansion rack (R1RE/R1RE2). A check is carried out whether the module is inserted in the correct rack. If this is not the case, the LEDs TMFail, IDR, RXTC and TXTC will blink.

2. The transmitted FP8K is checked on the receiver side. Further, the FP160ms is also checked. The

LED TMFail then switches to inactive. If a FP8K or a FP160ms then fails, the LED TMFail switches to active and the checking procedure starts once more.

3. The IDR LED displays that data transfer is possible. In the event of a fault, it remains inactive for at least 127 ms.

4. As soon as the CBI is unable to receive and data from the transmission link (PWR inactive), this is displayed by the RXTC LED.

5. As soon as the CBI is unable to receive and data from the transmission link (PWR inactive), this is displayed by the RXTC LED.

6. The TMFail LED is activated as soon as the reception frequency of 49.152 MHz is no longer correct.

Western plug

The Western plug RJ45 is used to transmit system data (frame pulse, highway data, CBus data, status lines and I2C bus data) and the transmission pulses.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

219

C-bus address distribution

C-bus address distribution and slot numbers

1. Slot number

AO = connecting circuit

220

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Fuses on the board

Component side of the R1Rc board

1. Fan plug

2. Fan plug

3. Switch

4. Light Emitting Diodes

5. Western plug 1

6. Fuses 48V (T SIC, 500 mA)

• R1RG/R1RE: on the rear of the board

• R1RG2/R1RE2: on the component side of the board

7. 5V fuse soldered in

If the fire 5V fuse is defective (burned out), the board must be replaced by a new one.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

221

S5500/ACB1/ACB Advanced Computer Board

Short description

When using the software IEEx (with Linux operating system) all modules need one of the three boards

S5500, ACB1 or ACB as basic equipment. The boards S5500 and ACB1 are successors of the board ACB

(= Advanced Computer Board).

The ACB1 board is used in Media Gateway MG1000 from software version IEE2 onward

(L021V00_1_1.0). The server S5500 requires one of the following software version:

• IEE 3 (from version L030V00_1_9 onward)

• IEE 4 (from version L040V00_1_0_2.1 onward)

• IEE 5 untill IEE x all versions

For new business S5500 is used exclusively, where as the boards ACB and ACB1 are available only for mending or expansion of existing systems.

The ACB board uses a 2.5" hard disk drive for background memory. The boards S5500 and ACB1 use instead compact flash cards with varying storage capacity depending on the size of the system. The following sizes are recommended: for single module systems: for twin module and multi-module systems: with 1 GB with 4 GB

The handling, switching functions and display functions are identical for both boards:

Features

ETX PC

The ETX board is a complete PC system. All functions offered by a modern PC are implemented on this board.

Performance matches a Pentium III/400MHz or higher,

800MHz on S5500.

512 MB RAM (one SO-DIMM module only)

Boot Flash PROM with Phoenix Bios

Voltage generation

Real-time clock (RTC)

Hardware watchdog

Battery RTC (8-year buffer operation)

Ethernet interface with 10/100 Base-T

Two V.24 interfaces (see AEV24B adapter for Ethernet V24 B-module)

Interface to PCM highway (4 independent B-channel access points)

PCI bus (5V tolerant) 32-bit/33MHz

Two CBus interfaces (IS bus) one for system control purposes one as an SPY remote interface (SPY = System Protocoller and Analyzer)

IDE interface for background memory

The hardware preparations for remote logging with SPY are included on the board.

222

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Boards S5500 or ACB1, board side

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

223

ACB board, board side

1. Battery

2. ETX PC

3. V24I/NI

4. Transformer 10/100 Base-T

5. Boot Flash (Compact Flash Card)

6. PCM Highway Controller

7. PCM Highway Controller

8. CBI1A3 for SPY

9. EPLD

10. CBI1A3

11. HGS

224

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

The S5500 is equipped with one of the following V.24 sub-boards:

• V.24I Insulated

• V.24NI Non-Insulated (basic configuration)

The following signals are available for the V.24:

• RXD

• TXD

• DTR

• GND

• DSR

• RTS

• CTS

Other features

Current requirement +5V 3.5A

The V24NI submodule is used as standard when connecting devices to the V.24 interfaces. If necessary, it is also possible to use the DC isolated V24I.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

225

LEDs and Switch Functions

ACB board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

S2

S3

Left-hand position

Left-hand position

Boards S5500 or ACB1, front side

226

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch

Mean:

Left:

Right:

Right:

Operating state

Hardware reset for board, locking

ACB is shut down (by the operating system), keying

S2 Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR)

Left: Operating state: IDE Hard Disk in operation

Right:

S3

Service entry

Service position: Inserting and removing the IDE Hard Disk

Left: Commissioning (loading OS, applications and customer data) is performed without interruption.

The switch must be in the right-hand position prior to booting (rebooting, restoration of the voltage supply).

The booting phase is interrupted at a defined point. Service access via

ISM (WebMin) is possible at this point. Parameters like IP addresses or

GCU slot addresses can be changed.

Afterwards the switch should be moved to the left-hand position. The service access is closed and a reboot is performed.

L5

L6

L7-

L10

Interpretation of the LEDs

LL

LD

L1

L2

L3

L4

On:

Off:

On:

Off:

On:

Off:

On:

On or flashing:

On or flashing:

Ethernet connection status "OK"

Ethernet connection status "interrupted"

Data transfer to Ethernet

No data transfer to Ethernet

The Ethernet interface of this module is connected to the network.

The Ethernet interface of this module is not connected to the network.

All board-internal voltages are present.

Data transfer via the C bus

Access to the plugged background memory

On:

Off:

On:

Off:

Indicates that the background memory can be unplugged.

Operating state does not permit the background memory to be unplugged.

Fault in the GCU (group indication)

Operating state

The LEDs indicate the states from reset to operation. After the supply voltage is switched on a functional check is performed (LED lights up briefly).

If a fault is detected by the SEM (System Error Management) which results in a recovery (restart of the process or system shutdown), then the LED L6 is activated (i.e. it lights up). LEDs L7-L10 are ignored. Once the recovery process is finished, the LED L6 (red) is switched on for 5 seconds and then switched back off again. The status LEDs L7-L10 then indicate the current system status.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

227

The commissioning status is divided into four groups:

1. ACB loading from the flash software

2. ACB loading from the background memory to operating system level

3. ACB loading from the background memory to application level

4. ACB loading in special status (APS change) during operation.

No L7 L8 L9 L10 Gr. Status Description of the phases

15 1 1 1 1 0 Start of commissioning BIOS running; LED test.

on function takes Linux kernel is loaded.

GRUB is completed and the initialization of the

RAM disc has started.

10 1 0

9 1 0

1 0

0 1

0

1 system via CBI system via the Ethernet system via the local bus

Flash SW update

PAL starts

The ACB board without background memory is loaded as the slave via the C-bus.

States 11 and 12 are skipped.

The ACB board without background memory is loaded as the master via the Ethernet.

States 11 and xx are skipped.

The ACB board with background memory is loaded directly as the master.

States 11 to 13 are not worked through in sequence.

The ACB flash software is being processed.

The Pal server is ready.

All known Pascal tasks are started.

Download of the application files in progress.

8 1 0 0 0 1 Download of the application files applications

6 0 1 1 0 3

Start of the platform applications, e.g. PFSP, PAL,

L4AD.

5 0 1 0 1 3 progress ACB with IVL function prepares an APS change.

(display at the IVL only) data (display at the IVL only) customer Conversion of customer data (CKDT initiated by

MML is not displayed).

2 0 0 1 0 2 Load APS customer data The DMS of the module signals the phase "Load customer data".

1 0 0 0 1 2 ICU commissioning

0 0 0 0 0 2 Normal operation

All customer data loaded.

Start commissioning of module(s)

Module(s) in operation

1 = LED on

0 = LED off

228

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

2x USB 16 USB devices are preconfigured. Of these, 8 are designed purely for TTY operation. Of the remainder, 4 are designed for the ACOM protocol and 4 a RAW, which do not yet have an application. The host index for all of these devices is configured to Group 1 by default. This can however be changed at any time via WebMin.

By default the USB devices are not connected to logical devices of the Pascal application.

This also still needs to be done via the Webmin Interface.

Once it has been done the Pascal application (Prologtask) will attempt to log on its break character (^C) on this new device. This activation can take up to a minute after the changes to the configuration data are made by the WebMin.

The remaining interfaces can all be configured in the same way (commissioning and decommissioning).

Part numbers available in the Ebuyer Tool:

4.999.096.855

USB Hub

4.999.096.856

USB/V24 Adapter

4.999.100.643

USB/USB Laplink Gold Cable (no longer in new business)

4.999.127.021

USB/LAN-Adapter from IEE4 onward (L040V00_2_0.1)

Replacing the fans

Replacing defective fans in MG1000 with S5500

The S5500 for standard systems develops relatively low heat. As a result, the risk that the maximum permissible operating temperature of the processor is reached or exceeded exists only under unfavorable conditions, even if no fans are running. Unfavorable conditions are a high room temperature (over 35°C) and a permanently high load (over 70%).

If one of the two fans fails, we recommend replacing it within a week.

If both fans fail, check the CPU temperature and CPU load (total load) of the affected S5500 first (Webmin:

Performance Management). If the CPU temperature is far below the limit of 100°C, replace the defective fans within two days. To be on the safe side, check the CPU temperature regularly until the fans are replaced. If the CPU is close to or exceeds the limit, replace the fans as soon as possible.

Projects

Up to four boards S5500 are permitted per module, an additional fan in necessary for more than two boards.

Removing and Inserting the board

The S5500 board may be removed or inserted during system operation, if the S1 switch handle has been moved to the left.

In single module systems, removing the S5500 board during operation will result in a total breakdown.

In multi-module systems, removing the S5500 board will result in the failure of this module or of the central functions depending on the BS Confi data packet.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

229

Operation

In English refer to handling specification HSP to S5500, ACB1, ACB, APS IEE 5.0

In German refer to handling specification HSP zu ACB/S5500, APS IEE 6.0

V24I/NI Insulated/Non-Insulated

Short description

Both submodules are inserted on to the ACB/HSCB board and have the following features:

• V24I, is for the DC decoupling of all signals and of the logic ground.

• V24NI, is for the direct connection of all signals and of the logic ground.

V24I/V24NI modules on the HSCB board

230

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

V24M Module

Short description

V24M is a sub-board for the UIP board. It comprises the layer 1 functions for a V.24 interface.

A maximum of two V24 modules can be inserted on slots 1 and 2 of the UIP module. This requires the connection of the connecting device line to be implemented via the CA3 module.

Use

Current requirement +5V

Other features for further V.24 ports on the system

100 mA

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

231

Connector technology and signaling

Connection module

CA

[

→ 238 ]

of the connection module

General description

Connection module

AEV24B

[

→ 233 ]

AV24B

[

→ 236 ]

CA1B

[

→ 239 ]

CA2B

[

→ 240 ]

CA3B

[

→ 241 ]

CA3B/T

[

→ 242 ]

CA4B

[

→ 243 ]

CA5B

CA6B

[

→ 244 ]

CAIB

EES1B

[

→ 264 ]

EES8B

[

→ 264 ]

EES0B

[

→ 254 ]

EESS0

[

→ 258

]

EESS0

ESBx

[

→ 266 ]

ESBA

[

→ 266 ]

ESBB

[

→ 266 ]

OFA2B

[

→ 281 ]

OFAS

[

→ 281 ]

TER

[

→ 283 ]

Connection module

EDU

[

→ 252 ]

of the connection module

ACB

[

→ 222 ]

,

VOIP

[

→ 442 ]

HSCB

[

→ 199 ]

, CBT

ASCEU, ASCF, ASCGB,

ATA

[

→ 316 ]

,

ATA2

[

→ 319 ]

ATB

[

→ 322 ]

,

ATC and

[

→ 325 ]

,

CAS

[

→ 372 ]

,

DDID

[

→ 488 ]

,

DCON

[

→ 475 ]

,

DUP03

[

→ 395 ]

,

MULI

[

→ 428 ]

,

DECT21

[

→ 491 ]

,

DECT22

[

→ 378 ]

,

DT0

[

→ 497 ]

,

DT21

[

→ 500 ]

,

DT22

[

→ 391 ]

,

UIP without V.24M

[

→ 435 ]

ASC2

[

→ 452 ]

,

ASC21

[

→ 301 ]

,

ATLC

[

→ 329 ]

,

DS02

[

→ 494 ]

,

DS03

[

→ 388 ]

,

DUPN

[

→ 398 ]

, JPAT,

ADM

[

→ 292 ]

UIP with V24

[

→ 435 ]

,

ICF with CL2M/CL2ME

[

→ 204 ]

UIP with CL2ME

[

→ 435 ]

DT21

[

→ 500 ]

,

DT22

[

→ 391 ]

,

CAS

[

→ 372 ]

,

DCON

[

→ 475 ]

IMUX

[

→ 515 ]

MAC

[

→ 415 ]

,

HAMUX

[

→ 503 ]

IPGW

ATA

[

→ 316 ]

,

ATA2

[

→ 319 ]

,

ATB

[

→ 322 ]

,

ATC and

[

→ 325 ]

ATA

[

→ 316 ]

,

ATA2

[

→ 319 ]

,

ATB

[

→ 322 ]

,

ATC and

[

→ 325 ]

DT0

[

→ 497 ]

DT0

[

→ 497 ]

,

ADM

[

→ 292 ]

CF2E,

CF22

[

→ 178 ]

,

ICF

[

→ 204 ]

CF2E,

CF22

[

→ 178 ]

,

ICF

[

→ 204 ]

CF2E,

CF22

[

→ 178 ]

,

ICF

[

→ 204 ]

DT21

[

→ 500 ]

,

DT22

[

→ 391 ]

DT21

[

→ 500 ]

,

DT22

[

→ 391 ]

On back plane (only B3 module)

of the connection module

ESB

[

→ 266 ]

232

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

AEV24B adapter Ethernet / V24 B module

Short description

The adapter board Ethernet / V24 B module (AEV24B)is fitted in the R1 racks only behind the ACB or

VOIP boards.

The use of the AEV24B in conjunction with HSCB or CBT boards is not permitted!

AVE24B board

1. RJ45 socket (8 pins), 1st V24

2. RJ45 socket (8 pins), 1st V24 (not for VOIP)

3. 15-pin D socket for 6-pair cable to the HVT (not for VOIP)

4. 26-pin connection strip as output for SCA 28.7640.385x using pre-assembled cable (only for use in

I33 with the ACB Advanced Computer Board)

5. RJ45 socket for the Ethernet connection for the hub (data network connection, LAN switch)

6. RJ45 socket for the Ethernet connection for a PC (direct connection to PC)

7. Plug for backplane

8. Locking

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

233

It is not permitted for the Ethernet connections for the hub (5) and the PC (6) to be active concurrently.

Applications for V24 ports

First V24 port with ACB with VOIP second V24 port with ACB with VOIP

Linux system console

System console for the VOIP board

MML system console none

MDF Connections

The connections described hereafter are only relevant for connection in the I33.

On the HVT the 6-pair (16-pin D plug) cable should be connected as follows.

MDF

Colors

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

AEV24B

A1/B1 (T) S

0

connector for service PC (*)

C1/D1 (R) S

0

connector for service PC (*)

A1/B1 (T) S

0

test subscriber (*)

U

P0

test subscribers (*) a1/b1, analog test subscribers (*)

C1/D1 (R) S

0

test subscriber (*)

Available free/GND (plug screen)

* Switch the S

0

, U

P0

and a/b test connections from the MDF in the TC system.

V.24 Interfaces

see also interface configuration

PIN assignment of the V24 ports

234

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Assignment of the V.24 interfaces

PIN1=free;

PIN2=TXDx;

PIN3=RXDx;

PIN4=DSRx;

PIN5=GNDx;

PIN6=DTRx;

PIN7=CTSx

PIN8=RTSx

Plug screen=GND

Ethernet ports

PIN assignment of the Ethernet ports

PIN assignment of the RJ45 connection socket for the hub

2

3

Pin

1

4

7

8

5

6

Plug screen

Signal identification

TXD_P

TXD_M

RXD_P

Z1

Z1

RXD_M

Z2

Z2

GND

Z = matching resistor (symmetry)

PIN assignment of the RJ45 connection socket for the service PC

6

7

4

5

2

3

Pin

1

8

Plug screen

Signal identification

RXD_P

RXD_M

TXD_P

Z1

Z1

TXD_M

Z2

Z2

GND

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

235

Z = matching resistor (symmetry)

The cable connections for the hub are not crossed; those for the PC are crossed.

AV24B Adapter V24 B Module

Short description

The adapter board V24 / B module (AV24B) is fitted in the R1 racks only behind the HSCB board or with the CBT service board.

AV24 B module

1. BG AV24B, soldering side

2. 26-pin strip connector to the SCA 28.7640.385x board (only for use in I33)

3. 15-pin D plug for the six-pair cable to the HVT for a tester, service PC or DuWa test jack (only for use in I33)

4. 9-pin D plug, 2nd V24

5. 9-pin D plug, 1st V24

6. HSCB slot

7. BG HSCB module

First V24 port Used to connect the PC for CBT applications, such as protocolling etc.

second V24 port can be configured in the IVL (HSCB with HGS) as a connecting interface of the

DCF77 receiver.

236

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

MDF Connections

The connections described hereafter are only relevant for connection in the I33.

MDF

Colours

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WHBK

WH/BU

A1/B1 (T) S

0

AV24B

connection for service PC (*)

C1/D1 (R) S

0

connection for service PC (*)

A1/B1 (T) S

0

test subscriber (*)

U

P0

test subscriber (*) a1/b1, analog test participants (*)

C1/D1 (R) S

0

test subscriber (*) a11/b11 (DID test device) (*) a12/b12 (DID test device) (*)

* Connect the S

0

-, U

P0

and a/b test connections from the MDF to the PBX.

V.24 Interfaces

See

Interface Configuration

[

→ 648 ]

PIN assignment of the V24 ports

Assignment of the V.24 interfaces

PIN1=free;

PIN2=RXD;

PIN3=TXD;

PIN4=DTR (only supported for HSCB);

PIN5=GND;

PIN6=DSR (only supported for HSCB);

PIN7=RTS (only supported for HSCB);

PIN8=CTS (only supported for HSCB);

PIN9=free

Connections from the first V24 port of the CA3B in the B3 module

PIN1/PIN6 A1/B1 (R, external clock 2048/1544 kHz)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

237

CA Cable Adapter

Short description

The CA cable adapters are fitted in the rack (MG1000 only) and allow connecting device board connections to be switched through to the HVT.

CA Assignment

Cable adapters for digital connecting device modules

Module

CAS

DCON

DECT21

DECT22

DS02

DT0

DT21

DT22

DUP03

DUPN

IMUX

MAC

HAMUX

MULI

ADM

UIP without V.24M

UIP with V.24M

CA1B

CA2B

CA5B

CA6B

CA6B

CA1B

CA2B

CA1B

CA3B

Cable adapter

CA1B

CA4B

CA1B

CA4B

CA1B

CA1B

CA2B

CA1B

CA1B

CA4B

OFA2B

CA1B

CA4B

OFA2B

Cable adapters for analog connecting device modules

Module Cable adapter

ASC2. CA2B

ASC . .

CARUB

CA1B

ATA/B/C

CARUB

CA1B

238

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

ATLC

DDID

JPAT

CA2B

CARUB

CA1B

CA2B

CARUB

Cable adapters for IP telephony gateways

Module Cable adapter

VOIP AEV24B

Cable adapters for other connectors

Module

CF22/CF2E

ACB

HSCB

ICF + CL2M

Cable adapter

ESBx

AEV24B

AV24B

CA3B (B3 module and ICS)

CA1B cable adapter 1 for B modules

Short description

Cable adapter for 16, 4 or 2-pair analog or digital connecting device line for boards ASCEU, ASCF,

ASCGB, ATAx, ATB, ATC, DDID, DUP03, DT0, DT21, DT22, CAS, DCON, UIP without V24M, MULI,

DECT21 and DECT22 with

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• Overload current breakpoint (230 V contact)

1. 16, 4 or 2-pair to the MDF/NT

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

239

1. Release the lock by pressing the bracket

2. Do not turn the screw!

CA2B cable adapter 2 for B modules

Short description

Cable adapter for 2 to 8-wire analog or 4-wire digital connection device line for the ASC2, ASC21, ATLC,

DS02, DUPN, JPAT and ADM boards with

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• Overcurrent breakpoint (230 V contact)

1. Cable 1 (16x2) to the MDF

2. Cable 2 (16x2) to the MDF

240

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

CA3B cable adapter 3 for B modules

Short description

Cable adapter for the UIP module, provided that the V24M submodules are also inserted here. The board is also required for external synchronization when using the CL2M/CL2ME on ICF (B3 module or ICS).

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• 2x 9-pin D plugs for V24 interfaces

• Overload current breakpoint (230 V contact)

If on the UIP board the first slot is equipped with a CL2ME for connection of a clock pulse from

TAREF, then the cable adapter CA3B/T must be used.

1. Cable (six-paired) to MDF

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

241

2. Cable for connection of an external clock pulse transmitter plugged into first V.24

CA3B/T cable adapter 3 for B-modules TAREF

Short description

Cable adapter for UIP board, if the clock pulse feed from TAREF goes via the CL2ME plugged into the first slot of the UIP.

The V24M sub-boards can also be plugged in here.

2. Cable for connection of the TAREF (part number: 27.5630.0531) plugged into the first V24

242

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

CA4B cable adapter 4 for B modules

Short description

Cable adapter for the connection of coax lines when using modules DT21, DT22, CAS and DCON, provided that these modules are set on asymmetrical interfaces.

• 2 BNC Coax sockets as output to NT or MUX.

Coax cable to NT or MUX

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

243

CA6B cable adapter 6 for B modules

Short description

Cable adapter for connecting U

P0

and S2M connections to MAC and HAMUX boards.

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• 8-pin WE plugs

1. Cable 16X2 to MDF

2. 8-pin WE plugs

CF22 Central Functions 22

Short description

The central board CF22 is the basic equipment in all modules. It replaces the CF2E board.

It supports:

• the dealer functions

• intermodule handover functions for DECT

and

• call number display for incoming calls to analogue terminals ("CLIP" Calling Line Identification Protocol).

As opposed to CF2E it only features one DSP system.

Ports

B channels (time slots)

ILMx

Features

544

1088

+

244

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

DECT

Internal traffic flow

External traffic flow

+

1088 Erl.

225 Erl.

Features

Clock Supply and Module Synchronization

External synchronization via network nodes (S0, S2M).

Master function in multi-module systems can be set up using software.

Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking)

Module Switching Matrix

Bit rate 4,096 MBit/s

Module internal non-blocking

11 DTMF receiver sets, 4 DTMF transmitters (only for dialling)

Call Progress Tones

A maximum of 16 call progress tones can be generated as customer-specific or country-specific and can be cyclically repeated. At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

In addition, a maximum of 3 tones with burst character can be supplied.

Short Voice Messages

Up to 8 voice messages or "music on holds" can be used. The total duration of all brief voice messages must be no longer than 64 sec.

Long Voice Messages

4 voice messages with unspecified time limits and confidata can be set up (connecting message devices via analogue subscriber line circuits). At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

Tone Injection in Two-Party Conversations

Up to 3 various cyclic tones can be generated which may be fed into a maximum of 15 two-party conversations (e.g. call waiting tone, rolling tone etc.).

Conferences

The system software only allows three-party conferences.

Only dealer terminals support conferences with more participants.

Call number ID

8 DTMF transmitters for CLIP (call nummer indication on analogue terminals for incoming calls)

Power demand +5V

Other features

1400 mA

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

245

A high precision reference clock is required for the intermodule handover functions. This can be carried out through the use of the CL2M submodule on the UIP or ICF. See also Intermodule Handover section.

If fibre-optic links are used, the CF22 board is to be fitted with the submodule CFIML or CFIML1 Central

Function Inter Module Link.

Jumper and DIL Switch Functions

Configuration switches are located on the component side of the module. The functions and positions of these switches are described below:

CF22 module, module side

1. DIL switch, 8-part

2. DIL switch, 4-part

3. Fuse F2 for the power supply EOC, 500 mA replaceable

246

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

4. LED red:

Loadable module hardware not functioning

Module function not possible

5. FPGA boot/load PROM

6. Fire protection fuse 7A

If the fire protection fuse is defective (burned out), the module must be replaced by a new one.

7. LED green: R/T active on: high data traffic flashes: Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor.

8. LED yellow: TFAIL flashes: Packet loss in transmission buffer because of transmit timeout or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro processor

9. LED red: RFAIL flashes: Packet loss in receiver buffer because of receive timeout or reset

10. CFIML or CFIML1 submodule Central Function Inter Module Link

Functions of the DIL switches 8-part

System configuration for MMG

Single module system

Two module system, first module

Two module system, second module

Two module system, systems with more than two modules

Specification of highest scan address switch

1

ON

ON

2

OFF

OFF

switch

3

ON

OFF

4

ON

OFF

35

55

87

126 (Default)

Battery status query (AIC)

Testing of -48 V battery is not possible

(Default)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

5

ON

Testing of -48 V battery active OFF

When using PS350 with a connected battery (only Integral 33): Switching on the battery voltage monitoring

Error signaling unit

with ESU without ESU

6

ON

OFF

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

247

In order to get the correct signaling direction ATA with EE8B in an MG1000 Media Gateway with ESBA instead of ESB, switch 6 must be placed to ON (with ESU).

Download

Download inactive

Download possible (default)

Module Manager Watchdog

Watchdog inactive

Watchdog active (default)

Switch

7

ON

OFF

8

ON

OFF

Functions of the DIL switches 4-part

Intermodule handover

in twin and multi module configuration: intermodule handover active across modules in twin and B3 configuration: intermodule handover inactive across modules

Fiber optic cable length compensation (only with doubled CF2E)

Activation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot

Deactivation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot

Switch still without function

Switch still without function

Switch

1

ON

OFF

2

ON

OFF

3

4

248

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

LEDs and Switch Functions

Boards

CF22 module, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

S2 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Operating state

Reset module, locking

Reset module, keying

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

249

S2 Service Switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Operating state

No function, locking

With doubled CF2x: Initiate switchover, keying

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1

L2

L3

ACTIVE

On:

Flashing:

Off:

CLKUA

On:

IMHOSYNC

On:

Flashing:

Off:

MSMC active/inactive

MSMC (switching matrix processor unit) resetting/inactive

MSMC download in progress or MSMC waiting for commissioning

MSMC active

Clock unit active

Normal operation: Active module clock unit

Module is synchronized for DECT operation

Resynchronization (flashes for 30 seconds)

Module is not synchronized for DECT operation

This operating mode can also occur if switch 1 of the DIL switch 2 is in the position ON (IMHO active) and the LED L4 is on.

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

MAFREI

On:

Flashing:

AMEX1S

On:

DSP-LED1

On:

Flashing:

Off:

TFAIL

On or flashing:

Off:

MMG

On:

Flashing:

Off:

CLKUSYN

On:

Free running of master (internal clock pulse) or external synchronization (if

L10 is also on)

Internal free running (internal clock pulse) after failure of synchronous clock via fiber optic path

Alarm message ext. synchr. clock 1 sec.

Synchronizing clock pulse has failed for more than 1 second (for master module: clock cycle from OVST, network node; for slave module: clock cycle via fiber optic cable)

Status - LED

Boot phase after board reset or DSP system permanently faulty

Temporary synchronization fault on a DSP highway

DSP system in operation

One or more C-bus transmission faults

C-bus in operation. Sub-board CFIML or CFIML1 not plugged at CF22.

MMG status

MMG not in operation (no module operation) or faulty fiber optic connection

(after CF reset in multi-module system)

MMG in operation, but module logon not yet possible

MMG in operation

Clock unit synchronization

Module clock system is synchronized

250

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

L10 MANK

On:

L11 IDR

L12 ECLKU

On:

Flashing:

L13 DSP-LED2

On:

Flashing:

Off:

L14 RFAIL

On or flashing:

Off:

Boards

Master network nodes

External synchronous clock switched on for synchronization by the system software

IDR fault from IMLA (e.g. fiber optic path not OK)

Error clock unit

Clock system error

After failure of synchronous clock pulse via fiber optic path

Status - LED

Boot phase after board reset or DSP system permanently faulty

Temporary synchronization fault on a DSP highway

DSP system in operation

One or more C-bus receive faults

C-bus in operation. Sub-board CFIML or CFIML1 not plugged at CF22.

Doubling

It is possible to double the CF22 module in the R1 rack.

See

Doubling

[

→ 153 ]

.

Removing and Inserting the board

ESD-measures must be accomplished when working with boards susceptible to electrostatic shock.

The CF22 board can be removed or inserted during system operation. However, the module will not operate if the CF22 is not doubled.

Removal of the board is followed by a restart without loading customer data.

When doubling, the CF22 board may only be removed when in passive status (LED 2 off). If

LED 2 is on, place switch S2 into the right position. LED 2 Off The board can now be removed.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

251

EDU Error Display Unit

Short description

The EDU module is used in the service panel or multi-module (

1

/

2

K rack) as a fault indicator.

Features

18 red LEDs for indicating fault statuses.

1 green LED for display of "ready" status

26-pin pin strip for control cable connection

EDU module on the ESB module

1. BG ICF (only in the B3 module)

2. Ribbon cable

3. Module ESB

4. 26-pin plug

5. 10x2 LEDs

6. EDU module (located on the service panel or on the front side of the

1

/

2

K rack)

252

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Meanings of LEDs

EDU board

LED Short description Description

L0

L1

L2

L3

L4 (ivgstoe)

L5 (rivzaus)

L6

L7

L8

L9

(zgdeaus)

(ltgdef)

(amtalrm)

L10 (stvstoe)

L11

(lockstoe)

(hgsausf)

(schnstoe)

(lueausf)

(einzstoe)

L12 (redver)

L13 (synausf)

L14 (ausfext)

L15 (imtustoe)

System in operation

SMDT/automatic information call malfunction

HGS failure*

S01 switch on text code

233

599, 604

-

S01 switch off text code

600

ZGDE failure

Module malfunction

Reserve CPU failure

Interface malfunction

Fan failure

Analog/digital line fault

Individual Fault

Loss of redundancy

Synchronization failure

External facility failure

IMTU malfunction

-

-

126, 127, 297

98

262, 264, 265, 266,

267, 535

611, 613

System ready for operation 664

Power supply fault

77, 555

605, 607, 609

14, 81, 225, 575

227, 228, 361, 362,

363, 364, 401

649

530, 615, 617, 619,

621, 694, 696

643, 644

Switch off using MML after fault elimination.

128, 558, 564

139

Switch off using MML after fault elimination.

Switch off using MML after fault elimination.

Switch off using MML after fault elimination.

565

665

Switch off using MML after fault elimination.

Switch off using MML after fault elimination.

Switch off using MML after fault elimination.

650

Switch off using MML after fault elimination.

645

* LED2 is activated via the HGS driver.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

253

A LED stays activated until the required switch off text code is output or until it is switched off by means of the SSUP MML program (submenu MANI; command FSSM).

It is not possible to freely configure the LEDs that are not occupied. The assignment of LED and S01 text code is a fixed part of the S01 program.

The S01 does not distinguish between the different system types; this has to be done by the user of the

S01 task.

For a description of the S01 texts for the E070V06 version, see E070V06_S01

EES0B Emergency Extension Switch S0 B Module

Short description

The Emergency Extension Switch S

0

is available for answering equipment that must always be reachable

(e.g. police, fire department or Red Cross). In the event of a power failure or other malfunctions, this modules enables a switchover from the connecting line coming from the ISDN network to sets that are powered by the ISDN network.

EES0B module

1. Cable 1 + 2, each 24-pair to external MDF

2. Champ plug

3. EES0B

4. Pl.1

5. Pl.2

Settings

Connection to a DT0, i.e. 2 DAs are to be switched per section.

Switchover is implemented to a set that is only used when the switchover is active.

For this purpose, a switchover with 1 WP each for the analog voice documentation.

Two 50-pin plugs are available as external connectors.

254

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Switch-over criteria

General power failure

PC Board DT0 removed

Manual actuation of an external potential-free switch

The number of sections is determined by the limited number of plug positions.

The section 1..6 contains the switchover option. Sections 7 and 8 are directly switched through.

The switchover is implemented with 4 wires.

For each section, an additional 2 switchover contacts are brought out, via which, for example, lines to voice recording devices are switched.

The power supply to the module is implemented with GND from the DT0. -48 V is fed via the connecting cable.

One wire is fed for the forced switchover via the connecting cable.

Connection cables required: 2 cables 24x2 MG1000-HVT 29.9030.56xx (xx = cable length)

Block diagram

Emergency switchover facility for S0 lines

1. ISDN line

2. Answering with emergency set

3. Answering without emergency set

4. Answering

5. Emergency set

6. ZN

7. manual emergency switching

8. Documentation

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

255

Further Information

An NTBA with emergency supply is used as the NT, and the exchange dialling can be loaded with up to

380 mW in this case.

In normal operation, the emergency set has no function and therefore nothing appears in the display.

Facilities of this type are normally only to be handled by trained personnel. It can then be assumed that no unqualified actions shall be initiated by the users.

Each cable adapter is provided with 125 mA semi-lag fuse protection.

MDF Connections

MDF Cable 1

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

TA1/TB1

TC1/TD1

TA2/TB2

TC2/TD2

TA3/TB3

TC3/TD3

TA4/TB4

TC4/TD4

TA5/TB5

TC5/TD5

TA6/TB6

TC6/TD6

TA7/TB7

TC7/TD7

TA8/TB8

TC8/TD8

EA1/EB1

EC1/ED1

EA2/EB2

EC2/ED2

EA3/EB3

EC3/ED3

EA4/EB4

EC4/ED4

Emergency Extension Switch S

0

with DT0

ISDN lines with emergency switching

ISDN lines without emergency switching

Emergency sets

256

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MDF Cable 2

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

Boards

EA5/EB5

EC5/ED5

EA6/EB6

EC6/ED6

RA1/RB1

ERA1/ERB1

EOA1/EOB1

RA2/RB2

ERA2ERB2

EOA2/EOB2

RA3/RB3

ERA3ERB3

EOA3/EOB3

RA4/RB4

ERA4/ERB4

EOA4/EOB4

RA5/RB5

ERA5/ERB5

EOA5/EOB5

RA6/RB6

ERA6/ERB6

EOA6/EOB6

-48 V/-48 V

ZN/GND

Emergency Extension Switch S

0

with DT0

Emergency sets

To analog voice recording from handset of emergency set

From handset of answering facility

To analog voice recording from handset of emergency set

From handset of answering facility

To analog voice recording from handset of emergency set

From handset of answering facility

To analog voice recording from handset of emergency set

From handset of answering facility

To analog voice recording from handset of emergency set

From handset of answering facility

To analog voice recording from handset of emergency set

From handset of answering facility

From power supply

For the contingency of an emergency change-over

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

257

EESS0 Emergency Extension Switch S0

Short description

The Emergency Extension Switch S

0

is available for answering equipment that must always be reachable

(e.g. police, fire department or Red Cross). In the event of a power failure or other malfunctions, this module enables a switchover from the connecting line coming from the ISDN network to S

0

devices that are powered by the ISDN network.

EESS0 module

1. Cable 1 + 2, each 24-pair to external MDF

2. Champ plug

3. EESS0

4. Pl.1

5. Pl.2

Settings

Connection to a DT0 or ADM, i.e. 2 DAs are to be switched per section.

Switchover is implemented to a set that is only used when the switchover is active.

For this purpose, a switchover with 1 WP each for the analog voice documentation.

Two 50-pin plugs are available as external connectors.

Switch-over criteria

General power failure

DT0/ADM PCB removed

Manual actuation of an external potential-free switch

Other features

Current requirement -48 V = 108 mA

The number of sections is determined by the limited number of plug positions.

258

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Other features

The section 1..6 contains the switchover option. Sections 7 and 8 are directly switched through. Sections 9 to 16 cannot be used (applies to ADM only).

The switchover is implemented with 4 wires.

For each section, an additional 2 switchover contacts are brought out, via which, for example, lines to voice recording devices are switched.

"LP removed" is detected using GND from the DT0 or ADM.

-48 V is fed via the connecting cable.

One wire is fed for the forced switchover via the connecting cable.

Connection cables required: 2 cables 24x2 MG1000-HVT 29.9030.56xx (xx = cable length)

The ADM PCB requires the EEADM sub-PCB for plug 8X.

The EESS0 module differs from the EES0B module only in that the EESS0 has jumpers that can prevent emergency switchovers of individual sections.

Emergency switchover facility for S

0

lines

1. ISDN line

2. Answering station

3. Manual emergency switching

4. Documentation

5. Emergency query

System Manual Integral Enterprise

Block diagram

June 2009

259

Additional measures with ADM

If the ADM board is used with emergency switching (EESS0 cable adapter) submodule 3 is not required. On the X8 connector (normally for submodule 4) you must insert the EEADM submodule instead of submodule 4.

ADM board, location of EEADM on X8

If the EEADM board is inserted in the wrong place on the ADM board this will cause a defect in the ADM board.

260

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Jumper

On the EESS0 there are switchover contacts with jumpers for the prevention of emergency switchovers of individual parts.

Cable adapter EESS0, component side

On delivery the emergency switchover is active for the parts 0-5, i.e. the jumpers are connected to 2-3 and

5-6. For special applications it is also possible to exclude individual parts from the emergency switchover.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

261

View of the plugs X7, X8 and X9

Plug X7 plug Jumper 1-2

Jumper 2-3

Jumper 4-5

Jumper 5-6

Plug X8 Jumper 1-2

Jumper 2-3

Jumper 4-5

Jumper 5-6

Plug X9 Jumper 1-2

Jumper 2-3

Jumper 4-5

Jumper 5-6

Emergency switchover for part 0 inactive

Emergency switchover for part 0 active

Emergency switchover for part 1 inactive

Emergency switchover for part 1 active

Emergency switchover for part 2 inactive

Emergency switchover for part 2 active

Emergency switchover for part 3 inactive

Emergency switchover for part 3 active

Emergency switchover for part 4 inactive

Emergency switchover for part 4 active

Emergency switchover for part 5 inactive

Emergency switchover for part 5 active

Further Information

The feedlines of the -48V should not be connected to the same fuse as those of the PBX because of the current difference between them.

The failure criteria such as fuse failure, board removed or manual switchover trigger a message on the system console so that monitoring from there is guaranteed.

An NTBA with emergency supply is used as the NT, and the exchange dialling can be loaded with up to

380 mW in this case.

In normal operation, the emergency set has no function and therefore nothing appears in the display.

Facilities of this type are normally only to be handled by trained personnel. It can then be assumed that no unqualified actions shall be initiated by the users.

262

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

MDF Connections

MDF Cable 1

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

TA1/TB1

TC1/TD1

TA2/TB2

TC2/TD2

TA3/TB3

TC3/TD3

TA4/TB4

TC4/TD4

TA5/TB5

TC5/TD5

TA6/TB6

TC6/TD6

TA7/TB7

TC7/TD7

TA8/TB8

TC8/TD8

EA1/EB1

EC1/ED1

EA2/EB2

EC2/ED2

EA3/EB3

EC3/ED3

EA4/EB4

EC4/ED4

Emergency Extension Switch S

0

with DT0

ISDN line 0

ISDN line 0

ISDN line 1

ISDN line 1

ISDN line 2

ISDN line 2

ISDN line 3

ISDN line 3

ISDN line 4

ISDN line 4

ISDN line 5

ISDN line 5

ISDN line 6

ISDN line 6

ISDN line 7

ISDN line 7

Emergency set 0

Emergency set 0

Emergency set 1

Emergency set 1

Emergency set 2

Emergency set 2

Emergency set 3

Emergency set 3

Complementary wire: GND

MDF Cable 2

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

EA5/EB5

EC5/ED5

EA6/EB6

EC6/ED6

RA1/RB1

ERA1/ERB1

Emergency Extension Switch S

0

with DT0

Emergency set 4

Emergency set 4

Emergency set 5

Emergency set 5 to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

263

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

EOA1/EOB1

RA2/RB2

ERA2ERB2

EOA2/EOB2

RA3/RB3

ERA3ERB3

EOA3/EOB3

RA4/RB4

ERA4/ERB4

EOA4/EOB4

RA5/RB5

ERA5/ERB5

EOA5/EOB5

RA6/RB6

ERA6/ERB6

EOA6/EOB6

-48 V/-48 V

ZN/GND from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility

-48V from power supply

Contact of forced emergency switching / to contact of forced emergency switching

Complementary wire: GND

EESxB emergency extension switch B module

Short description

The board EESxB is used to connect the a/b interfaces of the ATA, ATB, ATC and ATA2 modules to the lines leading to the MDF.

The board EES1B serves the direct connection of an analog exchange line to a terminal in the event of a network failure. It provides connections for one analog exchange line, one line with analog terminal and one subscriber line circuit.

The EES8B enables an emergency switchover of eight analog subscriber sets to the network. The board also contains an overvoltage breakpoint (230 V contact).

264

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

EESxB Adapter module with connection

1. 50-pin Champ plug

2. Cable, 16 or 24-pair to external MDF

3. EESxB Adapter module

MDF Connections

MDF

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

RD/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

via EES1B or EES8B from ATx

a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8

NST a1/b1

NST a2/b2 (8x only)

NST a3/b3 (8x only)

NST a4/b4 (8x only)

TLN-S a1/b1

TLN-S a2/b2 (8x only)

TLN-S a3/b3 (8x only)

TLN-S a4/b4 (8x only)

NST a5/b5 (8x only)

NST a6/b6 (8x only)

NST a7/b7 (8x only)

NST a8/b8 (8x only)

TLN-S a5/b5 (8x only)

TLN-S a6/b6 (8x only)

TLN-S a7/b7 (8x only)

TLN-S a8/b8 (8x only)

Boards

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

265

ESBx External signaling B Module

Short description

The ESBx module is an adapter board which is inserted behind the CF2E, CF22 or ICF boards.

Features

50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF.

18 relays for fault indication, one changeover contact per relay.

26-pin pin strip for connection of the EDU module

Total breakdown indication for single or doubled controllers (adjustable using jumper).

4 inputs used for external status queries, DC decoupled via optocoupler.

These may be messages from a UPS for example, that are signaled via the TC system and activate a validation call.

4 fused -48 V electric circuits for the operator sets or NT

4 potential connections for fans with failure supervision.

Other features

Current draw +5V 20-400 mA (depending on the number of relays to be activated)

Apart from the fully filled form of the ESB there are two less filled variants:

Variant

ESBA

ESBB without external fault signaling, only power supplies for fan, VA and NT, with no EDU without external fault signaling, only power supplies for fan, VA and NT, with no EDU, all optocouplers mounted.

The characteristics of the boards can be found in the following table:

Characteristics of the ESBx board family

Feature

Champ plug

Relays for fault signaling

Champ plug

48V power supply circuit assured

Optocoupler inputs for interrogating external conditions

Connection facilities for a fan

26-pin connector

ESB ESBA ESBB

1

4

1

18

1

0

0

4

1

0

0

4

4

4

1

0

4

0

4

4

0

Notes to HVT one changeover contact per relay

Fault signaling by the relay contacts

Operator set or NT e.g messages from a UPS for example, that are signaled via the TC system and activate a validation call.

with drop-out monitoring for EDU connection via ribbon cable

266

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Schematic representation of the optocoupler interface

Boards

Possible opposite stations for the optocoupler

1. ESB

2. Possible Opposite Station

3. Optocoupler

4. Jumper to deactivate the interface

5. ESD

6. Optocoupler

7. or relay contact

8. or jumper

Pin connector on the ESBx

• If overload current points of division on the ESBx board are burnt out, the board must be replaced with a new one.

• Never attempt to repair the breakpoints!

• The system may carry out a reset when the module is inserted!

Assignment of pins to pin connectors on ESB and ESBB boards

Optoc.

Bridge Optoc.

S1/1

S1/2

1 inactive

2 inactive

1 - 2

4 - 5

1 active

2 active

Bridge

2 - 3

5 - 6

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

267

S2/1

S2/2

S3/1

S3/2

3 inactive

4 inactive

Module with 1 CFx

Default setting

For application in B3 module (IMTU)

S3/1 Module with 1 ICF

1 - 2

4 - 5

1 - 2

4 - 5

3 active

4 active

Module with 2 CFx’s

Parking position

2 - 3

5 - 6

2 - 3

5 - 6

1 - 2 not permissible 2 - 3

Insert the jumpers as required.

To protect against fire and energy hazards, fuses must only be replaced with fuses of the same type. Fuses S1 to S5 Wickmann type TR5-630 mA, 250 V time-lag.

ESBx adapter board, pin connector location

1. Cable 1, 4, 16 or 24-pair to external MDF

2. Fuse 5 for fan in housing

3. Cable 2, 16 or 24-pair to external MDF

4. Connector for EDU circuit board

5. Fan connectors

6. Fire protection device; Will require servicing if defective!

Si = Fuse

268

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

MDF Connections colors

4x2

BK/BN

BK/RD

BK/OG

BK/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

colors

16x2

RD / BU

Panel for the two-wire connection

WE 1

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 16

colors

24x2

Cable 1

RD / BU GND/-48 V (fuse 1, 630 mA, M) for VA or NT (all variants)

WH/YE GND/-48 V (fuse 2, 630 mA, M) for VA or NT (all variants)

WH/GN GND/-48 V (fuse 3, 630 mA, M) for VA or NT (all variants)

WH/BN GND/-48 V (fuse 4, 630 mA, M) for VA or NT (all variants)

WH/BK Total failure contact (only ESB)

WH/BU free / SMDT automatic information call malfunction contact, A (only ESB)

WH/YE SMDT automatic information call malfunction contact,

M/R (only ESB)

WH/GN free / HGS failure contact, A (only ESB)

WH/BN HGS failure contact, M/R (only ESB)

WH/BK free / module malfunction contact, A (only ESB)

WH/BU Module malfunction contact, M/R (only ESB)

WH/YE free / individual malfunction contact, A (only ESB)

WH/GN Individual malfunction contact, M/R (only ESB)

WH/BN free / interface malfunction contact, A (only ESB)

RD/BK Interface

WH/BU Free contact (only ESB)

WH/YE free / IMTU malfunction contact, A (only ESB)

WH/GN IMTU

WH/BN free / reserve controls failure contact, A (only ESB)

WH/BK Reserve controls failure contact, M/R (only ESB)

WH/BU OK 1 external device malfunction (+/-, loop I 2.8 mA)

(only ESB and ESBB)

WH/YE OK 2 external device malfunction (+/-, loop I 2.8 mA)

(only ESB and ESBB)

RD/GN OK 3 external device malfunction (+/-, loop I 2.8 mA)

(only ESB and ESBB)

WH/BN OK 4 external device malfunction (+/-, loop I 2.8 mA)

(only ESB and ESBB)

Ok = optocoupler

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

269

colors

16x2

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

Panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

colors

24x2

Cable 2

RD / BU free / power supply malfunction contact, A (only ESB)

WH/YE Power supply malfunction contact, M/R (only ESB)

WH/GN free / fan failure contact, A (only ESB)

WH/BN Fan failure contact, M/R (only ESB)

WH/BK free / synchronization failure contact, A (only ESB)

WH/BU Synchronization failure contact, M/R (only ESB)

WH/YE free / ZGDE failure contact, A (only ESB)

WH/GN ZGDE failure contact, M/R (only ESB)

WH/BN free / system readiness contact, A (only ESB)

WH/BK System readiness contact, M/R (only ESB)

WH/BK free / line malfunction contact, A (only ESB)

WH/YE Analog/digital line fault contact, M/R (only ESB)

WH/GN free / loss of redundancy contact, A (only ESB)

WH/BN Loss of redundancy contact, M/R (only ESB)

RD/BK Free/contact malfunction external Facility, A (only ESB)

WH/BU Contact malfunction external Facility, M/R (only ESB)

WH/YE Free / contact not currently used, A (only ESB)

WH/GN Contact not currently used, M/R (only ESB)

WH/BN Free / contact not currently used, A (only ESB)

WH/BK Contact not currently used, M/R (only ESB)

WH/BU Free / contact not currently used, A (only ESB)

WH/YE Contact not currently used, M/R (only ESB)

RD/GN free/free

WH/BN free/free

270

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

HSCB High Speed Computer Board

Short description

HSCB is the basic equipment in all modules. It is a computer board with dynamic RAM.

Features

Optionally with parity

128 kByte ERROR flash-PROM

512 kByte Boot flash-PROM

Buffered real time clock

Two-level hardware watchdog

Hardware status register

C-bus interface

4 B channel accesses

2 V.24 interfaces

Downloadable

2x PC card/ATA interfaces for 1.8" PC card driver with ATA mode. Hard disk drives with 260 MB or 1 GB

(for large systems) are available for these interfaces.

Other features

Application

Power demand

+5V

Basic equipment in all modules

1900 mA

2400 mA

2900 mA without HGS with 1 HGS (startup current) with 2 HGS (startup current)

The drives can be replaced during operation.

The V24NI submodule is used as standard when connecting circuits to the V.24 interfaces. If necessary, it is also possible to use the DC isolated V24I.

Additional Memory If additional memory submodules (PS2) are inserted into the HSCB, it should be taken into account that the first memory slot must always be occupied. The inserted PS2 memory modules must have an access time of 60 ns.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

271

HSCB board, component side

1. Memory 4

2. Memory 3

3. Memory 2

4. Memory 1

5. HGS

6. Battery

The HSCB is equipped with one of the following V.24 submodules:

• V.24I Insulated

• V.24NI Non-Insulated (basic configuration)

The following signals are available for the V.24:

• RXD

• TXD

• DTR

• GND

• DSR

• RTS

• CTS

272

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

LEDs and Switch Functions

Boards

HSCB board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

S2

S3

S4

Left position

Left position

Left position

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

273

Switch Function

S4

S2

S3

S1 Reset switch and MI button

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Reset board, locking (see S2)

Monitor interruption (TENOBUG start), keying

Memory test switch

Left: (Standard)

Right:

No memory test when resetting/restarting

Memory test when reseting/reloading the TC system

Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR)

Left:

Right:

Operating status: PC-CARD-ATA-interfaces in operation

Service position: Removing and inserting the HGS(s)

System console connected (SCOCON)

Left: No device connected (Default), or printer or video terminal connected

Right: System terminal connected

Meanings of LEDs

L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7-

L10

Fault indication from the control (group statement)

Indicates module data transfer via the C-bus (e.g. call at subcriber)

Indicates access to the inserted background memory

Indicates that the HGS(s) can be removed

Indicates that the S4 switch is in the "right" position, and that the system terminal can be connected to the first V.24 interface on the AV24B/W (service)

Unused

The LEDs flash to indicate the status from reset to operation. The display remains lit for about 5 seconds if a fault is found in the loading phases 15 to 7 (see following table). If a fatal fault occurs, the reset process is repeated from the beginning (loading phase 15).

6

5

8

7

4

No. L7 L8 L9 L10 Phase name

15 1 1 1 1 Start reset phase

14 1 1 1 0

13 1 1 0 1

Test flash-PROM

Test QUICC

12 1 1 0 0

11 1 0 1 1

10 1 0 1 0

9 1 0 0 1

Test real time clock

Test C-bus interface

Test DUART (V.24 ports)

Test dynamic RAM

1 0 0 0

0 1 1 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 0 0

Output hardware image

End reset phase

Initial program loading (IPL)/IPL ready flag

STIN program loader is loaded and started

Operating system has been loaded and started (restart)

274

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

3

2

1

0

0 0 1 1

0 0 1 0

0 0 0 1

0 0 0

User programs (have been dispatched) have been loaded

Start of customer data loading in the user programs

All customer data loaded Start commissioning of module(s)

0 Module(s) in operation

1 = LED on

0 = LED off

Changing the HGSs

The HGS may be removed or inserted during system operation without the prior removal of the HSCB.

The following procedure must be adhered to:

• Remove static charge from the module frame

• Move S3 switch to the right

• Wait for L4 to light up

• Remove the appropriate HGS

Do not touch the components!

Take hold of the drive from above and below.

• Insert the new HDD

• Move S3 switch to the left

• L4 will go out in a short time

Removing and Inserting the board

The HSCB board may be removed or inserted during system operation, if the S1 switch handle has been moved to the left.

In single module systems, removing the HSCB board will result in a total breakdown.

In multi-module systems, removing the HSCB board will result in the failure of this module.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

275

ICF IMTU Central Functions

Short description

The central board of the B3 module or ICS is the ICF.

Features

Clock Supply and

Synchronization

Clock frequency precision for DECT.

Remotely synchronizable by system clock and master module, with CL2M or CL2ME

Master function for multi-module systems, adjustable using software.

External interfaces

128 send/receive highways

Outputs for ext. signaling

Remote control for power supply

Fiber optic cable connector

Ref. clock supply (CL2M)

Clocks

Micro processor bus

Interface to other modules

Through MLB, with possible MLBIML

Transfer of C-bus data.

256 PCM channels.

Inter module manager (IMMG)

Fault Management using Inter Module Manager

Other features

Use

Current requirement +5V

Battery status query

Basic equipment in B3/ICS

3210 mA

Memory doubling e.g. for downloading

Fire protection fuse

Difference between ICF .1321 and .1331

CBI and IMLA are on the board on the .1331.

The ICF with the part no. 49.9905.9146 can be used in both the B3 module and in the ICS.

276

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Jumper and DIL Switch Functions

ICF module, module side

1. DIL switch

2. Jumper

3. Fire Protection Fuse

Jumper Functions

Total breakdown (system not in operation) via ESB

1 - 2

2 - 3

Normally closed contact for message

Normally open contact for message

Battery status query

4 - 5

5 - 6

Testing of -48 V battery not possible (default)

Testing of -48 V battery active

When using PS350 with connected battery: Activation of the battery voltage monitoring option

Fire Protection Fuse

If the fire protection fuse is defective (burned out), the module must be replaced by a new one.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

277

Functions of the DIL Switches

S1 Error unit

ON: with ESU

OFF: without ESU

S2

ON:

OFF:

System configuration for IMMG

IMMG passive

IMMG active

S3

ON

S4

ON

Specification of highest scan address

16

OFF ON 32

ON OFF 64

S5

S6

ON:

OFF:

ON:

OFF:

Inter module manager watchdog

Watchdog inactive

Watchdog active (default)

CBI master mode switching

Test mode

CBI master (default) For testing and servicing purposes. Do not change

S7

ON:

OFF:

Enable NMI

NMI disable (default) For testing and servicing purposes. Do not change

S8

ON:

OFF:

2 MHz

4 MHz (default)

278

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

LEDs and Switch Functions

ICF module for B3 module, front ICF module for IC and B3 module, front

Switch functions

S1

Reset

Left:

Mean:

Right:

S2

Service switch

Left:

Mean:

Right:

No function, locking

Operating state

Reset module, keying

No function, locking

Operating state

With double star coupler: Initiate switchover, keying

LED denotations

L1

L2

No function

Clock unit active on: Active module clock unit

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

279

L4

L3

L5

L6

When doubling, IMTU status on: IMTU active off: IMTU hot stand-by flashing quickly: IMTU active and alternate path switched flashing slowly: IMTU hot-standby and alternate path switched

IMMG status on: flashing:

IMMG not in operation (no module operation)

IMMG in operation, but module logon not yet possible

With doubled multi module, also failure of the fiber optic cable path

ICF <--> ICF.

off: IMMG in operation

Clock unit synchronization on: Module’s clock system is synchronized

Master/Freewheel on: Module prepared by system software for master operation

or

Module in master freewheel

Removing and Inserting the board

The board may be removed and inserted during system operation.

All existing connections are disconnected if the board is removed. Exception when doubling.

If the active ICF board of a doubled pair is to be removed, the service switch must be used to change it over to the hot stand-by side. After the ICF has been reinserted, the service switch must be switched back again.

Doubling

Only one ICF board can be inserted for each B3 module.

A doubling of the system can only be implemented by using a second ICS or B3 module.

See

Complete doubling

[

→ 165 ]

280

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

External clock pulse input

First V.24 interface of the CA3B (Cable Adapter 3 for B modules)

PIN 1 A1 External clock pulse input 2.048 MHz (high precision reference clock / TAREF)

PIN6 B1

OFA2B/OFAS Optical Fiber Adapter

Short description

The OFA2B optical fiber adapter 2 B modules and OFAS optical fiber adapter single mode are for connecting the fiber optic cables when DT21 or DT 22 boards are used and the optical interfaces are employed.

The boards are used for various optical fibre types:

OFA2B

Graded-index fibers

Ready-made cable types

29.9030.6101-6199

*

Core diam. µm

62,5

Mono-mode fibers

Ready-made cable types

29.9030.6201-6299

*

OFAS

Core diam. µm

9,5

*

The last two characters of the item number indicate the length of the pre-prepared cable in meters.

Cable lengths >99m are handled by the project division.

Common data for OFA2B and OFAS boards

Interfaces Quantity and form Wavelength

Optical transmitters

Optical receivers

1 SC socket

1 SC socket

1300nm

1300 nm

Power supply

Current consumption

Power consumption

Electrical values

5V

250mA

1.25W

Typical

Depending on the optical fibre used and cross-section area of the optical cable, different maximum cable lengths can be achieved:

Maximum distances

Type of fiber

Graded-index fibres

Mono mode

Optical fiber core diam. µm

62.5

50

9,5 maximum length km

10

6,2

15

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

281

Basic construction of OFA2B and OFAS

OFA2B and OFAS boards are designed for connecting to SC plugs. Neither board is thus compatible with the previous OFA1B board type, which was designed for mono-mode fibre and ST connectors.

282

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

TER Termination

Short description

The TER boards are used for line terminations (terminating resistor) of the backplane. Depending on the application, the following TER boards are available:

TER2

TER3

Submodules

Power demand +5V

Power demand +5V

110 mA

90 mA

When using TER boards, check that they are properly connected.

1. TER slot on the B3 backplane

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

283

Analog interfaces

Board

ASC21

[

→ 301 ]

ATA

[

→ 316 ]

ATA2

[

→ 319 ]

ATB

[

→ 322 ]

ATC

[

→ 325 ]

ATLC

[

→ 329 ]

ADM

[

→ 292 ]

AUP

Subboard

SIGA

[

→ 344 ]

SIGB

[

→ 345 ]

SIGC

[

→ 346 ]

SIGD

[

→ 347 ]

SIGE

[

→ 348 ]

SIGF

[

→ 349 ]

SIGG

[

→ 350 ]

SIGH

[

→ 351 ]

SUPA

[

→ 357 ]

SUPB

[

→ 358 ]

SSBA

[

→ 352 ]

SSBB

[

→ 353 ]

SSBC

[

→ 354 ]

SSBD

[

→ 355 ]

SSSM

[

→ 356 ]

PLSM

[

→ 342 ]

ALSM

[

→ 298 ]

]

ALSMF

[

→ 300

ACSM

[

→ 289 ]

]

ABSM1

[

→ 285

ABSM

[

→ 450 ]

Connection

CA2B

CA1B

CA1B

CA1B

CA1B

CA2B

CA2B

[

[

[

[

[

[

[

→ 240 ]

→ 239 ]

→ 239 ]

→ 239 ]

→ 239 ]

→ 240 ]

→ 240 ]

,

,

,

,

EESxB

EESxB

EESxB

EESxB

[

[

[

[

→ 264 ]

→ 264 ]

→ 264 ]

→ 264 ]

See Service and Assembly Manual Analog Universal Platform AUP with submodules on I33

284

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

ABSM1 Analog Subscriber Submodule 1

Short description

The ABSM1 submodule is plugged into the ADM board. It replaces the ABSM submodule and provides four a/b connections for analogue terminals, according to country-specific requirements, with the following features:

Country-specific variants are configurable using board software for the following countries:

Power demand +5V

Interfaces

Constant current supply

Germany, Austria, Switzerland, Netherlands, Great Britain, Italy,

Spain, Belgium, Venezuela, Hungary, Czech Republic, Slovakian

Republic, Mexico, Hong Kong, USA, Russia and France

70 mA

4 &times; a/b

24 mA convertible to 30 mA

Line resistance 2 x 475 Ohm range: 4 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0,4 mm

9 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0,6 mm

15 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0,8 mm

DTMF/pulse dialling

50 Hz ringing current (only with PS350A switchable to 25 Hz)

Short and long flash time (end device dependent)

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Polarity reversion for "message waiting" signalling

Connection of external announcement devices

The connection on the MDF is carried out via the CA2B or CARUB boards.

Setting of the supply current 30mA per port

The ABSM1 board implements a subscriber interface with continuous current supply. This means that the switching regulator of each port component provides the supply voltage to the terminal (analogue telephone) in order for the supply current to flow (within the limits of the supply range). A continuous current of

24mA is adjusted by default.

The supply current can be increased to 30mA by inserting bridges or 0 ohm resistances. Each of the 4 ports can be adapted individually. A maximum of 4 ports must be changed individually.

Only one of the following setting options should be used for the ABSM1 submodule. Mixing the variants does not make sense!

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

285

Increase of the supply current to 30mA by inserting bridges on the component side

The following picture shows the component side of the ABSM1. The positions of the soldering spots for the resistances (or bridges) are highlighted and shown in detail next to the board.

Simple wire bridges must be soldered on the component side. Short-circuits as a result of contact with neighbouring components and signalling lines at all costs must be avoided!

ABSM1 submodule, component side

286

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Increase of the supply current to 30mA by inserting bridges on the solder side

Since the components are in close proximity to each other and since it is not possible to immediately find the modified current setting of an ABSM1 plugged onto the ADM, there is another possibility of setting the current. By soldering wire bridge onto the solder side of the ABSM1 it is possible to obtain the same effect as by soldering bridges onto the component side. The soldering points located between the *1 marks (very small) must be connected by means of a wire bridge. The following figure shows the soldering side of the

ABSM1. The port-specific areas are outlined and shown in detail.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

287

288

System Manual Integral Enterprise

ABSM1 submodule, conductor side

June 2009

Boards

There are no components on the soldering side. This simplifies the soldering process and the optical recognition of a chosen current increase. A very exact orientation must be ensured with this variant! We recommend the use of a magnifying glass to make sure that the correct soldering points are connected to each other.

ACSM Alternating Current Signaling Submodule

Short description

The Alternating Current Signaling submodule (ACSM) performs the signaling exchange by transmitting

50Hz AC impulses back and forwards on the speech lines.

Other features

Region of application

Current requirement +5V

National and international

5 mA

Interface for transmitting back and forwards an a/b (two-core line)

The signaling current must be measured.

Combinations with other submodules on an ATLC module are possible.

Setting up the ACSM

In exceptional application cases, a separate alternating current signal for signaling to the opposite transmitter can be supplied instead of the alternating current from the power supply of the MG1000. At the MDF, the supply is implemented via the (in this case unused) wires of the incoming Ka/Kb speech path. To carry out an AC signal switchover, two bridges on the ACSM subboard must be disconnected and then two bridges inserted.

Section of the soldering side on the ACSM submodule

1. Disconnect two bridges here

2. Insert two bridges here

Note

The supply must be implemented separately for each fraction via the associated Ka/Kb wires.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

289

Calibrating the Signalling Current

The signal current comprises the base for signalling between the ACSM and the remote connecting circuit.

Because the strength of the current depends on the connecting line between ACSM and the remote connecting circuit, commissioning or alteration of the connecting line must be followed by individual adjustment of the signal current to and from the remote side.

If the signalling current is too weak, the individual criteria may not be identified. If the current is too strong, this may lead to signal distortion, and subsequent misrepresentation of the individual criteria.

The ACSM submodule is equipped with two potentiometers for adjustment of the signal current to the remote connecting circuit and two measuring points for identification of the signal current from the remote connecting circuit.

For the calibrating procedure, the ATLC board and the corresponding ACSM sub-board should be inserted into the TC system via the Board Adapter (BA) module, material number: 28.5630.590x. This provides access to the potentiometers and measuring points.

The a.c signalling voltage is located on the sleeve strip lines to the ATLC basic board. Contact with these parts as well as the component connections is to be avoided.

Soldering side of the ACSM submodule

1. Potentiometers

Measuring the Transmitted Alternating Current from the remote connecting circuit

In order to do this, the remote connecting circuit must transmit a continuous alternating current. The intensity of the current is measured by a voltmeter, which is to be set as follows:

Measurement range: 1V -2V, DC

The required measuring points, PP1 (-) and PP2 (+), are illustrated.

290

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Soldering side of the ACSM submodule

1. Potentiometers

The signalling current must be adjusted at the remote connecting circuit until the test points read 0.7 V DC voltage.

Once this process has been completed, the continuous alternating current from the remote connecting circuit is switched off.

Setting the Transmission Current to the remote connecting circuit

In order to carry out this process, the ACSM must send a continuous alternating current to the remote connecting circuit. To do this, the appropriate testing and blocking switches on the ATLC board must be switched into the right position. The associated LED will flicker slowly, the connecting circuit is now blocked and will transmit continuous alternating current to the remote connecting circuit.

The alternating current transmitted by the ACSM is now measured at the remote connecting circuit, and, by turning the potentiometers alternately, the ACSM adjusts the current to correspond with the remote connecting circuit’s requirements. Turning the meters clockwise results in an increase of the transmission current. Turning anti-clockwise results in a decrease of the transmission current.

Subsequently, the testing and blocking switches on the corresponding port of the ATLC must be brought back into the middle (resting) position. The continuous alternating current is switched off, the accompanying LED goes out, and the connecting circuit is ready for operation.

The calibrating procedure is completed.

The ATLC board can now be removed from the BA module and inserted in its place in the PBX.

The corresponding adjustments must be made in the configuration data.

Adjusting the Configuration Data

Physical line interface

Set to "AC signalling active".

Signalling plan

Set the signalling plan so that is identical to that of (coordinated with) the remote connecting circuit.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

291

Speech path design and relative level

Set one of the following combinations according to the requirement of the interface to the remote connecting circuit.

If your country of application is not listed, select the required level setting for D. Your application then corresponds to German transmission technology.

Speech path design

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

Relative level (Pr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

-3/-4 dBr

-3/-4 dBr

-4/-3 dBr

-4/-3 dBr

-5/-2 dBr

-6/-1 dBr

-6/-1 dBr

E

/Pr

A

) Application in countries

A

F

NL

D

A, D, E, GR

B, L

F

NL

I

D, GR(default setting)

F

B, L

• Modifications of the signal times may only be made in exceptional circumstances on site.

• Some signalling plans require adjustments to be made to the "digits". The permissible settings can be found in the respective signalling plan.

• Settings for the connecting circuit type must not be changed.

ADM Analog Digital Mixboard

Short description

The ADM module is a basic module which accommodates up to five sub-boards. The following submodules are available:

SubMod

STSM1

Equipment

UPSM1

UPSM

ABSM

UKSM

EEADM four S

0

/T

0

interfaces as exchange, permanent connection or subscriber connection four U

PN

interfaces as subscriber connection or permanent connection four U

PN

interfaces as subscriber connection or permanent connection four analog subscriber connections (a/b) two U

K0

master interfaces for use of the ADM with S

0

emergency sets via cable adapter EESS0

292

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

ADM module, component side

Please note the numbering of the sub-boards.

2

4

1

3

Connecting device 1-4

Connecting device 9-12

Connecting device 5-8

Connecting device 13-16

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

293

If the ADM board with emergency switchovers (cable adapter EESS0) is used then the sub-board 3 on it is omitted. On the connector X8 (otherwise used for sub-board 4), you must plug in the sub-board EEADM instead of the sub-board 4.

If the EEADM board on the ADM board is plugged in the incorrect location then this will result in a fault on the ADM board.

On the ADM board, it is possible to use the ICU editor to set the "Call Reference Length - (CRL)" for the entire board to a length of one or two bytes. The Call Reference Length of 2 bytes is required for QSIG networks with certain external systems. If this setting is chosen all of the ports have CRL=2 bytes, regardless of the currently selected protocol. As a result, connection of system phones with TN1R6 protocol to this ADM board was not possible.

From ICU software release ADM0900.ICL/ADM00009.ICP, the behavior of the ADM module and the MG100 ADM part has been changed. The adjustment of the CRL settings is only performed for the ports of the board which have "QSIG" as their protocol. On all other protocols CRL=1 always remains.

As a result, it is possible to set up QSIG ports with CRL=2 for external system networking, whereas system phones and permanent connection lines with CRL=1 can be used on other ports with TN1R6 protocol.

Other features

Countries of use

Current requirement +5V

Interfaces

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Download board software

Application in all countries

230 mA

16 times 2/4-wire

Board identification using board ID data

Maintenance function

In connection with V24IA module debugging interface on module front

Debugger=troubleshooting program

294

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

LEDs and Switch Functions

Boards

DECT module, front side

1. RJ45 connector with PIN assignment

Switch Functions

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Preparatory disabling (of all connecting devices)

Operation status/release

Reset module

Forced module download

At the end of the download process the module is automatically reset.

In order to prevent infinite repetition of the download, the switch S1 must be returned to the middle position after the message "Test Reply 1".

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

295

Interpretation of the LEDs

L3

L4

L5

L1

L2

L6

L7-L19 On:

L20

On: Board is busy with switching functions

Flashing: Module is removable after preparatory disabling

Off:

On:

Module is not busy

Module reset in progress

Flashing: Download in progress

Off: Module in operation

Available

Available

On:

On:

Layer 1 of the digital connecting device 1 active or analog connecting device 1 busy

Layer 1 of the digital connecting device 2 active or analog connecting device 2 busy

On:

Layer 1 of the digital connecting device 3...15 active or analog connecting device 3...15 busy

Layer 1 of the digital connecting device 16 active or analog connecting device 16 busy

MDF Connections

Colours

16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF, Cable 1

Patch panel for the two wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Patch panel for the four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

STSM1

1st slot

2nd slot

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

A2/B2 (T)

C2/D2 (R)

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

A5/B5 (T)

C5/D5 (R)

A6/B6 (T)

C6/D6 (R)

A7/B7 (T)

C7/D7 (R)

A8/B8 (T)

C8/D8 (R)

via CA2B from

UPSM,

UPSM1

ADM with

UKSM

ADM with

ABSM,

ABSM1 free

A5/B5 free

A6/B6 free

A7/B7 free

A8/B8 free

A1/B1 free

A2/B2 free

A3/B3 free

A4/B4 free

A3/B3 free

A4/B4 free free free free free

A1/B1 free

A2/B2 free free free free free a5/b5 free a6/b6 free a7/b7 free a8/b8 free a1/b1 free a2/b2 free a3/b3 free a4/b4

296

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

Colours

16x2

MDF Cable 2

Patch panel for the two wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Patch panel for the four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

3rd slot

4th slot

STSM1

A9/B9 (T)

C9/D9 (R)

A10/B10 (T)

C10/D10 (R)

A11/B11 (T)

C11/D11 (R)

A12/B12 (T)

C12/D12 (R)

A13/B13 (T)

C13/D13 (R)

A14/B14 (T)

C14/D14 (R)

A15/B15 (T)

C15/D15 (R)

A16/B16 (T)

C16/D16 (R)

via CA2B from

UPSM,

UPSM1

ADM with

UKSM

ADM with

ABSM,

ABSM1

A9/B9 free

A5/B5 free

A10/B10 A6/B6 free free

A11/B11 free

A12/B12 free free free free free

A13/B13 A7/B7 free free

A14/B14 A8/B8 free free

A15/B15 free

A16/B16 free free free free free a9/b9 free a10/b10 free a11/b11 free a12/b12 free a13/b13 free a14/b14 free a15/b15 free a16/b16 free

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

297

ALSM Active Loop Submodule

Short description

The ALSM module is a submodule for the ATLC. It provides an extension to the signalling variants via a two-wire speech path (a/b line). The ALSM submodule is an interface featuring:

Options for use

Power demand +5V

National and international

30 mA interface a/b

Supply/loop recognition (subscriber line circuit)

Ringing current signalling

Flash key recognition

Pulse and DTMF dial recognition

Possible combination with other submodules in an ATLC board

Setting up the ALSM

The Active Loop Submodule (ALSM) implements signal exchange with the remote connecting circuit by means of active loop signals (supply and ringing current) on the speech wires.

The ALSM submodule is used for the connection of special facilities (e.g. speech memory). It is also possible to connect analog CB sets or connecting lines which require this type of signalling.

Connection is implemented via a 2-wire line (a/b).

With the ALSM submodule, the supply current on the a/b line comprises 24 mA (standard). Current changeover to supply current of 30 mA is achieved by disconnecting one conductor path and inserting one bridge (see following illustration).

Section of the soldering side on the ALSM submodule

1. Material number: 28.7640.6961 or .6962

2. Insert bridge here

3. Disconnect bridge here

298

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

The corresponding adjustments must be made in the configuration data.

Physical line interface

Set to "loop signalling active".

Signalling plan

Set the signalling plan so that is identical to that of (coordinated with) the remote connecting circuit.

Speech path design and relative level

Set one of the following combinations according to the requirement of the interface to the remote connecting circuit.

Speech path design Relative level (Pr

E

/Pr

A

) Application in countries

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-6.5 dBr

+3/-5 dBr

Special application 1

I

A, D, E, GR (def.)

B, L

F (with ALSMF)

NL

CH

UK

If your country of application is not listed, select the required level setting for D. Your application then corresponds to German transmission technology.

In the case of ALSM submodules with material number: 28.7640.6961 which do not show any wire changes, only a setting of "2-wire, special application 1" is permissible.

In the case of ALSM submodules with material number: 28.7640.6962 and ASLM submodules with reference no. 28.7640.6961 which were changed by inserting wire bridges, all settings except "2-wire, special application 1" are permissible.

• Adjustments to times must not be made.

Adjustments to the digits may be made if required.

These settings depend on the application case and the selected signalling plan. The required setting measures are found in the respective signalling plan.

Settings for the connecting circuit type

The only other permissible setting in addition to connecting circuit type "QUe" is "TS". This setting is used if the ATLC port is to be operated as a "normal" subscriber line circuit. More detailed information can be found in the respective signal plan.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

299

ALSMF Active Loop Submodule France

Short description

The ALSMF board is a submodule for the ATLC and is used in France. It provides an extension to the signalling variants via a two-wire speech path (a/b line). The ALSMF submodule is an interface featuring:

Options for use

Power demand +5V

National and international

30 mA interface a/b

Supply/loop recognition (subscriber line circuit)

Ringing current signalling

Flash key recognition

Pulse and DTMF dial recognition

Possible combination with other submodules in an ATLC board

Setting up the ALSMF

The Active Loop Submodule France (ALSMF) implements signal exchange with the remote connecting circuit by means of active loop signals (supply and ringing current) on the speech wires.

In terms of its functions, the ALSMF is identical to the ALSM submodule. However, additional components mean that it is coordinated especially for French transmission technology.

Connection is implemented via a 2-wire line (a/b).

A switchover via a point of division is not possible with the ALSMF submodule.

The corresponding adjustments must be made in the configuration data.

• Physical line interface

Set to "loop signalling active".

• Signal code

Set the signalling plan so that is identical to that of (coordinated with) the remote connecting circuit.

• Speech path design and relative level

Set one of the following combinations according to the requirement of the interface to the remote connecting circuit.

If your country of application is not listed, select the required level setting for D. Your application then corresponds to German transmission technology.

Speech path design Relative level (Pr

E

/Pr

A

) Application in countries

2-wire 0/-7 dBr A, D, E, GR (def.)

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr I

B, L

F (with ALSMF)

NL

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

0/-6.5 dBr

+3/-5 dBr

Special application 1

CH

UK

300

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

• Adjustments to times must not be made.

• Adjustments to the digits may be made if required.

These settings depend on the application case and the selected signalling plan. The required setting measures are found in the respective signalling plan.

• Settings for the connecting circuit type

The only other permissible setting in addition to connecting circuit type "QUe" is "TS". This setting is used if the ATLC port is to be operated as a "normal" subscriber line circuit. More detailed information can be found in the respective signal plan.

ASC21 Analog Subscriber Circuit 21

Short description

The ASC21 board provides 32 a/b connections for analog terminals, according to country-specific requirements with the following features:

Country-specific variants are configurable using board software for the following countries:

Power demand +5V

Interfaces

Constant current supply

Germany, Austria, Switzerland, Netherlands, Great Britain, Italy,

Spain, Belgium, Venezuela, Hungary, Czech Republic, Slovakian

Republic, Mexico, Hong Kong, USA, Russia and France

600 mA

32 &times; a/b

22 mA convertible to 30 mA

Line resistance 2 x 235 Ohm range: 1.7 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0,4 mm

4.0 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0,6 mm

7.5 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0,8 mm

DTMF/pulse dialling

25/50 Hz ringing current (convertible)

Short and long flash time (end device dependent)

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Polarity reversion for "message waiting" signalling

Connection of external announcement devices

The connection on the MDF is carried out via the CA2B or CARUB boards.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

301

Converting the feed current up to version F

On the board the feed current per connection device can be changed from 22mA (standard) to 30mA.

Up to version F of ASC21 (indicated on the front: 49.9906.7719 F) the ASC21 is manufactured with supply modules in an 28-pin SO casing (SO = Small Outline Package). The casing can be identified by the connections on the two long sides (14 each).

The following actions are to be carried out:

On the conductor path side and the component side the number of connecting devices for which the current switchover can be performed needs to be specified.

Example:

The supply module for connecting device 01 is located on the component side. The soldering points for adjusting the higher loop current are located on the conductor path side.. For this reason the identification

01 is also located on the conductor path side.

In each connecting device area there is the identification *3, in the proximity of which there are 4 landing areas for two non-fitted resistors (0 Ohm).

Two of these landing areas are to be connected with a wire bridge. It is important that always 2 wire bridges per connecting device are soldered in.

302

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

ASC21 module

1. Supply module for each connection device

2. Shared for 4 connection devices

3. Connector for MG1000 back plane

For clearer orientation, please turn the module until the connector (3) points towards you and you can read the numbers of the connecting devices.

The detail of the component side below indicate the location of the landing areas which need to be bridged.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

303

*1 depending whether the port is on the component side or solder side

The landing areas must be connected perpendicular to each other.

Marking *3 refers to the landing areas marked with the arrow.

304

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

On the component side the current increase can be set for the following connecting devices:

Connecting device number

Number for xx Number for yy

02

05

04

07

10

13

18

21

26

29

12

15

20

23

28

31

The component allocation scheme is marked the same on all connecting devices with xx and/or yy.

The detail of the conductor path side below indicate the location of the landing areas which need to be bridged.

A different arrangement applies for connecting device 01 than for the other connecting devices. Component arrangement for connecting device 01 and 03:

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

305

*1 depending whether the port is on the component side or solder side

The two bridges to solder on connection device 01 are next to each other.

Marking *3 refers to the landing areas marked with the arrow.

306

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

The component arrangement is the same for additional connection devices for which the current increase can be set on the conductor path side:

*1 depending whether the port is on the component side or solder side

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

307

Marking *3 refers to the landing areas marked with the arrow.

On the conductor path side the current increase can be set for the following connecting devices:

09

14

17

22

Connecting device number

Number for xx Number for yy

01 #1

06

03

08

25

30

11

16

19

24

27

32

#1 The component arrangement is different for connection device 01.

The component allocation scheme is marked the same on all connecting devices with xx and/or yy.

Only connect the correspondingly marked landing areas (vertical) with each other.

Bridge connectors soldered differently can cause significant malfunctions.

308

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Switchover of the feed current from version G

On the board the feed current per connection device can be changed from 22mA (standard) to 30mA.

By changing the housing form the ASC21 is manufactured as of version G (identification on the front panel

4.999.067.719 G or 4.999.107.751 A) with supply modules in the 32-pin PLCC housing (PLCC = Plastic

Leaded Chip Carrier). The housing can be identified from the fact that the connections are distributed around all 4 sides.

The following actions are to be carried out:

• On the conductor path side and the component side the number of connecting devices for which the current switchover can be performed needs to be specified.

Example:

The supply module for connecting device 01 is located on the component side. The soldering points for adjusting the higher loop current are located on the conductor path side.. For this reason the identification 01 is also located on the conductor path side.

• In each connecting device area there is the identification *3, in the proximity of which there are 4 landing areas for two non-fitted resistors (0 Ohm).

• Two of these landing areas are to be connected with a wire bridge. It is important that always 2 wire bridges per connecting device are soldered in.

For clearer orientation, please turn the module until the connector to the backplane points towards you and you can read the numbers of the connecting devices.

As the component allocation for the board differs slightly from version G onward in comparison to the predecessor version, a detail of the component page is shown on which you can see the location of the landing areas which need to be bridged.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

309

The landing areas must be connected perpendicular to each other.

310

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

The marking *3 relates to the landing areas in the yellow (gray) area.

On the component side the current increase can be set for the following connecting devices:

10

13

18

21

Connecting device number

Number for xx Number for yy

02

05

04

07

26

29

12

15

20

23

28

31

The component allocation scheme is marked the same on all connecting devices with xx and/or yy.

The landing areas which are to be connected are now always side-by-side. A short-circuit between the bridges which are to be inserted does not represent a problem, as the 4 points are to be connected to each other anyway. A connection between adjacent components must be prevented in all cases.

Only connect the correspondingly marked landing areas with each other.

Bridge connectors soldered in at other positions could cause significant malfunctions.

A detail of the conductor path page for the module from version G is shown below. This indicates the location of the landing areas which need to be bridged.

Here, the schematic diagram is the same for all relevant parts. Parts 01 and 03 are not shown separately.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

311

The marking *3 relates to the landing areas in the yellow (gray) area.

312

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

On the conductor path side the current increase can be set for the following connecting devices:

09

14

17

22

Connecting device number

Number for xx Number for yy

01

06

03

08

25

30

11

16

19

24

27

32

The component allocation scheme is marked the same on all connecting devices with xx and/or yy.

The landing areas which are to be connected are now always side-by-side. A short-circuit between the bridges which are to be inserted does not represent a problem, as the 4 points are to be connected to each other anyway. A connection between adjacent components must be prevented in all cases.

Only connect the correspondingly marked landing areas with each other.

Bridge connectors soldered in at other positions could cause significant malfunctions.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

313

LEDs and Switch Functions

ASC21 board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Preparatory disabling (VSP) for all connecting circuits

Forced board download

314

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: flashing: off:

L2 on:

flashing: off:

Board is busy with switching functions

Board removable after preparatory disabling

Board is not busy

Board reset in progress

Module has gone into operation

MDF Connections

colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF Cable adapter CA2B or CARUB from ASC21

Panel for two-wire connection Cable 1 Cable 2

WE 1

WE 2 a1/b1 a2/b2 a17/b17 a18/b18

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a19/b19 a20/b20 a21/b21 a22/b22

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16 a7/b7 a8/b8 a9/b9 a10/b10 a11/b11 a12/b12 a13/b13 a14/b14 a15/b15 a16/b16 a23/b23 a24/b24 a25/b25 a26/b26 a27/b27 a28/b28 a29/b29 a30/b30 a31/b31 a32/b32

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

315

ATA Analog Trunk Interface A

Short description

The ATA module provides the interface for up to 8 analog exchange accesses (PSTN) in accordance with country-specific guidelines. It is a universal basic Euro exchange line junction and can be adapted to individual countries by means of the corresponding submodule and software (levels, impedances etc.).

SubMod

SIGA signaling unit A

SIGB signaling unit B

SIGC signaling unit C

SIGD signaling unit D:

SIGE signaling unit E

SIGF signaling unit F

SIGG signaling unit G

Countries of use

Germany, Russia

Switzerland

Luxembourg

Austria

Austria

Belgium

Hungary

A mixed combination of ATA modules and submodules is not possible.

The module can accommodate a maximum of 4 two-part submodules.

ATA module, slots

316

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Other features

Current requirement +5V

Interfaces

MFV/IWV selection

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

530 mA with eight occupied connecting devices

8 × a/b

Dial tone identification, charge count

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

An emergency operation switchover can be set up in the MG1000 Media Gateway by adding an EES1B/

(EES8B) module behind the ATA module. This is not possible in the MG100 Media Gateway.

LEDs and Switch Functions

ATA module, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

S2-S9 Left-hand position

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

317

Switch Function

S1

S2

S3-S8

S9

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1

L6

L2

L3, L4, L5,

L7, L8, L9

L10

Off:

On:

Off:

On:

Off:

On:

Flashing:

Off:

On:

Flashing:

Off:

On:

Preparatory disabling (of all connecting devices)

Operation status/release

Reset module

Forced module download

AO1 preparatory disabling

Approve, operation status

AOx preparatory disabling;

Approve, operation status

AO8 preparatory disabling

Approve, operation status

Board is busy with switching functions

Module is removable after preparatory disabling

Module is not busy

Module reset in progress

Download in progress or blocked by the software

Module in operation

AO1 busy

AO1 not busy

AOx busy

AOx not busy

AO8 busy

AO8 not busy

MDF Connections

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

Patch panel for, two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

Cable Adapter CA1B for ATA

a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 free

318

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16 free free free free free free free

ATA2 Analog Trunk Interface A2

Short description

TheATA2 board provides the interfaces for a max. of 8 analog exchange access points (PSTN). It is a universal basic Euro exchange line junction. Through

SubMod

SIGH signaling Unit H

Countries of use

Czech Republic/Slovakia and software (levels, impedances etc.) it is adapted to individual countries.

The difference between this module and the ATA module is the lower DC loop resistance.

A mixed combination of ATA2 modules and sub modules is not possible.

The module can accommodate a maximum of 4 two-part sub modules.

ATA2 module, slots

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

319

Other features

Current draw +5V

Interfaces

530 mA with eight occupied connecting devices

8 × a/b

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Dial tone identification, charge count

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

An emergency operation switchover can be set up by inserting an EES1B (EES8B) module behind the

ATA2 module.

LEDs and Switch Functions

ATA2 board, slots

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

S2-S9 Left position

320

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left: Forced board download

S2

S3-S8

S9

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:

AO1 preparatory disabling

Approve, operation status

AOx preparatory disabling;

Approve, operation status

AO8 preparatory disabling

Approve, operation status

Meanings of LEDs

L6

L2

L1

off:

L3, L4, L5,

L7, L8, L9 on:

L10 off: on:

off: on: flashing: off: on: flashing: off: on:

Board is busy with switching functions

Board removable after preparatory disabling

Board is not busy

Board reset in progress

Download in progress or blocked by software

Board in operation

AO1 busy

AOx busy

AOx not busy

AO8 busy

MDF Connections

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

Patch panel for, two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

Cable Adapter CA1B from ATA2

a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 free

Boards

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

321

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16 free free free free free free free

ATB Analog Trunk Interface B

Short description

TheThe ATB module provides the interface for up to 8 analog network accesses (PSTN) in accordance with British Telecom guidelines. It is a universal basic Euro exchange line junction. Through

SubMod Countries of use

SUPA Loop Calling/Earth Calling

SUPB Loop Calling/Earth Calling

GB,HK

USA and software (levels, impedances etc.) it is adapted to individual countries.

ATB module, slots

322

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Other features

Current draw +5V

Interfaces

Level, impedance, etc. adjustable via confidata

Signaling process selectable via software download

595 mA with eight occupied connecting devices

8 × a/b

Loop calling guarded clearing

Earth calling signaling system

Simple call routing mode

MFV/IWV selection

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Dial tone recognition, charge metering (350-440 Hz, 1111 Hz/50 Hz)

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Access to private MCL network via British Telecom lines.

An emergency operation switchover can be set up by inserting an EES1B (EES8B) board behind the ATB board.

LEDs and Switch Functions

ATB board, front side

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

323

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

S2-S9 Left position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

S2

Right, then left:

Right:

Left:

S3-S8 Right:

Left:

S9 Right:

Left:

Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Neutral/release

Forced board download

AO1 preparatory disabling

AOx preparatory disabling

AO8 preparatory disabling

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: flashing: off:

L6 on:

flashing:

L2 off: on:

L3, L4, L5,

L7, L8, L9 off: on:

off:

L10 on: off:

Board is busy with switching functions

Board removable after preparatory disabling

Board is not busy

Board reset in progress

Board in operation

AO1 busy

AO1 not busy

AOx busy

AO8 busy

AO8 not busy

MDF Connections

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

Cable Adapter CA1B from ATB

Patch panel for, two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3 a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3

324

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16 free free free free free free a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 free free

ATC Analog Trunk Interface C

Short description

TheThe ATC module provides the interfaces for up to 8 analog network accesses (PSTN) in accordance with country-specific guidelines. It is a universal basic Euro exchange line junction and can be adapted to different countries via

SubMod

SSBA signaling Sub Board Type A

SSBB signaling Sub Board Type B

SSBC signaling Sub Board Type C

SSBD signaling Sub Board Type D

France

Spain

Italy

Netherlands

Countries of use and the software (levels, impedances etc.).

The module can accommodate a maximum of 4 two-part sub modules.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

325

ATC module, slots

A mixed combination of ATC modules and sub modules is not possible.

Other features

Current draw +5V

Interfaces

530 mA with eight occupied connecting devices

8 × a/b

MFV/IWV selection

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Dial tone identification, charge count

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Direct current loop controller

An emergency operation switchover can be set up by inserting an EES1B (EES8B) board behind the ATC board.

326

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

LED and Switch Functions

ATC board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

S2-S9 Left position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

S2

Right, then left:

Right:

Left:

S3-S8 Right:

Left:

S9 Right:

Left:

Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Neutral/release

Forced board download

AO1 preparatory disabling

AOx preparatory disabling

AO8 preparatory disabling

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

327

L6

L2

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: flashing: off: on: flashing: off: on:

off:

L3, L4, L5, L7,

L8, L9 on:

L10 off: on:

off:

MDF Connections

colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

Board is busy with switching functions

Board removable after preparatory disabling

Board is not busy

Board reset in progress

Download in progress

Board in operation

AO1 busy

AOx busy

AOx not busy

AO8 busy

MDF

Patch panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter CA1B from ATC

Free

Free

Free

Free

Free

Free

Free

Free a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8

328

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

ATLC Analog TIE Line Circuit

Short description

The Analog TIE Line Circuit (ATLC) module is used for

• networking the MG1000 Media Gateway with the same or other PABXs using analog trunk lines

• connecting of special equipment (e.g. speech memory, door handsfree devices)

The module can be used inland or abroad, e.g. in special police networks, power supply companies, etc.

The ATLC module contains 8 connecting devices. These connecting devices do not have submodules in their basic configuration. This means that signal exchange takes place by means of transmission on separate signal wires according to the signal code plan (S in

/S out

connection setup/disconnection and also S3 in

/

S3 out

for supervisory functions). The speech path can be executed as a two or four-wire path.

Speech wire designation:

• a/b two-wire speech path or outgoing speech path of the four-wire speech path,

• Ka/Kb incoming speech path of the four-wire speech path

The following signaling procedures can be used with these designs:

• Static signals on the S in

(E) and S out

(M) signal wires

• Time-assessed signals on the S in

(E) and S out

(M) signal wires

• Time-specific signaling on the S in

(E) and S out

(M) signal wires, and supervisory functions via the S3 in and S3 out

signal wires.

Dialing information signaling, which controls the connection setup, may appear as:

• Pulses on the signal wires S in

(E) and S out

(M)

• DTMF signals via the speech wires

• Pulse signaling procedure using speech wires (simultaneous transmission). Alternating current transmission

The individual connecting devices can also be equipped with submodules according to application. One terminating set is occupied in each submodule.

The following submodules are available:

• Alternating Current Signaling Submodule (ACSM), alternating current transmission

• Simplex Signaling Submodule (SSSM), simultaneous transmission

• Active Loop Submodule (ALSM/ALSMF/ALSMH), subscriber

• Passive Loop Submodule (PLSM), loop transmission

Signal exchange for these applications takes place via the speech path. An exception to this rule is the

PLSM submodule in certain applications.

The function of the ATLC module is assigned by means of the configuration data at the corresponding slot in the MG1000. The configuration data can be entered or changed using the ICU editor.

The following adaptations and adjustments must be made to the ATLC module’s configuration data for each connecting device:

• Physical interface condition must be adapted

• Signal exchange and speech path version must be adjusted

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

329

Signaling function

The signaling function for the ATLC and it’s submodules is documented in signal code plans. These indicate the physical version (direct current, alternating current, etc.) and also the nature and duration of individual signals (seizure, selection, etc.) corresponding to the exchange connection status.

Changing the connecting device type.

This function type is used to log on part of the ATLC to the MG1000’s controller. This connecting device type must correspond with the customer data set up. The basic setting of the connecting device type for all applications is "QUE". Exceptions to this are stated in the respective signal code plan.

The appropriate interface for opposite transmission with regard to:

• physical version and

• signal exchange can be determined using the ATLC signal code plans.

• Numbering plan

• Alternating current signaling, ACSM

• Simplex signaling a/b ground, SSSM

• No submodule, 2 signal lines

• No submodule, 4 signal lines

• Passive loop signals, PLSM

• Active look signals, ALSM

• Special applications

• Connection examples for door handsfree devices

A signal code plan is set up for each signaling function.

Other features

Region of application

Current requirement +5V

National and international

480 mA

Interfaces

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Eight 2/4-wire speech path with 2/4 signal wires each

Board software download

Configuration data download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

330

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

ATLC board Without Submodule

Each connecting circuit of the ATLC board that is being operated without a submodule can exchange signals with the remote connecting circuit using:

• static signals on the signal wires S in

(E) and S

• time-assessed signals on the signal wires S in out

(M)

(E) and S out

(M)

• time-assessed signals on the signal wires San (E) und Sab (M) and monitoring functions via the signal wires S3an und S3ab

Signalling of the dialling information in order to control the connection setup can be implemented using:

• Pulses on signal wires S an

(E) and S ab

(M) or

• DTMF signals via the speech wires

The corresponding adjustments must be made in the configuration data.

Signalling on the outgoing signal wires S ab (out)

(M) and S3 ab (out) is performed applying a 0V potential during the active signal. When resting or pausing from signalling, the signal wires are unconnected.

The signal wire S ab (out)

(M) can be changed to signalling with a negative potential (-48V) for ATLC boards as of material number: 28.5630.4003. These different signalling methods are internationally designated as type 1 and type 4.

Signalling on signal wires S out

and S in

1. ATLC (first delivery)

2. User

3. ATLC (altered)

The outgoing signal wire S3 ab

is not switchable.

In order to change the signal potential of the S out

signal wire, a breakpoint must be opened for each port and a wire bridge must be soldered in. The following illustration shows the location of the breakpoints and the bridging points.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

331

The ATLC board is a multilayer circuit board. The connector must be removed at a flat angle, so that the conductor tracks located below are not damaged.

Soldering side of the ATLC board. Example of switching the signal potential on port 1 (port 0)

1. Disconnect

2. Connect

With an active S out

(M) line, the minimum current is monitored in static signalling. This recognizes the "presence" of the connected remote side. In order to ensure the error-free operation of the board, the following conditions for the signal wires must be observed.

Input conditions:

Principle of the San signal wire

1. Remote side and connecting cable

2. Indicator

3. Control

332

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

I

I

With HW version .4001 or .4003

IN min

: 3mA

IN max

R

L max

:

:

15 mA (R

L

= 0 Ohm)

12 kOhm (resistive load)

Principle of the S3an (in) signal wire

1. Remote side and connecting cable

2. Indicator

3. Control

With HW version .4001 or .4003

I

IN min

: 3mA

I

IN max

:

R

L max

:

8.6 mA (R

L

= 0 Ohm)

10 kOhm (resistive load)

Output power:

Principle of the Sab (out) signal wire (condition when delivered)

I

1. Control

2. Indicator

3. Remote side and connecting cable

4. Counter-potential type: -48V

With HW version 0.4001

I

OUT P max

: 400 mA

OUT C max

R

ON typ

:

: 100 mA

700 Ohm

I

OUT min

: at U

GP

= -48V

2.5 mA

(R

LD

= 16,4 kOhm)

With HW version .4003

400 mA

100 mA

135 Ohm

1mA

(R

LD

= 46.5 kOhm)

For max. 10 ms

Continuous load

I

OUT

=10 mA

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

333

Principle of the Sab (out) signal wire (switched to -48 V)

1. Control

2. Indicator

3. Remote side and connecting cable

4. Counter-potential

I

OUT P max

:

I

OUT C max

:

R

ON typ

:

I

OUT min

:

With HW version 0.4001

Not switchable

-----//-----

-----//-----

-----//-----

With HW version .4003

400 mA

65 mA

800 Ohm

1mA at R

LD

= 47 kOhm

For max. 10 ms

R

LD

= 0 Ohm

I

OUT

=10 mA

Principle of the S3ab (out) signal wire

1. Remote side and connecting cable

2. Counter-potential type: -48V

With HW version .4001 or .4003

I

OUT P max

:

I

OUT C max

:

R

ON typ

:

400 mA

100 mA

14 Ohm

For max. 10 ms

Continuous load

I

OUT

=10 mA

Adjusting the Configuration Data

• Physical line interface

Make a selected setting according to the requirement of the interface to the remote connecting circuit:

"No submodule, 2 signal lines" (default setting)

"No submodule, 4 signal lines"

334

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Signalling plan

Set the signalling plan so that is identical to that of (coordinated with) the remote connecting circuit.

• Speech path design and relative level

Set one of the following combinations according to the requirement of the interface to the remote connecting circuit. If your country of application is not listed, select the required level setting for D. Your application then corresponds to German transmission technology.

Speech path design Relative level (Pr

E

/Pr

A

) Application in countries

2-wire

2-wire

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

A, D, E, GR

B, L

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

-3/-4 dBr

I

F

NL

D, GR

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

4-wire

4-wire

4-wire

4-wire

4-wire

-3/-4 dBr

-4/-3 dBr

-4/-3 dBr

-5/-2 dBr

-6/-1 dBr

-6/-1 dBr

0/0 dBr

-2.5/-4.5 dBr

-3.5/-3.5 dBr

+4/-14 dBr

+9/-17 dBr

F

B, L

NL

D

A

F

(default setting)

• Modifications of the signal times may only be made in exceptional circumstances on site.

• Some signalling plans require adjustments to be made to the "digits". The permissible settings can be found in the respective signalling plan.

• The only other permissible setting in addition to connecting circuit type "QUe" is "DUe". This connecting circuit type is to be set if special facilities for line adaptation are to be connected to the ATLC board.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

335

Inserting the Submodules

ATLC module, module side

1. Connecting device 1

2. Connecting device 2

3. Connecting device 3

4. Connecting device 4

5. Connecting device 5

6. Connecting device 6

7. Connecting device 7

8. Connecting device 8

Remove the ATLC module from the slot.

The module may be removed and inserted during system operation. The switch functions and

LED displays on the front connector bar must be taken into consideration however.

Remove the strapping plug of the corresponding connecting device (1-8) from the three pin strips.

Insert the submodule into the prepared location.

Insert the ATLC module into the slot.

Once a submodule has been installed, the configuration data must be set up or changed in the MG1000

(line interface, signal code plan and speech path version/level). This is necessary for the ATLC module to work properly with the submodule.

336

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Removing the Submodules

When removing a submodule, reinsert the bridge plug. Make sure it is in the correct position.

Installation which does not correspond with the diagram can lead to faulty functions in the module or MG1000 Media Gateway.

Connection to the MDF

The connectors of the ATLC board are picked up by two 16-pair cables on the CA2B adapter modules, and fed to the MD.

Insert the CA2B adapter module in the respective alignment section.

Insert the Champ plug of the connecting cable into the plug socket of the adapter module.

Attach the connecting cable to the designated fastening grooves.

CA2B adapter module with ATLC board

1. 50-pin Champ plug

2. Cable 1, 16-pair to MDF

3. 50-pin Champ plug

4. Cable 2, 16-pair to MDF

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

337

LEDs and Switch Functions

Switch function

S1 Reset switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Right, then left:

AO1-AO8 S2-S9

Mean:

Left:

Right:

Check S10 *

Center:

Left:

* from .4003!

Right:

Operating state

Preparatory disabling of module (VSP of all connecting devices)

Reset module

Forced module download

Operating state

Test AO1-AO8 (e.g. simulate an S3 in

signal)

AO1-AO8 preparatory disabling (VSP)

Operating state

Extend DTMF signaling to approx. 20 sec. (for testing purposes only)

Not used at present

338

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

LED denotations

L1 on: flashing: off:

L2 on:

flashing: off:

L3

Module is busy in terms of exchange functions

Module removable (all connecting devices blocked or faulty)

Module not busy

Module reset in progress. Programming break in download

Module in operation

Connecting device (AO) status display

L..

on: flashing quickly: flashing slowly:

Flickering to the rhythm of the dial pulse:

AO.. is busy in terms of exchange functions

AO.. is faulty

AO.. is blocked (in terms of software or by preparatory disabling)

AO.. chosen by pulse dialing to transmit, or AO.. receiving pulse dialing dial pulse from transmitter.

AO.. not busy

Data exchange with MG1000 controller L11 * off: on:

L12* off: on: off:

* from .4003!

No data exchange

Error during data transfer with MG1000 controller

Error-free data exchange with MG1000 controller

MDF Connections

Main distributor

If necessary, connect the sheath wires of the connecting cable (open end and WP plug) with the ground terminals.

Connect the connection cable from the MG1000 Media Gateway to the network (patches).

Mark the cable at both ends using the supplied labels.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

339

Connections from the ATLC

Variants

ATLC without submodules

ATLC without submodules

ATLC without submodules

Port

8 (1 per line)

8 (1 per line)

8 (1 per line)

Interfaces/procedures

2-wire speech path,

E+M signaling

4-wire speech path,

E+M signaling

4-wire speech path,

E+M and S3 in signaling

/S3 out

Connections a/b

S in

/S out a/b

Ka/Kb

S in

/S out a/b

Ka/Kb

S an

/S ab

S3 an

/S3 ab

ATLC with SSSM submodules

ATLC with ACSM submodules

ATLC with ALSM/ALSMF submodules or ALSMH

ATLC with PLSM submodules

8 (1 per SSSM)

8 (1 per ACSM)

8 (1 per ALSM/ALSMF)

(1 per ALSMH) a/b ground

50 Hz alternating current

Special facility (e.g.

Analog DID Hong Kong a/b a/b a/b a/b

8 (1 per PLSM) Special facility (e.g. door handsfree device) a/b c/d e/f

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC module without submodules

Colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

MDF

Patch panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB

Cable 1

1a/1b

1Ka/1Kb

2a/2b

2Ka/2Kb

3a/3b

3Ka/3Kb

4a/4b

4Ka/4Kb

5a/5b

5Ka/5Kb

6a/6b

6Ka/6Kb

7a/7b

Cable 2

1S in

/1S out

1S3 in

/1S3 out

2S in

/2S out

2S3 in

/2S3 out

3S in

/3S out

3S3 in

/3S3 out

4S in

/4S out

4S3 in

/4S3 out

5S in

/5S out

5S3 in

/5S3 out

6S in

/6S out

6S3 in

/6S3 out

7S in

/7S out

340

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

7Ka/7Kb

8a/8b

8Ka/8Kb

7S3 in

/7S3 out

8S in

/8S out

8S3 in

/8S3 out

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC module with ACSM or ALSM/ALSMF/ALSMH or

SSSM submodules

Colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

CA2B or CARUB cable adapter

Cable 1 Cable 2

1a/1b free/free

2a/2b free/free

3a/3b free/free

4a/4b free/free

5a/5b free/free

6a/6b free/free

7a/7b free/free

8a/8b free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC module with PLSM submodules

Colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

MDF

Panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

CA2B or CARUB cable adapter

Cable 1

1a/1b free/free

2a/2b free/free

3a/3b free/free

4a/4b free/free

5a/5b free/free

6a/6b free/free

7a/7b

Cable 2

1c/1d

1f/1e

2c/2d

2f/2e

3c/3d

3f/3e

4c/4d

4f/4e

5c/5d

5f/5e

6c/6d

6f/6e

7c/7d

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

341

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16 free/free

8a/8b free/free

7f/7e

8c/8d

8f/8e

PLSM Passive Loop Sub Module

Short description

The sub-module Passive Loop Sub Module (PLSM) realizes the exchange of signals with the opposite transmitter through passive loop signals (HKZ signals) on the speech wires.

The PLSM sub-module is used for the connection of special facilities, e.g.:

• Door handsfree facilities

• Paging systems

• Dictation facilities

For certain special facilities (e.g. door opener), further signals can be fed via additional speech wires.

Other features

Potential applications National and international

Current draw +5V 5 mA

Interface Six wires (a/b/c/d/e/f)

Functions of the Wires a/b wire

The seizure of special facilities is implemented by the closing of the a/b loop. The loop current must be supplied from the special facility (opposite side). If the opposite side cannot provide this supply, the "ATLC without sub-module" version is to be applied.

c wire

The c wire serves to check that the special facility is ready for operation. Here, a -48 V voltage is offered by the PLSM via a resistor. The "ready for operation" status is signaled by the 0 V potential from the special facility.

d wire

The d wire serves to switch on the special facility. The PLSM switches 0 V potential onto the line.

e wire

The e wire is used to implement, for example, the door opening function via the transmitted 0 V potential.

f wire

The f wire serves to block the respective connecting circuit from the paging system so as to prevent an outgoing seizure by the subscriber (0 V potential). When connecting to a door hands free facility, the f wire can be connected to the door bell.

342

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

The described functions of the e and f wires can be changed to the following functions in some signal codes:

• Loop monitoring in place of the f wire

• Earth button function in place of the e wire

To do this, conductor paths must be disconnected and bridges inserted on the PLSM sub-module.

The corresponding adjustments must be made in the configuration data.

Section of the soldering side on the PLSM sub-module

1. For the evaluation of loop current monitoring in place of the f wire disconnect the bridge here

2. For the evaluation of loop current monitoring in place of the f wire insert the bridge here

3. Insert bridge here for the earth button function in place of the e wire

Adjusting the Configuration Data

Physical line interface

Set to "loop signalling passive".

Signalling plan

Set the signalling plan so that is identical to that of (coordinated with) the remote connecting circuit.

Speech path design and relative level

Set one of the following combinations according to the requirement of the interface to the remote connecting circuit.

Speech path design Relative level (Pr

E

/Pr

A

) Application in countries

2-wire

2-wire

0/-7 dBr

-7/0 dBr

A, D, E, GR (default setting)

D

• Changes to the signal times must not be made.

• Adjustments to digits are to be made according to the application of the PLSM (door handsfree facility, paging system, etc.), for example, to provide a code to activate the door opening function. The code can be set once the number of digits in the code has been specified. The functions of the codes depend on the set signalling plan. They are explained in the respective signalling plan.

• Settings for the connecting circuit type must not be changed.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

343

SIGA Signalling Unit A

Short description

The submodule SIGA contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be used as analog trunk module (non direct inward).

Location of the SIGA on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGA

3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features

Country of application

Call recognition (25/50 Hz)

Germany, Russia

Charge recognition (16 kHz)

344

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

SIGB Signalling Unit B

Short description

The submodule SIGB contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be used as analog trunk modules without direct inward dialling.

Location of the SIGB on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGB

3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features

Country of application

Call recognition (20/55 Hz)

Switzerland

Charge recognition (12 kHz)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

345

SIGC Signalling Unit C

Short description

The submodule SIGC contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be connected as trunk modules.

Location of the SIGC on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGC

3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features

Country of application

Call recognition (25 Hz)

Luxemburg

Charge recognition (16 kHz or 50 Hz earth symmetric).

The switchover is made using the ATA board software.

346

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

SIGD Signalling Unit D

Short description

The submodule SIGD contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be used for the direct inward dialling circuits with monitoring frequency.

Location of the SIGD on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGD

3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features

Country of application Austria

12 kHz identifier for supervisory frequency and charges

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

347

SIGE Signalling Unit E

Short description

The submodule SIGE contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be used for DC direct inward dialling (GSD).

Location of the SIGE on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGE

3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features

Country of application

Charge identifier (12 kHz)

Austria

Call identifier (40-60 Hz)

Potential switch and direct current identifier for GSD signalling process.

348

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

SIGF Signalling Unit F

Short description

The submodule SIGF contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be connected as trunk modules.

Location of the SIGF on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGF

3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features

Country of application

Charge identifier (16 kHz)

Belgium

Call identifier (25 Hz)

Dial tone identifier (f1 = 420-460 Hz, f2 = 1140 Hz)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

349

SIGG Signalling Unit G

Short description

The submodule SIGG contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be used as analog trunk modules without direct inward dialling.

Location of the SIGG on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGG

3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features

Country of application

Charge identifier (12 kHz)

Call identifier (20-50 Hz)

Hungary

350

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

SIGH signaling Unit H

Short description

The sub-moduleSIGH contains the functions for 2 connecting devices and is inserted on the ATA2 module.

A maximum of 4 sub modules can be used as analog trunk module without direct inward dialing.

Location of the SIGH on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Sub-module SIGH

3. Connecting device slot

Other features

Countries of use Czech Republic/Slovakia

Charge identifier (16 kHz)

Call identifier (25-50 Hz)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

351

SSBA Signalling Sub Board A

Short description

The submodule SSBA contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATC board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

Location of the SSBA on the ATC module

1. ATC module

2. Submodule SSBA

3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features

Country of application

Call recognition (50 Hz)

France

Charge identifier (12 kHz)

Direct loop current limit: 60 mA

Polarity reversal detection

352

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

SSBB Signalling Sub Board B

Short description

The submodule SSBB contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATC board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

Location of the SSBB on the ATC module

1. ATC module

2. Submodule SSBB

3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features

Country of application

Call recognition (20-30 Hz)

Spain

Charge identifier (50 Hz and 12 kHz)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

353

SSBC Signalling Sub Board C

Short description

The submodule SSBC contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATC board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

Location of the SSBC on the ATC module

1. ATC module

2. Submodule SSBC

3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features

Country of application

Call recognition (25-50 Hz)

Italy

Charge identifier (12 kHz)

Blocking of incoming seizure in case of malfunctions or during shutdown

Polarity reversal detection

Switchable loop impedance (high, low)

354

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

SSBD Signalling Sub Board D

Short description

The submodule SSBD contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATC board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

Location of the SSBD on the ATC module

1. ATC module

2. Submodule SSBD

3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features

Country of application

Call recognition (50 Hz)

Charge identifier (50 Hz)

Polarity reversal detection

Switchable loop impendance

Netherlands

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

355

SSSM Simplex Signaling Submodule

Short description

The simplex signaling submodule (SSSM implements the exchange of signals with the opposite transmitter using DC signals on the speech wires.

Other features

Region of application

Current requirement +5V

National and international

45 mA

Interface for transmitting back and forwards

An a/b ground signaling method (two-core line)

Additional settings are not required in order to carry out signaling with the opposite transmitter.

Combinations with other submodules on an ATLC module are possible.

The corresponding adjustments must be made in the configuration data.

Adjusting the Configuration Data

Physical line interface

Set "Simplex signalling a/b earth".

Signalling plan

Set the signalling plan so that is identical to that of (coordinated with) the remote connecting circuit.

Speech path design and relative level

Set one of the following combinations according to the requirement of the interface to the remote connecting circuit.

Speech path design Relative level (Pr

E

/Pr

A

) Application in countries

2-wire

2-wire

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

A, D, E, GR

B, L

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

0/-7 dBr

-3/-4 dBr

-4/-3 dBr

-4/-3 dBr

-5/-2 dBr

-6/-1 dBr

NL

D, GR(default setting)

B, L

NL

D

A

If your country of application is not listed, select the required level setting for D. Your application then corresponds to German transmission technology.

• Adjustments to times must not be made.

• Adjustments to digits must not be made.

• Settings for the connecting circuit type must not be changed.

356

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

SUPA Supplement A

Short description

The sub-moduleSUPA contains the functions for 2 connecting devices and is inserted on the ATB module.

A maximum of 4 sub modules can be connected.

Location of the SUPA on the ATB module

1. ATB module

2. Sub-module SUPA

3. Connecting device slot

Other features

Countries of use UK/Hong Kong

Call recognition/charge detector (14-26 Hz/50 Hz)

Switch to turn on earth calling signaling systems (ECS)

Highly resistant tape loop for loop calling guarded clearing (LGC)

Auxiliary voltage switch for testing PSTN off-line condition in ECS.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

357

SUPB Supplement B

Short description

The sub-moduleSUPB contains the functions for 2 connecting devices and is inserted on the ATB module.

A maximum of 4 sub modules can be connected.

Location of the SUPB on the ATB module

1. ATB module

2. Sub-module SUPB

3. Connecting device slot

Other features

Countries of use

Call recognition (14-26 Hz/50 Hz)

USA

Ground Start

Loop Start

Auxiliary voltage switch for testing PSTN off-line condition in ECS.

358

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

SUTC Signaling Unit Trunk C

Short description

The SUTC is a submodule of the JPAT. It is used for analog exchange lines (direct inward dialling) with

3-wire signalling.

Location of the SUTC on the JPAT module

1. JPAT module

2. Submodule SUTC

3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features

Country of application Russia

Variants Incoming traffic, local

Incoming traffic, long-distance

Two ports are implemented on each submodule. Using the ICU Editor, the two ports can be configured for incoming local, incoming long-distance or mixed traffic.

The transmission of signals is implemented in decimal dialling (DEC) via DC signalling only and using various resistance values. Only the transmission of ANI is implemented in the voiceband by means of frequency signalling.

The following tables indicate the correlation between the signal, transmission direction and associated resistance value.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

359

Incoming Traffic, Local

Signal

Idle condition control

Seizure

Number reception

(DEC or

MF-PS)

Direction / wire

C

<-------

C

------->

C

<------a

-------> b

-

Incoming end of connection

a b c

Operation with

CO coordinates

-

1000

Ohm

+

1000

Ohm

-

1040

Ohm c

Operation with

CO

HDW

-

1)

Comment

The input resistance of the c-wire depends on the associated central office (CO coordinates or

HDW) and on the line resistance of the c-wire at the HDW system.

A seizure is detected by a current in the c-wire (~ 13 mA). Once detected , the current in the c-wire is limited to 30 mA (call acknowledge).

+ -

Ohm

+ greater/ equal to

R

-

+ greater/ equal to

R

1000

Ohm

1000

Ohm

1040

Ohm

+ greater/ equal to

R

Rin

+ greater/ equal to

R

DEC: Pulse/pause via a/b-wire, or pulse/pause via a-wire only.

MF-PS Dial information in voiceband with frequency signaling

(multi-frequency pulse shuttle).

-

+

: - 60 V

: GND greater/equal R : The size of greater/equal R depends on the line resistance of the c-wire and the associated supply voltage

1) : Line resistance of the c-wire between 0 Ohm - > 500 Ohm = input resistance SUTC

1040 Ohm - 350 Ohm

360

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Signal Direction/ wire

Subscriber B disconnects first a, b

<-------

Subscriber A disconnects a

------->

Incoming end of connection

a b c

Operation with

CO coordinates

+

1000

Ohm

-

200 kOhm c

Operation with

CO

HDW

Comment

Answer or ANI prompt from the

MG1000

Withdraw

ANI prompt a, b

<------a, b

<-------

-

1000

Ohm

+

200 kOhm

+

1000

Ohm

-

-

+

1000

Ohm

1000

Ohm

200 kOhm

-

1040

Ohm

+ greater/ equal to

R

1040

Ohm

+ greater/ equal to

R

1040

Ohm

+ greater/ equal to

R

-

Rin

+ greater/ equal to

R

Rin

+ greater/ equal to

R

Rin

+ greater/ equal to

R

Subscriber B (subsc. in MG1000) disconnects first after a call.

Subscriber B (subsc. in MG1000) is busy.

No available connection paths in

MG1000

The signal is transmitted on two paths. The signal receiver stops working when the current is 6.5 mA. No detection takes place if the current on the a-wire is less than 6.5mA. Reception on the c-wire is interrupted if the control resistance circuit has reached

8000 Ohm and a voltage of 74V.

-

+

: - 60 V

: GND greater/equal R : The size of greater/equal R depends on the line resistance of the c-wire and the associated supply voltage

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

361

Signal

Disconnection in every status

Direction/ wire

c

------->

Incoming end of connection

a b c

Operation with

CO coordinates c

Operation with

CO

HDW

Comment

Ohm

+ greater/ equal to

R greater/ equal to

R disconnected at current of I <10 mA.

Transition to idle status

Blocking c c

<-------

<-------

cal switching status

1000

Ohm

-

1000

Ohm

+

1000

Ohm

+

1000

Ohm

-

1040

Ohm

Insulation

-

1)

Insulation

The MG1000 informs the opposite station that it cannot be seized

(blocking status).

: - 60 V

+ : GND

1) : Line resistance of the c-wire between 0 Ohm - > 500 Ohm = input resistance SUTC 1040 Ohm - 350

Ohm

Incoming Traffic, Long-distance

Signal Direction/ wire

Idle condition control

C

<-------

-

Incoming end of connection

a b c

1000

Ohm

+

1000

Ohm

-

Operation with

CO coordinates

1040

Ohm c

Operation with

CO

HDW

-

1)

Comment

The input resistance of the c-wire depends on the associated central office (CO coordinates or

HDW) and on the line resistance of the c-wire at the HDW system.

362

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Seizure

Number reception

(DEC or

MF-PS)

C

------->

C

<------a

-------> b

-

1000

Ohm

+

1000

Ohm

+ greater/ equal to

R

A seizure is detected in the

MG1000 via a current in the c-wire (~ 13 mA). Once detected, the current in the c-wire is limited to 30 mA. (seizure acknowledgement)

-

Ohm

+ greater/ equal to

R

1040

Ohm

+ greater/ equal to

R

-

Rin

+ greater/ equal to

R

DEC: Pulse/pause via a/b-wire, or pulse/pause via a-wire only.

MF-PS Dial information in voiceband with frequency signaling

(multi-frequency pulse shuttle).

-

+

: - 60 V

: GND greater/equal R : The size of greater/equal R depends on the line resistance of the c-wire and the associated supply voltage

1) : Line resistance of the c-wire between 0 Ohm - > 500 Ohm = input resistance SUTC

1040 Ohm - 350 Ohm

Signal Direction/ wire

Subscriber B free

Calling a, b

<------a or b

------->

Incoming end of connection

a b c

Operation with

CO coordinates

+

1000

Ohm

+

1000

Ohm

-

-

1000

Ohm

1000

Ohm

-

-

1040

Ohm

+ greater/ equal to

R

c

Operation with

CO

HDW

-

Rin

+ greater/ equal to

R

Comment

Subscriber B (subsc. in MG1000) is free once the subscriber B number is received.

The opposite side switches the a or b-wire to a lower resistance in order to display the call signaling.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

363

Subscriber busy or no free connection

Reply a, b

<------a, b

<-------

Subscriber B disconnects a, b

<-------

+

200 kOhm

+

200 kOhm

+

1000

Ohm

-

-

-

1000

Ohm

200 kOhm

1000

Ohm

-

-

1040

Ohm

+ greater/ equal to

R

-

1040

Ohm

+ greater/ equal to

R

> = 1300

Ohm

Rin

+ greater/ equal to

R

Rin

+ greater/ equal to

R

The MG1000 informs the other party of the subscriber or MG1000

Media Gateway status.

Subscriber B (subsc. in MG1000) is busy

No available connection paths in

MG1000

The MG1000 informs the other party when the subscriber has lifted the handset and changes the resistance on the a, b-wire (conversation status).

Subscriber B (subsc. in MG1000) disconnects first after a call.

-

+

: - 60 V

: GND greater/equal R : The size of greater/equal R depends on the line resistance of the c-wire and the associated supply voltage

Signal Direction/ wire

Disconnection at every stage

Block c

-------> c

<-------

-

Incoming end of connection

a b c

Operation with

CO coordinates c

Operation with

CO

HDW

Comment

Depends on technical switching status

1000

Ohm

+

1000

Ohm

Ohm

+ greater/ equal to

R

Insulation greater/ equal to

R

Insulation disconnected at current of I <10 mA.

The MG1000 informs the opposite station that it cannot be seized

(blocking status).

-

+

: - 60 V

: GND

364

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

SUTD signaling Unit Trunk D

Short description

The SUTD is a sub-module of the JPAT. It is used for analog exchange lines (direct inward dialing) with

3-wire signaling.

Location of the SUTD on the JPAT module

1. JPAT module

2. Sub-module SUTD

3. Connecting device slot

Region of application

Variant

Other features

Russia

Outgoing local and long-distance traffic

The transmission of signals is implemented in decimal dialing (DEC) via DC signaling only and using various resistance values. Only the transmission of ANI is implemented in the voiceband by means of frequency signaling. The following tables indicate the correlation between the signal, transmission direction and associated resistance value.

Two ports are implemented on each sub-module.

Outgoing traffic, local and long-distance

Signal Direction / wire

Outgoing end of connection

a b c

Notes

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

365

Idle condition control c

<-------

Seizure

Dec. dialling

(pulse) c

-------> a, b

------->

Subscriber busy

Reply or ANI prompt

Withdraw ANI prompt

Disconnection by called subscriber B b

<------a

<------a

<------a, b

<-------

Signal

Disconnection by called subscriber

A

Disconnection at any stage

Blocking/idle condition control

Direction / wire

a

-------> c

-------> c

<-------

-

+

: - 60 V

: GND

insulated

- 42 kOhm

+ 500

Ohm insulated

-42 kOhm

-42 Ohm

-42 Ohm

-42 Ohm

+ insulated

+ 1 kOhm

- 500

Ohm insulated

+ 1 kOhm

+ 1 kOhm

+ 1 kOhm

+ 1 kOhm

+

+ 22 kOhm

+ 22 kOhm

> = 65

Ohm

> = 65

Ohm

> = 65

Ohm

> = 65

Ohm

> = 65

Ohm

Ringing current monitoring (I ~ 2 mA) to see if the central office (CO) is ready to be seized.

Pause: - 42 kOhm on a-wire

Pause: + 1 kOhm on b-wire

Checks whether current is flowing in the b-wire (I ~ 13 - 20 mA)

Checks whether current is flowing in the a-wire (I ~ 1 mA)

No current in the a or b-wire

Checks whether current is flowing in the b-wire (I ~ 13 - 20 mA)

Outgoing end of connection

a b c

- 1 kOhm

+ 1 kOhm

< + 65

Ohm

Insulation

Insulation

Insulation

Insulation

> + 22 kOhm

> + 22 kOhm

Notes

Current in the a-wire increases from

I ~ 1 mA to I ~ 13 - 20 mA

Checks whether c wire ext. = open

(no current from I ~ 2 mA)

366

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Digital interfaces

Board

DUP03

[

→ 395 ]

DUPN

[

→ 398 ]

DS03

[

→ 388 ]

DT22

[

→ 391 ]

CAS

[

→ 372 ]

IPN

[

→ 413 ]

MAC

[

→ 415 ]

DECT22

[

→ 378 ]

UIP

[

→ 435 ]

MULI

[

→ 428 ]

ADM

[

→ 368 ]

Subboard

EMAC

[

→ 412 ]

CL2ME

[

→ 187 ]

UPSM1

[

→ 440 ]

UPSM

[

→ 440 ]

STSM1

[

→ 434 ]

STSM

[

→ 535 ]

UKSM

[

→ 439 ]

EEADM

[

→ 401 ]

Connection

CA1B

[

→ 239 ]

CA2B

[

→ 240 ]

CA2B

[

→ 240 ]

CA1B

[

→ 239 ]

CA4B

[

→ 243 ]

OFA2B

[

→ 432 ]

OFAS

[

→ 432 ]

CA1B

[

→ 239 ]

CA4B

[

→ 243 ]

CA6B

[

→ 244 ]

CA1B

[

→ 239 ]

CA3B/T

[

→ 242 ]

CA1B

[

→ 239 ]

CA2B

[

→ 240 ]

,

EESS0

[

→ 258 ]

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

367

ADM Analog Digital Mixboard

Short description

The ADM module is a basic module which accommodates up to five sub-boards. The following submodules are available:

SubMod

STSM1

UPSM1

UPSM

ABSM

UKSM

EEADM

Equipment four S

0

/T

0

interfaces as exchange, permanent connection or subscriber connection four U

PN

interfaces as subscriber connection or permanent connection four U

PN

interfaces as subscriber connection or permanent connection four analog subscriber connections (a/b) two U

K0

master interfaces for use of the ADM with S

0

emergency sets via cable adapter EESS0

368

System Manual Integral Enterprise

ADM module, component side

June 2009

Boards

Please note the numbering of the sub-boards.

2

4

1

3

Connecting device 1-4

Connecting device 9-12

Connecting device 5-8

Connecting device 13-16

If the ADM board with emergency switchovers (cable adapter EESS0) is used then the sub-board 3 on it is omitted. On the connector X8 (otherwise used for sub-board 4), you must plug in the sub-board EEADM instead of the sub-board 4.

If the EEADM board on the ADM board is plugged in the incorrect location then this will result in a fault on the ADM board.

On the ADM board, it is possible to use the ICU editor to set the "Call Reference Length -

(CRL)" for the entire board to a length of one or two bytes. The Call Reference Length of 2 bytes is required for QSIG networks with certain external systems. If this setting is chosen all of the ports have CRL=2 bytes, regardless of the currently selected protocol. As a result, connection of system phones with TN1R6 protocol to this ADM board was not possible.

From ICU software release ADM0900.ICL/ADM00009.ICP, the behavior of the ADM module and the MG100 ADM part has been changed. The adjustment of the CRL settings is only performed for the ports of the board which have "QSIG" as their protocol. On all other protocols

CRL=1 always remains.

As a result, it is possible to set up QSIG ports with CRL=2 for external system networking, whereas system phones and permanent connection lines with CRL=1 can be used on other ports with TN1R6 protocol.

Other features

Countries of use

Current requirement +5V

Interfaces

Application in all countries

230 mA

16 times 2/4-wire

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Download board software

Board identification using board ID data

Maintenance function

In connection with V24IA module debugging interface on module front

Debugger=troubleshooting program

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

369

LEDs and Switch Functions

DECT module, front side

1. RJ45 connector with PIN assignment

Switch Functions

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Preparatory disabling (of all connecting devices)

Operation status/release

Reset module

Forced module download

At the end of the download process the module is automatically reset.

In order to prevent infinite repetition of the download, the switch S1 must be returned to the middle position after the message "Test Reply 1".

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1 On:

Flashing:

Board is busy with switching functions

Module is removable after preparatory disabling

370

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

L3

L4

L5

L2

Off:

On:

Flashing:

Off:

L6

Module is not busy

Module reset in progress

Download in progress

Available

Available

On:

On:

Layer 1 of the digital connecting device 1 active or analog connecting device 1 busy

Layer 1 of the digital connecting device 2 active or analog connecting device 2 busy

L7-L19

L20

On:

On:

Layer 1 of the digital connecting device 3...15 active or analog connecting device 3...15 busy

Layer 1 of the digital connecting device 16 active or analog connecting device 16 busy

MDF Connections

Colours

16x2

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

MDF, Cable 1

Patch panel for the two wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Patch panel for the four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

1st slot

2nd slot

STSM1

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

A2/B2 (T)

C2/D2 (R)

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

A5/B5 (T)

C5/D5 (R)

A6/B6 (T)

C6/D6 (R)

A7/B7 (T)

C7/D7 (R)

A8/B8 (T)

C8/D8 (R)

A3/B3 free

A4/B4 free

A5/B5 free

A6/B6 free

via CA2B from

with

UPSM,

UPSM1

ADM with

UKSM

A1/B1 free

A2/B2 free

A1/B1 free

A2/B2 free

A7/B7 free

A8/B8 free free free free free free free free free

A3/B3 free

A4/B4 free a4/b4 free a5/b5 free a6/b6 free a7/b7 free a8/b8 free

ADM with

ABSM,

ABSM1 a1/b1 free a2/b2 free a3/b3 free

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

371

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

Colours

16x2

MDF Cable 2

Patch panel for the two wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Patch panel for the four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

3rd slot

4th slot

STSM1

via CA2B from

UPSM,

UPSM1

ADM with

UKSM

ADM with

ABSM,

ABSM1

A9/B9 (T) A9/B9 A5/B5

C9/D9 (R) free free

A10/B10 (T) A10/B10 A6/B6

C10/D10 (R) free

A11/B11 (T) A11/B11

C11/D11 (R) free

A12/B12 (T) A12/B12 free free free free

C12/D12 (R) free free

A13/B13 (T) A13/B13 A7/B7

C13/D13 (R) free free

A14/B14 (T) A14/B14 A8/B8

C14/D14 (R) free

A15/B15 (T) A15/B15

C15/D15 (R) free

A16/B16 (T) A16/B16

C16/D16 (R) free free free free free free a9/b9 free a10/b10 free a11/b11 free a12/b12 free a13/b13 free a14/b14 free a15/b15 free a16/b16 free

CAS Channel Associated Signalling

Short description

TheThe CAS module is a PCM30 interface for up to 30 B channels in accordance with CCITT. The module contains the following features:

Other features

Region of application National and international

Current draw +5V 930 mA

Line signaling in channel 16 (CAS) in accordance with CCITT or country/customer specifications.

Register signaling in 30 B channels (inband) in accordance with CCITT or country/customer specifications.

Can be used as an exchange interface, connection line or special interface.

Incoming, outgoing and bothway traffic direction, can also be mixed as required

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Module software download.

PCM30 interface configuration via module software.

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance functions

372

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

CAS-TIELINE User Program

Introduction

The CAS-TIELINE user program is a QUE program that was designed especially for the Integral Enterprise system on the CAS HW platform. The 16 different QUE variants are designated E1 to E10/2.

The user data is adapted to individual requirements by means of the ICU mask.

Hardware

The CAS module (channel associated signaling) is used here. Depending on the application, the 2 MBit/s interface can be configured using the confidata (see Section "ICU mask and confidata") with impedance of

75

(unsymmetrical) or 120

(symmetrical).

One of the following appropriate adapter modules (for MG1000 only) is then required for line connection:

• CA1B for 120

(symmetrical)

• CA4B for 75

(unsymmetrical)

Further general information about the CAS module, in particular about the controls and denotations of the front connector bar, can be gathered from the appropriate paragraphs.

Software

The CAS module is set up with KAD (customer specific user data) for TIELINE application. This requires the corresponding load list name for the accompanying slot address to be entered.

The necessary parameters (confidata) are then set up using the ICU editor. The corresponding ICP files and the confidata subsequently end up on the CAS module by means of a download.

Brief description of applications

The TIELINE user program supports inband signaling (DTMF dial codes, audible tones) and line signaling

(signaling channel bit a). For line bits b, c and d, bcd = 101 applies. Only changes to bit a will be processed by the user program. Changes to the bcd bits will be ignored.

16 different signaling plans are produced from the available signal stock. These plans can be selected using the confidata and always apply to all 30 connecting devices (AO).

In principle all the AOs are set up for both-way throughput.

Line signaling will not be carried out if all the signals appear as pulsed signals.

DTMF (dual tone multi-frequency dialing) and pulse dialing are suitable dialing systems.

The suffix dialing facility is guaranteed for the entire duration of an outgoing call, and for a predefined period of an incoming call.

If the criterion "message" is identified, an active call will be cut off, incl. deleting the chipcard data.

The eligibility or ineligibility of a line can be set up by the confidata separately for incoming and outgoing

AOs.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

373

In the same way, a 425 Hz continuous tone can be connected to the switching matrix as a proceed-to-select signal for outgoing traffic, or a 425 Hz busy tone to the line for incoming traffic according to configuration.

Up to 10 digits can be programmed for a destination in outgoing traffic. The destination will be chosen automatically according to the preset timeout when "eligible" or "ineligible" in the absence of the "dialing" message.

If "eligible"; incoming "dialing" messages are ignored once the timeout has ended. If "ineligible"; they will always be ignored. The suffix dialing facility is also guaranteed for the previous destination when in call status.

Outgoing DTMF signals which are "called through" will be identified, and incoming "dialing" messages are subsequently ignored.

An area code may be programmed, which will be relayed to the GCU global control unit during incoming occupancy once the proceed-to-select criterion (signal, time) has been met.

Where "dial" or "message" information is absent, the release which has been initialized by the user program’s watchdog exists neither for incoming nor for outgoing traffic.

If a fault occurs, trouble signaling to the opposite side can be activated using confidata.

In the same way, an unblocking function can be set up for each connecting device. When active (blokking-n = on), and with the front connector bar switches TBS (total blocking switch) and TBS-N (total blokking switch minus n) switched on, the corresponding connecting device will not be blocked.

Specification of inband signals

The available DTMF transmitters and receivers are set out in accordance with CEPT recommendation T/

CS 46-02.

The tone identifier will certainly operate in the range of 350 to 500 Hz with -30 dBm0.

The tone generator supplies a 425 Hz frequency with a transmission level of -3 dBm0. In outgoing traffic, it can be sent to the switching matrix as a proceed-to-select signal (continuous tone). In incoming traffic, it can be connected to the line as a busy tone (German rhythm).

Synchronization

The CAS module can generally be used as the synchronous clock supplier for synchronization purposes.

In the TIELINE application, however, this is only sensible if no digital exchange interfaces or group lines are present.

This is the reason for the default setting of "No synchronous clock". This setting can be changed via the configuration data.

374

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Identifying the Operation Phase

As described above, the boot software controls

• initialization,

• test and download procedures after a reset and

• indicates various statuses and possible faults by means of the LED’s on the front panel.

If no faults are found and all GCU messages (test messages, "startup ready" etc) have been received, L1 will flash eleven times and L9, L7, L8, L15 and L16 will go out, indicating that the operation phase has been reached.

LED and Switch Functions

The functions of the switches and LED’s on the front panel differ in boot phase from those in operation phase.

Following a reset, the boot software carries out initialization, test and download procedures, and indicates various statuses as well as possible faults via the LEDs on the front panel.

If no faults are found and all necessary GCU messages (test messages, "ready for startup" etc.) have been received, the CAS board will reach the operation phase, where user software is put into effect.

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

S2

S3

Middle position

Middle position

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

375

Switch Function

S1 Left:

S3

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

S2 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Preparatory disabling (TBS) *

Neutral/release

Reset board

Forced board download

Preparatory disabling (TBS-N) *

Neutral

No function

No function

No function

No function

* With S1 (TBS) in the left position and S2 (TBS-N) in the middle position, all 30 ports will be blocked.

With S1 (TBS) and S2 (TBS-N) in the left position, all ports outlined in the configuration data will not be blocked.

If S1 (TBS) is in the middle position, all 30 ports will not be blocked, irrespective of the position of S2

(TBS-N).

L4

L5

L6

L7

Meanings of LEDs

L1 TSL Total status LED

L2

L3

ESY

LOS

External synchronization

No signal

LOF

CRC

RFR

ISU1

Frame failure

CRC4 test fault

Frame failure at remote side

**

L8

L9

ISU3

RDL

L10 MSG

L11 AIS

L12 LMF

L13 BIT

L14 RMF

L15 ISU2

L16 ISU4

**

LED reset/download

C-bus message

Alarm identification signal

Superframe failure

Increased bit error ratio

Superframe failure at remote side

**

**

** The denotation of the LEDs depends on the application (display of R2 register, DTMF receiver/ transmitter, tone transmitter/receiver)

376

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

MDF Connections

MDF Connection via CA1B from the CAS Module

Cable end

Colours

BK/BN

BK/RD

CA1B

CAS

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

MDF Connection via CA4B from the CAS Module

Coax

Coax

1

2

A1/B1

C1/D1

Transmit

Receive

CL2ME Clock 2 Module Extended

Short description

The CL2ME submodule supplies an external clock pulse using a normal clock (TAREF). This is required when DECT intermodule handover is used in twin and multi-module configuration.

Use on

UIP/ICF 2048 kHz receiver

Other features

Current requirement +5V 100 mA

If the CL2ME is positioned on slot 1 of the UIP, the connection of the line can be made via the CA3B/T module.

Location of CL2ME on the UIP module

1. Connecting device slot

2. UIP module

3. CL2ME module

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

377

DECT22 ICU for DECT applications 22

Short description

The DECT22 module is used to connect the radio base station to the Integral Enterprise.

1. RM 588 Part no.: 4.998.001.296

2. RM 603 Part no.: 4.999.109.229

3. RM 617 Part no.: 4.999.117.297 (indoor variant for enclosed rooms)

4. RM 717 Part no.: 4.999.117.298 (weatherproof outdoor variant)

It performs an automatic runtime measurement. The manual measurement of the individual routes up to 1 km is not applicable as long as no repeater is connected between.

The DECT22 module is a resdesign of the DECT21 and replaces it. The behavior is the same as the

DECT21. Both the DECT21 and DECT22 can be used in an MG1000 Media Gateway. As DECT21 and

DECT22 have the same board type (DT32), a DECT22 can therefore also be used with older software versions.

The distinction is made via the Service Tool "ICU Editor" in the load list. It should be noted here that a

DECT22 must be set up in the ICU Editor. If a slot is set up for a DECT21 and a DECT22 is used, it will not work.

In contrast to the DECT21, the DECT22 uses a modern processor system with operating system (Linux).

Accordingly, a few things need to be taken into account when downloading the board software and commissioning the board.

(cf.

Startup of the DECT22

[

→ 385 ]

)

Other features

Region of application

Current requirement +5V

Interfaces

National and international

860 mA

8 U

PD

interfaces for RBS

A U

PD

interface corresponds to 2 physical U

PN

interfaces.

The ADPCM (Adaptive-Differential-Pulse-Code-Modulation, 32 kbit/s) conversion is carried out on the module.

One of the two D channels is used for the transmission of synchronization information between the

DECT22 module and the RBS.

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Download from board software

(1)

Board identification using board ID data

Maintenance function

Note 1:

If a DECT22 is to be operated on a slot set up for DECT21, you must first use the ICU Editor service tool to set up a DECT22 module. The DECT22 cannot be operated with the program for a DECT21.

378

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Line lengths

Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y diam. 0.6 mm

External cable A-2YF(L)2Y 0.6 mm

2

Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y 0.6 mm

2

and U

PN

repeater

External cable A-2YF(L)2Y 0.6 mm

2

and U

PN

repeater

1.0 km

1.0 km

2x 1.0 km

2x 1.0 km

Boards

DECT22 module, module side

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

379

LEDs and Switch Functions

DECT22 module, front side

Function of the Switches

S1 Right:

Middle: Normal

Left: During operation of the DECT22

No function

After reset up to initial test response

Forced download of the board software (S2 in normal position for this), at the end of the download process the board is automatically reset.

In order to prevent infinite repetition of the download, the switch

S1 must be returned to the middle position after the message

"Test Reply 1".

S2 Right:

During operation of the DECT22

Yet to be defined

Middle: Normal

Left: No function

After reset up to initial test response

Prevention of a download of the board SW, even if a more recent version is available on the background memory or when forced by S1.

380

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

L3

L4

L5

L6

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1 Off: Module is not busy

L2

On:

Off:

Module is busy in terms of exchange functions

Synchronization slave

On: Synchronization master

Layer 1, active port 0

Layer 1, active port 2

Layer 1, active port 4

L7

L8

L9

L10

Layer 1, active port 6

Layer 1, active port 8

Layer 1, active port 10

Layer 1, active port 12

L11

L12

Flashing:

Off:

Flashing:

Layer 1, active port 14

FP download active

Initialization phase

L13

L14

L15

L16

L17

Off:

On:

Flashing:

User program running

(1)

Module in operation

Module reset in progress

Download in progress

All 30 B-channels are busy

Layer 1, active port 1

Layer 1, active port 3

L18

L19

L20

L21

Layer 1, active port 5

Layer 1, active port 7

Layer 1, active port 9

Layer 1, active port 11

L22

L23

L24

Flashing:

Off:

Flashing:

Layer 1, active port 13

Layer 1, active port 15

SW IDM in ICU activated

Initialization phase

User program running

(1)

Note 1:

Alternate flashing of L12 and L24 (approx. 1s cycle) signals that the user program is running properly.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

381

MDF Connections

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

Panel for four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

via CA1B from DECT21 or DECT22

1st Station

2nd Station

3rd Station

4th Station

5th Station

6th Station

7th Station

8th Station

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

382

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Connections to the DECT22 front panel

There are two RJ45 sockets on the bottom half of the DECT22 front panel. They are arranged in the following way with the following functions:

Legend:

1. Ethernet interface (no function)

2. RS232 interface

The socket for the Ethernet interface is not occupied in the series version.

The RS232 interface can be used for test functions. Allocation of the connections:

6

7

4

5

2

3

Pin

1

8

Signal

nc

RS232_TXD

RS232_RXD nc

GND nc

RS232_CTS

RS232_RTS

Function

Not connected

Serial data output (with RS232 level)

Serial data input (with RS232 level)

Not connected

Mass

Not connected

Clear to send input (with RS232 level), signal not used

Request to send output (with RS232 level), signal not used

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

383

Important: RS232 levels are available at the interface.

Use of the V24 level adapter is not permitted.

38400 Baud no parity

1 Stop bit no flow control (HW or SW handshake)

Notes on the program of the DECT22

Linux is used as the operating system on the DECT22. This means on the one hand that a modern operating system is used which allows adaptation to other processor platforms. On the other hand, the amount of data required for operation on the board is also increased.

The board software is divided into three files for the program download:

The user program DEC22Axx.ICP

The operating system

The file system

DEC22Kxx.ICP

DEC22Rxx.ICP

("xx" is a placeholder for different SW versions)

Based on the assumption that the file system and the operating system are stable and that only the user program needs to be replaced during a software upgrade, two loading list files were specified for the program download: with all program files only with the user program

DECT22L0.ICL

DECT2200.ICL

The user program contains all of the functional units like the download program, DSP programs, FP software, specific driver SW for DECT HW components and DECT functions. Downloading the user program alone significantly shortens loading times. In the ICU editor you can choose between the two loading lists, whereby the loading list DECT2200.ICL is set by default.

Together with the corresponding system software (*) the DECT22 enables the so-called turbo-download, which significantly reduces the loading time (e.g. loading according to DECT22L0.ICL takes around 15 minutes). The loading time without turbo-download takes around 65 minutes for all files, or 15 minutes for the user program alone. It is assumed that a simultaneous download of all files will only take place very rarely.

_____________________________

(*)

Software system from the following versions:

E07V09,

L021V01_4 and

L03V01_3

384

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Startup of the DECT22

After resetting the DECT22 (by plugging the module, executing the Remote Reset command or resetting via the switch S1 on the front), the RAM memory contained and compressed in the flash PROM is copied into the RAM memory, decompressed and started. This process can take up to a minute. During this time, no LED signals are output on the front panel. In order to prevent misinterpretation, a number of states for the startup of a DECT22 are described below.

Display after a reset:

All LEDs switched off except L13

The programs are being decompressed and copied to RAM. This status lasts around one minute (75 seconds max.).

Display when the operating system is running and the user program has been started:

L13 flashes

L3 to L6 and L15 to L18 are switched on

This status lasts a maximum of approximately 5 seconds (in practice, it is usually so short that it is barely even noticed).

L12 and L24 flash alternately in 1-second intervals.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

385

Display once the first messaging traffic with the control of the MG1000 has taken place

(Test_response_1):

L13 flashes

L3 goes out, L4 to L6 and L15 to L18 remain switched on.

L12 and L24 flash alternately in 1-second intervals.

If the program download was forced via S1 (switch to the left), then S1 must now be moved back into the normal position (middle). The transition to the next state takes either around 5s if no program download is taking place, or around 2 minutes when a program download is initiated. The display states and transition times until complete commissioning of the DECT22 without program download correspond to the standard for an MG1000 module, so this is not covered in any more detail here.

Display during a program download

L13 flashes

Via L3/L4 and L15/L16 the individual states during data reception are displayed.

With the receipt of the program data, L3/L4 and L15/L16 are switched on alternately.

The data are being stored in the RAM and - if a file has been completely received - programmed into the flash memory.

L12 and L24 flash alternately in 1-second intervals.

386

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Display when all program data have been received

L13 flashes

The alternating flashing of L3/L4 and L15/L16 ends.

Programming of the data from the RAM into the flash PROM continues. Depending on the download (i.e. everything or just the user program), this status can last for up to 4.5 minutes (if everything is to be loaded).

L12 and L24 flash alternately in 1-second intervals.

Display that the program download has been performed successfully

L13 flashes

L3 and L4 are switched on, L15 and L16 are off.

The checksum test for the loaded program has been successfully performed.

DECT22 now stops the test message traffic in order to force a restart from the plant control. After the reset the DECT22 starts with the loaded software.

L12 and L24 flash alternately in 1-second intervals.

Attention:

If S1 is not to the normal position then the program will be downloaded again.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

387

DS03 Digital Linecard S0 Variant 3

Short description

The DS03 board replaces the DS02 board and provides also 16 supplied, digitale S

0

subscriber ports.

Other features

Country of application National and international

Power demand +5V 445 mA, no terminal connected

Power supply

Interfaces

48V/100mA, short-circuit-proof

16 supplied, digital S

0

subscriber ports range: four-wire

150m Bus S0 (four-wire), short bus, installation cable Ø 0,6 mm J-Y(ST)Y

500m Bus S0 (four-wire), extended bus, installation cable Ø 0,6 mm

J-Y(ST)Y

1km

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

S0 PTP (four-wire), installation cable Ø 0,6 mm J-Y(ST)

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

In conjunction with V24IA board debugging interface on board front

Debugger = program that helps to track down errors

388

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

LEDs and Switch Functions

Boards

DS03 module, front side

1. RJ45 connector

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

Function of the Switches

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (VSP) for all connecting circuits

Middle:

Right: then left: at the end of the download process the module is automatically reset.

In order to prevent infinite repetition of the download, the switch S1 must be returned to the middle position after the message "Test Reply 1".

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

389

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1 On:

Flashing:

Off:

L2 On:

Flashing:

L3

Off:

Free

L4

L5

L6-L19

L20

Free

On:

Off:

On:

Off:

On:

Off:

Board is busy with switching functions

Module is removable after preparatory disabling

Module is not busy

Module reset in progress

Module has gone into operation

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 0 active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 0 inactive

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1/14 active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1/14 inactive

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 15 active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 15 inactive

MDF Connections

Colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Panel for four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

C2/D2 (R)

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

via CA2B from DS02 or DS03

Cable 1 Cable 2

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

A9/B9 (T)

C9/D9 (R)

A2/B2 (T)

C10/D10 (R)

A10/B10 (T)

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

A5/B5 (T)

C5/D5 (R)

A6/B6 (T)

C6/D6 (R)

A7/B7 (T)

C7/D7 (R)

A8/B8 (T)

C8/D8 (R)

A11/B11 (T)

C11/D11 (R)

A12/B12 (T)

C12/D12 (R)

A13/B13 (T)

C13/D13 (R)

A14/B14 (T)

C14/D14 (R)

A15/B15 (T)

C15/D15 (R)

A16/B16 (T)

C16/D16 (R)

390

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

DT22 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 2

The DT22 board provides a configurable S

2M

interface.

Other features

Region of application

Current requirement +5V

Interfaces

National and international

600 mA

One S

2M

interface (Exchange(T2) - or FV(TIE)), 120 Ohm symm. or 75 Ohm asymm. (not provided for use in MG100)

Optical interface driver(not provided for use in MG100)

One RJ45 socket on the front for S

2M

(twisted pair only) as an alternative to the cable adapter

2.048 MHz clock pulse output(not provided for use in MG100)

V.24 test interface (front panel) and IDM

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Cable adapter/front socket

For use in MG1000

Possible adapter boards: CA1B, CA4B, OFA2B, OFAS,

S

2M

also via front socket

For use in MG100

NT feed via ESBx

None, direct tap on the front panel only

NT feed via an external mains adapter plug (part no.

27.4402.1056).

Ranges

For use in MG1000

37 dB attenuation range

Wire interfaces (CA1B or CA4B)

120 Ohm symmetric

75 Ohm coax

Optical interface (OFA1B)

0.9 km

1.8 km

Installation cable

TF cable

1.5 km

Monomode cable 9/125 micrometer, 11 dB max. attenuation for entire optical path (e.g. max. 20 km at 0.4 dB/km and 7 plug connections 0.4 dB/plug)

For use in MG100

37 dB attenuation range

Wire interfaces (direct tap on the front panel)

120 Ohm symmetric 0.9 km

1.8 km

Installation cable

TF cable

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

391

LEDs and Switch Functions

DT22 module, front side

1. S2M front interface via RJ45 (as an alternative to the backplane)

Pin1 RX+ Receive

Pin2 RX- Receive

Pin4

Pin5

L13

L14

TX+ Transmit

TX- Transmit

S2M active to backplane

S2M active to front

Activation of the front panel is indicated with the green LED. Five jumpers need to be replugged on the board. In addition, all cable adapters need to be removed.

392

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

2. V24 and IDM interface

1 = not occupied

V24: 2 = RXD

3 = TXD

IDM:

4 = +5V

5 = GND

6 = D-Channel Data upstream

7 = D-Channel Data downstream

8 = Clock burst 2.048 MHz

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

S2 Middle position

Function of the Switches

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling

S2

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Left, then right:

Operation status/release

Reset module

Forced download of the board, at the end of the download process the module is automatically reset.

In order to prevent infinite repetition of the download, the switch S1 must be returned to the middle position after the message "Test Reply 1".

Report (fault statistic message to the system console) Switch must be returned to the center position (2 MHz cycle output off) or to the right (2 MHz cycle output on).

Middle:

Right:

Standard operation / 2 MHz cycle output off

2 MHz cycle output on

L2

L3

L4

L5

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1 On: Board is busy with switching functions

Flashing: Module is removable after preparatory disabling

Off: Module is not busy

L6

L7

L8

On:

On:

On:

On:

On:

On:

Module is synchronous clock supplier

Remote Alarm Indication RAI (opposite side reporting fault status)

Alarm Indication Signal AIS (opposite side reporting "Out of Order")

Loss of Signal LOS (no receiving signal)

Rx E bit errors

Module reset in progress

Flashing: Download in progress

Off: Module in operation

On: Normal operation (layer 1 active, no alarm)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

393

L9

L10

L11

L12

On:

On:

On:

On:

Bit error rate > 10

-6

Bit error rate > 10

-3

Loss of Framing LOF (loss of frame synchronization)

The LED signals an activated debug monitoring. LED 12 is used as indicator as this debugging has an adverse effect on the real-time function of the module. It is possible to activate the debugging with a terminal connected (on the front panel of the DT22) and subsequently remove the terminal in which case the debugging will inadvertently remain switched on.

A special IDM cable needs to be used on the DT22 for connection of an IDM to the front panel, part no.: 49.999.114.507.

Connections - DT22 to MDF and front panel

MDF Connection via CA1B from the DT22 Board

Cable end

Colors old

BK/BN

Colors new

BN/WHBN

BK/RD

BK/OG

BK/YE

BU/WHBU

GN/WHGN

OG/WHOR

MDF Connection via CA4B or OFA1B from the DT22 Board

Coax 1 A1/B1 Transmit

Coax 2 C1/D1 Receive via CA1B from the DT22

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

A2/B2 (2 MHz pulse to NT)

Free

_______________________________________________________

Connection via RJ45 to the front panel of the DT22 board

RJ45 with LED is the S

2M

interface

Pin1

Pin2

RX+

RX-

Receive

Receive

Pin4

Pin5

TX+

TX-

Transmit

Transmit

In order to activate this socket, five jumpers need to be replugged on the board and the corresponding cable adapters need to be removed.

394

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

DUP03 Digital Subscriber UP0 HW Variant 3

Short description

The DUP03 board provides 16 U

PN interface.

Other features

Country of application

Power demand +5V

Interfaces

Power supply

National and international

640 mA

16 U

PN

ports for digital U

PN terminals e.g. terminals likeTK93 etc. as well as the terminals of the T3 family two-wire; transmission rate: 384 kbit/s

Two 64 kbit/s B channels and one 16 kbit/s D channel

16 dB attenuation range

-48 V/max. 60 mA short-circuit-proof for increased power consumption, e.g.

T3 terminals

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

In conjunction with V24IA board debugging interface on board front

Debugger = program that helps to track down errors

Line lengths 1 km Installation cable (I-Y(ST)Y Ø 0.6 mm

2.8 km Outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø 0,6 mm

1.8 km Outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø 0.4 mm

Using a U

PN

repeater enables the range of the U

PN

interface to be extended.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

395

LEDs and Switch Functions

DUP03 module, front side

1. RJ45 connector with PIN assignment

1 = not occupied

2 = +5 V (via 68 Ohm)

3 = DEB_IN

4 = RXD

5 = TXD

6 = GND

7 = GND

8 = not occupied

Switch Functions

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Preparatory disabling (of all connecting devices)

Right, Forced download of the board, then left: at the end of the download process the module is automatically reset.

In order to prevent infinite repetition of the download, the switch S1 must be returned to the middle position after the message "Test Reply 1".

396

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1 On: Board is busy with switching functions

Flashing:

Off:

Module is removable after preparatory disabling

Module is not busy

L2 On:

Flashing:

L3

Off:

Module reset in progress

Module in operation

Free

L4

L5

L6

L7-L19

L20

Free

On: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1 active

On:

On:

On:

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 2 active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit .. or .. active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 16 active

MDF Connections

MDF

Colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

Panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

via CA1B from the DUP03

A9/B9

A10/B10

A11/B11

A12/B12

A13/B13

A14/B14

A15/B15

A16/B16

A1/B1

A2/B2

A3/B3

A4/B4

A5/B5

A6/B6

A7/B7

A8/B8

Boards

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

397

DUPN Digital Subscriber UPN

Short description

The DUPN board provides 32 U

PN interfaces for digital terminals.

Other features

Country of application National and international

Power demand +5V 1100 mA

Interfaces 32 U

PN

ports for digital U

PN terminals e.g. terminals likeTK93 etc. as well as the terminals of the T3 family

Mode one B channel per interface two B channels per interface

Power supply two-wire; transmission rate: 384 kbit/s one or two 64 kbit/s B channels and one 16 kbit/s D channel

16 dB attenuation range

-48 V/max. 60 mA short-circuit-proof for increased power consumption, e.g. T3 terminals

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

In conjunction with V24IA board debugging interface on board front

Debugger = program that helps to track down errors

Line lengths 1 km Installation cable (I-Y(ST)Y Ø 0.6 mm

2.8 km Outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø 0,6 mm

Using a U

PN

repeater enables the range of the U

PN

interface to be extended.

398

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

LEDs and Switch Functions

Boards

DUPN module, front side

1. RJ45 connector with PIN assignment

1 = not occupied

2 = +5 V (via 68 Ohm)

3 = DEB_IN

4 = RXD

5 = TXD

6 = GND

7 = GND

8 = not occupied

Switch Functions

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Preparatory disabling (of all connecting devices)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

399

S2 left: at the end of the download process the module is automatically reset.

In order to prevent infinite repetition of the download, the switch S1 must be returned to the middle position after the message "Test Reply 1".

Left or middle: Status display of layer 1 of the AOs 1..0.16 activated

Right: Status display of layer 1 of the AOs 17...32 activated

Interpretation of the LEDs

L3

L4

L1

L2

L5

L6

L7-L19

L20

On:

Flashing:

Off:

On:

Flashing:

Off:

Free

Free

On:

On:

On:

On:

Board is busy with switching functions

Module is removable after preparatory disabling

Module is not busy

Module reset in progress

Download in progress

Module in operation

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1 or 17 active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 2 or 18 active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit .. or .. active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 16 or 32 active

MDF connections DUPN

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Patch panel for the two wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

via CA2B from DUPN

Cable 1 Cable 2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B17

A18/B18

A3/B3

A4/B4

A5/B5

A6/B5

A19/B19

A20/B20

A21/B21

A22/B22

A7/B7

A8/B8

A9/B9

A10/B10

A11/B11

A12/B12

A13/B13

A14/B14

A15/B15

A16/B16

A23/B23

A24/B24

A25/B25

A26/B26

A27/B27

A28/B28

A29/B29

A30/B30

A31/B31

A32/B32

400

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

EEADM Emergency Extension Analog Digital Mixboard

Short description

The sub-module EEADM is plugged with the sub-module STSM1 onto the connector X8 on the ADM board when it is being operated with the emergency switchover (cable adapter EESS0). It is used to detect whether the ADM is present.

If required, plug the EEADM sub-module into the X8 connector on the ADM board, see diagram below:

ADM module, component side

Slot 3 (X5/X6) remains unoccupied in this case.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

401

EES0B Emergency Extension Switch S0 B Module

Short description

The Emergency Extension Switch S

0

is available for answering equipment that must always be reachable

(e.g. police, fire department or Red Cross). In the event of a power failure or other malfunctions, this modules enables a switchover from the connecting line coming from the ISDN network to sets that are powered by the ISDN network.

EES0B module

1. Cable 1 + 2, each 24-pair to external MDF

2. Champ plug

3. EES0B

4. Pl.1

5. Pl.2

Settings

Connection to a DT0, i.e. 2 DAs are to be switched per section.

Switchover is implemented to a set that is only used when the switchover is active.

For this purpose, a switchover with 1 WP each for the analog voice documentation.

Two 50-pin plugs are available as external connectors.

Switch-over criteria

General power failure

PC Board DT0 removed

Manual actuation of an external potential-free switch

The number of sections is determined by the limited number of plug positions.

The section 1..6 contains the switchover option. Sections 7 and 8 are directly switched through.

The switchover is implemented with 4 wires.

402

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

For each section, an additional 2 switchover contacts are brought out, via which, for example, lines to voice recording devices are switched.

The power supply to the module is implemented with GND from the DT0. -48 V is fed via the connecting cable.

One wire is fed for the forced switchover via the connecting cable.

Connection cables required: 2 cables 24x2 MG1000-HVT 29.9030.56xx (xx = cable length)

Block diagram

Emergency switchover facility for S0 lines

1. ISDN line

2. Answering with emergency set

3. Answering without emergency set

4. Answering

5. Emergency set

6. ZN

7. manual emergency switching

8. Documentation

Further Information

An NTBA with emergency supply is used as the NT, and the exchange dialling can be loaded with up to

380 mW in this case.

In normal operation, the emergency set has no function and therefore nothing appears in the display.

Facilities of this type are normally only to be handled by trained personnel. It can then be assumed that no unqualified actions shall be initiated by the users.

Each cable adapter is provided with 125 mA semi-lag fuse protection.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

403

MDF Connections

MDF Cable 1

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

MDF Cable 2

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

TA1/TB1

TC1/TD1

TA2/TB2

TC2/TD2

TA3/TB3

TC3/TD3

TA4/TB4

TC4/TD4

TA5/TB5

TC5/TD5

TA6/TB6

TC6/TD6

TA7/TB7

TC7/TD7

TA8/TB8

TC8/TD8

EA1/EB1

EC1/ED1

EA2/EB2

EC2/ED2

EA3/EB3

EC3/ED3

EA4/EB4

EC4/ED4

Emergency Extension Switch S

0

with DT0

ISDN lines with emergency switching

ISDN lines without emergency switching

Emergency sets

EA5/EB5

EC5/ED5

EA6/EB6

EC6/ED6

RA1/RB1

ERA1/ERB1

EOA1/EOB1

RA2/RB2

Emergency Extension Switch S

0

with DT0

Emergency sets

To analog voice recording from handset of emergency set

From handset of answering facility

To analog voice recording

404

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

ERA2ERB2

EOA2/EOB2

RA3/RB3

ERA3ERB3

EOA3/EOB3

RA4/RB4

ERA4/ERB4

EOA4/EOB4

RA5/RB5

ERA5/ERB5

EOA5/EOB5

RA6/RB6

ERA6/ERB6

EOA6/EOB6

-48 V/-48 V

ZN/GND from handset of emergency set

From handset of answering facility

To analog voice recording from handset of emergency set

From handset of answering facility

To analog voice recording from handset of emergency set

From handset of answering facility

To analog voice recording from handset of emergency set

From handset of answering facility

To analog voice recording from handset of emergency set

From handset of answering facility

From power supply

For the contingency of an emergency change-over

EESS0 Emergency Extension Switch S0

Short description

The Emergency Extension Switch S

0

is available for answering equipment that must always be reachable

(e.g. police, fire department or Red Cross). In the event of a power failure or other malfunctions, this module enables a switchover from the connecting line coming from the ISDN network to S

0

devices that are powered by the ISDN network.

EESS0 module

1. Cable 1 + 2, each 24-pair to external MDF

2. Champ plug

3. EESS0

4. Pl.1

5. Pl.2

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

405

Settings

Connection to a DT0 or ADM, i.e. 2 DAs are to be switched per section.

Switchover is implemented to a set that is only used when the switchover is active.

For this purpose, a switchover with 1 WP each for the analog voice documentation.

Two 50-pin plugs are available as external connectors.

Switch-over criteria

General power failure

DT0/ADM PCB removed

Manual actuation of an external potential-free switch

Other features

Current requirement -48 V = 108 mA

The number of sections is determined by the limited number of plug positions.

The section 1..6 contains the switchover option. Sections 7 and 8 are directly switched through. Sections

9 to 16 cannot be used (applies to ADM only).

The switchover is implemented with 4 wires.

For each section, an additional 2 switchover contacts are brought out, via which, for example, lines to voice recording devices are switched.

"LP removed" is detected using GND from the DT0 or ADM.

-48 V is fed via the connecting cable.

One wire is fed for the forced switchover via the connecting cable.

Connection cables required: 2 cables 24x2 MG1000-HVT 29.9030.56xx (xx = cable length)

The ADM PCB requires the EEADM sub-PCB for plug 8X.

The EESS0 module differs from the EES0B module only in that the EESS0 has jumpers that can prevent emergency switchovers of individual sections.

406

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Block diagram

Emergency switchover facility for S

0

lines

1. ISDN line

2. Answering station

3. Manual emergency switching

4. Documentation

5. Emergency query

Boards

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

407

Additional measures with ADM

If the ADM board is used with emergency switching (EESS0 cable adapter) submodule 3 is not required. On the X8 connector (normally for submodule 4) you must insert the EEADM submodule instead of submodule 4.

ADM board, location of EEADM on X8

If the EEADM board is inserted in the wrong place on the ADM board this will cause a defect in the ADM board.

408

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Jumper

On the EESS0 there are switchover contacts with jumpers for the prevention of emergency switchovers of individual parts.

Cable adapter EESS0, component side

On delivery the emergency switchover is active for the parts 0-5, i.e. the jumpers are connected to 2-3 and

5-6. For special applications it is also possible to exclude individual parts from the emergency switchover.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

409

View of the plugs X7, X8 and X9

Plug X7 plug

Jumper 1-2

Jumper 2-3

Jumper 4-5

Jumper 5-6

Plug X8 Jumper 1-2

Jumper 2-3

Jumper 4-5

Jumper 5-6

Plug X9 Jumper 1-2

Jumper 2-3

Jumper 4-5

Jumper 5-6

Emergency switchover for part 0 inactive

Emergency switchover for part 0 active

Emergency switchover for part 1 inactive

Emergency switchover for part 1 active

Emergency switchover for part 2 inactive

Emergency switchover for part 2 active

Emergency switchover for part 3 inactive

Emergency switchover for part 3 active

Emergency switchover for part 4 inactive

Emergency switchover for part 4 active

Emergency switchover for part 5 inactive

Emergency switchover for part 5 active

Further Information

The feedlines of the -48V should not be connected to the same fuse as those of the PBX because of the current difference between them.

The failure criteria such as fuse failure, board removed or manual switchover trigger a message on the system console so that monitoring from there is guaranteed.

An NTBA with emergency supply is used as the NT, and the exchange dialling can be loaded with up to

380 mW in this case.

In normal operation, the emergency set has no function and therefore nothing appears in the display.

Facilities of this type are normally only to be handled by trained personnel. It can then be assumed that no unqualified actions shall be initiated by the users.

410

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

MDF Connections

MDF Cable 1

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

TA1/TB1

TC1/TD1

TA2/TB2

TC2/TD2

TA3/TB3

TC3/TD3

TA4/TB4

TC4/TD4

TA5/TB5

TC5/TD5

TA6/TB6

TC6/TD6

TA7/TB7

TC7/TD7

TA8/TB8

TC8/TD8

EA1/EB1

EC1/ED1

EA2/EB2

EC2/ED2

EA3/EB3

EC3/ED3

EA4/EB4

EC4/ED4

Emergency Extension Switch S

0

with DT0

ISDN line 0

ISDN line 0

ISDN line 1

ISDN line 1

ISDN line 2

ISDN line 2

ISDN line 3

ISDN line 3

ISDN line 4

ISDN line 4

ISDN line 5

ISDN line 5

ISDN line 6

ISDN line 6

ISDN line 7

ISDN line 7

Emergency set 0

Emergency set 0

Emergency set 1

Emergency set 1

Emergency set 2

Emergency set 2

Emergency set 3

Emergency set 3

Complementary wire: GND

MDF Cable 2

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

EA5/EB5

EC5/ED5

EA6/EB6

EC6/ED6

RA1/RB1

ERA1/ERB1

Emergency Extension Switch S

0

with DT0

Emergency set 4

Emergency set 4

Emergency set 5

Emergency set 5 to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

411

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

EOA1/EOB1

RA2/RB2

ERA2ERB2

EOA2/EOB2

RA3/RB3

ERA3ERB3

EOA3/EOB3

RA4/RB4

ERA4/ERB4

EOA4/EOB4

RA5/RB5

ERA5/ERB5

EOA5/EOB5

RA6/RB6

ERA6/ERB6

EOA6/EOB6

-48 V/-48 V

ZN/GND from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility

-48V from power supply

Contact of forced emergency switching / to contact of forced emergency switching

Complementary wire: GND

EMAC Extended Multi Access Circuit Board

Short description

The board EMAC module is a submodule of the MAC and is used for the extension of 2x2 MBit interfaces.

EMAC board, component side

412

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

IPN Intelligent Private Network

Short description

The IPN module enables the operation of intelligent private networks between the Integral Enterprise and predecessor systems (I55, I33) by means of data transmission in the speech channel of a digital dial-up line.

Other features

Current requirement +5V 710 mA

Up to 15 IPN connections are possible per module.

Module software download.

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

The module must operate in connection with an ISDN exchange module.

Function of Switches and LEDs

IPN module, front side

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

413

Switch Position

S1

S2

S3

S4

Left:

Right:

Left:

Left:

Left:

Preparatory disabling

Reset module

Module status display not possible at a terminal for testing purposes, as Sub-D plug is not fitted

Test

Further status display of the module is not possible at a terminal for testing purposes, as Sub-D plug is not fitted

Protocol output "on" S5

S6

Left:

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1 On:

Flashing:

Off:

At least 1 connecting device is occupied

All connecting devices are disabled

Operating state

L2

L3

7x

8x

9x

10x

11x

13x

14x

Off:

3x

4x

5x

6x

Flashing:

1x

2x

Faulty DSPA test

Reserved

Checksum failure

X-RAM defect

Y-RAM defect

SSI defect

Illegal instruction

Receive SSI with overflow

Transmit SSI with underrun

Stack overflow

Illegal host message received

Field 2 info has been received before

External RAM error

External ROM error

Operating state

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

On:

Off:

On:

Flashing:

Off:

On:

Flashing:

Off:

At least one occupancy is active (occupancy summation display)

Operating state

Reset status

Download in progress

Operating state

Logging switched on

See L3 function

Operating state

L9

L10

12x

On:

Flashing:

Off:

Main program runtime > 125 µs

At least one channel blocked

At least one channel faulty

Operating state

414

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

MAC Multi Access Circuit Board

Short description

The MAC module is required for the application of the MG1000 Media Gateway as a dealer, special network, railway or master terminal system. It represents the connecting device module for the digital terminals (e.g. TH93M) and peripheral devices (e.g. speech recording unit). It is also provides switching matrix and mixer functions for the application of special dealer functions.

Overview

1. 2 MB interface

2. 2 MB module loop

3. Databus

4. Power supply

5. UP0 Interface

6. MAC module with submodule EMAC

The module is always required if multi connections (monitoring, OLD, extra handset, speech recording) are to be used in conjunction with the dealer terminals. Without these multi connections, a dealer terminal may also be connected to the UIP or DUP0 module.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

415

Features

8 UP

0

interfaces for the connection of TH93x terminals.

2 x 2 MBit interfaces for the connection TH93Zx modules or speech recording devices.

Expansion of the module by means of the EMAC submodule provides an additional two 2 MBit interfaces for the connection of TH93Z modules and speech recording devices.

The 2 MBit interface of a MAC can only be assigned to the terminals and Z modules that are located on the same MAC.

Other features

Region of application National and international

Current requirement +5V 1500 mA

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Module software download.

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

System requirements

The MAC module can only be used in the R1 rack in each module. It can be connected with any of the eight slots.

System Requirements

The MAC board can only be used in the R1 rack in each module. It can be connected with any of the eight slots.

416

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

CA6B for mains connection

Cable adapter for the connection of U

P0

and S2M connectors to the MAC module.

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• 8-pin WE plugs

Boards

CA6B with connections

1. 16-paired cable to external MDF, AO 1-8

2. 8-pin WE plug for the 2MBit interfaces

Ranges

U

P0

interface

The ranges are comparable to those of other U

P0

interfaces within the MG1000:

3.5 km

2.1 km

1.8 km

Line length

Ground cable diam. 0.6 mm

Ground cable diam. 0.4 mm

Installation cable diam. 0.6 mm

2 MBit interface

The interface range varies according to the cable attenuation.

When at 1 MHz, the wave attenuation must be no more than 6 dB.

Example 1:

The installation cable J-2Y (SST)Y 2x2x0.6 III Bd (28.9802.0151) has a wave attenuation at 1 MHz of

28dB/1km (2.8dB / 100 m), which results in a maximum length of 6dB: 2.8 dB = 214m.

Example 2:

The ECONET cable category 5 has a wave attenuation at 1 MHz of 16dB/1km (1.6dB/100 m), which results in a maximum length of 6dB: 1.6 dB = 375m.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

417

Connections

Connection of the 2 MBit Interface

Connection of 2 MBit interface using WE6-WE4 module connecting cord

1. Patch cable:

0.8 m 27.9798.0231

2.0 m 27.9798.0232

3.0 m 27.9798.0233

to

10 m 27.9798.0230

2. ECONET Cable 4x2 27.9798.0016

3. 4-wire connecting cord WE4/WE6 (junction box 17.8761.1598)

4. MDF cable:

1m 29.9030.5301

2m 29.9030.5302

to

99m 29.9030.5399

5. Junction boxes

6. Z modules

7. Patch panel:

16-part 27.9798.2353

24-part 27.9798.2354

48-part 27.9798.2357

418

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Connection of 2 MBit Interface, ECONET Standard

Boards

Connection of 2 MBit interface using WE8-WE4 module connecting cord in accordance with ECONET standard

1. Patch cable:

0.8 m 27.9798.0231

2.0 m 27.9798.0232

3.0 m 27.9798.0233

to

10 m 27.9798.0230

2. ECONET Cable 4x2 27.9798.0016

3. 4-wire connecting cord WE4/WE8 (junction box 17.8761.1598)

4. MDF cable:

1m 29.9030.5301

2m 29.9030.5302

to

99m 29.9030.5399

5. Junction boxes

6. Z modules

7. Patch panel:

16-part 27.9798.2353

24-part 27.9798.2354

48-part 27.9798.2357

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

419

To be able to meet the requirements of the ECONET cabling standard (featuring standardized configuration of connections), the extension modules now come supplied with a different connecting cord. Further information about cabling can be found in the Installation Manual of the respective extension modules.

Connector Configuration

1. Old Connecting Cord (17.8761.1589)

2. New Connecting Cord (17.XXXX.XXXX)

3. Offering side

4. Z module side

This connecting cord is identifiable via the plug design (WE8 on the offering side).

420

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Board

MAC board, component side

Boards

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

421

LEDs and Switch Functions

MAC board, front side

1. V.24 plug

PIN 3

PIN 4

PIN 8

PIN 5

PIN 4

TXD

RXD

CTS

GND

+5V

422

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Switch Function

S1 Middle:

Left:

Right:

S2 Middle:

Left:

Right:

Idle position

ICU data requires preparatory disabling after reset

Reset

Idle position

Yet to be defined

Yet to be defined

Meanings of LEDs

L1

L2

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

L11

L12

L13

L14

L15

L16

L17 on:

flashing:

off:

L3 flashing:

off: on:

Busy

Preparatory disabling execution

Normal

Reset

Downloading

Normal

Yet to be defined

Yet to be defined

UP0 port 1, layer 1 active

UP0 port 2, layer 1 active

UP0 port 3, layer 1 active

UP0 port 4, layer 1 active

UP0 port 5, layer 1 active

UP0 port 6, layer 1 active

UP0 port 7, layer 1 active

UP0 port 8, layer 1 active

2 MB interface 1 active

2 MB interface 2 active

2 MB interface 3 active

2 MB interface 4 active

DSP1

L18

L19

DSP1

DSP2

L20

L21

L22

DSP2

CBI LED RXTX active

CBI LED FAIL or PCANCEL

Boards

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

423

Commissioning

When starting up the MAC, the individual stages of the initialization are indicated by means of the LEDs on the front panel. LEDs 1 - 16 provide the following signalling:

1.

RESET of module On

2.

pre_init_interrupt_adresses

3.

Init. of hardware register, end of module RESET

4.

Initialization Interrupt Disable counter

5.

Network initialization a.

Initialization of switching modules (mtsl_init) b.

Initialization of mixer module (musac_init) c.

Initialization of mixer with level setting

(musac_a_init) d.

S2M Initialization (falc_init) e.

Initialization of switching components between UP0 and highways (epic_init)

6.

init_interrupt_addresses

7.

initialize_heap

8.

Initialization of layer 2 timer

9.

V24 Initialization

LED 5-12 On

LED 5 Off

LED 6 Off

UP0 7 LED Off LED 13-16 On

LED 13 Off

LED 14 Off

LED 15 Off

LED 16 Off

LED 8 Off

LED 9 Off

LED 10 Off

LED 11 Off

All LEDs Off

The initialization of the MAC board is now complete.

Setting up the board using the ICU Configuration Editor

MAC board

X

X

X

Card

Gen.

S2M UP0

X

Field designation

Country setting

EMAC present

DSP present

Protocol version acti ve

Effect or function

Selection of country

EMAC expansion level inserted, yes/no

DSM expansion level inserted, yes/no

Specification of which protocol the terminal is using

The installation of the MAC board requires the presence of CF2x modules and W1D, W2D or

B1D modules. Setting up the MAC also requires a MACS to be set up on slots 90 and 91.

424

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Correlations

When using the DSPF board, the AUX-HYs can no longer be used. This means that the DSPF board can now only be used for a maximum of 60 announcement channels and for this purpose uses only the bus bar, which is available for the module slot itself and the free slot located below.

There are no restrictions for the DSPF1 board, since it uses the 30 announce channels of its own slot only.

MACS board

X

Card

Gen S2M UP0

X

X

X

X

Field designation acti ve

Effect or function

Protocol

The pseudo module MACS (MAC Slave) must always be set up on slot 90 and 91 if at least one MAC is present within the module.

The MACS enables the reservation of time slots, through which the call progress tones are connected to the MAC.

Configuration Example for a Dealer Position on the MAC

20.11.97 07:51:19

Connecting circuit

Call number

Slot/HWA

AO-type

:520

:01-01-03-00

:DIPL -log. position no.: 73

General ADS data

Name

Accounting section

:MAC position 00

:0000

Log files :

Protocol Version

TN1R6

Overload priority :2

:1 SPWKGR. Public exchange access

SPWKGR. COLISEE :0

0 defective

OFF busy2

OFF error

OFF

DISA group

Dealer group

CN alloc. HKZ & tie :

:0

:0

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

425

Category

Waiting field max.

Reserved

Connection memory

Service memory

AO state

Service block

:-1

:

:10

:0

:2

:IN OPERAT.

:sv-free

Service data

TLP

Status Free

Dialling group

Traffic group

Switchover group

Code dialling group

2

1

0

0

LCR group

Dial retrieval

Backward rel.

0

DEACTIVE

DEACTIVE

DAT

FREE

3

1

0

0

0

DEACTIVE

DEACTIVE

B channel data

Allocation code

Deliberation code

: -

: -

Serves the signalling of extra handsets

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

2

3

B ch no.

1

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Bund no.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Dir.

426

System Manual Integral Enterprise

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Acc.

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

Status

F

June 2009

Boards

Serves the signalling of the seized monitor channels, max. 16 channels

26

27

28

29

30

22

23

24

25

18

19

20

21

B ch no.

16

17

Number of seizable channels: 30

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Bund no.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Dir.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Acc.

MDF Connections

The CA6B cable adapter must be used to integrate the MAC into the MG1000 rack.

MDF Using MAC CA6B

Colors Panel for two-wire connection UP

0

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BK

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

Available

Available

Available

Available

Available

Available

Available

Available

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

Status

F

F

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

427

MULI Multi-line

Short description

The following description provides a basic outline of the board MULI. More detailed information about module features, installation and configuration can be found in a separate manual entitled MULI

Multi-Line.

The MULI board is used for digital subscribers who have convenience features and who work together in a team or department.

The principle of the multi-line function is a pool containing call numbers that are assigned to the multi-line board. Each connected terminal is assigned call numbers which correspond to a B channel from this pool.

Features

Each subscriber has access to each line.

Access is gained directly via the keys of the terminal.

Holding calls (for consultation).

Each subscriber may retrieve a call in hold status at his terminal and continue conversation.

Definition of individual multi-line group per subscriber.

Line display to the terminal

Own call number (Primary Directory Number --> PDN)

Call number of other subscribers (Secondary Directory Number --> SDN)

Virtual call number (Phantom Directory Number --> PhDN)

Other features

Country of application National and international

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Board software download.

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

428

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Functionality

MULI module

The MULI module serves to provide the multi-line functions.

There exist three different configuration options:

• Single multi-line:

Module with 16 HWAs.

16 ports, each port with a maximum of two subscriber numbers.

Multi-line pool with a maximum of 32 subscriber numbers.

• Single multi-line:

Module with 32 HWAs with a neighboring slot for a replacement module.

16 ports, each port with a maximum of two subscriber numbers.

Multi-line pool with a maximum of 64 subscriber numbers.

• Twin multi-line: (for step 2)

Modules each with 16 HWAs

32 ports, each port with a maximum of two subscriber numbers.

Multi-line pool with a maximum of 64 subscriber numbers.

The entire process of signaling and message exchange is implemented by the MULI module.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

429

LEDs and Switch Functions

MULI board, front side

LED Functions

L12

L13

L14

L15

L16

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

L11

L1 on: flashing:

off:

L2 on:

flashing:

off:

L3

L4

L5 on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on:

430

System Manual Integral Enterprise

Busy

Preparatory disabling execution

Reset

Download

Yet to be defined

Yet to be defined

MULI Port 0 (16) layer active

MULI Port 1 (17) layer active

MULI Port 2 (18) layer active

MULI Port 3 (19) layer active

MULI Port 4 (20) layer active

MULI Port 5 (21) layer active

MULI Port 6 (22) layer active

MULI Port 7 (23) layer active

MULI Port 8 (24) layer active

MULI Port 9 (25) layer active

MULI Port 10 (26) layer active

MULI Port 11 (27) layer active

June 2009

Boards

L17

L18

L19

L20

L21

L22

L23

L24 on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on:

MULI Port 12 (28) layer active

MULI Port 13 (29) layer active

MULI Port 14 (30) layer active

MULI Port 15 (31) layer active

Yet to be defined

Yet to be defined

Yet to be defined

Yet to be defined

The numbers in brackets apply to the multi-line group for step 2, which can be implemented using two boards.

Switch Functions

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

S2 Links

Middle:

Right:

Preparatory disabling call from ICU data after a reset

Reset

Not used

MDF Connections

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Patch panel for the two wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

via CA1B from MULI (U

P0

)

A1/B1

A2/B2

A3/B3

A4/B4

A5/B5

A6/B6

A7/B7

A8/B8

A9/B9

A10/B10

A11/B11

A12/B12

A13/B13

A14/B14

A15/B15

A16/B16

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

431

OFA2B/OFAS Optical Fiber Adapter

Short description

The OFA2B optical fiber adapter 2 B modules and OFAS optical fiber adapter single mode are for connecting the fiber optic cables when DT21 or DT 22 boards are used and the optical interfaces are employed.

The boards are used for various optical fibre types:

OFA2B

Graded-index fibers

Ready-made cable types

29.9030.6101-6199

*

Core diam. µm

62,5

OFAS

Mono-mode fibers

Ready-made cable types

29.9030.6201-6299

*

Core diam. µm

9,5

*

The last two characters of the item number indicate the length of the pre-prepared cable in meters.

Cable lengths >99m are handled by the project division.

Common data for OFA2B and OFAS boards

Interfaces Quantity and form

Optical transmitters

Optical receivers

1 SC socket

1 SC socket

1300nm

1300 nm

Wavelength

Power supply

Current consumption

Power consumption

Electrical values

5V

250mA

1.25W

Typical

Depending on the optical fibre used and cross-section area of the optical cable, different maximum cable lengths can be achieved:

Type of fiber

Graded-index fibres

Mono mode

Maximum distances

Optical fiber core diam. µm

62.5

50

9,5 maximum length km

10

6,2

15

432

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Basic construction of OFA2B and OFAS

OFA2B and OFAS boards are designed for connecting to SC plugs. Neither board is thus compatible with the previous OFA1B board type, which was designed for mono-mode fibre and ST connectors.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

433

STSM1 S0/T0 Submodule

Short description

The submodule STSM1 is plugged into the ADM board. It provides four S

0

- or T

0 interface. It contains layer

1 and layer 2 HW ports.

It is important to note that the STSM1 submodule requires new ICU software (ADM0016 or higher versions). It is included in the following software versions:

• IEE 3 (from version L030V00_1_9 onward)

• IEE 4 (from version L040V00_1_0_2.1 onward)

• IEE 5 untill IEE x all versions

Combined with other software versions, the ICU software of ADM has to be downloaded separately for the

STSM1 submodule.

Configurable interfaces

Subscriber connection (S

0

powered); Layer 1 master (standard) or layer 1 slave (outlying extension)

Exchange line (T

0

, unpowered)

Exchange line simulation (T

0

, unpowered)

Permanent connection (T

0

, unpowered, master clock or clock slave, layer 2 master or slave)

STSM1 submodule, component side

1. Plug connector to the ADM (internal ADM interface)

2. Plug connector to the ADM (line interface)

Other features

Country of application Application in all countries

Power demand +5V 10 mA

Selection free configuration of each individual connection

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Download board software

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

434

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

UIP Universal Interface Platform

Short description

The The UIP module is a base module which accommodates up to 4 submodules.

Submodules

CL2ME for receiving an external clock pulse using a normal clock (TAREF).

Boards

UIP module, component side

1. Slot 1

2. Slot 2

3. Slot 3

4. Slot 4

The following signals are available for the V.24:

RXD

TXD

DTR (unsupported)

GND

DSR

RTS

CTS

(unsupported)

(unsupported)

(unsupported)

The V24M submodule may only be inserted in the first two (upper) slots. The others are freely configurable.

When using the CL2ME in the first slot, you must use the CA3B/T cable adapter to connect the

TAREF.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

435

Other features

Region of application

Current requirement +5V

Application in all countries

500 mA

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Download board software

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

LEDs and Switch Functions

UIP module, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1-S10 Middle position

436

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Function of the Switches

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

S2

S3 Right:

Middle:

Left:

S4 Right:

Middle:

Left:

S5 Right:

Middle:

Left:

S6 Right:

Middle:

Left:

S7 Right:

Middle:

Left:

S8 Right:

Middle:

Left:

S9 Right:

Middle:

Left:

S10 Right:

Middle:

Left:

Preparatory disabling of all connecting circuits

Forced module download

Connecting circuit 1 preparatory disabling

Connecting circuit 1 release

Connecting circuit 2 preparatory disabling

Connecting circuit 2 release

Connecting circuit 3 preparatory disabling

Connecting circuit 3 release

Connecting circuit 4 preparatory disabling

Connecting circuit 4 release

Connecting circuit 5 preparatory disabling

Connecting circuit 5 release

Connecting circuit 6 preparatory disabling

Connecting circuit 6 release

Connecting circuit 7 preparatory disabling

Connecting circuit 7 release

Connecting circuit 8 preparatory disabling

Connecting circuit 8 release

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1 On:

Flashing:

L7

L2, L8

L3

L4, L5, L6, L9, L10, L11

L12

Off:

On:

Flashing:

Off:

On:

On:

On:

Board is busy with switching functions

Module is removable after preparatory disabling

Module is not busy

Module reset in progress

Download in progress

Module in operation

Unassigned

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1 active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit x active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 8 active

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

437

MDF Connections

Colors

16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Panel for the two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Panel for the four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

UIP slot

1

2

3

4

via CA1B/3B from the UIP with four CL2M

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

Free

Free

A2/B2 (T)

C2/D2 (R)

Free

Free

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

Free

Free

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

Free

Free

via CA1B/3B from the UIP with four CL2ME

A1/B1 (R)

Free

Free

Free

A2/B2 (R)

Free

Free

Free

A3/B3 (R)

Free

Free

Free

A4/B4 (R)

Free

Free

Free

MDF Connection via CA3B from UIP

V24M sub-modules inserted on slots 1 and 2 can be tapped directly from the Sub-D connectors of the cable adapter.

If slots 1 and 2 contain a mixture of CL2M, CL2ME and V24M then refer to the table above.

438

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

UKSM UK0 Submodule

Short description

The UKSM submodule is inserted on the ADM board. It provides two U

K0 master interfaces. It contains layer 1 and layer 2 HW ports.

UKSM submodule, component side

1. Plug connector to the ADM (internal ADM interface)

2. Plug connector to the ADM (line interface)

Other features

Country of application

Power demand +5V

Interface description

Application in all countries

400 mA

U

K0 interface; two-wire; transmission rate: 384 kbit/s

Line lengths

Coding 2B1Q

4,5 km installation cable (I-Y(ST)Y Ø 0.6 mm

8 km outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø 0.6 mm

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Download board software

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

439

UPSM, UPSM1 UPN submodule

Short description

The subboard UPSM or UPSM1 is inserted on the ADM board. It provides four U

PN interfaces for digital terminals or permanent connection.

UPSM or UPSM1 subboard, component side

1. Plug connector to the ADM (internal ADM interface)

2. Plug connector to the ADM (line interface)

Other features

Country of application

Power demand +5V

Interface description

Application in all countries

35 mA four U

PN

interfaces; two-wire

Transmission rate: 384 kbit/s

16 dB attenuation range

-48 V/max. 60 mA short-circuit-proof supply for increased power consumption, e.g. T3 terminals

Line lengths 1 km installation cable (I-Y(ST)Y Ø 0.6 mm

2.8 km outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø 0.6 mm

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Download board software

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Using a UPN-Repeater the range of the U

PN interface can be extended.

440

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

IP Telephony Gateways

The multi-functional boards VoIP and IPMR enlarge the product family Integral Enterprise with Voice over

IP, that is communication based on IP. Special extensions of the Integral Enterprise may be integrated into the existing IP network of the customer (LAN, WAN, Corporate Network) by means of this boards.

Board

VOIP

[

→ 442 ]

IPMR

onward

[

→ 445 ]

from IEE 5

Subboard

SOM-2 = Small Outline Modul 2, subboard with two DSPs

DAR1 = 80 Channel VoIP DSP

DAughterboaRd, subboard with four DSPs

Connection

AEV24B

[

→ 233 ]

AEV24B

[

→ 233 ]

(for the use of

V24 interface)

The board IPMR is enhancement and successor of the board VoIP and takes over its functions.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

441

VOIP Voice over IP Board

Short description

The VOIP board is described with all the required additional information relating to installation and set-up, dimensioning etc. in the chapter

Notes on VolP and IPMR

[

→ 693 ]

.

VOIP board, component side

1. Speech compression/packeting

2. Echo cancelation

The basic VOIP board (part number: 49.9903.7976) has six slots for the SOM-2 submodules, each of which has two DSP chips (Digital Signal Processing Small Outline Module 2, part number: 49.9903.7980) in order to increase the number of DSP chips used in the system. These DSP chips perform three functions:

• Package of voice information from the highway into data packets and thus compression of the speech data when desired (from G.711 64 kbit/s to G.729A 8 kbit/s),

442

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

• Echo cancellation for speech connections from the IP terminals to the ISDN/analog terminals or the

ISDN/analog lines and identification of Fax- and DTMF-signals,

• coding and decoding for T.38-Fax.

The upper three slots 1 (in the center of the board) are used for voice compression and packeting, while the lower three slots 2 are used for echo cancellation.

Due to the very high cost of the DSP chips, the number of SOM-2 submodules needs to be calculated according to the configuration of the customer’s system (see Calculation of the number of SOM-2 submodules).

In addition, four DSP chips are soldered onto the VoIP board. These are responsible for central functions such as announcements, mixers and sound input, and support a fixed number of channels for voice compression and echo cancellation.

The connection of the VOIP board to the periphery is performed via the cable adapter AEV24B.

Other features

Use Integration of Integral Enterprise extensions into the existing IP-based data network environment operated by the customer (LAN, WAN, corporate network)

Current requirement +5V 1800 mA addition per SOM-2: 240 mA

LEDs and Switch Functions

The diagram below shows a view of the front panel and the meaning of the switches and LEDs.

View of front panel

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

443

Switch functions

S1 Left:

Center:

Right:

Right, then left:

Preparatory disabling (VSP)

Operation status/release

Reset

Forced download of the board, at the end of the download process the module is automatically reset.

In order to prevent infinite repetition of the download, the switch S1 must be returned to the middle position after the message "Test Reply 1".

LED denotations

L1

L2 POWER

GOOD)

L3 (ETH Link)

L4 (ETH 10/100)

L5 (ETH active)

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10 on: flashing: Module is removable after preparatory disabling off: Module is not busy on:

Module is busy in terms of exchange functions (active layer 3 connection) all voltages (5V, 3.3V, DSP on-board VCC 1.8V and PQUICC Vcore, presently 2.5V) are within their permissible tolerance ranges.

on: on:

Ethernet link is established

100Mbit transfer is taking place (SPEED) flashing: Activity on the Ethernet (on the send and receive side) on: Module reset in progress flashing: Download in progress off: Module in operation on: on:

Status LED 2/3

Status LED 2/2 on: on:

Status LED 2/1

Status LED 2/0

444

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

IP Media Resource 256

Short description

The IPMR board is described with all additional information relating to installation, set-up, dimensioning etc. in the chapter

Notes to VolP and IPMR

[

→ 693 ]

.

IPMR board (IP Media Ressource), component side

The basic IPMR board (part number: 4.999.115.155) has one on-board DSP Freescale 8122. The DSP chips perform three functions:

• Package of voice information from the highway into data packets and thus compression of the speech data when desired (from G.711 64 kbit/s to G.729A 8 kbit/s),

• Echo cancellation for speech connections from the IP terminals to the ISDN/analog terminals or to the

ISDN/analog lines and identification of Fax- and DTMF-signals,

• Coding and Decoding for T.38-Fax.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

445

One 8122-DSP encludes four independent "DSP-Cores". The DSP-Typ TI 55x realises central functions such as announcements, mixers and sound input.

By means of one basic IPMR board 64 packet channels with universal codec can be realized. For each channel one echo canceller is available. One IPMR board without subboards provides already ressources for 250 participants.

The following sequence for extensionsis has to be strictly observed (see previous figure): first SUB1 and afterwards SUB2 (SUB3 remains vacant)!

The maximum expansion consists of the basic IPMR board and two subboards DAR1 for up to 750 participants.

Usually the Ethernet interfaces on the front bar are used in the Integral Enterprise, for that no cable adapter is required. If the serial interface is used for error analysis, the cable adapter AEV24B can be used.

Other features

Use Integration of Integral Enterprise extensions into the existing IP-based data network environment operated by the customer (LAN, WAN, corporate network)

Current requirement +5V 1800 mA additionally (x * 240 mA) with x=1,2 for each subboard DAR1

446

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Switches/LEDs

View of the IPMR front bar with switches and LEDs:

The switch to reset the IPMR board or to lock it preparatory are located on the front bar above the LEDs, which show the status of the IPMR board. The picture shows the location of LEDs and their color: LEDs L1,

L2, L5, L13 and L16 are green, LED L6 is red, all other LEDs are yellow.

Switch functions

Der switch locks in all three positions. For normal operating state it has to be in the middle.

S1 Left:

Middle:

Preparatory disabling for all ports (VSP)

Operation status/release

Right:

Right, then left:

HW reset of the IPMR

Forced download of the board, at the end of the download process the module is automatically reset.

In order to prevent infinite repetition of the download, the switch S1 must be returned to the middle position after the message "Test Reply 1".

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

447

LED denotations

The meanings of the LEDs L1 to L10 are the same as at the VoIP board. The LEDs L11 to L16 have been added as status indicators for the additional Ethernet interfaces.

L1 on: flashing: at least one port is busy, IPMR is busy (active layer 3 connection) all ports are preparatory disabled, IPMR is removable after VSP

L2

(POWER GOOD)

L3 (ETH3 Link)

L4 (ETH3 10/100)

L5 (ETH3 active) off: on: on: on: flashing:

All ports are free, IPMR is not busy all voltages (5V, 3.3V, DSP on-board VCC 1.8V and PQUICC Vcore, presently 2.5V) are within their permissible tolerance ranges.

Ethernet Link3 is established

Ethernet Link3: 100Mbit transfer is taking place (SPEED)

Ethernet Link3: Activity on the Ethernet (on the send and receive side)

L11 (ETH1 Link) on:

L12 (ETH1 10/100) on:

L13 (ETH1 active) flashing:

L6 on: flashing:

L7

L8

L9

L10

L14 (ETH2 Link) off: on: on: on: on: on:

L15 (ETH2 10/100) on:

L16 (ETH2 active) flashing:

Ethernet Link1 is established

Ethernet Link1: 100Mbit transfer is taking place (SPEED)

Ethernet Link1: Activity on the Ethernet (on the send and receive side)

IPMR reset or error handling

Download in progress

IPMR in operation

Status LED 2/3

Status LED 2/2

Status LED 2/1

Status LED 2/0

Ethernet Link2 is established

Ethernet Link2: 100Mbit transfer is taking place (SPEED)

Ethernet Link2: Activity on the Ethernet (on the send and receive side)

The jacks for the interfaces Ethernet1 and Ethernet2 are on the front bar. They provide a redundant access to the customers LAN. Ethernet1 is the primary interface and Ethernet2 is the redundant interface. Without redundancy Ethernet1 is used always, with redundancy Ethernet2 will be used only when Ethernet1 is out of order.

The interface Ethernet3 is connected to the back plane connector of the Integral Enterprise or of the Integral 33 without redundancy. A cable adapter AEV24B is needed in this connection.

-----------------------

Up to here is the description of the front bar. All DIP switches on the inside IPMR board must be "off" for normal operation, they are solely provided for development purposes.

448

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Discontinued modules and components

The following modules and components have been discontinued from the active portfolio and will no longer be used in new business:

Module

DT0

[

→ 497 ]

DS02

[

→ 494 ]

DT21

[

→ 500 ]

DCON

[

→ 475 ]

DECT21

[

→ 491 ]

IMUX

[

→ 515 ]

HAMUX

[

→ 503 ]

BVT2

[

→ 461 ]

ASCxx

[

→ 456 ]

ASC2

[

→ 452 ]

DDID

[

→ 488 ]

JPAT

[

→ 532 ]

CF2E

[

→ 466 ]

Submodule

SPCU

Mirror card to HAMUX in the PC

SUTC, SUTD

CFIML

Connection module

CA1B,

CA2B

EESS0

CA1B, CA4B, OFA2B, OFAS

CA1B

CA5B, S64LI, S64LI

CA6B

CA1B

CARUB

ESB, ESBA, ESBB, EOCSM/

MM, EOCPF

(ICF, UIP)

(ATLC)

(UIP)

(ADM)

Submodule

CL2M

[

→ 474 ]

ALSMH

[

→ 451 ]

V24M

[

→ 231 ]

for E0x SW only, not for Integral Enterprise

Edition

ABSM

[

→ 450 ]

STSM

[

→ 535 ]

Connection module

ESB, ESBA, ESBB, CA3B

CA2B, CARUB

CA3B

CA2B, EESS0

(ASC21)

Connection module

CARUB

[

→ 466 ]

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

449

ABSM Analog Subscriber Submodule

Short description

The ABSM submodule is plugged into the ADM board. It makes available four a/b connection for analog end devices, according to country specific requirements with the following features:

Country-specific variants are configurable using board software for the following countries:

Germany, Austria, Switzerland, Netherlands, Great Britain, Italy, Spain,

Belgium, Venezuela, Hungary, Czech Republic, Slovakian Republic,

Mexico, Hong Kong, USA, Russia and France

Power demand +5V

Interfaces

Constant current supply

70 mA

4 &times; a/b

24 mA convertible to 30 mA

Line resistance range:

2 x 475 Ohm

4 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0,4 mm

9 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0,6 mm

15 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0,8 mm

DTMF/pulse dialling

50 Hz ringing current (only with PS350A switchable to 25 Hz)

Short and long flash time (end device dependent)

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Polarity reversion for "message waiting" signalling

Connection of external announcement devices

The connection on the MDF is carried out via the CA2B or CARUB boards.

Changing the Supply Current

The power supply per connecting circuit can be increased from 24 mA (standard) to 30 mA in this board.

The following actions are to be carried out per connecting circuit:

• Equip with 0 Ohm resistance (see illustration)

450

System Manual Integral Enterprise

ABSM board, component side

June 2009

Boards

1. Connecting circuit 1

2. Connecting circuit 2

3. Connecting circuit 3

4. Connecting circuit 4

5. Plug connector to the ADM (internal ADM interface)

6. Plug connector to the ADM (line interface)

ALSMH Active Loop Submodule Hong Kong

Short description

The ALSMH module is a submodule of the ATLC and is used for direct inward dialling in Hong Kong.

Once the ALSMH has been installed, it must be set up by the ICU editor in terms of software for

Hong Kong (deviating loadlist (.ICL) / Program (.ICP)).

Connection is implemented via a 2-wire line (a/b).

Setting up the ALSMH

Refer to the descriptions in the following documents:

• Setting up features

• ICU Editor User Manual

Other features:

Options for use National and international

Power demand +5V 30mA

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

451

ASC2 Analog Subscriber Circuit 2

Short description

The ASC2 board makes available 32 a/b connections for analog end devices, according to country specific requirements with the following features:

Country-specific variants are configurable using board software for the following countries:

Power demand +5V

Interfaces

Constant current supply

Germany, Austria, Switzerland, Netherlands, Great Britain, Italy,

Spain, Belgium, Venezuela, Hungary, Czech Republic, Slovakian Republic, Mexico, Hong Kong, USA, Russia and France

700 mA

32 &times; a/b

22 mA convertible to 30 mA

Line resistance 2 x 235 Ohm range: 1.7 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0,4 mm

4.0 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0,6 mm

7.5 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0,8 mm

DTMF/pulse dialling

25/50 Hz ringing current (convertible)

Short and long flash time (end device dependent)

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Polarity reversion for "message waiting" signalling

Connection of external announcement devices

In conjunction with V24IA board debugging interface on board front

Debugger = program that helps to track down errors

The connection on the MDF is carried out via the CA2B or CARUB boards.

452

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Changing the Supply Current

The power supply per connecting circuit can be increased from 22 mA (standard) to 30 mA in this board.

The following steps must be taken:

• Each connecting circuit is fitted with its number on the conductor side or component side of the board.

• The code digit *3 is found in this connecting circuit area.

• Four soldering points are arranged at the position labelled *3. The two soldering points in the middle are connected by a conductor path.

• Connect the right and left soldering point with the two soldering points in the middle. A supply current setting of 30 mA is thereby achieved.

ASC2 board

1. Connecting circuit e.g. 31

2. common for four connecting circuits

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

453

LEDs and Switch Functions

ASC2 module, front side with RJ45 connector and PIN assignment

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

454

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Preparatory disabling (VSP) for all connecting circuits then left: at the end of the download process the module is automatically reset.

In order to prevent infinite repetition of the download, the switch S1 must be returned to the middle position after the message "Test Reply 1".

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1 On: Board is busy with switching functions

Flashing:

Off:

Module is removable after preparatory disabling

Module is not busy

L2 On:

Flashing:

Off:

Module reset in progress

Download in progress

Module has gone into operation

MDF Connections

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB for ASC2

Patch panel for two-wire connection Cable 1 Cable 2

WE 1

WE 2 a1/b1 a2/b2 a17/b17 a18/b18

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a19/b19 a20/b20 a21/b21 a22/b22 a7/b7 a8/b8 a9/b9 a10/b10 a11/b11 a12/b12 a13/b13 a14/b14 a15/b15 a16/b16 a23/b23 a24/b24 a25/b25 a26/b26 a27/b27 a28/b28 a29/b29 a30/b30 a31/b31 a32/b32

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

455

ASCxx Analogue Subscriber Circuit

Short description

The ASC board is available in the following variants:

ASCEU: Europe with the following characteristics:

Country-specific variants are configurable using board software for the following countries:

Germany, Spain, Netherlands, Switzerland, Italy, Belgium, Austria,

Greece, Mexico and Venezuela

Power demand +5V

Interfaces

620 mA

16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with country-specific guidelines)

Constant current supply 24 mA, switchable to 30 mA (mounting of a 0 ohm resistance)

Line resistance 2 x 475 Ohm

Range 4 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0.4 mm

9 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0.6 mm

15 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0.8 mm

Line lengths for Message waiting

[

→ 457 ]

DTMF/pulse dialling, flash and earth button detection, Telecom-specific (dependent on terminals)

Short and long flash time, Telecom-specific (dependent on terminals)

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Polarity reversion for "message waiting" signalling

Connection of external announcement devices

ASCF: France with the following characteristics:

Power demand +5V 620 mA

Interfaces

Resistance feed

(const. voltage)

16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with French guidelines and voice terminals)

2 x 400 Ohm

DTMF/pulse dialling, polarity reversal and button detection

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Symmetric call supply

Polarity reversion for "message waiting" signalling

Connection of external announcement devices

456

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

ASCGB: Great Britain

Power demand +5V

Interfaces

Constant current supply

620 mA

16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with British guidelines)

30 mA

DTMF/pulse dialling, flash and earth button detection

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Polarity reversion for "message waiting" signalling

Line lengths for message waiting

The range for message waiting signaling for analog subscribers of the ASCEU module with the ICU program ASCEU018.ICP in connection with the various apparatus types and occupation (pick up on call) and outgoing occupation (pick up) with the installation cable J-Y(ST)Y diam. 0.4 mm is:

Apparatus types

FEApp. T40

FEApp. TE51

FEApp. TE91

FEApp. TC91

FEApp. TB510LED DE

FEApp. TB519D

FEApp. TK40-20-2

Outgoing occupation (pick up)

Line length [m]

Incoming occupation (pick up in call)

Line length [

]

Line length [m]

Line length [

]

1400

1000

1000

1100

1100

900

300

379

272

272

298

298

245

83

1400

1000

1000

1100

600

900

300

379

272

272

298

163

245

83

Recommendation

The line length with which the performance feature Message waiting is to be operated with conventional signaling (permanently illuminated LED signal), should not be longer than

600 m

1.3 km

2.4 km

(Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y diam. 0.4 mm)

(Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y diam. 0.6 mm)

(Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y diam. 0.8 mm)

Malfunctions may occur when establishing a connection if the lines are any longer.

The FEApp. TK40-20-2 should only be operated with a 300 m (83

Ω) line length.

Deviations from the recommended line length are possible.

If the lines are any longer, a different Message waiting signal (signal LED blinks) should be selected. This signaling is implemented in the ICU program ASCEU019.ICP for the module ASCEU.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

457

LEDs and Switch Functions

ASCxx board, front side

1. LED red

2. LED green

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: flashing:

Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Neutral/release/ operating status

Forced board download

L2 off: on: flashing: off:

Board is busy with switching functions

Module can be removed after preparatory disabling

(VSP) or blocked in terms of software

Board is not busy

Board reset in progress

Download in progress

Board in operation

458

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Bridge positions

AO7

AO8

AO9

AO10

AO11

AO12

AO13

AO14

AO15

AO16

The power supply can be increased from 24 mA (standard) to 30 mA per line in this board: The increase in the supply current is implemented by inserted 0 Ohm resistors or bridges at the following coordinate points:

AO1

AO2

197 077

199 128

AO3

AO4

AO5

AO6

173 069

179 116

155 077

157 128

131 069

137 116

113 077

115 128

089 069

095 116

071 077

073 128

047 069

053 116

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

459

MDF Connections

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

Cable Adapter CA1B/CARUB from ASCxx

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Patch panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7 a9/b9 a10/b10 a11/b11 a12/b12 a13/b13 a14/b14 a15/b15 a16/b16 a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8

460

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

BVT2 Motherboard, Voice Transmitting Module 2

Short description

The BVT2 module is used to provide access to an MG1000 Media Gateway for PC supported applications.

A U

P0 connector on the BVT2 module connects the PC to the MG1000.

BVT2 module with CC telephone

1. PC

2. HAB with BVT2

3. CC telephone

4. Cable with U

P0

connection

5. for the MG1000

Application

ACD-UI application.

ACD system with MG1000 Media Gateway

CC telephone application.

Can only be used in connection with a call center and the MG1000 Media

Gateway. Up to 15 IPN connections are possible per module.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

461

BVT2 Module

BVT2 board

The BVT2 board features the following connector options:

1. U

P0

connection

2. AEI interface

3. Loudspeaker and microphone connector

4. Handset and headset connector

5. Hook switch connector

Pin Assignment

Assignment of the WE sockets

1. Switch hook

2. Handset

3. Loudspeaker and microphone

4. AEI

5. UP0

462

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Switch hook

The pin configuration of GND and GU allows a hook switch function to be assigned. The make contact 1 is intended for the application of a tape recorder controller, and make contact 2 for the application of a door opener, for example.

S0

Pin

Assignment

1

GND

2

GU

3

K1

Switch hook

4

K1

5

K2

6

K2

GND

GU

= Ground

= Switch hook

K1, K2 = Make contact 1, 2

Handset or headset

Either a T1 handset or a headset can be connected to the 4-pin WE socket. Connecting a switchover module enables switchover between the handset and headset.

Connection

Pin

Assignment

1

SK-

2

Handset or headset

HK+

3

HK-

4

SK+

SK

HK

= Transmitter inset (microphone)

=> Receiver inset

Loudspeaker and microphone

A loudspeaker and a microphone can be connected to this interface for handsfree operation or open listening.

Connection

Pin

Assignment

Loudspeaker and microphone

1

MIC-

2

MIC+

3

LS-

4

LS+

LS

MIC

=

=

Loudspeaker

Microphone

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

463

AEI interface

The AEI (Additional Equipment Interface) pursuant to ETSI features an analog X section and digital Y section. A tape recorder or headset can be connected to the AEI interface.

Connection is implemented via a 6-pin WE socket.

A connecting cable must not exceed the total length of 6 m.

Connection

Pin

Assignment

1

XTE

OUT

2

XTE

IN

3

GND

A

AEI interface

4

YTE

IN

5

GND

D

6

YTE

OUT

U

P0

interface

The U

P0

interface is in two-wire design. Both wires transmit the user data and signaling data between the

PC and the MG1000 using the time separation technique, also known as the ping-pong technique.

S0

Pin

Assignment

1

Available

2

Available

3

UP0 Interface

4

A B

5>

Available

6

Available

U

P0

interface range

When planning the line network, it must be taken into consideration that the range of the U

P0

interface may vary in relation to the cables that are used:

• 0.6 mm diameter for 3.5 km outdoor cable; 1.7 km for installation cable

• 0.4 mm diameter for 2.1 km outdoor cable

The use of various types of cables as well as the number of distributors within the line network will reduce the range of the U

P0

interface.

When connecting the line network, the following instructions must be adhered to:

• The lines for the U

P0

interface must be designed as twisted wire pairs.

• The shields of the cables must be connected to the ground potential on both sides.

The supply of the U

P0

interface to a terminal is implemented via so-called Universal Connector Units

(UAEs).

464

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Tape recorder

Connector

A tape recorder can be connected to the AEI interface. The input line of the tape recorder must be DC isolated and highly resistant (>10 kOhm).

The tape recorder is controlled via make contacts 1. See "AEI interface" table for pin assignment.

Control

The diagram illustrates the control connections on a tape recorder.

Tape recorder connection

1. AEI interface

2. Tape recorder NF input

3. BVT2

4. Relay contact

5. Interface for hook switch

AC

I max

2

U

max

P max

250

62,5

DC

2

220

30

Unit

A

V

W

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

465

CARUB Cable Adapter Russia B modules

Short description

The cable adaptor CARUB are used in Russia and the USA for the connection of ASCEU, ASC2, ASC21,

JPAT and ATLC boards.

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• Overcurrent breakpoint (230 V contact)

• Protective elements for contact with outside voltage

1. Cable 1 (16x2) to the MDF

2. Cable 2 (16x2) to the MDF

CF2E Central Functions 2E

Short description

The central board CF2E is the basic equipment in all modules.

It supports the dealer and intermodule handover functions for DECT.

Features

Ports

B channels (time slots)

ILMx

DECT

Internal traffic flow

External traffic flow

544

1088

+

+

1088 Erl.

225 Erl.

466

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Features

Clock Supply and Module Synchronization

External synchronization via network nodes (S0, S2M).

Master function in multi-module systems can be set up using software.

Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking)

Module Switching Matrix

Bit rate 4,096 MBit/s

Module internal non-blocking

11 DTMF receiver sets, 4 DTMF transmitters

Call Progress Tones

A maximum of 16 call progress tones can be generated as customer-specific or country-specific and can be cyclically repeated. At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

In addition, a maximum of 3 tones with burst character can be supplied.

Short Voice Messages

Up to 8 voice messages or "music on holds" can be used. The total duration of all brief voice messages must be no longer than 64 sec.

Long Voice Messages

4 voice messages with unspecified time limits and confidata can be set up (connecting message devices via analogue subscriber line circuits). At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

Tone Injection in Two-Party Conversations

Up to 3 various cyclic tones can be generated which may be fed into a maximum of 15 two-party conversations (e.g. call waiting tone, rolling tone etc.).

Conferences

The number of subscribers at a conference is 3.

Power demand +5V

Other features

2200 mA

The CF2E board is supported from the programme file MSC2P006 onwards.

A high precision reference clock is required for the intermodule handover functions. This can be carried out through the use of the CL2M subboard on the UIP or ICF. See also Intermodule Handover section.

In coupling via LWL, the CF2E board is to be fitted with the subboard CFIML or CFIML1 central function inter module Link.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

467

Jumper and DIL Switch Functions

Configuration switches are located on the component side of the module. The functions and positions of these switches are described below:

CF2E module, module side

1. DIL switch 3

2. DIL switch 2

3. Fuse F1 for the power supply EOC, 500 mA replaceable

4. LED red:

Fault indicator of the central functions

Hardware out of order

468

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

5. Fire protection fuse F3, 7 A

If the fire protection fuse is defective (burned out), the module must be replaced by a new one.

6. LED green: R/T active on: High data traffic flashes: Data packet being received/sent to/from the microprocessor

7. LED yellow: TFAIL flashes: Packet loss in transmission buffer because of transmit timeout or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro processor

8. LED red: RFAIL flashes: Packet loss in receiver buffer because of receive timeout or reset

9. CFIML or CFIML1 submodule Central Function Inter Module Link

Functions of DIL switch 3

System configuration for MMG

Single module system

Two module system, first module

Two module system, second module

Two module system, systems with more than two modules

Specification of highest scan address

Switch

1

ON

ON

2

OFF

OFF

Switch

3

ON

OFF

4

ON

OFF

35

55

87

126 (Default)

Battery status query (AIC)

Testing of -48 V battery is not possible

(Default)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

5

ON

Testing of -48 V battery active OFF

When using PS350 with a connected battery (only Integral 33): Switching on the battery voltage monitoring

Error signaling unit

with ESU without ESU

6

ON

OFF

In order to get the correct signaling direction ATA with EE8B in an MG1000 Media Gateway with ESBA instead of ESB, switch 6 must be placed to ON (with ESU).

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

469

Download

Download inactive

Download possible (default)

Module Manager Watchdog

Watchdog inactive

Watchdog active (default)

Functions of DIL switch 2

Intermodule handover

in twin and multi module configuration: intermodule handover active across modules in twin and B3 configuration: intermodule handover inactive across modules

Fiber optic cable length compensation (only with doubled CF2E)

Activation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot

Deactivation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot

Switch still without function

Switch still without function 4

3

switch

1

ON

OFF

2

ON

OFF

switch

7

ON

OFF

8

ON

OFF

470

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

LEDs and Switch Functions

Boards

CF2E board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

S2 Middle position

Switch Function

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

471

L6

L7

L8

L4

L5

S1 Reset switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

S2 Service Switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Reset of the board, locking

Reset board, keying

No function, locking

With a doubled CF2x: activate switchover, keying

Meanings of LEDs

L1 ACTIVE MSMC active/inactive on: MSMC (switching matrix processor unit) resetting/inactive flashing quickly: MSMC downloading flashing slowly: MSMC waiting for startup

off:

L2 CLKUA on:

Clock unit active

Normal operation: Active module clock unit

L3 IMHOSYNC on:

flashing: off:

Doubling: active CF2x

Module is synchronised for DECT operation

Resynchronization (flashes for 30 sec.)

Module is not synchronised for DECT operation

This operating status may also occur if switch 1 of DIL switch 2 is in the ON position (IMHO active) while LED L4 is on.

MAFREI on: flashing:

Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking) or external synchronization (if

L10 is also on)

Internal free-run clock mode (internal clocking) after failure of synchronous clock via beam waveguide path

AMEX1S on:

Alarm message ext. synchr. clock 1 sec.

Failure of synchronizing clock signal for more than 1 sec. (with master module: clock pulse from local exchange, network node; with slave module: clock pulse via fibre-optic cable)

DSP System 1 Status - LED on: Boot phase after board reset or DSP system 1 defective off:

TFAIL flashing:

DSP system 25.40 mm operation

MMG

Packet loss in transmission buffer because of transmit time-out or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro processor

MMG status

472

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

L9

L10

L13

L14

L11

L12 on: flashing: off:

CLKUSYN on:

MANK on:

MMG not in operation (no board operation) or defective beam waveguide connection (after CF reset in multi-module system)

MMG in operation, but board logon not yet possible

MMG in operation

Clock unit synchronization

Module clock system is synchronized

Master network node

External synchronous clock switched on for synchronization by the system software

IDR

ECLKU on: flashing:

IDR fault from IMLA (e.g. beam waveguide not in order)

Error clock unit

Clock system error

After failure of synchronous clock via beam waveguide

DSP System 2 Status - LED on: Boot phase after board reset or DSP system 2 defective off:

RFAIL flashing:

DSP system 2 in operation

Packet loss in receiver buffer because of receive time-out or reset

Doubling

It is possible to double the CF2E module in the R1 rack.

See

Doubling

[

→ 153 ]

.

Removing and Inserting the board

ESD-measures must be accomplished when working with boards susceptible to electrostatic shock.

The CF2E board can be removed or inserted during system operation. However, the module will not operate if the CF2E is not doubled.

Removal of the board is followed by a restart without loading customer data.

When doubling, the CF2E board must only be removed when in passive status (LED 2 off). If

LED 2 is on, place switch S2 into the right position. LED 2 Off The board can now be removed.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

473

CL2M Clock 2 Module

Short description

The submodule CL2M on the UIP or ICF board implements an external clock supply for the PBX or a clock pulse output for external devices.

Use on

UIP

ICF receiver and transmitter 2048 kHz receiver 2048/1544 kHz

This is necessary if digital dial-up lines or permanent connections are not available as the clock source, or if the customer has made high demands in terms of the reliability of the clock supply.

Other features

Power demand +5V 100 mA

If the CL2M is positioned on slot 1 or 2 of the UIP, the line can be connected via the CA1B board.

With slots 3 or 4 occupied and V24M (slot 1 or 2) being used, the line must be connected via the CA3B board.

Location of CL2M on the UIP board

1. Connecting circuit slot

2. UIP module

3. CL2M module

474

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

DCON Digital Protocol Converter

Short description

The DCON module links systems from various manufacturers, in which signaling between the systems takes place via the DPNSS protocol.

It provides this protocol by converting the TNet Bosch Network Protocol.

Other features

Region of application

Current requirement +5V

National and international

800 mA

Interfaces

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

A module contains one port (30B+D or 23B+D).

Download board software

Board identification using board ID data

Maintenance functions

The switching SW and tools treat the DCON like a DT2 with TNET protocol.

The module should generally be set up as a SLAVE type via the ICU data.

LEDs and Switch Functions

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

475

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1

S2

S3

S4

Middle position

Middle position

Middle position

Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

S2 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Preparatory disabling

Reset DT2 part

Forced board download

No function

Report (fault statistic message to the system console) The switch must be moved back to the middle position after use.

Trace mode S3 Left:

Middle:

S4

Right:

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Reset converter part

No function

L8

L9

L10

L11

L12

L13

L4

L5

L6

L7

L2

L3

L14

L15

L16

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: flashing: off: on: on: on: on: on: on:

Module is busy in terms of exchange functions (active layer 3 connection)

Board removable after preparatory disabling

Board is not busy

Module is clock supplier

Unused

Remote Alarm Indication RAI (remote side reporting fault status)

Alarm Indication Signal AIS (remote side reporting Out of Order) on: on: on: on:

Loss of Signal LOS (no receiving signal)

RES1 (reserve)

Trace mode (Test operation for fault tracking)

TNET LOS (loss of signal in TNET) on: on: flashing: off:

TNET L1 alarm (layer 1 failure in TNET)

TNET L2 alarm (layer 2 failure in TNET)

TNET in operation

Board reset in progress

Download in progress

Board in operation on: Normal operation (layer 1 active, no alarm)

Unused on:

Fault count> E-6 (bit error rate > 10

-6

)

476

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

L17

L18

L19

L20

L21

L22

L23

L24

Jumper Position

on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: off:

Fault count> E-3 (bit error rate > 10

-3

)

Loss of Frame LOF (loss of frame synchronization)

RES2 (not busy at present)

Reset of converter part in progress

Converter part in operation

DPNSS LOS (loss of signal in DPNSS network)

DPNSS L1 alarm (layer 1 failure in DPNSS network)

DPNSS L2 alarm (layer 2 failure in DPNSS network)

DPNSS network in operation (layer 2 is o.k.)

Boards

X32-X36 Line Impedance Selection

The line impedance is set using five-fold jumpers.

Connection

X32-X33

X33-X34

X34-X35

X35-X36

Impedance

75 Ohm

100 Ohm

100 Ohm

120 Ohm

X31 not equipped

System Manual Integral Enterprise

DCON board, component side

June 2009

477

DIL Switch Position

S4 Pulse Shape Selection

The shape of the transmission pulse can be adapted for 1.544 MHz applications using S4. For E1, the switch position is ignored and the pulse shape is set according to the specified line impedance. For DSX-1 applications, the pulse shape can be set according to the line length. S4/4 is not used.

S4/1 S4/2 S4/3 Application

OFF OFF OFF DSX-1 (163-200 m)

ON OFF OFF DSX-1 (122-163 m)

OFF ON OFF DSX-1 (81-122 m)

ON ON OFF DSX-1 (41-81 m)

OFF OFF ON DSX-1 (0-41 m)

OFF OFF ON CSU ECSA T1 C1.2

ON OFF ON CSU FCC Part 68A

X ON ON CSU FCC Part 68A

S5

This is used by the ZAP monitor (interactive module control). S5/6 and S5/7 determine the baud rate for the serial ZAP RS232 port.

S5/7

Off

Off

On

S5/6

Off

On

X

Baud rate

38400

19200

9600

X = Insignificant position

S5/1 is used to select the "DT2 Transparent Mode" (ON position) The DCON acts as a normal DT2 in this mode. The board transfers all D channel messages transparently.

In the OFF position, the user program is booted and the board starts to operate automatically.

S5/2 determines whether the user program or the ZAP monitor program is loaded. In the ON position, the board will boot the ZAP monitor program, and is then ready for testing and debugging.

S6

Only S6/6 is used at present. This selects the clock source for the transmission port.

In the OFF position, the system’s internal clock is used.

In the ON position, the clock is derived from the receiver port.

478

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

DCON Configuration

General

This chapter describes the user interface and the configuration parameters which are required for the

TNet/DPNSS module.

Each paragraph consists of a configuration menu, which appears to the user, and a description of the available options.

The user interface consists of a list of menus. Each menu option is selected by entering the number to the left of the option.

In order to commence a user interface session, the user must press any button within the first five seconds of system initialization. The user then selects the required option by entering the number to the left of the option.

Connecting the terminal

The socket on the front side of the module is 9-pin (D Sub). 3 connectors are needed to connect the terminal. The connected terminal can be 9-pin or 25-pin.

A VT 100 compatible terminal or a VT 100 emulation on a PC can be used.

9-pin to 9-pin connection

Terminal

RXD 2

TXD 3

-------------- 3 TXD

-------------- 2 RXD

GND 5 -------------- 5 GND

9-pin to 25-pin connection

Terminal

RXD 2 -------------- 3 TXD

TXD 3 -------------- 2 RXD

GND 5 -------------- 7 GND

System initialization

The following text will appear on the screen during initialization:

BOSCH TELECOM TNet/DPNSS Conversation

Version x.xx

DCON Initializing

Press Any Key for MMI: 3

In order to commence configuration, the user must press any key within the first five seconds of initialization. If no button is pressed during this time, the configuration menu will only become available again after a reset.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

479

The following text will appear on the screen after initialization:

BOSCH TELECOM TNet/DPNSS Conversation

Version x.xx

Initialization Complete

Reset DCON for MMI

Main menu

The configuration main menu is displayed.

BOSCH TELECOM TNet/DPNSS Conversation

Version x.xx

1. TNET Configuration

2. DPNS Configuration

3. System Clock Source

4. Software Download

5. Exit

Enter Option [1..5]:

The user selects an option by entering a number (1..5) and pressing the return button.

The following paragraphs describe the available options.

TNet configuration

The TNet configuration main menu is displayed.

TNet Configuration

------------------

1. Origination Address

2. Timeslots

3. Timers

4. Write Settings

5. Exit

Enter Option [1..5]:

The following options are available:

1. Default origination address (during call setup) in the TNet, if no line identity is supported by DPNSS.

2. Incoming time slots can be configured individually.

3. Signal timer configuration

4. New settings are written in the flash-PROM, and the module is reset.

5. Return to main menu.

480

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Origination address

The following options are available:

TNet Origination Address

1. Default Origination Address: 0525371393

2. Write Settings

3. Exit

Enter Option [1..3]:

1. The user will be prompted to enter a new default origination address. Only digits between 0 and 9 are accepted. A maximum of 30 digits can be entered. Pressing the return button without entering any digits will result in the default origination address being erased.

2. New settings are written in the flash-PROM, and the module is reset.

3. Return to previous menu.

Time slots

The following options are available:

TNet Timeslot Configuration

---------------------------

[01] D [17] B

[02] D [18] B

[03] D [19] B

[04] D [20] B

[05] D [21] B

[06] D [22] B

[07] D [23] B

[08] D [24] B

[09] D [25] B

[10] D [26] B

[11] D [27] B

[12] D [28] B

[13] D [29] B

[14] D [30] B

[15] D [31] B

1. Edit

2. Exit

1. Edit time slot configuration (as shown in next diagram).

2. Return to previous menu.

All time slots are bidirectional in terms of default.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

481

The time slots are selected using the numeric keypad. The user can select the following options:

I

B

O

D

W

E

TNet timeslot configuration

[01] D [17] B Use Numeric

[02] D [18] B keypad to

[03] D [19] B select timeslot -

8:up

2:down

4:left

6:right

[04] D [20] B

[05] D [21] B

[06] D [22] B

[07] D [23] B

[08] D [24] B Timeslot Settings:

[09] D [25] B

[10] D [26] B B:Bidirectional

[11] D [27] B I:Incoming

[12] D [28] B O:Outgoing

[13] D [29] B D:Disabled

[14] D [30] B

[15] D [31] B

W. Write Settings

E. Exit

Enter Option [B,I,O,D,W,E]:

Configure bidirectional time slot.

Configure incoming time slot.

Configure outgoing time slot.

Disable time slot for incoming and outgoing conversations.

Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the module

Return to previous menu.

Timer configuration

The given values are default settings.

TNet Timer Configuration

Time (Seconds)

1. T302 15

2. T303 4

3. T304 60

4. T305 30

5. T308 3

6. T310 60

7. T313 30

8. T3AA 120

9. Edit

10. Exit

Enter Option [1..10]:

This menu allows the user to configure the TNet signaling software timer.

482

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

List of configurable timers:

Timer Start

1 T302 Send SETUP ACK, restart if INFO received

2

4

5

T303

T305

T308

Send SETUP

3 T304 Receive SETUP ACK, restart when INFO sent

Send DISC

Send REL

Stop condition

Receive ALERT, CONN,

CALL, SENT

Receive ALERT, CONN,

CALL, SENT

Receive CALL SENT,

ALERT, CONN or INFO

Receive REL

Receive REL ACK

6 T310 CALL SENT, receive INFO Receive ALERT, CONN

7 T313 Send CONN

8 T3AA Send ALERT

Receive CONN ACK

Send CONN

Release with DISC

Release with DISC

Release with DISC

Release with REL

Repeat REL and restart from T308

Release with DISC

Release with DISC

Release with DISC

All timers can be configured from 0 to 255 seconds. Other available options:

9 Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the module. Return to previous menu.

10 Return to previous menu.

DPNSS configuration

The following options are available:

DPNSS Configuration

1. Timeslots

2. Timers

3. Layer 2/layer 3 Configuration

4. Layer 1 Stats

5. Write Settings

6. Exit

Enter Option [1..6]:

1. Individual time slots can be configured as incoming, outgoing, bidirectional and disabled.

2. Signaling timer configuration.

3. DPNSS A/B and X/Y configuration

4. Time interval between layer 1 statistic reports, which are sent via the V.24 interface.

5. Write new settings and reset module.

6. Return to previous menu.

Time slots

The following options are available:

1. Edit time slot configuration (as shown in next diagram).

2. Return to previous menu.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

483

DPNSS Timeslot Configuration

[01] B [17] B [33] B [49] B

[02] B [18] B [34] B [50] B

[03] B [19] B [35] B [51] B

[04] B [20] B [36] B [52] B

[05] B [21] B [37] B [53] B

[06] B [22] B [38] B [54] B

[07] B [23] B [39] B [55] B

[08] B [24] B [40] B [56] B

[09] B [25] B [41] B [57] B

[10] B [26] B [42] B [58] B

[11] B [27] B [43] B [59] B

[12] B [28] B [44] B [60] B

[13] B [29] B [45] B [61] B

[14] B [30] B [46] B [62] B

[15] B [31] B [47] B [63] B

1. Edit

2. Exit

Enter Option [1..2]:

All time slots are bidirectional set in terms of default.

Channels 1 to 31 are real channels. They are used as speech channels.

Channels 33 to 63 are virtual channels. They are required for features which do not need a speech channel (e.g. callback at a free subscriber).

The time slots are selected using the numeric keypad. The user can select the following options:

DPNSS Timeslot Configuration

[01] B [17] B [33] B [49] B Use Numeric

[02] B [18] B [34] B [50] B keypad to

[03] B [19] B [35] B [51] B select

[04] B [20] B [36] B [52] B timeslot-8:up

[05] B [21] B [37] B [53] B 2:down

[06] B [22] B [38] B [54] B 4:left

[07] B [23] B [39] B [55] B 6:right

[08] B [24] B [40] B [56] B

[09] B [25] B [41] B [57] B Timeslot Settings:

[10] B [26] B [42] B [58] B

[11] B [27] B [43] B [59] B B:Bidirectional

[12] B [28] B [44] B [60] B I:Incoming

[13] B [29] B [45] B [61] B O:Outgoing

[14] B [30] B [46] B [62] B D:Disabled

[15] B [31] B [47] B [63] B

W. Write Setting

E. Exit

484

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Enter Option [B,I,O,D,W.E]:

I

B

O

D

W

E

Configure bidirectional time slot.

Configure incoming time slot.

Configure outgoing time slot.

Disable time slot for incoming and outgoing conversations.

Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the module.

Return to previous menu.

Timer configuration

The following options are available:

DPNSS Timer Configuration

Time (Seconds)

1. ISRM/SSRM Timer 60

2. CRM Timer 10

3. Write Settings

4. Exit

Enter Option [1..4]:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Configure ISRM/SSRM timer (0 to 255 seconds)

Configure CRM timer (0 to 255 seconds)

Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the module.

Return to previous menu.

The above values are default settings.

Layer 2/Layer 3 configuration

The following options are available:

DPNSS Timer Layer2/Layer3 Configuration

Config.

1. L2 Config A

2. L3 Config X

3. Write Settings

4. Exit

Enter Option [1..4]:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Configure layer 2 A/B end

Configure layer 3 X/Y end

Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the module.

Return to previous menu.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

485

Configuration of layer 3 X/Y is necessary to eliminate call collisions. If a collision occurs, the "Y" conversation is reset and the "X" conversation continues.

Configuration of layer 2 A/B is necessary for layer 2 signaling. One end of the DPNSS connection must be specified as the A end and the other as the B end. If A/B end configuration is implemented incorrectly, layer 2 will not be initialized.

Layer 1 statistics

DPNSS Layer 1 Stats. Configuration

Time (Seconds)

1. Layer 1 Stats: Interval 120

2. Write Settings

3. Exit

Enter Option [1..4]:

The following options are available:

1.

Time interval between DPNSS layer 1 statistic reports, which are sent via the V.24 interface (0 to

255 seconds). The layer 1 statistic reports are disabled, if the time interval is set to 0.

2.

Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the module.

3.

Return to previous menu.

Clock source

The clock source is given as DPNSS or TNET. This parameter cannot be configured by the user interface.

Conversion System Clock

System Clock Source: DPNSS

Press Any Key To Continue:

Software download

This option is used to download the module.

The user will be asked to connect a PC to the module. This connection is made using the same interface which is being used for the user interface. If a PC with VT 100 emulation is already connected, this emulation can be ended in order to arrive at MS-DOS.

The user can leave this status by resetting the module.

The following paragraph describes the software download.

Software Download

Connect PC and run download utility.

486

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Software download program

The download program is used to load a new software version for the module. It will operate on every PC

(IBM compatible). It can use either the COM1 or COM2 interface. Connection is made as already described for the user interface.

The download program is called up by the DOWNLOAD instruction. The program requires a default from

COM1. If the COM2 is also required, the DOWNLOAD COM2 instruction is entered. The baud rate is set to

19200.

The following display will appear when the program is called up:

-- BOSCH Telecom TNet/DPNSS Conversation Download Utility Vx.xx

-- Opening COMx: at 19k2 baud

The following display will appear if the module is detected:

-- DCON Card Detected

If the module is not detected, an error message will appear and the program is ended:

-- DCON COM PORT NOT DETECTED

The flash-PROM will be erased once the module has been detected. The following display will appear:

-- Erasing Flash PROM

-- Erase Complete

The user can choose whether to preserve the existing parameter:

-- Preserve existing configuration? (Y/N):

The user must enter Y or N. No other keys will be accepted.

The filename is then entered:

-- Enter filename ()...

The following display will appear if the file is not found:

-- Cannot open file, retry, or <ret> to quit

-- Enter filename ()...

The following display will appear when download commences:

-- Download started

The following display will appear after a download:

-- Download complete

The program returns to MS-DOS.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

487

MDF Connections via CA1B from the DCON module

Cable end CA1B

Colours

BK/BN

BK/RD

DCON

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

via CA4B from the DCON module

Coax 1 A1/B1 Transmit

Coax 2 C1/D1 Receive

DDID Direct Dialling Inward Circuit

Short description

The DDID board is the interface for 8 analogue network accesses for direct dial in accordance with country-specific guidelines.

Other features

Power demand +5V

Interfaces

450 mA

8 times a/b

16 kHz meter pulse count

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

488

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

LEDs and Switch Functions

DDID board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

S2-S9 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

S2

Right, then left:

Left:

Middle:

S3-S8 Left:

Middle:

S9 Left:

Middle:

Preparatory disabling (VSP)

Neutral/release

Forced board download

DID 1 preparatory disabling

DID 1 release

DID x preparatory disabling

DID 8 preparatory disabling

DID 8 release

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

489

L6

L2

Meanings of LEDs

L1

L3, L4, L5, L7, L8, L9

L10

MDF Connections

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU on: flashing: off: on: flashing: off: on: on: on:

Board is busy with switching functions

Board removable after preparatory disabling

Board is not busy

Board reset in progress

Download in progress

Board in operation

DID 1 is busy

DID x is busy

DID 8 is busy

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Patch panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

Cable Adapter CA1B from DDID

free free free free free free free free a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8

490

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

DECT21 ICU for DECT-Applications 21

Short description

The DECT21 module is used to connect the RM 588 radio base station, part no. 4.998.001.296, to the Integral Enterprise.

It performs an automatic runtime measurement. The manual measurement of the individual routes up to 1 km is not applicable as long as no repeater is connected between.

Other features

Region of application National and international

Current requirement +5V 1185 mA

Interfaces 8 U

PD

interfaces for RBS

A U

PD

interface corresponds to 2 physical U

PN

interfaces.

The ADPCM (Adaptive-Differential-Pulse-Code-Modulation, 32 kbit/s) conversion is carried out on the module.

One of the two D channels is used for the transmission of synchronization information between the

DECT21 module and the RBS.

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Download from board software

(1)

Board identification using board ID data

Maintenance function

Note 1:

If a DECT21 is to be plugged into a slot which is set up for a DECT22 successor module, you must first use the ICU Editor service tool to set up a DECT21 module. Downloading DECT22 programs to DECT21 would lead to malfunctions. As a result the board would not work.

System Manual Integral Enterprise

DECT21 module, module side

June 2009

491

Line lengths

Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y 0.6 mm

2

External cable A-2YF(L)2Y 0.6 mm

2

Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y 0.6 mm

2

and U

PN

repeater

External cable A-2YF(L)2Y 0.6 mm

2

and U

PN

repeater

1.0 km

1.0 km

2x 1.0 km

2x 1.0 km

LEDs and Switch Functions

DECT21 module, front side

Switch Function

S1 Right:

Middle:

Left:

S2 Right:

Middle:

Left:

Reset module

Normal position

No function

Yet to be defined

Normal position

Yet to be defined

492

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

L6

L7

L8

L9

L2

L3

L4

L5

L10

L11

L12

L13

L18

L19

L20

L21

L14

L15

L16

L17

L22

L23

L24

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1

Flashing:

Off:

On:

On:

Flashing:

Off:

On:

Flashing:

MDF Connections

MDF

colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

Panel for four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

Module is not busy

Module is busy in terms of exchange functions

Synch. Master

Layer 1, active port 0

Layer 1, active port 2

Layer 1, active port 4

Layer 1, active port 6

Layer 1, active port 8

Layer 1, active port 10

Layer 1, active port 12

Layer 1, active port 14

FP download active

Yet to be defined

Module in operation

Module reset in progress

Download in progress

All 30 B-channels are busy

Layer 1, active port 1

Layer 1, active port 3

Layer 1, active port 5

Layer 1, active port 7

Layer 1, active port 9

Layer 1, active port 11

Layer 1, active port 13

Layer 1, active port 15

SW IDM in ICU activated

Yet to be defined

via CA1B from DECT21 or DECT22

1st Station

2nd Station

3rd Station

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

493

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

4th Station

5th Station

6th Station

7th Station

8th Station

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

DS02 Digital Linecard S0 Variant 2

Short description

The DS02 board provides 16 supplied digital S

0

subscriber ports.

Other features

Country of application

Power demand +5V

Power supply

Interfaces

National and international

300 mA

48 V/100 mA short-circuit-proof

16 supplied, digital S

0

subscriber ports four-wire

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

In conjunction with V24IA board debugging interface on board front

Debugger = program that helps to track down errors

494

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

LEDs and Switch Functions

Boards

DS02 module, front side

1. RJ45 connector

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

Function of the Switches

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Preparatory disabling (VSP) for all connecting circuits

Forced download of the board, at the end of the download process the module is automatically reset.

In order to prevent infinite repetition of the download, the switch S1 must be returned to the middle position after the message "Test Reply 1".

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

495

L2

L3

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1 On: Board is busy with switching functions

Flashing:

Off:

Module is removable after preparatory disabling

Module is not busy

On: Module reset in progress

Flashing: Download in progress

Off:

Free

Module has gone into operation

L4

L5

Free

On:

Off:

L6-L19 On:

L20

Off:

On:

Off:

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 0 active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 0 inactive

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1/14 active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1/14 inactive

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 15 active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 15 inactive

MDF Connections

Colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Panel for four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

C2/D2 (R)

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

via CA2B from DS02 or DS03

Cable 1 Cable 2

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

A9/B9 (T)

C9/D9 (R)

A2/B2 (T)

C10/D10 (R)

A10/B10 (T)

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

A5/B5 (T)

C5/D5 (R)

A6/B6 (T)

C6/D6 (R)

A7/B7 (T)

C7/D7 (R)

A8/B8 (T)

C8/D8 (R)

A11/B11 (T)

C11/D11 (R)

A12/B12 (T)

C12/D12 (R)

A13/B13 (T)

C13/D13 (R)

A14/B14 (T)

C14/D14 (R)

A15/B15 (T)

C15/D15 (R)

A16/B16 (T)

C16/D16 (R)

496

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

DT0 Digital Linecard T0

Short description

This component is no longer manufactured (February 2002). It has been replaced by the ADM

Analog Digital Mixboard module. Please only use ADM in the MG1000 Media Gateway.

The DT0-module provides 8-digit connections.

Other features

Region of application National and international

Current requirement +5V 610 mA

Interfaces 8 digital T

0

interfaces (exchange connections)

8 digital S

0

interfaces (exchange or locally-powered terminals, e.g. VA93D, PC)

8 digital S

0

FV interfaces for permanent circuits (clock master or clock slave) in private connections

Switchable digital attenuation for calls

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

The module contains the following additional features:

System Manual Integral Enterprise

DT0 module, module side

June 2009

497

LEDs and Switch Functions

DT0 board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

S2-S10 Middle position

S3

S4

S5

S6

S7

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

S2

Right, then left:

Not used

Right:

Middle:

Right:

Middle:

Right:

Middle:

Right:

Middle:

Right:

Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Forced board download

AO 1 preparatory disabling

AO 1 release/operating status

AO 2 preparatory disabling

AO 2 release/operating status

AO 3 preparatory disabling

AO 3 release/operating status

AO 4 preparatory disabling

AO 4 release/operating status

AO 5 preparatory disabling

498

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

S8

S9

S10

Middle:

Right:

Middle:

Right:

Middle:

Right:

Middle:

Meanings of LEDs

L7

L8

L1

L2

L3

L4, L5, L6, L9, L10, L11

L12

MDF connections DTD

AO 5 release/operating status

AO 6 preparatory disabling

AO 6 release/operating status

AO 7 preparatory disabling

AO 7 release/operating status

AO 8 preparatory disabling

AO 8 release/operating status on: flashing: off: on:

Board is busy with switching functions

Board removable after preparatory disabling

Board is not busy

Module is synchronous clock supplier on: flashing:

Board reset in progress

Download in progress off: Board in operation

Unused on: on: on:

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1 active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit X active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 8 active

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Patch panel for four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

System Manual Integral Enterprise via CA1x from the DT0

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

A2/B2 (T)

C2/D2 (R)

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

A5/B5 (T)

C6/D5 (R)

A6/B6 (T)

C6/D6 (R)

A7/B7 (T)

C7/D7 (R)

A8/B8 (T)

C8/D8 (R)

June 2009

499

DT21 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 1

Short description

The DT21 module provides a configurable S

2M

interface.

Other features

Region of application

Current requirement +5V

Interfaces

National and international

400 mA

One S

2M

interface (exchange(T2) - or FV(TIE)), 120 Ohm symm. or 75 Ohm asymm. (not provided for use in MG100)

Optical interface driver(not provided for use in MG100)

Switchable digital attenuation for speech connections (B-channels), adjustable via the ICU Editor

2.048 MHz clock pulse output(not provided for use in MG100)

V.24 Test interface (front panel)

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Cable adapter

For use in MG100

Possible adapter boards: CA1B, CA4B, OFA2B, OFAS

NT feed via ESBx

For use in MG100

None, direct tap on the front panel only

NT feed via an external mains adapter plug (part no.

27.4402.1056).

Ranges

For use in MG1000

37 dB attenuation range

Wire interfaces (CA1B or CA4B)

120 Ohm symmetric 0.9 km Installation cable

75 Ohm coax 1.5 km

Optical interface (OFA1B) monomode cable 9/125 micrometer, 11 dB max. attenuation for entire optical path (e.g. max. 20 km at 0.4 dB/km and 7 plug connections 0.4 dB/plug)

For use in MG100

37 dB attenuation range

Wire interfaces (direct tap on the front panel)

120 Ohm symmetric 0.9 km Installation cable

1.8 km TF cable

500

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

LEDs and Switch Function

Boards

DT21 board, front side

1. V.24 Test plug

1 = not assigned

2 = TXD

3 = RXD

4 = not assigned

5 = GND

6 = D channel data upstream

7 = D channel data downstream

8 = Clock burst 2.048 MHz

9 = +5V

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

501

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Neutral position

S2 Neutral position

Switch Function

S1

S2 links:

Mean:

Right:

Right, then left:

Left, then right:

Preparatory disabling

Operating status/release

Reset board

Forced board download

Report (fault statistic message to the system console) The switch must be moved back to the middle position after use (2 MHz clock output off) or to the right (2 MHz clock output on).

Normal operating mode / 2 MHz clock output off

2 MHz clock output on

Mean:

Right:

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7

Meanings of LEDs

L1

L8

L9

On:

Flashing: off:

On:

On:

On:

On:

On:

On:

Flashing: off:

On:

On:

L10

L11

L12

On:

On:

On:

Board is busy with switching functions

Board removable after preparatory disabling

Board is not busy

Module is synchronous clock supplier

Remote Alarm Indication RAI (opposite side reporting fault status)

Alarm Indication Signal AIS (opposite side reporting "Out of Order")

Loss of Signal LOS (no receiving signal)

Rx E bit errors

Board reset in progress

Download in progress

Board in operation

Normal operation (layer 1 active, no alarm)

Bit error rate > 10

-6

Bit error rate > 10

-3

Loss of Framing LOF (loss of frame synchronization)

The LED signals an activated debug monitoring. LED 12 is used as indicator as this debugging applies to the real time function of the module. It is possible to activate the debugging with a connected terminal and finally removing the terminal - then the debugging remains on and unaffected.

In order to connect an IDM to the front panel, an optional component must be inserted on the

DT21, reference number: 49.9801.4247.

502

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

MDF connections DT21

MDF Connection via CA1B from the DT21 Module

Cable end via CA1B from the DT21

Colours old

BK/BN

Colours new

BN/WHBN A1/B1 (T)

BK/RD

BK/OG

BK/YE

BU/WHBU

GN/WHGN

OG/WHOR

C1/D1 (R)

A2/B2 (2 MHz pulse to NT) free

MDF Connection via CA4B or OFA1B from the DT21 Module

Coax 1 A1/B1 Transmit

Coax 2 C1/D1 Receive

HAMUX - Home Agent Multiplexer

Short description

The following description provides a basic outline of the HAMUX module. More detailed information about module features, installation and configuration can be found in a separate manual entitled HAMUX Home Agent Multiplexer.

The HAMUX module with the associated SPCU submodules is used for the integration of up to 8 "Home

Agents" in the Call Center and operates with software versions from E04.1 on.

It is a central module with line interfaces, but with a virtual short-circuit between the two connecting devices, and enables the simultaneous transmission of compressed speech, data and signaling to a home agent via a B-channel.

Included in shipment

ISDN exchange access (to home agent) via standard MG1000 modules

Purchasable passive ISDN card for S

0

bus interface with D channel protocols

Cable adapter with 2x 2 MBit interfaces

ISDN dial connection via S

0

interface with one B-channel and one D channel

Multiplexing of the B-channel

Communication protocol of the data application/transmission

Speech compression

Connection of the HAMUX to the DP world is implemented via a 2 Mbit/s multiport server

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

503

Principal overview of a Call Center with home agent

1. Customer

2. HOME Agent

3. Network analog or digital

4. ISDN

5. Home agent PC board

6. Digital or analog connector board

7. Database

8. Agent/Supervisor

9. PC Agent/Supervisor

10. BCC Server

11. Router

12. LAN

13. HOST

In order to implement the 8 home agents, the module must be logged in with 16 connecting devices. Connecting devices AO0 - AO7 are responsible for the setup of the carrier connections to the home agents.

Connecting devices AO8 - AO15 are subjected to tunneled transmission and represent the actual agent connecting circuits.

Data transmission is implemented to a router via a 2 MBit/s data interface independently of startup and switching software. To enable better exploitation of the router capacity, it is possible to operate the data interfaces of the HAMUX module in cascades.

504

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

HAMUX module

LEDs and Switch Functions

Interpretation of the LEDs

System Manual Integral Enterprise

HAMUX module, front side

June 2009

505

L1 Total status of LEDs

On: 1 or more L3 ports active

Flashing:

Off:

All ports are blocked or not active

All ports are in idle condition

L2 Total status of LEDs

On: Reset

Flashing:

Off:

Failure of the configuration data received

Normal operation of ICU

L3 Port 0

On:

Off:

Flashing:

L4 Port 8

On:

Off:

Flashing:

Blocked

L2 and L3 active

Blocked

L5 Port 1

On:

Off:

Flashing:

L6 Port 9

On:

Off:

Flashing:

L7 Port 2

On:

Off:

Flashing:

L8 Port 10

On:

Off:

Flashing:

L9 Port 3

On:

Off:

Flashing:

L10 Port 11

On:

Off:

Blocked

L2 and L3 active

Blocked

Blocked

L2 and L3 active

Blocked

Blocked

L2 and L3 active

506

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Flashing:

L11 Port 4

On:

Off:

Flashing:

L12 Port 12

On:

Off:

Flashing:

L13 Port 5

On:

Off:

Flashing:

L14 Port 13

On:

Off:

Flashing:

L15 Port 6

On:

Off:

Flashing:

L16 Port 14

On:

Off:

Flashing:

L17 Port 7

On:

Off:

Flashing:

L18 Port 15

On:

Off:

Flashing:

L19 Message

Flashing:

L20 TEST LED1

On:

Off:

Switch Functions

Blocked

Blocked

L2 and L3 active

Blocked

Blocked

L2 and L3 active

Blocked

Blocked

L2 and L3 active

Blocked

Blocked

L2 and L3 active

Blocked

Fault in Direct Data Interface

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

507

HAMUX module, front side

S1 Total block

Left:

Middle:

Right:

S2 Test

Links

Right:

Hardware block of all 16 ports

Reset of ICU

508

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Connection

Upgrading of the HAMUX module

1. to Router/Server

2. Cables

3. CA6B Cable Adapter

4. 50-pin Champ

The HAMUX module is connected to the MG1000 via the CA6B cable adapter. At the same time, the interface to the router/server is implemented via WE socket 1 of the cable adapter.

In the event that several HAMUX modules are to be integrated into the system, a cascading of the modules is implemented via WE socket 2 of the respective cable adapter.

PIN

Function

3

1a (Rx)

PIN assignment, socket 1

6

1b (Rx)

4

2a (Tx)

5

2b (Tx)

PIN

Function

3

2a (Tx)

PIN assignment, socket 2

6

2b (Tx)

4

1a (Rx)

5

1b (Rx)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

509

Configuration of the Connecting Circuits

Carrier Connections AO0-A07

Connecting circuits 0-7 are responsible for the setup and release of the carrier connections to the home agents. They each provide a transparent B channel between the HAMUX board and a home agent.

On the HAMUX board, this is implemented by the simulation of a digital subscriber.

The connecting circuit is designated the digital subscriber type. The second B channel is blocked and assigned to the Data service function only.

A carrier connection connecting circuit is not able to setup a connection itself, but simply to seize the connection.

Agents AO8-AO15

Connecting circuits 8-15 are set up as agents in the Call Center. They are designated the digital position type. The second B channel is blocked.

The telephony service function only is set up for the agent connecting circuit.

Virtual short-circuit

On the HAMUX board, a virtual short-circuit is created by each carrier connection connecting circuit and an agent connecting circuit. The D channel of the agent connecting circuit is packed.

The status of a carrier connection connecting circuit (carrier connection present/not present) corresponds to the status of the agent connecting circuit (active/deactive).

Configuration Overview

AO

00

AO-type Log file Service B Chan-No.

B Channel Status

Digital subscriber EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0) Data only

1

2 free

Barred

01

02

Digital subscriber EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0) Data only

Digital subscriber EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0) Data only

1

2

1

2 free

Barred free

Barred

03 Digital subscriber EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0) Data only

04

05

06

07

Digital subscriber

Digital subscriber

Digital subscriber

Digital subscriber

EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0)

EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0)

EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0)

EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0)

Data only

Data only

Data only

Data only

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2 free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred

510

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

14

15

12

13

10

11

08

09

Digital position

Digital position

Digital position

Digital position

Digital position

Digital position

Digital position

Digital position

TN1R6 (Version 0)

TN1R6 (Version 0)

TN1R6 (Version 0)

TN1R6 (Version 0)

TN1R6 (Version 0)

TN1R6 (Version 0)

TN1R6 (Version 0)

TN1R6 (Version 0)

TLP only

TLP only

TLP only

TLP only

TLP only

TLP only

TLP only

TLP only

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

Configuration example for a carrier connection conn. circ.

Connecting circuit

Call number

Slot/HWA

AO-type

General ADS data

Name

Accounting section

Log files

:3300

:01-01-05-00

:DITN

:

:

:0000

ETSI

Overload priority

SPWKGR. Public exchange access

:2

:0

SPWKGR. COLISEE

DISA group

Dealer group

CN alloc. HKZ & tie

Category

:

:0

:0

:0

:-1

0 defective busy2

OFF OFF error

OFF free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

511

Waiting field max.

Reserved

Connection memory

Service memory

AO state

Service block

:0

:

:0

:1

:In operation

:sv-free

Service data

DAT

Status Free

30

Code dialling group 0

0

1

0

DEACTIVE

DEACTIVE

B channel data

:

:

B ch no. Bund no. Dir.

1 -

Acc.

Number of seizable B channels: 1

State

F

B ch no. Bund no. Dir.

2 -

Acc.

-

State

S

Seizure direction

G Outgoing

K

W

-

-

Incoming

Bothway

Access Authorization

M with

O without

Status

B -

D

EB -

-

ER -

F -

G -

R -

S

T

V

-

-

-

BUSY

DEFECTIVE

EDSS1 BUSY

FREE

FAULTY

RESERVED

BLOCKED

DEFECTIVE/BLOCKED

BUSY/BLOCKED

512

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Configuration example for an agent conn. circ.

20.11.97 07:51:19

Connecting circuit

Call number

Slot/HWA

AO-type

:3700

:01-01-05-08

:DIPL -log. position no.: 61

General ADS data

Name

Accounting section

Log files :

:

:0000

Log busy2 error

TN1R6

Overload priority

SPWKGR. Public exchange access

:2

:0

0 OFF OFF OFF

SPWKGR. COLISEE

DISA group

Dealer group

CN alloc. HKZ & tie

Category

Waiting field max.

Reserved

Connection memory

Service memory

AO state

Service block

:

:

:0

:0

:0

:-1

:0

:0

:1

:HW blocked

:sv-free

Service data

DAT

Status Free

Code dialling group

0

0

30

1

0

DEACTIVE

DEACTIVE

Boards

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

513

B channel data

:

:

B ch no.

1 -

Bund no.

-

Dir.

-

Acc.

Number of seizable B channels: 1

Seizure direction

G

K

-

-

Outgoing

Incoming

W Bothway

Access Authorization

M

O

-

with without

State

F

B

D

F

R

S

T

V

B ch no.

2

Status

EB -

ER -

G -

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Bund no.

BUSY

DEFECTIVE

EDSS1 BUSY

FREE

FAULTY

RESERVED

BLOCKED

-

Dir.

DEFECTIVE/BLOCKED

BUSY/BLOCKED

-

Acc.

State

S

514

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

IMUX Integrated Multiplexer

Short description

The IMUX module is used for networking MG1000 systems via permanent circuits (FV).

Boards

Type

D64S (S interface with 1 x 64 KBit/s B-channel)

DS01/DTS01 (S interface with 1 x 64 KBit/s B-channel and 1 x 16 KBit/s D channel)

DS02/DTS02 (S interface with 2 x 64 KBit/s B-channel and 1 x 16 KBit/s D channel)

International leased line as per X.21 (X.21 interface with a transmission rate of 64 KBit/s)

MG1000 Media Gateway with IMUX module

Functions of the IMUX module:

• The IMUX module permits the transmission of several compressed speech channels in one B-channel of the permanent circuit. In the process, the band width per speech channel is reduced/compressed to 16 Kbit/s in accordance with G.728 LD-CELP. This process ensures very high speech quality despite the compression of 4:1, and is better than ADPCM coding with the same band width, for example. They are better, for example, than a ADPCM coding with the same band width.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

515

Speech compression in the IMUX module

1. MG1000 Media Gateway with IMUX

2. Line

3. IMUX

4. Band width

Every speech channel is provided with identification and processing functions for fax group 3. Identification of a group 3 fax is necessary, as fax connections must not be subjected to the speech compression. The transmission is implemented at max. 9.6 KBit/s.

• The line may also be used for data transmission via the direct data interface as per V.24/X.21.

The data is multiplexed from the direct data interface on the line separately from the speech channels, demultiplexed at the opposite side on the second IMUX of the line, and fed to the direct data interface. This means that the data is fed neither via the decompression/compression units of the

IMUX modules nor via the switching matrixes of the systems.

• The data service is not supported by the IMUX, as data transport is not possible via compressed channels of IMUX. The Integral Enterprise uses the service identification function to automatically check whether it is dealing with the service type (DAT). If this is the case, the connection is not fed via the IMUX module, but by means of alternate routing to another bundle. If the alternate routing is not activated, "occupied" is signaled. This procedure functions for a all number plan types: common, hidden, open.

• Transit functions: If a connection is fed via several MG1000 systems, compression is performed in the originating node and decompression in the destination node. This ensures that repeated compression/decompression is avoided.

The prerequisite for this is that all routes between the participating nodes are equipped with IMUX modules and that the connection is fed via IMUX routes without exception.

The transit functions also apply when two compressed connections arriving at a transit node from a system need to be routed in different directions.

516

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Transit functions of the IMUX module

1. MG1000 with IMUX

2. Line

3. IMUX

4. Band width

Data connections via the direct data interface cannot be set up via several transit nodes, but only as point-to-point connections between 2 systems.

Other features

Region of application National and international

Current requirement +5V 650 mA

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Module software download.

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Hardware requirements

• The number of IMUX modules used per module is not limited. Each IMUX module occupies one connecting device slot.

Restrictions

• If a permanent circuit with 8 speech channels (DS02/DTS02) or two permanent circuits each with 4 speech channels (DS01/DTS01) is set up, the application of four SPCU speech compression units is required. IMUX modules that are equipped in this way must not be installed in directly neighboring slots. In this case, one slot must remain free or be occupied by a module with low dissipated power

(ASCEU, DS0, DT0, DT2....).

Software requirements

Software from E03.2 is required for operation of the IMUX modules.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

517

Components and Cables

Components of the IMUX board:

The IMUX board is made up of one basic board and submodules:

Components

Function

IMUX

SPCU

This board is the basic board and requires a connecting circuit slot.

Submodule of the IMUX for speech compression. Each SPCU can process two (speech) channels. A maximum of 4 SPCUs can be inserted onto the basic board.

S64LI

X64LI

Submodule of the IMUX for the implementation of the D64S (1xB), DS01/

DTS01 (1xB+D) and DS02/DTS02 (2xB+D) line interfaces. One submodule is required for each of the mentioned interfaces.

Submodule of the IMUX, implements the line interface: International leased line X.21 with a transmission rate of 64Kbit/s. One line interface is implemented per submodule.

Max. 2 S64LI, 2 X64LI, or 1 S64LI and 1 X64LI can be inserted on the basic board at any one time.

Material number

28.5630.318x

28.7640.517x

28.7640.516x

28.7640.515x

CA5B

Adapter module for B modules 28.7640.366x

Cable:

• 6x2 Sub-D/open ext. Connection cable TC-MDF (material number 29.9030.5101 for 1 m up to

29.9030.5199 for 99 m).

• 1x15-pin D-sub (male)/D-sub (female) for X64LI (material numbers 27.5630.0541 to .0543) in lengths of 5, 20 and 50 m. This cable can also be used for connection between the direct X.21 data interface and a data terminal.

For the direct V.24 async./sync. interface, a conventional 25-pin D-sub (male)/D-sub (female) cable can be used. The number of wires depends on the data terminal (HW handshake). For sync. transmission, the clock lines must always be switched.

• The following line interfaces can be served:

Line interface type

D64S

DS01/DTS01

DS02/DTS02

International leased line as per X.21

Structure

1xB

1xB+D

2xB+D

64 KBit/s

maximum number of speech channels

3

4

8

3

The data transmission as per X.21 allows a point-to-point data transmission only. Each line interface requires its own D channel (one D channel for two identical line interfaces is not possible. The number 3 for lines without dedicated D channel ensues due to the fact that D channel signalling also needs to be transmitted inband within the B channel. This is why not the entire band width is available for user data.

518

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Inserting the Submodules

Remove the IMUX module from the slot.

Note

The module may be removed and inserted during system operation.

Insert the S64LI and/or X64LI submodule onto Line-Interface A and/or Line-Interface B. One or more speech compression units (SPCUs) can be inserted at random on one or more free SPCU1-SPCU4 slots.

IMUX module, component side

1. SPCU Speech Compression Unit 2*G728/G.711 Speech Compression/Decompression

2. Line-Interface A Either: S64LI (Structured 64 KBit/s Line Interface) or X64LI (X.21 64 KBit/s Line

Interface)

3. Line-Interface B Either: S64LI (Structured 64 KBit/s Line Interface) or X64LI (X.21 64 KBit/s Line

Interface)

In order to guarantee the error-free operation of the module, the type and number (max. 2) of inserted line interfaces (S64LI and/or X64LI), as well as the number of speech compression units (2 speech compression units per SPCU module --> max. 8 speech compression units), must be adapted to the customer application. The configuration data must always be entered accordingly using the ICU Editor.

Insert the IMUX module into the slot.

Construction which does not correspond to the diagram can lead to faulty functions in the module.

For better orientation, the reference number (*) must be located on the left side of the SPCUs to ensure that they are installed the right way around.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

519

Synchronization

When networking MG1000 systems via the IMUX, it is unavoidable that the systems run synchronously, because:

• The speech compression algorithm reacts very sensitively to transmission faults through transmutation processes.

• Error-free operation cannot be guaranteed for the data interface without synchronization.

When networking systems via the permanent circuit of the public network, the IMUX line interfaces are configured as the "slave" on both sides of the permanent circuit (normal case). With direct connection, one side is set as the "master" and the other side as the "slave". This means that the same rules must be followed as, for example, with a permanent circuit operated with the DT0 module.

For synchronization purposes, MG1000 systems exchange information via the networking permanent circuit. This is carried out via the signaling channels of the logical ports. This means that synchronization can only be present via IMUX lines to which ports are assigned (i.e. that are set up for transportation of one or more B-channels).

The IMUX module software will reject a configuration (configuration error) that results in a port number = 0 for the entire module.

However, a port number = 0 (entire band width for data transmission) is possible for one of the individual

IMUX lines (A, B). These represent special cases that are to be observed with regard to synchronization.

Special case 1: two MG1000 systems networked using two permanent circuits operated with IMUX

Special case 1 for synchronization

1. Perm. circ. 1 Data only

2. Perm. circ. 2: B-channels only

Because no ports (no B-channels) are configured for permanent circuit 1, synchronization of the two

MG1000 systems is only possible via permanent circuit 2 (or via further permanent circuit lines that can be operated with IMUX or other modules such as DT0 or DT2, for example).

Note:

With the appropriate configuration of the line interfaces, the permanent circuit (FV) lines in the above example can also be connected to the line interfaces of the IMUX in a "crossed" pattern.

Special case 2: three MG1000 systems networked using two permanent circuits operated with IMUX

520

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Special case 2 for synchronization

1. Perm. circ. 1 Data only

2. Perm. circ. 2: B-channels only

3. Perm. circ. 3

4. Perm. circ. 4

5. Perm. circ. 5

6. Perm. circ. 6

7. Access to public network

The two MG1000 Media Gateways CANNOT be synchronized using permanent circuit 1 (no ports)! However, because synchronization must be ensured for data transmission, it is necessary to provide further synchronization paths:

• Using additional permanent circuits operated with IMUX between the two MG1000s, e.g. permanent circuit 3

• Using additional permanent circuits (operated with IMUX, DT0, DT2...) e.g. permanent circuit 5.

• Using a permanent circuit between the second and third MG1000, e.g. permanent circuit 6

• Via access of systems to the public network.

Configuration

ICU editor

The module possesses 2 physical ports, the line interfaces A (upper line submodule) and B (lower line submodule).

The ICU Editor is used to select the interface type and a band width distribution for each line interface (A,

B). The distribution is made up of a B-channel number (compressed speech channels of 16 KBit/s each) and band width reservation for the transmission of data (see table below). The number of B-channels provides the quantity, numbering and type of logical ports (connecting devices). This means that with the

IMUX, the number of logical ports represented for the switching software (MSU1 task) depends entirely on the configuration.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

521

1. Example:

Line A: 3B channels, slave (e.g. DS01)

Line B 5B channels, master (DS02) results in:

3

4

1

2

Port (AO) no.

0

Port type

BAVLN-2B slave

BAVLN-1B slave

BAVLN-2B master

BAVLN-2B master

BAVLN-1B master

2. Example:

Line A: not set up

LineB 4B channels, slave results in:

Port (AO) no.

0

1

Port type

BAVLN-2B slave

BAVLN-2B slave

Transmitted on physical line

A

A

B

B

B

Transmitted on physical line

B

B

The ICU Editor checks whether the number of B-channels on an IMUX module is greater/equal 8 and, if required, returns an error message. If this does not occur, the ICU Editor provides information about the number of speech compression units to be inserted (half the number = number of SPCUs).

When the IMUX module is started, the available band width of a physical line (e.g. 64 Kbit/s with type

D64S) is divided into subwidths by means of a "Mapping" algorithm. The input information for this process is as follows:

• The number of required B-channels (ICU Editor).

• The reserved band width for transmission of the data channel (ICU Editor), see data interfaces.

• In some cases, the required band width for the D signaling channel (permanently set, [8 KBit/s] e.g. with D64S) if the interface type does not provide a separate D channel.

It must be ensured that the ’Mapping’ algorithm provides the same results on both sides of a permanent circuit operated with IMUX (this means that the subbands have the same position throughout the entire band)! To this end, the line interfaces on both sides of the FV must on all accounts have the same confi-

guration concerning B-channel numbers and reserved capacity for the data channel.

This requirement must be met for each line interface. This means, for example, that if line A of an IMUX in an MG1000 system 1 is connected with line B of an IMUX in system 2 via a permanent circuit, the two line interfaces A (system 1) and B (system 2) must be configured in the same way.

Configuration checks

The ICU Editor carries out configuration checks for the IMUX module. This virtually rules out incorrect settings being made:

• Check of whether the total number of B-channels is 8 (max. possible number of speech compression units).

• Check of whether the reserved band width on the line selected for transmission of the data channel is sufficient for the current configuration of the ’direct data interface’.

522

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

• In addition, the number of required speech compression units is output (half the number = number of

SPCU submodules).

The above points are checked by the ICU software of the module. The hardware configuration data is also checked. In the event of inconsistencies in the configuration, the IMUX will not be started and indicates a configuration data error. This indication involves the top two LEDs flashing red and green on the front panel and a message to MCOM.

An error occurs if:

• The configuration data structure is unknown. (Always switch off the "Type name from ICU.TAB" option in the ICU Editor.)

• The total number of B-channels is greater than 8.

• The reserved capacity for transmitting the data channel is insufficient.

• One or both inserted line submodules is not compatible with the type of the selected line interface.

• No B-channel has been configured for the entire module (port number = 0).

If an insufficient number of SPCU submodules is inserted, some ports on the IMUX will not start up (traffic restriction!). This status is indicated by a continuously flashing LED (see "LEDs and Switches").

Customer data

When setting up the customer data, it must be ensured that enough ports of the BAV type are set up with port addresses 0, 1, 2...

Because one speech compression unit must be present on the module for each B-channel, and the maximum number of speech compression units that can be inserted is 8 (2 per SPCU submodule), the maximum number of ports is 5. This means that when setting up customer data for 5 ports of the BAV type with the addresses 0 to 4 on the IMUX slot, all configuration cases of the module are covered.

Networking via the TNET protocol

The switching controller regards the channels of the IMUX module as channels to "link line networks"

(basic access vln) using the TNET protocol. The IMX feature must be enabled in order to implement switching of the connecting devices of the IMUX module, which are also set up with a "basic access vln" connecting device type. All other customer data is subjected to the known regulations for basic access vln

(TNET).

Prevention of "non-speech connections"

In "non-speech connections", e.g. in the data service, the switching controller detects, with the aid of the customer data, during the connection setup that the desired service is not set up. The response to this is either disconnection or alternate routing. In networks with open numbering plans (access code for each node), it is possible via the customer data to set up the access code for IMUX connections only in dial groups for the speech service.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

523

LEDs and Switch Functions

IMUX module, front side

Switch function

S3

S4

S1 Right:

Center:

S2

Left:

Left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Reset module

Service disabling (preparatory) for all log. module ports

Normal position

Service disabling (preparatory) for line A

Normal position

Service disabling (preparatory) for line B

LED denotations

L1

L2

Summation display via all ports off: on:

No active layer 3 connections, all ports free

At least 1 layer 3 connection flashing: off:

on: flashing:

All available ports have "blocked" status

Normal

Startup or download in progress

524

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

L7

L5

L6

L3

L4

L9

L10

L11

L12

L8 off: on: off:

Layer 1 on line A active

Layer 1 on line A inactive (alarm)

Layer 1 on line B active on: Layer 1 on line B inactive (alarm)

Summation display via all ports allocated to line A off: No active layer 3 connections on line A, all allocated ports free

Summation display via all ports allocated to line B off: on: flashing: on: flashing: off:

No active layer 3 connections on line B, all allocated ports free

At least 1 layer 3 connection on line B

All ports allocated to the line have "blocked" status

At least 1 layer 3 connection on line A

All ports allocated to the line have "blocked" status

Module is not supplying synchronous clock to the MG1000 central clock supply on: Module supplying synchronous clock

Only valid if SYN LED (L7) is "on"!

off: on:

Synchronous clock is being fed from line B

Synchronous clock is being fed from line A off: flashing:

Normal

Insufficient number of compression units (too few SPCU’s)

The LED lights up briefly when C-bus messages are received

One-off fault states (IMUX internal buffer overflows) when transmitting data from the "direct data interface" result in the LED lighting up for 30 seconds. Such faults may occur if,

• The linked MG1000 systems are not in sync with each other or with the public network.

• Asynchronous data interfaces transmit data from the IMUX and the data terminal at adversely differing rates (IMUX corrects this fault automatically by slightly increasing the data output rate to the data interface).

During startup, the LEDs indicate various module statuses. The phase is indicated by LED 12 being continuously ON. When LED 12 has been switched off once, the LEDs resume their normal functions. The simultaneous flashing of LEDs 1 and 7 indicates a configuration fault

(module will not operate).

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

525

Data Interfaces

One data interface exists for each IMUX which can be configured as an asynchronous type (V.24/V.28) or synchronous type (V.24/V.28 or X.21/V.11) with various data rates.

These data connections are fed directly to the module via the switching matrix.

The data connections cannot be set up via transit nodes. The respective plug is on the cable adapter CA5B that belongs to the module.

MG1000 with IMUX module

The data is transported via one (configurable) of the permanent circuit (FV) lines. For this purpose, sufficient capacity for the data channel must be reserved on the selected line.

The ICU Editor checks whether the reserved band width on the selected transmission line is sufficient for the desired transmission rate. All data rates which fall below the reserved capacity are permissible but not necessarily sensible, as band width may be left unused.

Example:

Data interface 1200 baud asynchronous, transmission on line A, 32 KBit/s reserved on line A. Because band width can be reserved in increments of 8 KBit/s a capacity of 24 KBit/s remains unused, meaning that at least 1 other B-channel could be set up.

-

-

-

Transmission rate (Bit/s) asynch.

< 9600

19200

38400

synch.

< 8000

16000

24000

32000

48000

64000

Line band width to be reserved (KBit/ s)

8

16

24

32

48

64

526

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

As only one data channel can be transmitted, band width also only needs to be provided on one permanent circuit line. Any additional capacity reserved on the second line would remain unused.

The data interfaces operate protocol-transparent in all operating modes.

An end-to-end data backup should generally be implemented through the connected data terminals.

For all synchronous operating modes, the data interface is the clock master for the data terminal.

The V.24 data interface involves unsymmetrical dual power lines that perform the following tasks:

Direction

TxD (CT103):

RxD (CT104):

Transmit data

Receive data

DEE -->

<--

DÜE (IMUX)

CTS (CT106):

DSR (CT107):

GND (CT102):

DCD (CT109):

Transmit standby

Operation standby

Operational ground

Receive signal level

<--

<--

<--

In a synchronous transmission, the two lines below supply the DEE with pulse timing information (no function in asynchronous transmission):

TxC2 (CT114):

RxC2 (CT115):

Transmitting pulse

Receiving pulse

<--

<--

Subsequent to the activation of the interface, the CTS, DSR and DCD lines are permanently set to "ON" and remain at this signal until the module is reset (the data interface of the IMUX signals permanent stand-by).

Signal on the lines

V1 < -3 Volt V1 > +3 Volt

Data lines

Control and timing lines

Binary 1

OFF

Binary 0

ON

The X.21 data interface involves symmetrical dual power lines that perform the following tasks:

Direction

T: Send DEE --> DÜE (IMUX)

R:

C:

I:

F:

G:

Receiving

Control

Report

Clock pulse

Ground or return conductor

<--

-->

<--

<--

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

527

Subsequent to the activation of the interface, the I line is permanently set to "ON" and remains at this signal until the module is reset (the data interface of the IMUX signals permanent stand-by). Line C is not evaluated.

The "Gnd1" line can be set to ground irrespective of the country of application. The CA5B cable adapters feature a breakpoint which can be used to disconnect this line from ground.

Breakpoints on the cable adapter

1. Breakpoints

Signal on the lines

Data lines

Control and timing lines

VA...VB

< -0.3 Volt

Binary 1

OFF

VA...VB

> +0.3 Volt

Binary 0

ON

The following bit rates are supported which can be configured using ISM or the ICU Editor:

V.24 synch.

X.21 synch.

1000 Bit/s

2000 Bit/s

4000 Bit/s

8000 Bit/s

16000 Bit/s

24000 Bit/s

32000 Bit/s

V.24 asynch. (1 start bit, 1 stop bit, parity bit is possible)

300 Bit/s

600 Bit/s

1200 Bit/s

2400 Bit/s

4800 Bit/s

9600 Bit/s

19200 Bit/s

1000 Bit/s

2000 Bit/s

4000 Bit/s

8000 Bit/s

16000 Bit/s

24000 Bit/s

32000 Bit/s

528

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

Assignment of the X3 plug

1. Assignment for V.24

2. Signal names on the back plane

3. female 25-pin Sub-D (ISO 2110)

Assignment of the X4 plug

1. Assignment for X.21

2. Signal names on the back plane

3. female 15-pin Sub-D (ISO 4903)

4. 0 Ohm

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

529

MDF Connections

The connectors of the IMUX module are picked off with the corresponding cables on the adapter modules

CA5B and fed to the MDF, terminal adapter or data terminal.

When using S64LI as the line interface, the cable with reference number 29.9030.51xx is used, whereby xx represents the length of the cable in m (1 to 99).

The 15-pin Sub-D plug is connected to the X1 plug (line interface A) or X5 plug (line interface B) of the

CA5B. The open end of this cable is connected with 4 lines in the MDF (2 twisted pairs plus earth wire to ground).

Lines used:

Colors

YE/WH

GN/WH

Pin on the Sub-D

4/3

6/5

Name

TDa/TDb

RDa/RDb

Function

Transmit Data

Receive Data

When using X64LI as the line interface, the cable with reference number 27.5630.054x is used, whereby x represents the length of the cable in m: (x=1 for 5 m, x=2 for 20 m, x=3 for 50 m). This cable is connected directly to a TA of the network operator.

Pinning of the X1 and X5 plugs (Sub-D 15 male)

Pin

1 2 3 4 5

Name

Pin

Name

Gndb

11

Rb

Ta

12

Ib

Ca

13

Sb

Ra

14

Xb

Ia

15

NC

6

Sa

7

Xa

8

Gnda

9

Tb

10

Cb

The X3 plug comprises a 25-pin Sub-D female plug that serves the connection of an external data terminal with V.24 (synchronous/asynchronous) interface.

Pinning of the X3 plug

Pin

2 3

Name

TxD RxD

5

CTS

6

DSR

7

GND

8

DCD

15

TxC2

17

RxC2

Rest

NC

The X4 plug comprises a 15-pin Sub-D female plug that serves the connection of an external data terminal with X.21 (synchronous) interface.

Pinning of the X4 plug

Pin

1 2

Name

Pin

Name

Gnd1

11

Rb

Ta

12

Ib

3

NC

13

Sb

4

Ra

14

NC

5

Ia

15

NC

6

Sa

7

NC

8

Gnd

9

Tb

10

NC

530

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

CA5B with plugs

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

531

JPAT JISCOS Public Analog Trunk

Short description

The JPAT module provides a maximum of eight three-wire analog connections for exchange lines for connecting the MG1000 to the public network.

In order to operate the JPAT module, it must be equipped with a least one of the following submodules:

SubMod

SUTC Signaling Unit Trunk C

SUTD Signaling Unit Trunk D

Countries of use

Russia

Russia

Combined configuration with both submodules on the JPAT is possible.

JPAT module, module side

Other features

Interfaces 8x 3-wire (2-wire speech path, which is used together with the c-wire for signaling)

Decimal dialing (DEC)

MF-PS register signaling

Transmission and receipt of ANI

The connection of the JPAT is made via the cable adapter CARUB.

532

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

LEDs and Switch Functions

S1

S2-S9

S10 *

Meanings of LEDs

L1

L2 on:

flashing: off:

L3

L4 on: flashing: off:

Reset switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

AO1-AO8

Left:

Right:

RS2323 Interface

Left:

Right:

Operating status

Preparatory disabling of board (VSP of all connecting circuits)

Reset board

AO1-AO8 Normal status (operating status)

AO1-AO8 preparatory disabling (VSP)

On

Off

Board is busy in terms of exchange functions

Board removable (all connecting circuits blocked or defective)

Board not busy

Board reset in progress. Programming break in download

Board in operation

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

533

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

L11

L12

Message from or to the C-bus

MDF Connections

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter CARUB from JPAT

Patch panel for two-wire connection Cable 1 Cable 2

WE 1

WE 2 a1/b1 free/free c1/free free/free

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6 a2/b2 free/free a3/b3 free/free c2/free free/free c3/free free/free a4/b4 free/free a5/b5 free/free a6/b6 free/free a7/b7 free/free a8/b8 free/free c4/free free/free c5/free free/free c6/free free/free c7/free free/free c8/free free/free

534

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Boards

STSM S0/T0-Submodule

Short description

The submodule STSM is plugged into the ADM board. It provides four S

0

- or T

0 interface. It contains layer

1 and layer 2 HW ports.

Configurable interfaces

Subscriber connection (S

0

powered); Layer 1 master (standard) or layer 1 slave (outlying extension)

Exchange line (T

0

, unpowered)

Exchange line simulation (T

0

, unpowered)

Permanent connection (T

0

, unpowered, master clock or clock slave, layer 2 master or slave)

STSM submodule, component side

1. Plug connector to the ADM (internal ADM interface)

2. Plug connector to the ADM (line interface)

Other features

Country of application

Power demand +5V

Application in all countries

10 mA

Selection free configuration of each individual connection

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Download board software

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

535

V24M Module

Short description

V24M is a sub-board for the UIP board. It comprises the layer 1 functions for a V.24 interface.

A maximum of two V24 modules can be inserted on slots 1 and 2 of the UIP module. This requires the connection of the connecting device line to be implemented via the CA3 module.

Use

Current requirement +5V

Other features for further V.24 ports on the system

100 mA

536

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

MG100 Media Gateway

The MG100 Media Gateway is designed primarily for connecting regional office structures to company headquarters. It can also be used as a stand-alone solution in small companies.

It contains two slots for connection device modules (media modules) and two slots for submodules, enabling it to be customized according to requirements.

The central control functions (media server) and power supply are are already integrated.

Important notes

Safety information

Do not connect the mains voltage until after you have finished and checked all wiring. on the MG100 Media

Gateway

System service and repairs are the exclusive domain of an authorized specialist.

When installing the MG100 in 19" cabinets, on desks, in standing cases or on walls, make sure there is sufficient strain relief on all cable outlets and inlets.

When connecting devices to the V.24 interfaces, only use the supplied shielded cables.

Connect the MG100 Media Gateway to the potential equalization device.

The occurrence of strong magnetic fields in the vicinity of the MG100 Media Gateway must be prevented.

The Media Gateway MG100 must not be exposed to shock, impact or vibrations.

For reasons of EMC and conformity, only approved boards with metallic front panels may be used in Media

Gateways.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

537

ESD precautions must be followed when working with modules susceptible to electrostatic shock.

For reasons of EMC, vacant slots should be covered with front plates.

When mounting the MG100 on a wall, make sure to leave the minimum amount of clearance for removing and inserting PCBs.

The following regulations or guidelines must be considered during system installation, startup and operation:

• DIN VDE 0100 Setting up heavy current systems

• DIN VDE 0105 Operating heavy current systems

• DIN VDE 0132 Fire countermeasures in electrical systems

• DIN VDE 0298 Use of cables and insulated wiring for heavy current systems

• DIN VDE 0800 Telecommunications engineering

• DIN VDE 0891 Use of cables and insulated wiring for telecommunication and information processing systems

• DIN 4102 Combustive properties of building materials and components

• DIN 5035 Interior lighting with artificial light

• VDI 2054 Air conditioning systems for data processing environments

Additional regulations or guidelines may apply in special or individual circumstances.

Transport

Transport Media Gateways only in their original packaging or installed in the 19" cabinet.

Check that the system is complete by referring to the delivery note and the accompanying installation documents.

Connections to V.24 interfaces

To prevent the V.24 interface, driver and receiver modules from being destroyed when devices are switched on you must use the following cables:

Cable for logging

(PK HAL cat5, gray, 1:1)

Length

1 m

3 m

5 m

10 m

Part no.

4.999.045.210

4.999.045.212

4.999.045.214

4.998.045.215

Adapter plug RJ45/D-Sub, part no.: 4.999.059.171 is also available.

538

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Environmental Conditions

The following placement guidelines must be followed to ensure trouble free operation:

• The room must be dry and provide options for ventilation.

• Weight when fully equipped. See Technical data.

• The floor covering should possess antistatic properties. It should be easy to clean and abrasion resistant.

• The MG100 Media Gateway must not be exposed to sources of heat (e.g. radiator).

• An additional number of grounded mains sockets must be provided for service purposes.

Climatic conditions for operation, storage and transport. See Technical data.

Access must be ensured from the front and from the back.

When mounting the MG100 on a wall, make sure to leave the minimum amount of clearance for removing and inserting PCBs.

Required Servicing Procedures

.

If servicing is required the Helpdesk has been called by:

• the customer,

• the technician/service technician,

• Remote alarm signalling

• TNS (off hours)

In most cases, the Helpdesk will already have located the fault through the use of remote diagnostics. If this is the case, if necesary, simply replacing the faulty module will suffice. It should be stated, however, that remote diagnostics are not capable of locating every fault.

You must then:

• Condense the available information

• Interpret fault returns/indications or displays

• Locate the fault using the service PC

• Carry out diagnostics with the aid of the Helpdesk.

Product description

The MG100 Media Gateway is the ideal modern office communication platform for mid-sized and large companies with branch offices. It is designed primarily for connecting branch structures to company headquarters.

It supports standard interfaces used in traditional technology as well as VoIP solutions and IP networks.

The integrated VoIP interface can be configured for subscribers and networks.

This technology makes the MG100 Media Gateway the optimum addition to existing Integral systems.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

539

MG1000/MG100 comparison

Mounting technology

Installation

Cable adapter

Multi-group

Upgradeable

Error signaling

Potential-free switching contacts

ISDN emergency telephone

Fan

V.24

Harddisk

U

K0

Board slots

Expansion boards

Key differences at a glance (details follow in the text)

MG1000

19"

Cabinet required

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Not redundant

Insulated on non-insulated

PCMCIA

Yes

32

Any

Yes

MG100

19"

Cabinet, wall, standalone device not required.

No, single module only slot 1

No, no ESB/EDU no no

Redundant

Non-insulated

Compact Flash only no

4

ATA, CAS, DECT21, DECT22,

DT21, DT22, DSPF, IPN and VOIP

No Use of ATLC and IMUX boards

Free choice of slot

Power supply

CF22

S

2M

NT feed

Yes

Redundant

Redundant via ESB board

Restricted

Not redundant

Not redundant

External mains adapter

540

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

As a member of the Integral Enterprise system family, the MG100 Media Gateway offers most of the same features as the MG1000 in a compact 19" casing. The main objective in making the MG100 available was to reduce costs of small expansion options.

• The integration of central components and the subscriber/line interfaces on a single HW platform

(fixed configuration)

• optimized voltage supply unit in terms of cost and functionality

• omission of rarely used HW interfaces

• and a new, optimized design enable range of Integral Enterprise services to be made available at a competitive price for under 50 subscribers.

The MG100 Media Gateway runs with the same system software as all Integral Enterprise systems. The same service and network administration applications (ISM, ICU editor, CAT, ADN etc.) are also used for administration and monitoring.

Differences between the MG100 Media Gateway and MG1000 Media Gateway:

General

• 19" rack system with 3 height units. With the corresponding installation kits the unit can also be mounted on the wall or set up as a tabletop or standalone unit.

• No rear cable adapters (boards) with champ connectors are used for the wiring of the interfaces. The interfaces can all be accessed from the front and are installed via RJ-45 cables.

• Single-module configuration only possible; MG100 does not have an IML interface (intermodule link).

Twin and multi-module configurations are not possible.

• Module type is O1; MG100 cannot be expanded.

• CF doubling is not possible.

• MG100 does not have LEDs for error signaling, relay contacts and optical coupler inputs. An ESB/

EDU cannot be fitted.

• The MG100 has no free switching points.

• Connection of ISDN emergency telephones is not possible (no EES0B board).

• Compared to the MG1000 and its standard single fan, the MG100 has a redundant double fan. In the event of failure of one of the fans the system continues to run in the permissible temperature range.

Integrated components

• The functions of the HSCB/ACB, CF22, ADM and DUPN modules are fixed and integrated in MG100

Media Gateway The CBI addresses / slot allocations are fixed:

• Slot 3/CBI address 08: ADM

• Slot 5/CBI address 0A: DUPN

• Slot 9/CBI address 0E: HSCB/ACB

• Slot 10/CBI address 0F: CF22

• On the HSCBO / ACBO board there only the non-isolated V.24 interface. An "isolated" V.24 interface is not possible.

• With the HSCBO the MI switch function is not realized.

• The HSCBO only uses CompactFlash as the background storage medium. Other media such as hard disks cannot be used.

• The DUPNs integrated on the motherboard (MBO1) only support 24 subscribers instead of 32.

• The ADM is also integrated on the motherboard (MBO1) of the Media Gateway.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

541

• ADM submodule 1 is an ABSM (ports 0 to 3). It is fixed and cannot be removed (4 analog subscriber interfaces).

• ADM submodule 4 is an STSM1 (ports 12 to 15) and is also fixed and cannot be removed (4 S0 or

T0 interfaces).

• ADM submodules 2 and 3 can be configured as UPSM, UPSM1, STSM1 or ABSM. The UKSM submodule cannot be used in the BU.

• The MG100 does not have any LEDs for individual port assignments for the integrated ADM/DUPN functions.

Expansion slots

• The MG100 has two slots for modules. These can be freely chosen, although some restrictions apply.

• The following rules apply to the board slots:

• Slot 1 / CBI address 06 (upper slot of the BU):

Only the VOIP, DSPF, DT22 or IPN board may be inserted into this slot. When installing the DT22 the connection via the front panel of the DT22 must always be used used.

• Slot 7 / CBI address 0C (lower slot of the BU):

The boards ATA, CAS, DECT21, DECT22, DT21, DT22, DSPF or IPN can be inserted into this slot.

• When using the boards DT21 or DT22 it is not possible to connect the optical 2 Mbit/s interface

(OFAS submodule) or coax connection (CA4x).

• When using the DECT21 or DECT22 board, no more than eight base units may be configured.

• There are no auxiliary highways at these two slots. Therefore the DSPF board can only be equipped with a maximum of two ASM3 submodules. This means that the DSPF has access to 64 channels, which is sufficient for the expansion size of the MG100.

• When using the board DT21 or DT22 for connection to an S

2M

NT, the voltage supply of the Network

Terminator (NT) should be realized via an external mains power adapter (part no. 27.4402.1056).

Power supply

• The PSO power supply unit is a fixed component in the MG100. Doubling of the power supply is not possible.

• No 110V network supply.

• No -60V partial voltage generation in the BU.

Therefore the -72V voltage feed of the U

KO

interfaces on the UKSM submodule cannot be generated for the integrated ADM.

• No external -48V battery feed.

• No 25 Hz ringing voltage.

542

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Technical Data

Connection options up to 52 speech or data channels in the basic expansion up to 240 VoIP speech channels up to 8 radio base stations (DECT) or 1x S

2M

Network interfaces

ISDN basic connection, 4-wire BRI T

0

ISDN primary multiplex connection (if required) PRI S

2M

Channel structure B+B+D

Channel structure 30xB+D

S

0

interfaces

U

PN

interfaces (B+B+D) a/b interfaces

Basic configuration

4

24

4 a/b or

S

0

U

or

PN

VoIP

DECT

DT21/DT22

(*)

ATA

CAS

Expansions max. 2x4 (1x4 possible) max. 2x4 (1x4 possible) max. 2x4 (1x4 possible)

240 channels for networking and subscribers

8 RBS

One S

2M

interface (Exchange(T2) - or FV(TIE)), 120 Ohm symm.

8 analog exchange access points (PSTN) one S

2M

interface (exchange interface, connecting line or special interface)

* If DT21 or DT22 are used, then DECT is omitted, in this case DECT via IP.

Dimensions

MG100 Media Gateway (WxHxD)

Wall unit (MG100 in wall bracket, WxHxD)

Standalone unit (MG100 with stand, WxHxD)

482x132x483.5 mm (3 HU)

510x530x135.1 mm

510x574x444.8 mm

MG100 Media Gateway

Wall unit (MG100 in wall bracket)

Standalone unit (MG100 with stand)

Weights

11.00 kg

16.25 kg

20.50 kg

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

543

Color

MG100 Media Gateway RAL 7024

Mains voltage

Mains frequency

Maximum current draw

Circuit fuses

Mains connection

230V ± 10%

50 Hz -6% +26%

0.6A

Automatic circuit-breaker, 16A, type C, slow-acting

Further information

Thermal output at full expansion

Sound pressure level (at a distance of 1m acc. to EN ISO 3744)

75 W

<45 dB(A)

Telephones/terminals

All telephones available for the Integral Enterprise can be connected:

• IP telephones

• ISDN telephones

• Analog telephones

Storage:

Transport:

Operation:

Ambient conditions/climate control

DIN ETS

300.019-Kl.1.1

300.019-Kl.2.2

Temperature range

-5°C to +45°C

-25°C to +70°C

300.019-Kl.232

-5°C to +45°C

Relative humidity Comments

Operation in a fixed location, weather-proof

Reliability

All of the stated values take into account the power supply device. However, the failure of power supply devices is less frequent than the failure of mains voltage due to the the power plant. If UPS (uninterrupted power supply) is not used, this will lead to total system failure in both cases. This must be taken into account during the use of the values.

MTBF for the entire system

Fault rate of individual boards

Reliability

>/= 35 years

</= 0.75%

</= 0.5% during the first year during the second year

544

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Traffic handling capacity

The term "traffic handling capacity" is divided into dynamic and static traffic handling capacity.

The dynamic traffic handling capacity is the capacity provided by the system. The unit it is quoted in is

BHCA, Busy Hour Call Attempts, which describes the number of attempts to connect a call which can be processed during an hour of busy traffic. For ACD systems the unit BHCC is used, i.e. Busy Hour Call Connected, or the number of calls connected during the hour of busy traffic which reach at least one queue with announcement.

The static traffic handling capacity describes the performance capability of the coupled network. It is specified with the unit Erlang (Erl).

The basis for the dimensioning of telephony systems is FTZ directive 12TR3 (FTZ = German telecommunications engineering authority). This indicates a traffic handling capacity of 0.3 Erlang for digital subscribers

(2B+D) (see BAPT regulations for traffic values).

The following values apply for one MG100 Media Gateway:

Dynamic

Static

Traffic handling capacity

8000 BHCA

Free of blocking (1 Erlang/B-channel)

MG100 rack

The MG100 Media Gateway integrates central components, subscriber and line interfaces, and power supply.

Only two slots are available. In general, the BU has been designed for the VOIP and DECT boards.

Nonetheless, if required they can be replaced or combined with the following boards:

• ATA

• CAS

• DSPF1 (only 32 channels available)

• DSPF (only 32 channels available)

• DT21 or DT22

• IPN

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

545

546

System Manual Integral Enterprise

MG100 Media Gateway peripheral componentsand the location of their connection devices

June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

1. depending on the plugged connecting device board

The table shows the possible combinations of all usable boards in a matrix.

VoIP

VoIP -

DECT21/22

DT21/22

X

X

DSPF/DSPF1

ATA

IPN

CAS

X = possible combination

X

X

X

X

DECT21/22

X

-

-

X

-

X

-

DT21/22 DSPF/DSPF1

X X

-

-

X

-

X

-

X

X

-

X

X

X

X

-

X

-

ATA

X

-

-

-

X

X

X

IPN

X

X

X

X

-

X

-

CAS

X

-

-

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

547

Setup

The MG100 Media Gateway is housed in a universal casing. It can be used as a wall, standing or desk casing for installation in the 19" cabinet (3 height units).

• The rack can be installed in the 19" cabinet using two single assembly brackets and sliding rails.

• The bottom has rubber feet for use as a desk unit.

• A simple painted wall bracket is used to mount the rack on the wall.

• Simple accessories let the base casing be used as a standing unit.

Access to all interfaces and controls and displays is available from the front of the unit. The fans can be replaced from the outside while the unit is in operation.

Interior view of the MG100 Media Gateway (motherboard as a PCB solution in the casing), top view.

1. Fan

2. Place for the third ADM submodule (S

0

, T

0

, U

PN

or a/b)

3. Place for the second ADM submodule (S

0

, T

0

, U

PN

or a/b)

4. RJ45 multipoint connectors

548

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Front side

Front of the MG100 Media Gateway

1. 2x background memory

• Top = background memory 1

• Bottom = background memory 2

2. LEDs and control elements for HSCBO/ACBO

3. RJ45 socket and 2x USB port for ACBO

• Top = CU Eth (Ethernet interface for the ACBO control unit)

• Middle = UBS/1 (universal serial bus interface 1)

• Bottom = UBS/2 (universal serial bus interface 2)

4. RJ45 sockets for HSCBO/ACBO

• Top = CU V.24/1 (first V.24 interface of the HSCBO/ACBO control unit)

• Bottom = CU V.24/2 (second V.24 interface of the HSCBO/ACBO control unit)

5. Slot for additional VOIP, DSPF, DSPF1 board or IPN

6. Slot for additional ATA, CAS, DECT21, DECT22, DT21, DT22, DSPF, DSPF1 board or IPN

7. RJ45 sockets

• Top = (currently no function)

• Bottom = SPY (R1RG/2 SPY)

These two connections are provided for future applications and cannot be used in full at present.

8. LEDs and control elements for the MBO1 board

9. RJ45 sockets for connecting device connections

1. Multipoint female connector 1

2. Multipoint female connector 2

3. Multipoint female connector 3

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

549

Opening the housing

To open the casing (for example, to add submodules), follow these steps:

• Loosen the five TORX screws (1.)

• Pull the casing cover off to the front.

550

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

• Lift the casing cover over the screw heads.

MG100 Media Gateway

• Then pull the cover out from the front.

To close the casing, follow the steps in reverse.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

551

Desk unit

To use the MG100 as a desk unit, you must attach the rubber feet provided in the installation set to the bottom of the casing.

Installation in a cabinet

To install the MG100 Media Gateway in a cabinet, the unit must be mounted on sliding rails.

Install the sliding rails for the MG100 in the cabinet.

Attach M6 cage nuts to the holes in the profile rails from the back.

The MG100 comes with preinstalled assembly brackets. Insert the unit in the HU slot. Use four TORX screws to attach it to the cabinet.

The following illustration shows an installed MG100 Media Gateway.

552

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Wall-mounting the unit

Place the MG100 Media Gateway in the wall bracket with the LEDs and control block facing upwards.

The preferred installation position of the MG100 is with access to the modules and patch field on the left.

If you want to install the unit with access to the right, the cable should be long enough to be able to remove the modules for servicing. The extra cable can be stowed in the rear once the unit is started up.

Use the drill template (packaging cardboard with stamped drill holes) to draw the three drilling spots (1.) on the wall.

Drill the holes and insert the anchors provided.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

553

Install the wall bracket according to local conditions.

Note: Clearance

The modules must be able to be removed and inserted.

Next hang the bracket onto the top two screws and secure it in place with the third screw. Tighten all three screws.

Secure the connection cable on the ducts (2.) and strain relief bars (3.) on the left and right using cable ties.

Place the MG100 Media Gateway on the lower wall bracket panel. Push the unit into place. The suspended angle plate in the back and assembly angle in the front determine the stop position and placement in the wall bracket.

Attach the unit to the wall bracket using four TORX screws.

Plug the connection cables into the corresponding RJ45 sockets on the front of the MG100.

554

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Standing setup

Place the bracket in the stand with rubber feet.

MG100 Media Gateway

Stand (from top)

Wall bracket

1. Connect the bracket and stand using four TORX screws.

Use cable ties to secure the MG100 Media Gateway connection cables to the ducts and tension relief bars on the left and right side of the wall bracket (see illustrations).

Slide the MG100 Media Gateway from the side shown into the bracket.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

555

1. Attach the unit to the bracket using four TORX screws.

2. Plug the connection cables into the corresponding RJ45 sockets on the front of the MG100.

1. Securing cables using quick ties (tension relief).

556

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

2. Tension relief eye for grounding wire

3. Terminal for grounding wire

4. Low-power device plug

Boards

The boards plugged at the front may be removed and inserted during system operation. ESD measures must be taken into account when doing this.

For reasons of EMC and conformity, only approved boards with metallic front panels may be used in the MG100 Media Gateway.

For reasons of EMC, vacant slots should be covered with front plates.

The following boards can be used in the MG100 Media Gateway:

Boards

ATA

[

→ 563 ]

CAS

[

→ 567 ]

DECT22

[

→ 573 ]

DSPF1

[

→ 586 ]

DSPF

[

→ 583 ]

DT22

[

→ 591 ]

IPN

[

→ 595 ]

VOIP

[

→ 608 ]

The MG100 Media Gateway already contains a media server and additional central components, including:

Boards

ACBO

[

→ 558 ]

MBO1

[

→ 598 ]

SBAO

[

→ 607 ]

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

557

ACBO Advanced Computer Board Office

Short description

The ACBO board is the basic configuration in the MG100 Media Gateway. This computer board is used with the IEE 2 software (= Integral Enterprise Edition 2.0) and higher.

Combined with the motherboard MBO1, it is equipped only with the PC-module ETX 800 MHz and requires one of the following software versions:

• IEE 3 (from version L030V00_1_9 onward)

• IEE 4 (from version L040V00_1_0_2.1 onward)

• IEE 5 untill IEE x all versions

Features

ETX PC

The ETX board is a complete PC system. All functions offered by a modern PC are implemented on this board. Performance matches a Pentium III/400MHz or higher.

Hardware watchdog

Battery RTC (8-year buffer operation)

512 MB RAM (one SO-DIMM module only)

Boot Flash PROM with Phoenix Bios

Voltage generation

Real-time clock (RTC)

Ethernet interface with 10/100 Base-T

Two V.24 interfaces (non-insulated)

Interface to PCM highway (4 independent B-channel access points)

PCI bus (5V tolerant) 32-bit/33MHz

Two CBus interfaces (IS bus) one for system control purposes one as an SPY remote interface (SPY = System Protocoller and Analyzer)

IDE interface for Compact Flash (HGS)

USB1/2 for further V.24 interfaces

The hardware preparations for remote logging with SPY are included on the board.

558

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

As the software for remote logging is currently not realized, this must be done locally with the aid of the board SP1 (part no.: 49.9902.8112) and a PC.

ACBO board, board side

1. Background memory, Compact Flash (component side); Boot Flash, Compact Flash, (conductor path side)

2. Ethernet USB 1.1

3. 2 x V.24

4. Battery

5. Transformer 10/100 Base-T

6. ETX PC

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

559

7. CBI

8. PCM Highway Controller

9. CBT

10. PCM Highway Controller

11. SEPL

12. Ribbon cable

13. ISA bus test connector

14. Power supply connector

Current requirement +5V

Other features

2200 mA with 2 * Compact Flash

LEDs and Switch Functions

1. Location of the operating elements and LEDs (Control Unit)

Switches and LEDs of the ACBO

ACBO board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle

S2 Bottom

560

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Function of the Switches

S1 Reset switch

S2

Middle:

Bottom:

Operating state

Hardware reset for board, locking

Top: ACB is shut down (by the operating system), keying

Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR)

Bottom:

Top:

Operating state: IDE Hard Disk in operation

Service position: Inserting and removing the IDE Hard Disk

Interpretation of the LEDs

L3

On: CBI access

L4

L5

On:

On:

Access to Compact Flash 1/2

Compact Flash (background memory) can be plugged/disconnected

L2

On: Power OK

L7-L10

The LEDs indicate the states from reset to operation. After the supply voltage is switched on a functional check is performed (LED lights up briefly).

The commissioning status is divided into four groups:

1. ACBO loading from the flash software

2. ACBO loading from the background memory to operating system level

3. ACBO loading from the background memory to application level

4. ACBO loading in special status (APS change) during operation.

No L7 L8 L9 L10 Gr. Status

15 1 1 1 1 0 Start commissioning

14 system takes on function

Description of the phases

BIOS running; LED test.

Linux kernel is loaded.

GRUB is completed and the initialization of the RAM disc has started.

13 1 1 0 1 0 Loading system via CBI ded as the slave via the C-bus.

States 11 and 12 are skipped.

12 1 1 0 0 0 Loading system via the Ethernet

11 1 0 1 1 0 Loading system via the local bus

10 1 0 1 0 0 Flash SW update

9 1 0 0 1 1 PAL ded as the master via the Ethernet.

States 11 and 13 are skipped. directly as the master.

States 11 to 13 are not worked through in sequence.

The ACB flash software is being processed.

server ready.

All known Pascal tasks are started.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

561

No L7 L8 L9 L10 Gr. Status

8 1 0 0 0 1 Download the application files

7 0 1 1 1 3

6 0 1 1 0 3

5 0 1 0 1 3

Start applications

Description of the phases

Download of the application files in progress.

Start of the platform applications, e.g. PFSP, PAL,

L4AD.

ACB with IVL function prepares an APS change.

change progress (display at the

IVL only)

3 0 0 1 1 2 Conversion customer data (display at the IVL only)

Conversion of customer data (CKDT initiated by

MML is not displayed).

data customer The DMS of the module signals the phase "Load customer data".

1 0 0 0 1 2 ICU All

Start commissioning of module(s).

0 0 0 0 0 2 Normal Module(s) operation

1 = LED on

0 = LED off

On the component side of the ACBO there are two multipin connectors X11 and X12.

Detail from the component page for the ACBO board

562

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Jumper Functions

Jumper on X11

1 - 2

2 - 3 (Default)

4 - 5

5 -6 (Default)

Jumper on X12

1 -2 (Default)

2 - 3

4 - 5

5 -6 (Default)

Address bit A9 = 1

Address bit A9 = 0

Board ID data protected

Board ID data not protected

Watchdog enable

Watchdog disable

SCOCON satisfied (Service entry)

SCOCON not satisfied

ATA Analog Trunk Interface A

Short description

The ATA module provides the interface for up to 8 analog exchange accesses (PSTN) in accordance with country-specific guidelines. It is a universal basic Euro exchange line junction and can be adapted to individual countries by means of the corresponding submodule and software (levels, impedances etc.).

SubMod

SIGA signaling unit A

SIGB signaling unit B

SIGC signaling unit C

SIGD signaling unit D:

SIGE signaling unit E

SIGF signaling unit F

SIGG signaling unit G

Countries of use

Germany, Russia

Switzerland

Luxembourg

Austria

Austria

Belgium

Hungary

A mixed combination of ATA modules and submodules is not possible.

The module can accommodate a maximum of 4 two-part submodules.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

563

ATA module, slots

Other features

Current requirement +5V

Interfaces

MFV/IWV selection

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

530 mA with eight occupied connecting devices

8 × a/b

Dial tone identification, charge count

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

An emergency operation switchover can be set up in the MG1000 Media Gateway by adding an EES1B/

(EES8B) module behind the ATA module. This is not possible in the MG100 Media Gateway.

564

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Installation

The ATA board must be inserted in the slot shown below.

MG100 Media Gateway

1. Slot for the ATA board

Details

Use on the slot of the ATA

Slot address:

CBI address: xx = port number

01-01-07-xx

0C hex.

Connections between ATA and the multipoint female connector 1

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

565

Connections - see:

Connections of the BU

[

→ 625 ]

.

LEDs and Switch Functions

ATA module, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1

S2-S9

Middle position

Left-hand position

Switch Function

S1

S2

S3-S8

S9

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:

Preparatory disabling (of all connecting devices)

Operation status/release

Reset module

Forced module download

AO1 preparatory disabling

Approve, operation status

AOx preparatory disabling;

Approve, operation status

AO8 preparatory disabling

Approve, operation status

566

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1 On:

Flashing:

Off:

L6 On:

Flashing:

Off:

On: L2

Off:

L3, L4, L5, L7, L8, L9 On:

L10

Off:

On:

Off:

Board is busy with switching functions

Module is removable after preparatory disabling

Module is not busy

Module reset in progress

Download in progress or blocked by the software

Module in operation

AO1 busy

AO1 not busy

AOx busy

AOx not busy

AO8 busy

AO8 not busy

CAS Channel Associated Signallin

Short description

TheThe CAS module is a PCM30 interface for up to 30 B channels in accordance with CCITT. The module contains the following features:

Other features

Region of application

Current draw +5V

National and international

930 mA

Line signaling in channel 16 (CAS) in accordance with CCITT or country/customer specifications.

Register signaling in 30 B channels (inband) in accordance with CCITT or country/customer specifications.

Can be used as an exchange interface, connection line or special interface.

Incoming, outgoing and bothway traffic direction, can also be mixed as required

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Module software download.

PCM30 interface configuration via module software.

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance functions

Installation

The CAS board can be inserted in the slot shown below.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

567

Details

Slot address:

CBI address: xx = port number

01-01-07-xx

0C hex.

Slot for the CAS board

Connections between CAS and the multipoint female connector 1

568

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Connections - see:

Connections of the BU

[

→ 625 ]

.

CAS-TIELINE User Program

Introduction

The CAS-TIELINE user program is a QUE program that was designed especially for the Integral Enterprise system on the CAS HW platform. The 16 different QUE variants are designated E1 to E10/2.

The user data is adapted to individual requirements by means of the ICU mask.

Hardware

The CAS module (channel associated signaling) is used here. Depending on the application, the 2 MBit/s interface can be configured using the confidata (see Section "ICU mask and confidata") with impedance of

75

(unsymmetrical) or 120

(symmetrical).

One of the following appropriate adapter modules (for MG1000 only) is then required for line connection:

• CA1B for 120

(symmetrical)

• CA4B for 75

(unsymmetrical)

Further general information about the CAS module, in particular about the controls and denotations of the front connector bar, can be gathered from the appropriate paragraphs.

Software

The CAS module is set up with KAD (customer specific user data) for TIELINE application. This requires the corresponding load list name for the accompanying slot address to be entered.

The necessary parameters (confidata) are then set up using the ICU editor. The corresponding ICP files and the confidata subsequently end up on the CAS module by means of a download.

Brief description of applications

The TIELINE user program supports inband signaling (DTMF dial codes, audible tones) and line signaling

(signaling channel bit a). For line bits b, c and d, bcd = 101 applies. Only changes to bit a will be processed by the user program. Changes to the bcd bits will be ignored.

16 different signaling plans are produced from the available signal stock. These plans can be selected using the confidata and always apply to all 30 connecting devices (AO).

In principle all the AOs are set up for both-way throughput.

Line signaling will not be carried out if all the signals appear as pulsed signals.

DTMF (dual tone multi-frequency dialing) and pulse dialing are suitable dialing systems.

The suffix dialing facility is guaranteed for the entire duration of an outgoing call, and for a predefined period of an incoming call.

If the criterion "message" is identified, an active call will be cut off, incl. deleting the chipcard data.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

569

The eligibility or ineligibility of a line can be set up by the confidata separately for incoming and outgoing

AOs.

In the same way, a 425 Hz continuous tone can be connected to the switching matrix as a proceed-to-select signal for outgoing traffic, or a 425 Hz busy tone to the line for incoming traffic according to configuration.

Up to 10 digits can be programmed for a destination in outgoing traffic. The destination will be chosen automatically according to the preset timeout when "eligible" or "ineligible" in the absence of the "dialing" message.

If "eligible"; incoming "dialing" messages are ignored once the timeout has ended. If "ineligible"; they will always be ignored. The suffix dialing facility is also guaranteed for the previous destination when in call status.

Outgoing DTMF signals which are "called through" will be identified, and incoming "dialing" messages are subsequently ignored.

An area code may be programmed, which will be relayed to the GCU global control unit during incoming occupancy once the proceed-to-select criterion (signal, time) has been met.

Where "dial" or "message" information is absent, the release which has been initialized by the user program’s watchdog exists neither for incoming nor for outgoing traffic.

If a fault occurs, trouble signaling to the opposite side can be activated using confidata.

In the same way, an unblocking function can be set up for each connecting device. When active (blokking-n = on), and with the front connector bar switches TBS (total blocking switch) and TBS-N (total blokking switch minus n) switched on, the corresponding connecting device will not be blocked.

Specification of inband signals

The available DTMF transmitters and receivers are set out in accordance with CEPT recommendation T/

CS 46-02.

The tone identifier will certainly operate in the range of 350 to 500 Hz with -30 dBm0.

The tone generator supplies a 425 Hz frequency with a transmission level of -3 dBm0. In outgoing traffic, it can be sent to the switching matrix as a proceed-to-select signal (continuous tone). In incoming traffic, it can be connected to the line as a busy tone (German rhythm).

Synchronization

The CAS module can generally be used as the synchronous clock supplier for synchronization purposes.

In the TIELINE application, however, this is only sensible if no digital exchange interfaces or group lines are present.

This is the reason for the default setting of "No synchronous clock". This setting can be changed via the configuration data.

570

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Identifying the Operation Phase

As described above, the boot software controls

• initialization,

• test and download procedures after a reset and

• indicates various statuses and possible faults by means of the LED’s on the front panel.

If no faults are found and all GCU messages (test messages, "startup ready" etc) have been received, L1 will flash eleven times and L9, L7, L8, L15 and L16 will go out, indicating that the operation phase has been reached.

LED and Switch Functions

The functions of the switches and LED’s on the front panel differ in boot phase from those in operation phase.

Following a reset, the boot software carries out initialization, test and download procedures, and indicates various statuses as well as possible faults via the LEDs on the front panel.

If no faults are found and all necessary GCU messages (test messages, "ready for startup" etc.) have been received, the CAS board will reach the operation phase, where user software is put into effect.

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1

S2

S3

Middle position

Middle position

Middle position

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

571

Switch Function

S1 Left:

S2

S3

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Preparatory disabling (TBS) *

Neutral/release

Reset board

Forced board download

Preparatory disabling (TBS-N) *

Neutral

No function

No function

No function

No function

* With S1 (TBS) in the left position and S2 (TBS-N) in the middle position, all 30 ports will be blocked.

With S1 (TBS) and S2 (TBS-N) in the left position, all ports outlined in the configuration data will not be blocked.

If S1 (TBS) is in the middle position, all 30 ports will not be blocked, irrespective of the position of S2

(TBS-N).

L4

L5

L6

L7

Meanings of LEDs

L1 TSL Total status LED

L2

L3

ESY

LOS

External synchronization

No signal

LOF

CRC

RFR

ISU1

Frame failure

CRC4 test fault

Frame failure at remote side

**

L8

L9

ISU3

RDL

L10 MSG

L11 AIS

L12 LMF

L13 BIT

L14 RMF

L15 ISU2

L16 ISU4

**

LED reset/download

C-bus message

Alarm identification signal

Superframe failure

Increased bit error ratio

Superframe failure at remote side

**

**

** The denotation of the LEDs depends on the application (display of R2 register, DTMF receiver/transmitter, tone transmitter/receiver)

572

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

DECT22 ICU for DECT-Applications 22

Short description

The DECT22 module is used to connect the radio base station to the Integral Enterprise.

1. RM 588 Part no.: 4.998.001.296

2. RM 603 Part no.: 4.999.109.229

3. RM 617 Part no.: 4.999.117.297 (indoor variant for enclosed rooms)

4. RM 717 Part no.: 4.999.117.298 (weatherproof outdoor variant)

It performs an automatic runtime measurement. The manual measurement of the individual routes up to 1 km is not applicable as long as no repeater is connected between.

The DECT22 module is a resdesign of the DECT21 and replaces it. The behavior is the same as the

DECT21. Both the DECT21 and DECT22 can be used in an MG1000 Media Gateway. As DECT21 and

DECT22 have the same board type (DT32), a DECT22 can therefore also be used with older software versions.

The distinction is made via the Service Tool "ICU Editor" in the load list. It should be noted here that a

DECT22 must be set up in the ICU Editor. If a slot is set up for a DECT21 and a DECT22 is used, it will not work.

In contrast to the DECT21, the DECT22 uses a modern processor system with operating system (Linux).

Accordingly, a few things need to be taken into account when downloading the board software and commissioning the board.

(cf.

Startup of the DECT22

[

→ 580 ]

)

Other features

Region of application

Current requirement +5V

Interfaces

National and international

860 mA

8 U

PD

interfaces for RBS

A U

PD

interface corresponds to 2 physical U

PN

interfaces.

The ADPCM (Adaptive-Differential-Pulse-Code-Modulation, 32 kbit/s) conversion is carried out on the module.

One of the two D channels is used for the transmission of synchronization information between the

DECT22 module and the RBS.

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Download from board software

(1)

Board identification using board ID data

Maintenance function

Note 1:

If a DECT22 is to be operated on a slot set up for DECT21, you must first use the ICU Editor service tool to set up a DECT22 module. The DECT22 cannot be operated with the program for a DECT21.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

573

Line lengths

Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y diam. 0.6 mm

External cable A-2YF(L)2Y 0.6 mm

2

Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y 0.6 mm

2

and U

PN

repeater

External cable A-2YF(L)2Y 0.6 mm

2

and U

PN

repeater

1.0 km

1.0 km

2x 1.0 km

2x 1.0 km

DECT22 module, module side

Installation

The DECT21 or DECT22 board must be inserted in the slot shown below.

1. Slot for the board DECT21 or DECT22

574

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Details

Use on the slot of the DECT21 or DECT22 board

Slot address: 01-01-07-xx

CBI address: xx = port number

0C hex.

MG100 Media Gateway

Connections between the DECT21 or DECT22 board and multipoint female connector 1

The RBSs are physically connected via the ports 00 to 07.

Connections - see:

Connections of the BU

[

→ 625 ]

.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

575

LEDs and Switch Functions

DECT22 module, front side

Function of the Switches

S1 Right:

Middle:

Left: During operation of the DECT22

After reset up to initial test response

No function

Forced download of the board software (S2 in normal position for this), at the end of the download process the board is automatically reset.

In order to prevent infinite repetition of the download, the switch S1 must be returned to the middle position after the message "Test Reply 1".

Yet to be defined S2 Right:

Middle:

Left: During operation of the DECT22

After reset up to initial test response

No function

Prevention of a download of the board SW, even if a more recent version is available on the background memory or when forced by S1.

576

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

L3

L4

L5

L6

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1 Off: Module is not busy

L2

On:

Off:

Module is busy in terms of exchange functions

Synchronization slave

On: Synchronization master

Layer 1, active port 0

Layer 1, active port 2

Layer 1, active port 4

L7

L8

L9

L10

Layer 1, active port 6

Layer 1, active port 8

Layer 1, active port 10

Layer 1, active port 12

L11

L12

Flashing:

Off:

Flashing:

Layer 1, active port 14

FP download active

Initialization phase

L13

L14

L15

L16

L17

Off:

On:

Flashing:

User program running

(1)

Module in operation

Module reset in progress

Download in progress

All 30 B-channels are busy

Layer 1, active port 1

Layer 1, active port 3

L18

L19

L20

L21

Layer 1, active port 5

Layer 1, active port 7

Layer 1, active port 9

Layer 1, active port 11

L22

L23

L24

Flashing:

Off:

Flashing:

Layer 1, active port 13

Layer 1, active port 15

SW IDM in ICU activated

Initialization phase

User program running

(1)

Note 1:

Alternate flashing of L12 and L24 (approx. 1s cycle) signals that the user program is running properly.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

577

Connections to the DECT22 front panel

There are two RJ45 sockets on the bottom half of the DECT22 front panel. They are arranged in the following way with the following functions:

Legend:

1. Ethernet interface (no function)

2. RS232 interface

The socket for the Ethernet interface is not occupied in the series version.

The RS232 interface can be used for test functions. Allocation of the connections:

6

7

4

5

2

3

Pin Signal

1 nc

RS232_TXD

RS232_RXD

Function

Not connected

Serial data output (with RS232 level)

Serial data input (with RS232 level)

8 nc

GND nc

Not connected

Mass

Not connected

RS232_CTS Clear to send input (with RS232 level), signal not used

RS232_RTS Request to send output (with RS232 level), signal not used

578

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Important: RS232 levels are available at the interface.

Use of the V24 level adapter is not permitted.

38400 Baud no parity

1 Stop bit no flow control (HW or SW handshake)

Notes on the program of the DECT22

Linux is used as the operating system on the DECT22. This means on the one hand that a modern operating system is used which allows adaptation to other processor platforms. On the other hand, the amount of data required for operation on the board is also increased.

The board software is divided into three files for the program download:

The user program DEC22Axx.ICP

The operating system

The file system

DEC22Kxx.ICP

DEC22Rxx.ICP

("xx" is a placeholder for different SW versions)

Based on the assumption that the file system and the operating system are stable and that only the user program needs to be replaced during a software upgrade, two loading list files were specified for the program download: with all program files only with the user program

DECT22L0.ICL

DECT2200.ICL

The user program contains all of the functional units like the download program, DSP programs, FP software, specific driver SW for DECT HW components and DECT functions. Downloading the user program alone significantly shortens loading times. In the ICU editor you can choose between the two loading lists, whereby the loading list DECT2200.ICL is set by default.

Together with the corresponding system software (*) the DECT22 enables the so-called turbo-download, which significantly reduces the loading time (e.g. loading according to DECT22L0.ICL takes around 15 minutes). The loading time without turbo-download takes around 65 minutes for all files, or 15 minutes for the user program alone. It is assumed that a simultaneous download of all files will only take place very rarely.

_____________________________

(*)

Software system from the following versions:

E07V09,

L021V01_4 and

L03V01_3

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

579

Startup of the DECT22

After resetting the DECT22 (by plugging the module, executing the Remote Reset command or resetting via the switch S1 on the front), the RAM memory contained and compressed in the flash PROM is copied into the RAM memory, decompressed and started. This process can take up to a minute. During this time, no LED signals are output on the front panel. In order to prevent misinterpretation, a number of states for the startup of a DECT22 are described below:

Display after a reset:

All LEDs switched off except L13

The programs are being decompressed and copied to RAM. This status lasts around one minute (75 seconds max.).

Display when the operating system is running and the user program has been started:

L13 flashes

L3 to L6 and L15 to L18 are switched on

This status lasts a maximum of approximately 5 seconds (in practice, it is usually so short that it is barely even noticed).

L12 and L24 flash alternately in 1-second intervals.

580

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Display once the first messaging traffic with the control of the MG1000 has taken place

(Test_response_1):

L13 flashes

L3 goes out, L4 to L6 and L15 to L18 remain switched on.

L12 and L24 flash alternately in 1-second intervals.

If the program download was forced via S1 (switch to the left), then S1 must now be moved back into the normal position (middle). The transition to the next state takes either around 5s if no program download is taking place, or around 2 minutes when a program download is initiated. The display states and transition times until complete commissioning of the DECT22 without program download correspond to the standard for an MG1000 module, so this is not covered in any more detail here.

Display during a program download

L13 flashes

Via L3/L4 and L15/L16 the individual states during data reception are displayed.

With the receipt of the program data, L3/L4 and L15/L16 are switched on alternately.

The data are being stored in the RAM and - if a file has been completely received - programmed into the flash memory.

L12 and L24 flash alternately in 1-second intervals.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

581

Display when all program data have been received

L13 flashes

The alternating flashing of L3/L4 and L15/L16 ends.

Programming of the data from the RAM into the flash PROM continues. Depending on the download (i.e. everything or just the user program), this status can last for up to 4.5 minutes (if everything is to be loaded).

L12 and L24 flash alternately in 1-second intervals.

Display that the program download has been performed successfully

L13 flashes

L3 and L4 are switched on, L15 and L16 are off.

The checksum test for the loaded program has been successfully performed.

DECT22 now stops the test message traffic in order to force a restart from the plant control. After the reset the DECT22 starts with the loaded software.

L12 and L24 flash alternately in 1-second intervals.

Attention:

If S1 is not to the normal position then the program will be downloaded again.

582

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

DSPF Digital Signal Processing Function

Short description

The DSPF is the base board for the ASM3 announcement subboard. The announcement board lets you record and play voice announcements for ACD and hotel use. Depending on the application, the DSPF can be equipped with up to:

4 ASM3

2 ASM3 for access to 128 time slots for access to 64 time slots in MG1000 in MG100

Region of application

Current requirement +5V

Other features

National and international

850 mA

Inserting the submodule

The used ASM3 modules are inserted in the submodule slots "submodule 1" - "submodule 2" of the DSPF.

DSPF board, component side

1. Submodule 1

2. Submodule 2

The position must correspond to the setting in the confidata. The following allocation must be observed:

"Submodule number" parameter in the ICU Editor

0

1

Labelling

Submodule 1

Submodule 2

Labelling on the DSPF board

SUB1

SUB2

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

583

Installation

The DSPF board can be inserted in the slots shown below.

1. Slots for the DSPF board

Connections - see:

Connections of the BU

[

→ 625 ]

.

Time slot management

The MG100 Media Gateway design allows the DSPF to be inserted only in an odd slot.

Each ASM3 submodule represents one ICU. The DSPF has access to 64 time slots total in the MG100

Media Gateway. A maximum of two ICUs is possible. The ICU of the physical slot of the module (time slots

0-31) logs on with the ICU type DSFM (DSPF master). The additional ICU is created on the same hardware using logical address entries (time slot 32-63) in the CBI. The log on using ICU type DSFS (DSPF slave).

It is not helpful to configure a second DSPF in the same module.

In accordance with the above conditions, the two submodule slots and thus each of the ICUs can be assigned an application (ACD or HOTCOM).

Setting up of the DSFM and DSFS ICUs prior to operation of the TC system is implemented using the CAT application and during operation using the ICU Editor service and management program.

This module does not have any external connections.

584

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

LEDs and Switch Functions

MG100 Media Gateway

DSPF module, front panel

Meaning of the switch on the front panel of the DSPF module

Up to 4 ICUs (1* DSFM and 3 * DSFS) can be implemented on the DSPF module. The common status of the ICUs can be controlled via the S1 front panel switch as follows:

S1 Reset and blocking switch

Middle position All ICUs in operation status

Left-hand position All ICUs in preparatory disabling

Right position All ICUs in reset

Left position after module reset

Master ICU DSMF (DSPF module) receives a forced ICU download. After commencing the loading process, the switch must be returned to the middle position.

Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the DSPF module

Up to 4 ICUs (1* DSFM and 3 * DSFS) can be implemented on the DSPF module. The common status of the ICUs is displayed via the two front panel LEDs L1 and L10 according to the following pattern:

The display appears according to priority, i.e., if several functions of the scheme are represented by one

LED, the one with the highest priority is implemented. Prio 1 is the highest priority, and prio 5 the lowest. In the cases with priority 1, the module is still in the reset or download phase, whereby the additional ICUs

(DSFS) are not yet active.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

585

L1

L2

Flashing 5Hz At least one ICU is still in startup, waiting for "Switching On" message

Flashing 1Hz All ICUs are preparatory disabled, the module is removable on At least one ICU is switchboard-occupied in at least one channel.

Prio 2

Prio 3

Prio 4

All ICUs (entire module) are in reset processing (if L10 is also on) Prio 1 off All ICUs are in a resting state with their ports, the module is not occupied Prio 5

Flashing 5Hz At least 1 ICU is still waiting for startup Prio 2

Flashing 1Hz /

Master ICU DSFM (DSPF module) ICU download in progress on

Prio 1

Prio 3

Master ICU DSFM (DSPF module) in reset processing (if L1 is also on) Prio 1 off

Master ICU DSMF (DSPF module) Programming procedure in ICU download

All ICUs in operation

Prio 1

Prio 4

DSPF1 Digital Signal Processing Function

Short description:

The board DSPF1 is used to record and to play voice announcements, for example as alarm announcement in hotel applications or as voice messages for ACD (eg for queue announcements).

The board DSPF1 is the successor of DSPF, but doesn’t have any subboard.

Compared with the predecessor one board DSPF1 corresponds with a board DSPF with one subboard

ASM3. It offers access to 32 time layers. Several boards DSPF1 must be used, if a higher capacity is required.

Example:

Two boards DSPF1 correspond with one board DSPF equiped by two subboards ASM3, that are 64 time layers. The second board can use the neighbor slot, which has to be spared anyway in the original

DSPF-Configuration.

Other features

Region of application

Current requirement +5V

National and international

850 mA

586

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Configuration

The DSPF1 is easier to configure in the ICU editor than the DSPF, because subboards are not to be considered. Do the following settings:

• for the port type,

• for the port number (mostly "0"),

• for the application and

• for the DSP function (similar as with the DSPF).

Important:

DSPF and DSPF1 do have the same ICU type from the telephone system’s point of view. When an existing DSPF is to be replaced by a DSPF1, the DSPF1 type must be set for this slot using the ICU-editor!

Otherwise, the telephone system will try to load the ICU-software of the existing DSPF into the DSPF1.

The DSPF1 will ignore that and won’t go into operation (the system console will display an error message).

Moreover, the expansion of the existing DSPF has to be considered, when replacing it by a DSPF1. If more than one ASM3 was plugged, several DSPF1 boards are necessary for the full replacement.

Time slot management

The DSPF1 does not have any restrictions due to the slot. It uses solely the 32 layers of its own time slot.

Set the ICU type DSFM when commissioning the DSPF1. Before the system is in operation, this is done with the application of CAT and during operation with the usual management and maintenance programs.

External connections

Connections to the main distribution frame are not implemented. A cable adapter is not required for the slot of the DSPF1.

Jumpers at the DSPF1 board

A 2x3-pin connector with the name X35 is placed near the lower front panel latch. With the help of two jumpers a copy function of voice messages can be carried out there.

This functionality is only provided for the production!

These two jumpers may not be available for the use of the customer or must be plugged in the normal position, - otherwise, the operation of the DSPF1 not possible. Two red LEDs at the bottom of the front panel must be off as visual check in the normal operation.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

587

Partial view of the DSPF1 board with the position of the pin connector X35.

588

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

LEDs and Switch Functions

A switch (with three positions) and four LEDs are housed at the front panel of the DSPF1 board. front panel of the DSPF1 board

Meaning of the switch on the front panel of the DSPF1 board

An ICU is implemented at the DSPF1 board. Its status can be controlled via the S1 front panel switch as follows:

S1 Reset and blocking switch

Middle position The ICU is in operation status.

Left position

Right position

Left-hand position after board reset

The ICU is in preparatory disabling.

Reset of the DSPF1 board.

The DSPF1 board receives a forced ICU download.

After commencing the loading process, the switch must be returned to the middle position (otherwise endlessly forced download).

The status of the ICU - implemented on the DSPF1 - is signaled by means of the LEDs L1 and L2:

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

589

L1

L2

L3

L4

Signaling idle, busy, blocking status

Flashing 5Hz The ICU is in its commissioning phase and is waiting for the message "switching on".

Flashing 1Hz The ICU is in preparatory disabling, the board can be reset.

on The ICU is busy in terms of exchange functions (play announcement or voice recording).

off

The ICU reset is in progress (if L2 is on also).

All ports of the ICU are idle, the board is not busy at all (the board can be reset).

Signaling operation status (reset, download, in operation)

Flashing 5Hz The ICU is wating for commissioning.

The ICU download is in progress (download of new ICU software).

Flashing 1Hz --- on The ICU download is in progress, data are being programmed into the flash.

off

The ICU reset is in progress (if L1 is on also).

The ICU is in operation.

Signaling the recording (for the production solely), following the normal position

- record at X35

Flashing 5Hz ---

Flashing 1Hz --- on off

Announcements for the hotel application are being copied from the playback

DSPF1 to the record DSPF1 (for the production solely). The jumper X35 is plugged in "record" position. The DSPF1 board expects protocol-oriented data on its PCM highway to store them.

The DSPF1 board is in normal operation status.

The LED must be off for the proper operation of the DSPF1, i.e. if a jumper X35 is there, its position must be "normal".

Signaling playback (for the production solely), following the normal position

- playback at X35

Flashing 5Hz ---

Flashing 1Hz --- on off

Announcements for the hotel application are being copied from the playback

DSPF1 to the record DSPF1 (for the production solely). The jumper X35 is plugged in "playback" position. The DSPF1 board supplies protocol-oriented data to its PCM highway for the record board to store them.

The DSPF1 board is in normal operation status.

The LED must be off for the proper operation of the DSPF1, i.e. if a jumper X35 is there, its position must be "normal".

590

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

DT22 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 2

Short description

The DT22 board provides a configurable S2M interface.

Other features

Region of application National and international

Current requirement +5V 600 mA

Interfaces One S

2M

interface (Exchange(T2) - or FV(TIE)), 120 Ohm symm. or 75 Ohm asymm. (not provided for use in MG100)

Optical interface driver(not provided for use in MG100)

One RJ45 socket on the front for S

2M

(twisted pair only) as an alternative to the cable adapter

2.048 MHz clock pulse output(not provided for use in MG100)

V.24 test interface (front panel) and IDM

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Cable adapter/front socket

For use in MG1000

For use in MG100

Possible adapter boards:

CA1B, CA4B, OFA2B, OFAS,

S

2M

also via front socket via ESBx NT feed

None, direct tap on the front panel only

NT feed via an external mains adapter plug (part no. 27.4402.1056).

Ranges

For use in MG1000

37 dB attenuation range

Wire interfaces (CA1B or CA4B)

120 Ohm symmetric

75 Ohm coax

Optical interface (OFA1B)

0.9 km

1.8 km

Installation cable

TF cable

1.5 km

Monomode cable 9/125 micrometer, 11 dB max. attenuation for entire optical path (e.g. max. 20 km at 0.4 dB/km and 7 plug connections 0.4 dB/ plug)

For use in MG100

37 dB attenuation range

Wire interfaces (direct tap on the front panel)

120 Ohm symmetric 0.9 km

1.8 km

Installation cable

TF cable

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

591

Installation

The DT22 board can be inserted in the upper (1) or lower (2) slot:

Slots for the DT22 board:

1. When using the upper slot the connection via the front panel of the DT22 must always be used.

2. When using the lower slot the connection can also be made using the fixed integrated wiring (similarly to the DT21 board). As the assignments of the connections via the front panel of the board are diffe-

rent from the assignments of the fixed integrated socket, we do however recommend always using the connection via the front panel of the board when using the DT22.

Details

Slot address:

CBI address: xx = port number

01-01-07-xx

0C hex.

1. S2M front interface via RJ45 (as an alternative to the back plane)

Pin1

Pin2

Pin4

Pin5

L13

L14

RX+ Receive

RX- Receive

TX+ Transmit

TX- Transmit

S2M active to back plane

S2M active to front

592

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Activation of the front panel is indicated with the green LED. Five jumpers need to be replugged on the board.

LEDs and Switch Functions

DT22 module, front side

1. S2M front interface via RJ45 (as an alternative to the backplane)

Pin1

Pin2

Pin4

Pin5

L13

L14

RX+ Receive

RX- Receive

TX+ Transmit

TX- Transmit

S2M active to backplane

S2M active to front

Activation of the front panel is indicated with the green LED. Five jumpers need to be replugged on the board. In addition, all cable adapters need to be removed.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

593

2. V24 and IDM interface

1 = not occupied

V24: 2 = RXD

3 = TXD

4 = +5V

5 = GND

IDM: 6 = D-Channel Data upstream

7 = D-Channel Data downstream

8 = Clock burst 2.048 MHz

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1

S2

Middle position

Middle position

Function of the Switches

S1

S2

Left:

Middle:

Preparatory disabling

Operation status/release

Right: Reset module

Right, then left: Forced download of the board, at the end of the download process the module is automatically reset.

In order to prevent infinite repetition of the download, the switch S1 must be returned to the middle position after the message "Test Reply 1".

Left, then right: Report (fault statistic message to the system console) Switch must be returned to the center position (2 MHz cycle output off) or to the right (2 MHz cycle output on).

Middle: Standard operation / 2 MHz cycle output off

Right: 2 MHz cycle output on

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1

L5

L6

L7

L2

L3

L4

L8

L9

On:

Flashing:

Off:

On:

On:

On:

On:

On:

On:

Flashing:

Off:

On:

On:

Board is busy with switching functions

Module is removable after preparatory disabling

Module is not busy

Module is synchronous clock supplier

Remote Alarm Indication RAI (opposite side reporting fault status)

Alarm Indication Signal AIS (opposite side reporting "Out of Order")

Loss of Signal LOS (no receiving signal)

Rx E bit errors

Module reset in progress

Download in progress

Module in operation

Normal operation (layer 1 active, no alarm)

Bit error rate > 10

-6

594

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

L10

L11

L12

On:

On:

On:

Bit error rate > 10

-3

Loss of Framing LOF (loss of frame synchronization)

The LED signals an activated debug monitoring. LED 12 is used as indicator as this debugging has an adverse effect on the real-time function of the module. It is possible to activate the debugging with a terminal connected (on the front panel of the DT22) and subsequently remove the terminal in which case the debugging will inadvertently remain switched on.

A special IDM cable needs to be used on the DT22 for connection of an IDM to the front panel, part no.: 49.999.114.507.

IPN Intelligent Private Network

Short description

The IPN module enables the operation of intelligent private networks between the Integral Enterprise and predecessor systems (I55, I33) by means of data transmission in the speech channel of a digital dial-up line.

Other features

Current requirement +5V 710 mA

Up to 15 IPN connections are possible per module.

Module software download.

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

The module must operate in connection with an ISDN exchange module.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

595

Installation

The IPN module can be inserted in the slots shown below.

1. IPN module slots

Details:

The IPN module cannot be connected using the Western socket.

LEDs and Switch Functions

IPN module, front side

596

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Switch Position

S1

S2

S3

S4

Left:

Right:

Left:

Left:

Left:

Preparatory disabling

Reset module

Module status display not possible at a terminal for testing purposes, as Sub-D plug is not fitted

Test

Further status display of the module is not possible at a terminal for testing purposes, as Sub-D plug is not fitted

Protocol output "on" S5

S6

Left:

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1 On: At least 1 connecting device is occupied

Flashing:

Off:

All connecting devices are disabled

Operating state

L2

L3 Flashing:

1x

2x

3x

Faulty DSPA test

Reserved

Checksum failure

X-RAM defect

8x

9x

10x

11x

4x

5x

6x

7x

13x

14x

Off:

Y-RAM defect

SSI defect

Illegal instruction

Receive SSI with overflow

Transmit SSI with underrun

Stack overflow

Illegal host message received

Field 2 info has been received before

External RAM error

External ROM error

Operating state

L4

L5

L6

L7

On:

Off:

On:

Flashing:

Off:

On:

At least one occupancy is active (occupancy summation display)

Operating state

Reset status

Download in progress

Operating state

Logging switched on

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

597

L8 Flashing:

Off:

L9

L10

12x

On:

Flashing:

Off:

See L3 function

Operating state

Main program runtime > 125 µs

At least one channel blocked

At least one channel faulty

Operating state

MBO1 Motherboard Office

Short description

In the BU, the MBO1 (Motherboard Office) combines the functional units of the central functions (CF22) and a part of the analog and digital interfaces (max. 40 ports). In order to reduce the cost of the MBO1

(number of layers), the digital signal processors belonging to the CF22 were moved to the DSPO submodule.

Together with the ACBO board, the PC-Modul ETX 800 MHz and the PSO included, they realize the basic components of the MG100 Media Gateway. The boards VOIP, DECT21 or DECT22 can be connected to the system via the adapter board SBAO.

Features

Clock supply and module synchronization

External synchronization via network nodes (S

0

, S

2M

)

Master freewheel (intrinsic clock)

Module switching matrix

Bit rate 4.096 MBit/s

Non-blocking module contents

11 MFTN receiver sets, 4 MFTN senders (for dialing only)

Call progress tones

A maximum of 16 call progress tones can be generated as customer-specific or country-specific and can be cyclically repeated. At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

In addition, a maximum of 3 tones with burst character can be supplied.

598

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Short voice messages

Up to 8 voice messages or "music on holds" can be used. The total duration of all the brief voice messages must be no longer than 64 sec.

Long voice messages

2 voice messages with unspecified time limits and confidata can be set up (connecting message devices via analog subscriber line circuit). At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

Tone injection in two-party conversations

Up to 3 different cyclic tones can be generated which may be fed into a maximum of 15 two-party conversations (e.g. call waiting, roll tone etc.).

Conferences

The system SW only allows 3-way conferences.

Remote number ID

8 MFTN senders for CLIP (subscriber number display on analog terminal units for an incoming call)

In its basic version, the analog-digital mixboard ADM part contains the following functions:

• 24 digital U

PN

interfaces as subscriber connections

• four connections for S

0

or T

0

for subscribers or exchange lines (ADM submodule 4, STSM1, fixed part, ports 12 to 15)

• four connections for analog subscribers, a/b (ADM submodule 1, ABSM, fixed part, ports 0 to 3)

In addition, depending on the requirements or configuration, two ADM submodules from the list below may be inserted in this part (see diagram below).

SubMod Equipment

STSM1

STSM four S

0

/T

0

interfaces as exchange, permanent connection or subscriber connection four S

0

/T

0

interfaces as exchange, permanent connection or subscriber connection

UPSM1 four U

PN

interfaces as subscriber connections

UPSM

ABSM1

ABSM four U

PN

interfaces as subscriber connections four analog subscriber connections (a/b) four analog subscriber connections (a/b)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

599

2. Slot for submodule 2 (SUB2, ports 4-7)

3. Slot for submodule 3 (SUB3, ports 8-11)

On the ADM board, it is possible to use the ICU editor to set the "Call Reference Length -

(CRL)" for the entire board to a length of one or two bytes. The call reference length of two bytes is required for QSIG networks with certain external systems. If this setting is chosen all of the ports have CRL=2 bytes, regardless of the currently selected protocol. As a result, no subscribers/lines with the protocols TN1R6, 1TR6, DKZN, VN3, NI2 or ETSI with CRL=1 could be connected to this ADM module.

The ADM module’s behavior is different in ICU software version ADM0900.ICL/ADM00009.ICP and later. The CRL setting is only accepted for the ports with QSIG as their protocol. On all other protocols CRL=1 always remains.

As a result, it is possible to set up ports with the protocol QSIG with CRL=2 for networking with external systems, while CRL=1 is used on the other ports with the protocols TN1R6, 1TR6,

DKZN, VN3, NI2 and ETSI.

600

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Other features

Countries of use Application in all countries

Current requirement +5V 6000 mA

Interfaces Standard 24 times U

PN

Optional (max. 2 submodules)

4 times

4 times

4 times

4 times

4 times a/b

S

0

U

PN a/b

S

0

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Download board software

Board identification using board ID data

For logging use adapter plug RJ45/D-Sub, part no.: use 49.9905.9171

In conjunction with the parts of the ADM and DUPN protocol interfaces for boards on the front of the system.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

601

Details

ADM on MBO1

Slot address:

CBI address: xx = port number

03.01.01-xx

08 hex.

Connections port ADM on MB0 to contact strip 3

DUPN on MBO1

Slot address:

CBI address: xx = port number

05.01.01-xx

0A hex.

602

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Connections port DUPN on MB0 to contact strip 1 (port) and contact strip 2

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

603

Current settings

Changes on the MBO1 must be made very carefully using suitable tools, as this is a central component.

The ABSM installed as a fixed component on the part of the analog/digital mixboard ADM realizes four connections for analog subscribers for analog subscribers a/b, with a constant current feed of 24 mA. It is possible to switch over to 30 mA. This is done per port, with the connection of the soldering points shown under 1.

Detail of the MBO1, location of the ports for analog subscribers

604

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

1. When converting to 30 mA, insert one bridge per port (connecting device).

Detail of the MBO1, soldering points for one port (connecting device)

Line resistance

Range:

Other features

2 x 475 Ohm

4 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0.4 mm

9 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0.6 mm

15 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø 0.8 mm

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

605

LEDs and Switch Functions

1. Location of operating elements and LEDs

Operating elements and LEDs of the MBO1

Switch and LED block of the CF22

Switch functions

S1 Reset switch

Center:

Bottom (left):

Top (right):

Reset module, locking

Board reset, keying

On the HSCBO board there is no switch for the memory test. In order to perform a switch-operated restart despite this, the switch S1 of the MBO1 must be pressed upwards (reset of the CF22). This will cause the HSCBO to perform a restart.

LED denotations

L1 (green) Power Good on: All required operating voltages present

606

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

L2 (green)

L3 (red) off:

CLKUSYN on:

MSMC on: flashing:

off:

L4 (yellow) MANK on:

Failure of one operating voltage

Clock unit synchronization

Module clock system is synchronized

MSMC active/inactive

MSMC (switching matrix processor unit) resetting/inactive

MSMC download in progress or MSMC waiting for commissioning

Master network nodes

External synchronous clock switched on for synchronization by the system software

LED block of the DUPN

L1 (green) on: flashing: off:

L2 (red) on: flashing: off:

LED block of the ADM

L1 (green) on:

L2 (red) flashing: off: on: flashing: off:

Board is busy with switching functions

All connecting devices blocked after VSP

Module is not busy

Module reset in progress

Download in progress

Module in operation

Board is busy with switching functions

All connecting devices blocked after VSP

Module is not busy

Module reset in progress

Download in progress

Module in operation

LED block (currently no function): Not yet realized.

LED block of the SPY: Not yet realized.

SBAO System Board Adapter Office

Short description

The SBAO (System Board Adapter Office) module is a small back plane with two connection device slots with the most common signals and voltages in the Integral Enterprise. It is a fixed component of the

MG100 Media Gateway.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

607

VOIP Voice over IP Board

Short description

The VOIP board is described with all the required additional information relating to installation and set-up, dimensioning etc. in the chapter

Notes on VolP and IPMR

[

→ 693 ]

.

VOIP board, component side

1. Speech compression/packeting

2. Echo cancelation

The basic VOIP board (part number: 49.9903.7976) has six slots for the SOM-2 submodules, each of which has two DSP chips (Digital Signal Processing Small Outline Module 2, part number: 49.9903.7980) in order to increase the number of DSP chips used in the system. These DSP chips perform three functions:

• Package of voice information from the highway into data packets and thus compression of the speech data when desired (from G.711 64 kbit/s to G.729A 8 kbit/s),

608

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

• Echo cancellation for speech connections from the IP terminals to the ISDN/analog terminals or the

ISDN/analog lines and identification of Fax- and DTMF-signals,

• coding and decoding for T.38-Fax.

The upper three slots 1 (in the center of the board) are used for voice compression and packeting, while the lower three slots 2 are used for echo cancellation.

Due to the very high cost of the DSP chips, the number of SOM-2 submodules needs to be calculated according to the configuration of the customer’s system (see Calculation of the number of SOM-2 submodules).

In addition, four DSP chips are soldered onto the VoIP board. These are responsible for central functions such as announcements, mixers and sound input, and support a fixed number of channels for voice compression and echo cancellation.

The connection of the VOIP board to the periphery is performed via the cable adapter AEV24B.

Use

Current requirement +5V

Other features

Integration of Integral Enterprise extensions into the existing IP-based data network environment operated by the customer (LAN, WAN, corporate network)

1800 mA addition per SOM-2: 240 mA

Installation

The VOIP board is always plugged into the upper slot (Slot 01).

1. Slot for the VOIP board

With the MG100 Media Gateway, the slots are addressed in such a way that the neighboring slots are always left free. Accordingly, the VOIP board can occupy 64 channels if required.

Details

Slot address: 01-01-01-11 to 01-01-01-62

01-01-01-00-S to 01-01-01-62-S

01-01-02-00 to 01-01-02-62

CBI address: 06 hex.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

609

1. V24. Console of the VoIP board

Connections between VOIP and the multipoint female connector 1

Connections - see:

Connections of the BU

[

→ 625 ]

.

610

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

LEDs and Switch Functions

The diagram below shows a view of the front panel and the meaning of the switches and LEDs.

View of front panel

Switch functions

S1 Left:

Center:

Right:

Right, then left:

Preparatory disabling (VSP)

Operation status/release

Reset

Forced download of the board, at the end of the download process the module is automatically reset.

In order to prevent infinite repetition of the download, the switch S1 must be returned to the middle position after the message "Test Reply 1".

LED denotations

L1 on: flashing: off: on: L2

(POWER GOOD)

L3 (ETH Link) on:

L4 (ETH 10/100) on:

Module is busy in terms of exchange functions (active layer 3 connection)

Module is removable after preparatory disabling

Module is not busy all voltages (5V, 3.3V, DSP on-board VCC 1.8V and PQUICC Vcore, presently 2.5V) are within their permissible tolerance ranges.

Ethernet link is established

100Mbit transfer is taking place (SPEED)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

611

L7

L8

L9

L10

L5 (ETH active)

L6 flashing: Activity on the Ethernet (on the send and receive side) on: flashing:

Module reset in progress

Download in progress off: on: on: on: on:

Module in operation

Status LED 2/3

Status LED 2/2

Status LED 2/1

Status LED 2/0

Power supply

As a general rule, an MG100 Media Gateway can be connected to the 230 V, 50 Hz and 60 Hz mains voltage. The fuse protection for the electric circuit consists of a C Type 16 A automatic circuit breaker. The circuit is a separate circuit (phase and fuse).

The PSO is available as the power supply module. The unit is designed for direct feed.

PSO Power Supply Office

Short description

The PSO board (Power Supply Office) generates the voltages required for the MG Media Gateway. In addition, the two module fans are connected to it.

It offers the following features:

• Harmonics as per EN 61000 (PFC).

• Noise immunity input 4 kV (1.2/50).

• Shutdown of the -48V output after a period of time in the event of overload/short-circuit

• Delayed disconnection of device during overload/short-circuit of +5 V output.

• Board ID data

• I

2

C bus connection

Technical data

Mains voltage

Mains frequency

Reduced voltage

AC ringing voltage

Ringing voltage frequency

Protection class

Radio interference suppression

Voltages and frequencies

230V; ±10 % (single-phase alternating current)

47 - 63 Hz

+5.1 V, -5 V, -48 V

~72 V

47 - 63 Hz

1 (in accordance with VDE 0100)

Limit class B (in accordance with EN 55022 and VDE 878)

612

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Device input, power and currents

P prim

I prim

138W

0.6A

Device output, power and currents

P

+5.1 V

-5 V

-48 V

72 V ~

102 W

10 A

0.2 A

1A, including fan part

0.04 A

All outputs are short-circuit proof.

Exchange

If it is necessary to replace the power supply module this can be done on-site.

Proceed as follows:

1. Disconnect the mains cable from the cold device plug.

2. Undo the cold device plug from the back of the housing (2 screws).

3. Open the system (see Opening the housing).

4. Remove the cover panel from the PSO (1 screw).

5. Disconnect the connecting cable from the PSO (2 fan cables and 1 connecting cable).

6. Undo the fastening screws (5 screws).

7. Unscrew the grounding screw (1 screw, marked with the ground symbol).

8. Take out and replace the PSO.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

613

9. Reverse the steps to install the new one.

In the process, make sure that perfect contact is made between the floor of the housing and the PSO circuit board by means of the grounding screw, so that the requirements according to

EN 60950 are satisfied (resistance between protective conductor and housing </= 0.1 Ohm).

(see chapter

Opening the housing

[

→ 550 ]

)

PE or FPE

The MG100 Media Gateway can be connected with a PE or FPE.

PE

The MG100 Media Gateway can be grounded using permanent grounding with the protective conductor

(PE) of the socket, lockable plug and cable with

• a length of 3 m, part no.: 4.998.045.750

• a length of 5 m, part no.: 4.998.069.828

This option does not require connection to the equipotential bonding strip using a separate copper wire on the MG100 Media Gateway. This variant should be used for desk and standing units.

FPE

If you have an FPE available, you can use it. This option is used primarily for wall-mounted units and use in a cabinet, but it can also be used for desk and standing units.

To connect the MG100 Media Gateway, use the mains cable with a separated PE:

• length 3 m, part no.: 4.999.079.215

• length 5 m, part no.: 4.999.079.453.

You must use one of the two options (PE or FPE) to ground the MG100 Media Gateway.

Loop formation!

614

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Connecting the PE

Plug the grounding plug of the connection cable into the MG100 Media Gateway.

If you then plug in the grounding plug into the socket and press in the black lever, the plug is locked.

1. Wall socket

2. Catch (black)

3. Grounding plug, can be be locked with cable

Start up the system.

Unlocking and removing the grounding plug

Shut down the system.

Use a screwdriver to pull out the black lever by approx. 10 mm.

The plug is unlocked and can be removed.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

615

1. Wall socket

2. Catch (black)

3. Screwdriver

616

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Connection of the FPE

Secure the grounding wire to the casing eye using a cable tie (1.).

MG100 Media Gateway

Clamp the stripped end of the copper wire (FPE=green/yellow, greater than or equal to 4 mm nal on the back of the casing (2.).

2

) in the termi-

Check whether the FPE is properly connected to the equipotential bonding strip and PABX.

If you are placing the MG100 Media Gateway in the cabinet, a 2.5 mm

2

ground wire with ferrules at both ends is available. The ground wire is included with the cabinet.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

617

Module view in the ISM

The module view shows an example configuration with the boards VOIP, DECT21 or DECT22.

The two boards DECT21 or DECT22 are displayed in the ISM as DECT2 without further specification of the board name.

Commissioning

Make sure that all cables have been secured.

Cover the free slots of the front AO boards with slot covers.

Insert the safety plug of the power supply cord into the earthing contact socket provided for the purpose.

1. Position of the control elements and LEDs

618

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Switching on with ACBO module (= Advanced Computer Board Office)

The module is switched on and loads the programs in less than 15 minutes. It is ready for operation when

• the yellow LEDs L7 to L10 are off,

• the green LED L3 flashes and

• the green LED L2 is lit.

Switching on with HSCBO module (= High Speed Computer Board Office)

The module is switched on and loads the programs in less than 10 minutes. It is ready for operation when

• the yellow LEDs L7 to L10 are off and

• the green LED L2 is flashing.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

619

Network

Connect the connections of the connection devices on the front of the MG100 Media Gateway to the patch field or main distributor using the pre-assembled cable.

Patch cable

Two cable options and a Y adapter for the RBS connection are available for connecting the connection device connections on the front of the MG100 Media Gateway to the main distributor:

Cable with open end

In order to connect the MG100 Media Gateway with a conventional main distributor (e.g. push-cut technology) the cable used must have solid copper wires - e.g. use installation cable J-Y(ST)Y.

Cable 8xWE8/4, with open end

The cable with the part number 4.999.020.564 meets the requirements and fits with all connecting devices.

Furthermore, this also applies to an S

2M

interface if a DT21 or DT22 is fitted instead of the DECT21 or

DECT22 in the BU.

620

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Outer ring (1.)

1. RD/BL

2. WH/YE

3. WH/GN

4. WH/BN

5. WH/BK

6. WH/BL

7. WH/YE

8. WH/GN

9. WH/BN

10. WH/BK

11. WH/BL

Inner ring (2.)

12. RD/YE

13. WH/GN

14. WH/BN

15. WH/BL

16. WH/BL

Cable 8xWE8/4 (16x2x0.6) 5m, Part no.: 4.999.020.564, with assignment

WE1 1 Available

2 Available

3 WH (P2)

4 RD (P1)

5 BL (P1)

6 YE (P2)

7 Available

8 Available

WE2 1 Available

2 Available

3 WH (P4)

4 WH (P3)

5 GN (P3)

6 BN (P4)

7 Available

8 Available

WE3 1 Available

2 Available

3 WH (P6)

4 WH (P5)

5 BK (P5)

6 BL (P6)

7 Available

8 Available

WE4 1 Available

2 Available

3 WH (P8)

4 WH (P7)

5 YE (P7)

6 GN (P8)

7 Available

8 Available

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

621

WE5 1 Available

2 Available

3 WH (P10)

4 WH (P9)

5 BN (P9)

6 BK (P10)

7 Available

8 Available

WE6 1 Available

2 Available

3 WH (P12)

4 WH (P11)

5 BL (P11)

6 YE (P12)

7 Available

8 Available

WE7 1 Available

2 Available

3 WH (P14)

4 WH (P13)

5 GN (P13)

6 BN (P14)

7 Available

8 Available e.g. P11 = pair 11

Assignment of the WE connectors

Cable WE8/8, with open end

The cable with the part no. 4.999.089.690 (length 10m) is used if

• one T

0

exchange (ADM board with STSM1) needs to be connected to an NTBA or

• the ATA board with eight exchange connections is used in the BU.

WE8 1 Available

2 Available

3 WH (P16)

4 WH (P15)

5 BK (P15)

6 BL (P16)

7 Available

8 Available

Ring (1.)

1. RD/BL

2. WH/YE

3. WH/GN

4. WH/BN

Cable WE8/8 (10m) with assignment, part no.: 4.999.089.690

622

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

WE1

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

WH (P4)

BN (P4)

WH (P2)

RD (P1)

BL (P1)

YE (P2)

WH (P3)

GN (P3) e.g. P4 = pair 4

Assignment of the WE connector

Connection of the RBS

For the DECT connections in the BU you will need the Y-adapter (see RBS connection). It splits the two connections.

Alternatively. you can also use the cable WE8/8 with an open end for the wiring of the DECT connections in the BU.

Patch Cable

The following cables are used to make the connecting device connections (RJ45 sockets on the front panel(s) of the MG100 Media Gateway) to a main distribution which comprises patch fields:

Cable for patch panels Length Part no.

1m 4.998.051.621

3m 4.999.045.218

5m 4.999.048.490

10m 4.998.055.426

For the DECT connections you will need the Y-adapter (see RBS connection). It splits the two connections.

Exception

If a T

0

exchange is to be wired, use the cable WE8/8 with an open end (length 10m), part number 4.999.089.690 and clamp this to the NTBA.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

623

RBS connection

With the sockets of the DECT21 or DECT22, it should be noted that only one RBS per plug can be operated if the cable is connected directly. To reach both RBS connections of a socket, the Y-adapter (8/8 to 2x

4/8) needs to be connected in between the cable connector and the connecting socket (part no.:

4.999.028.515).

The adapter splits the two connections.

The assignment of the RJ45 sockets for the RBSs on the front side defines the assignment of the RJ45

Y-adapter (8/8 to 2x 4/8).

624

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 connections

The connection device connections are on the front of the MG100 Media Gateway.

Assignment of the RJ45 sockets

MG100 Media Gateway

1. Multipoint female connector 1

2. Multipoint female connector 2

3. Multipoint female connector 3

1. The following are connected to the multipoint female connector 1:

• Protocol interface of the ADM board

• Protocol interface of the DUPN board

• Protocol interface for the VOIP board

• Ethernet connection of the VOIP board

• Connections for eight radio base stations

1. RBS 0/1

2. RBS 2/3

3. RBS 4/5

4. RBS 6/7 or at 1. the S

2M

connection for the board DT21/DT22 or at 1. and 2. eight analog exchange connections for the ATA board or at 1. the S

2M

connection of the CAS board

• Connections for the last eight U

PN

subscribers

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

625

• Connections for DECT21 or DECT22 (RBS) or DT21(S2M) or DT22(S2M)

Connections for DECT21 or DECT22 (RBS0) or DT21 or DT22

Line DECT A1 goes to contact no.: 4

Line DECT B1 goes to contact no.: 5

This corresponds to the lines TX+ and TX- when using a DT21 or DT22

Line DECT A2 goes to contact no.: 6

Line DECT B2 goes to contact no.: 3

This corresponds to the lines RX+ and RX- when using a DT21 or DT22

Connections for DECT21 or DECT22 (RBS1)

Line DECT A3 goes to contact no.: 7

Line DECT B3 goes to contact no.: 8

Line DECT A4 goes to contact no.: 1

Line DECT B4 goes to contact no.: 2

2. The following are connected to the multipoint female connector 2:

• Connections for the first 16 U

PN

subscribers

3. The following are connected to the multipoint female connector 3:

• Connections for all four a/b analog subscribers

• Connections for four S

0

or T

0

for subscribers or exchange lines as well as (optionally according to the boards inserted on the two slots of the ADM with UPSM,

UPSM1, ABSM or STSM1 submodules)

• Connections for four U

PN

subscribers

• Connections for four analog a/b subscribers or

• Connections for four S

0

or T

0

for subscribers or exchange lines

626

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Front views

RJ45 sockets

Front view, RJ45 socket, top

MG100 Media Gateway

Front view, RJ45 socket, bottom

Signal assignment

Board

(submodule)

ADM (ABSM)

ADM (STSM1)

ADM (UPSM,

UPSM1)

DUPN

DECT21/22

Signal at RJ45 pin

1 2 3

GND

A2

4 a

A1

GND A

A

A4 B4 B2 A1

5 b

6 7 8

B1 B2 A1/B1 = S

0

Tx, A2/B2 = S

0

Rx

B GND

B

B1 A2

Notes

A3 B3 4 x UP0 per RJ45 for 2 x RBS

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

627

Board

(submodule)

DT21/22

ATA

CAS

VOIP [ETH]

VOIP [V24]

ADM [V24]

DUPN [V24]

HSCBO [V24]

ACBO [V24]

*1

Signal at RJ45 pin Notes a4 b4

B2 b2

A1 a1

B1 b1

A2 a2

A1/B1 = TX+/TX- (S

2M

), A2/

B2=RX+/RX- (S

2M

) a3 b3 2 x 4 connecting devices per

RJ45

TxD

B2

TxD RxD

RxD

TxD RxD

A1

Tx_P Tx_M Rx_P *1

B1

GND

GND

GND

A2

*1 Rx_M *1

A1/B1 = TX+/TX- (S

2M

), A2/

B2=RX+/RX- (S

2M

)

*1 *1 Wiring see below

V24 signal level (no TTL)

V24 signal level (no TTL)

V24 signal level (no TTL)

TxD RxD DSR GND DTR CTS RTS V24 signal level (no TTL)

TxD RxD DSR GND DTR CTS RTS V24 signal level (no TTL)

628

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

Discontinued modules and components

The media gateway MG100 with the motherboard MBO is no longer used in new business.

Also the following modules and components have been discontinued from the active portfolio and will no longer be used in new business as well:

Module

DECT21

[

→ 629 ]

DT21

[

→ 633 ]

HSCBO

[

→ 639 ]

DECT21 ICU for DECT-Applications 21

Short description

The DECT21 module is used to connect the RM 588 radio base station, part no. 4.998.001.296, to the Integral Enterprise.

It performs an automatic runtime measurement. The manual measurement of the individual routes up to 1 km is not applicable as long as no repeater is connected between.

Other features

Region of application National and international

Current requirement +5V 1185 mA

Interfaces 8 U

PD

interfaces for RBS

A U

PD

interface corresponds to 2 physical U

PN

interfaces.

The ADPCM (Adaptive-Differential-Pulse-Code-Modulation, 32 kbit/s) conversion is carried out on the module.

One of the two D channels is used for the transmission of synchronization information between the

DECT21 module and the RBS.

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Download from board software

(1)

Board identification using board ID data

Maintenance function

Note 1:

If a DECT21 is to be plugged into a slot which is set up for a DECT22 successor module, you must first use the ICU Editor service tool to set up a DECT21 module. Downloading DECT22 programs to DECT21 would lead to malfunctions. As a result the board would not work.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

629

DECT21 module, module side

Line lengths

Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y 0.6 mm

2

External cable A-2YF(L)2Y 0.6 mm

2

Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y 0.6 mm

2

and U

PN

repeater

External cable A-2YF(L)2Y 0.6 mm

2

and U

PN

repeater

1.0 km

1.0 km

2x 1.0 km

2x 1.0 km

Installation

The DECT21 or DECT22 board must be inserted in the slot shown below.

1. Slot for the board DECT21 or DECT22

630

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Details

Use on the slot of the DECT21 or DECT22 board

Slot address: 01-01-07-xx

CBI address: xx = port number

0C hex.

MG100 Media Gateway

Connections between the DECT21 or DECT22 board and multipoint female connector 1

The RBSs are physically connected via the ports 00 to 07.

Connections - see:

Connections of the BU

[

→ 625 ]

.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

631

LEDs and Switch Functions

DECT21 module, front side

Switch Function

S1

S2

Right:

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Middle:

Left:

Interpretation of the LEDs

L1 Off:

L2

L3

L4

On:

On:

L5

L6

L7

L8

Reset module

Normal position

No function

Yet to be defined

Normal position

Yet to be defined

Module is not busy

Module is busy in terms of exchange functions

Synch. Master

Layer 1, active port 0

Layer 1, active port 2

Layer 1, active port 4

Layer 1, active port 6

Layer 1, active port 8

Layer 1, active port 10

632

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

L9

L10

L11

L12

L13

L18

L19

L20

L21

L14

L15

L16

L17

L22

L23

L24

Flashing:

Off:

On:

Flashing:

Flashing:

Layer 1, active port 12

Layer 1, active port 14

FP download active

Yet to be defined

Module in operation

Module reset in progress

Download in progress

All 30 B-channels are busy

Layer 1, active port 1

Layer 1, active port 3

Layer 1, active port 5

Layer 1, active port 7

Layer 1, active port 9

Layer 1, active port 11

Layer 1, active port 13

Layer 1, active port 15

SW IDM in ICU activated

Yet to be defined

DT21 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 1

Short description

The DT21 module provides a configurable S

2M

interface.

Other features

Region of application

Current requirement +5V

Interfaces

National and international

400 mA

One S

2M

interface (exchange(T2) - or FV(TIE)), 120 Ohm symm. or 75 Ohm asymm. (not provided for use in MG100)

Optical interface driver(not provided for use in MG100)

Switchable digital attenuation for speech connections (B-channels), adjustable via the ICU Editor

2.048 MHz clock pulse output(not provided for use in MG100)

V.24 Test interface (front panel)

Overvoltage protection up to 4kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

633

For use in MG100

For use in MG100

Cable adapter

Possible adapter boards: CA1B, CA4B, OFA2B, OFAS

NT feed via ESBx

None, direct tap on the front panel only

NT feed via an external mains adapter plug (part no.

27.4402.1056).

Ranges

For use in MG1000

37 dB attenuation range

Wire interfaces (CA1B or CA4B)

120 Ohm symmetric

75 Ohm coax

Optical interface (OFA1B)

0.9 km

1.8 km

Installation cable

TF cable

1.5 km monomode cable 9/125 micrometer, 11 dB max. attenuation for entire optical path (e.g. max. 20 km at 0.4 dB/km and 7 plug connections 0.4 dB/ plug)

For use in MG100

37 dB attenuation range

Wire interfaces (direct tap on the front panel)

120 Ohm symmetric 0.9 km

1.8 km

Installation cable

TF cable

Installation

The DT21 board can be inserted in the slot shown below.

1. Slot for the DT21 board

634

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Details

Slot address:

CBI address: xx = port number

01-01-07-xx

0C hex.

MG100 Media Gateway

Connections between the DT21 (slot of the DECT21 or DECT22) and multipoint female connector 1

The connections of the DECT21 or DECT22 are located in the first block of 16 in the Western sockets

(RJ45). Accordingly, the exchange line interface of the DT21 is also located there.

Picture of a block of 16

16 x RJ45 sockets, viewed from the front

The two DECT21 or DECT22 connections for the first RBS stations are in socket 8.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

635

Wiring of socket 8

Line DECT_A1 goes to contact no.: 4 (shown green)

Line DECT_B1 goes to contact no.: 5 (shown green

This corresponds to the lines TX+ and TX- when using a DT21.

Line DECT_A2 goes to contact no.: 6 (shown yellow)

Line DECT_B2 goes to contact no.: 3 (shown yellow

This corresponds to the lines RX+ and RX- when using a DT21.

Connections - see:

Connections of the BU

[

→ 625 ]

.

636

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

LEDs and Switch Functions

MG100 Media Gateway

DT21 board, front side

1. V.24 Test plug

1 = not assigned

2 = TXD

3 = RXD

4 = not assigned

5 = GND

6 = D channel data upstream

7 = D channel data downstream

8 = Clock burst 2.048 MHz

9 = +5V

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

637

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Neutral position

S2 Neutral position

Switch Function

S1 links:

Mean:

Right:

S2

Right, then left:

Left, then right:

Mean:

Right:

Preparatory disabling

Operating status/release

Reset board

Forced board download

Report (fault statistic message to the system console) The switch must be moved back to the middle position after use (2 MHz clock output off) or to the right (2 MHz clock output on).

Normal operating mode / 2 MHz clock output off

2 MHz clock output on

L2

L3

L4

L5

Meanings of LEDs

L1 On:

Flashing: off:

L6

L7

On:

On:

On:

On:

On:

On:

Flashing: off:

L8

L9

On:

On:

L10 On:

L11 On:

L12 On:

Board is busy with switching functions

Board removable after preparatory disabling

Board is not busy

Module is synchronous clock supplier

Remote Alarm Indication RAI (opposite side reporting fault status)

Alarm Indication Signal AIS (opposite side reporting "Out of Order")

Loss of Signal LOS (no receiving signal)

Rx E bit errors

Board reset in progress

Download in progress

Board in operation

Normal operation (layer 1 active, no alarm)

Bit error rate > 10

-6

Bit error rate > 10

-3

Loss of Framing LOF (loss of frame synchronization)

The LED signals an activated debug monitoring. LED 12 is used as indicator as this debugging applies to the real time function of the module. It is possible to activate the debugging with a connected terminal and finally removing the terminal - then the debugging remains on and unaffected.

In order to connect an IDM to the front panel, an optional component must be inserted on the

DT21, reference number: 49.9801.4247.

638

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

HSCBO High Speed Computer Board Office

Short description

HSCBO (High Speed Computer Board Office) is a computer board (central system control) with a dynamic

RAM.

Features

Optionally with parity

128 kByte ERROR flash-PROM.

512 kByte Boot flash-PROM

Buffered real-time clock

Two-level hardware watchdog

Hardware status register

C-bus interface

4 B-channel access points

2x V.24 interfaces (non-insulated)

Download-capable

2x interfaces for compact flash memory cards

Other features

Current draw

+5V

1900 mA

The Compact Flash can be replaced during operation.

with 1 * Compact Flash (background memory)

LEDs and Switch Functions

1. Position of the control elements and LEDs

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

639

Control elements and LEDs of the HSCBO

HSCBO board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

S3 lower position

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch and MI button

Middle:

Left: Reset of the board, locking

Right:

S3 Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR) below: above:

Operating status: PC-CARD-ATA-interfaces in operation

Service position: Removing and inserting the HGS(s)

Meanings of LEDs

L2 Indicates module data transfer via the C-bus (e.g. call at subcriber)

L3 Indicates access to the inserted background memory

L4

L5

Indicates that the HGS(s) can be removed

Indicates that the system terminal can be connected to the first V.24 interface (service)

L7- L10 The LEDs flash to indicate the status from reset to operation. The display remains lit for about

5 seconds if a fault is found in the loading phases 15 to 7 (see following table). If a fatal fault occurs, the reset process is repeated from the beginning (loading phase 15).

No L7 L8 L9 L10 Phase name

15 1 1 1

14 1 1 1

1

0

Start reset phase

Test flash-PROM

13 1 1 0

12 1 1 0

11 1 0 1

10 1 0 1

1

0

1

0

Test QUICC

Test real time clock

Test C-bus interface

Test DUART (V.24 ports)

640

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

MG100 Media Gateway

9 1 0 0

8 1 0 0

7 0 1 1

6 0 1 1

5 0 1 0

4 0 1 0

3 0 0 1

2 0 0 1

1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

1 = LED on

0 = LED off

1 Test dynamic RAM

0 Output hardware image

1 End reset phase

0 Initial program loading (IPL)/IPL ready flag

1 STIN program loader is loaded and started

0 Operating system has been loaded and started (restart)

1 User programs (have been dispatched) have been loaded

0 Start of customer data loading in the user programs

1 All customer data loaded Start commissioning of module(s)

0 Module(s) in operation

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

641

BS Confidata:

Operating System Configuration Data from E050

The distribution of software components and / or tasks in the 9030 system among the single GCU controls is determined by the operating system configuration data. Like the 8030 system, each customer system is not separately configured, instead certain configurations are specified by means of package-formation, which each cover an area of the system. The slot allocation of the GCU is an exception, this occurs in the

9030 individually as per customer data.

From version E06 onwards, the OMSF task in the packages S2, I1...I4 is doubled (no primary function).

Packages

A configuration data packet determines the configuration of the operating system for a specific system extension. The packets are produced in the operating system development.

For the 9030 there are currently six packages.

• Package S1 for a single module

• Package S2 for a twin module and

• Packages I1,I2,I3 and I4 for various multi-module configurations.

GCU configuration

Each package defines the minimum and maximum number of GCUs in a system. The minimum number is dependent on the imperative functions (e.g. central switching functions), the maximum number is dependent on the GCUs defined in the package. The package defines which software (operating system/tasks) are loaded on each GCU.

Each GCU is assigned to a logical group number (LGN - logical group number) The LGN must be defined for a physical slot address on the module by TIP/PC-KAD. The LGNs, a function name (abbreviation of the control function, e.g. CSF) and a "mandatory/optional" code are supplied into TIP/PC-KAD/CAT in a data file.

642

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

BS Confidata:

Package S1 for a single module

LGN

Mandatory/optional

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

Package S2 for a twin module

LGN

Mandatory/optional

1 m

MSF1

MSF

CSF

LCF

MML

AIC

O+M

CCU

ACT

TKOM

HOKO

PRST

FHS

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

System Manual Integral Enterprise

LCF

MML

PRST

CCC

AIC

O+M

CCU

ACT

1 m

MSF1

MSF

CSF

TKOM

HOKO

FHS

2 m

MSF2

MSF

CSF’

CCC

CCU’

OMSF’

PRST

FHS

June 2009

643

I1 Package

for systems with up to 16 boards (use of 5ML board in the IMTU). In the first 3 modules of this package, central and module-specific functions (CSF, LCF and MSF) are mixed.

LGN mandatory/optional

1 m

MSF1

MSF

LCF

CCC

MML

AIC

TKOM

HOKO

PRST

FHS

ACT

2 m

MSF2

MSF

CSF

CCU

O+M

PRST

FHS

3 o

MSF3

MSF

CSF’

CCU’

OMSF’

FHS

4 o

MSF4

MSF

FHS

5 o

MSF5

MFS

FHS

6-16 o

MSF6-16

MSF

Remark:

If central functions are made available on separate GCU controls, it is possible to distribute these controls freely in the system

1

(slots are alloted by TIP or KAD/CAT), but no slots are possible in the IMTU module.

1

GCU slots must be situated under a fan within the framework of the slots defined by the GCU control.

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

644

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

BS Confidata:

I2 Package

for customers, who want to see central functions in the hardware, and for large systems due to load. 2 additional controls are made available for the central switching functions (CSF and CSF’).

LGN

Mandatory/optional

81 m

82 m

1 m

2 o

3 o

4 o

5 o

6-32 o

LCFA

CFS

LCF

CSFP

CFS’

CCC

MSF1

MSF

MSF2

MSF

MSF3

MSF

MSF4 MSF5

MSF MFS

MSF6-32

MSF

MML

AIC

ACT

O+M

CCU

TKOM

HOKO

PRST

FHS

CCU’

OMSF’

PRST

FHS FHS FHS FHS

Note:

If central functions are made available on separate GCU controls, it is possible to distribute these controls freely in the system

1

(slots are allotted by TIP or KAD/CAT), but no slots are possible in the IMTU module.

1

GCU slots must be situated under a fan within the framework of the slots defined by the GCU control.

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

645

I3 Package

for customers, who want to see central functions in the hardware, and for large systems due to load. 2 additional controls are made available for the central switching functions (CSF and CSF’). Furthermore, the LCF and CCC functions are evacuated.

LGN 81 m

CSFA

82 o

CSFP

91 m

LCFA

92 m

CCC

1 m

MSF1

2 o

MSF2

3 o

MSF3

4-32 o

MSF4-32 mandatory/optional

CFS

CCU

FHS

CFS’

CCU’

FHS

LCF

MML

AIC

ACT

O+M

TKOM

HOKO

PRST

FHS

CCC

OSMF’

PRST

FHS

MSF

FHS

MSF MFS MSF

Remark:

If central functions are made available on separate GCU controls, it is possible to distribute these controls freely in the system

1

(slots are alloted by TIP or KAD/CAT), but no slots are possible in the IMTU module.

1

GCU slots must be situated under a fan within the framework of the slots defined by the GCU control.

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

646

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

BS Confidata:

I4 Package

for customers, who want to see central functions in the hardware, and for large systems due to load. 2 additional controls are made available for the central switching functions (CSF and CSF’), 2 controls for the

CCU functions and 2 controls for the LCF and CCC functions. .

LGN 81 m

CSFA

82 m

CSFP

91 m

LCFA

92 m

CCC

71 m

CCUA

72 o

CCUP

1 m

MSF1

2-32 o

MSF2-32 mandatory/optional

CFS

PRST

FHS

CFS’

PRST

FHS

LCF

MML

AIC

ACT

O+M

TKOM

HOKO

PRST

FHS

CCC

OSMF’

PRST

FHS

CCU CCU’ MFS

FHS

MSF

Remark:

If central functions are made available on separate GCU controls, it is possible to distribute these controls freely in the system

1

(slots are alloted by TIP or KAD/CAT), but no slots are possible in the IMTU module.

1

GCU slots must be situated under a fan within the framework of the slots defined by the GCU control.

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

647

Interface Configuration

Each package also determines, among other things, the number and designation of hard disks and V.24

interfaces in the system. In this context, a distinction should be made between V.24 interfaces on GCU and

V.24 interfaces on UIP.

Each GCU is equipped with two V.24 interfaces, which are configured in the configuration data of the operating system. The interfaces are addressed via the device name. The device names are allocated to a certain interface by the physical device numbers (PDN = physical device number). The device names,

PDN, the interface type (console, ACOM) and the physical parameters can be changed within the system by operating system configuration task.

Two V.24 interfaces can be connected to one UIP board. Configuration data and device names are pre-configured in each package for V.24 interfaces on UIP. The allocation between an interface and a device name is once more managed by PDN. The PDN must be allocated to an interface by ICU configuration data.

In each package there are currently 2 possible UIPs with V.24 in the system, each of which is partly operated by the LCF.

Each configuration package contains

• a default configuration for the devices on GCU (online devices)

• an alternative configuration for the devices on GCU (offline devices)

• a predefined configuration for the devices on UIP

The main console (CO-01) is normally not connected to the system. The main console and console 2

(CO-02) are configured on the same interface; when necessary, the main console is activated by a switch

(only applies to LCFs).

The following must be taken into account concerning the use of the consoles by the text output task S01:

In view of the fact that the S01 issues an extremely sizeable volume of reports on the console, a LCF console should always be used for output. This means it is not necessary for these reports to be rerouted from the S01 to the LCF via the CBus system, thus generating a longer processing time.

The following interfaces are currently defined in the operating system configuration data:

648

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

BS Confidata:

Single module S1

Single module - configuration package S1

Device name

CO-01

CO-02

CO-03

CO-04

LGN Device

173 number

1/2/3

PD

N

State GCU/

101 ON

1

ICU

GCU

173 4/5/6

173 7/8/9

102 ON

1

181 19/20/21 105

2

GCU

103 OFF GCU

ICU

CO-05 182 22/23/24 106

2

ICU

ZG-01

VC-01

HS-01

HS-02

173 12

173 14

171 16

171 17

TC-01-01 173 28

TC-01-02 173 29

TC-01-03 173 30

TC-02-01 173 31

TC-02-02 173 32

TC-02-03 173 33

TC-03-01 173 34

TC-03-02 173 35

TC-03-03 173 36

ZG-02 183 13

VC-02

DC-01

184

173

25

38

104 ON GCU

108 OFF GCU

301 ON GCU

302 OFF GCU

700 ON GCU

700 ON GCU

700 ON GCU

700 ON GCU

700 ON GCU

700 ON GCU

700 ON GCU

700 ON GCU

700 ON GCU

109

2

10A

2

ICU

ICU

10B OFF GCU

1

2

3

Device driver Type

DVZT/DHZT System console

DVZT/DHZT Console

DVZT/DHZT Console

ICZT Console

ICZT

-

-

-

-

-

ICZT

ICZT

Console

-

-

-

-

DVZA/DHZA ACOM

DVZA/DHZA ACOM

DVZH/DHZP Harddisk

DVZH/DHZP Harddisk

S01 output to ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

S01 output to ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

S01 output to ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

ACOM

ACOM

DVZT/DHZT DCF77

Inter face

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

Port 0

3

Port 2

3

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

SCS0

SCS0

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

Port 0

3

Port 2

3

ASS2 Port B

Dependent on the "System Console Connected" switch on the computer board (GCU)

Dependent on the ICU customer data

The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given values are only suggestions.

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

649

Twin module S2

Twin module - configuration package S2

Device name

CO-01

CO-02

CO-03

CO-04

CO-05

ZG-01

VC-01

HS-01

HS-02

LGN Device number

173 1/2/3

173 4/5/6

173 7/8/9

PDN State GCU/

ICU

101

ON

1

Device driver Type

GCU1 DVZT/DHZT System console

102

103

ON

1

ON

181 19/20/21 105

2

182 22/23/24 106

2

173 12

173 14

171 16

171 17

TC-01-01 173 28

TC-01-02 173 29

TC-01-03 173 30

TC-02-01 173 31

104

108

301

302

700

700

700

700

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

GCU1 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU1

ICU

ICU

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

-

-

-

-

DVZT/DHZT Console

ICZT

ICZT

Console

Console

DVZA/DHZA ACOM

DVZA/DHZA ACOM

DVZH/DHZP Harddisk

DVZH/DHZP Harddisk

S01 output to ISM

Interface

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

2

2

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

SCS0

SCS0

S0

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

S01 output to ISM S0

TC-02-02 173 32

TC-02-03 173 33

TC-03-01 173 34

TC-03-02 173 35

TC-03-03 173 36

ZG-02 173 13

VC-02

DC-01

173 25

173 38

700 ON

700 ON

700 ON

700 ON

700 ON

109

2

10A

2

GCU1 -

GCU1 -

GCU1 -

GCU1 -

GCU1 -

ICU

ICU

ICZT

ICZT

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

S01 output to ISM

ACOM

ACOM

10B OFF GCU1 DVZT/DHZT DCF77

S0

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

2

2

ASS2 Port B

CO-12

CO-13

ZG-11

VC-11

ZG-12

VC-12

176 4/5/6

176 7/8/9

176 12

176 14

176 13

176 25

102 OFF GCU2 DVZT/DHZT Console

103 OFF GCU2 DVZT/DHZT Console

104 ON GCU2 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

108 OFF GCU2 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

109 OFF GCU2 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

10A ON GCU2 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

1

2

3

Dependent on the "System Console Connected" switch on the computer board (GCU)

Dependent on the ICU customer data

The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given values are only suggestions.

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

650

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

BS Confidata:

Multi-Module I1

Multi-module (up to 20 modules) - configuration package I1

Device name

CO-01

CO-02

CO-03

CO-04

CO-05

ZG-01

VC-01

HS-01

HS-02

LGN Device number

173 1/2/3

173 4/5/6

173 7/8/9

173 12

173 14

171 16

171 17

TC-01-01 173 28

TC-01-02 173 29

TC-01-03 173 30

TC-02-01 173 31

PDN State GCU/

ICU

101 ON

1

Device driver Type

GCU1 DVZT/DHZT SystemConsole

102 ON

1

GCU1

103 OFF GCU1

181 19/20/21 105

2

182 22/23/24 106

2

104 ON

ICU

ICU

GCU1

108 OFF GCU1

301 ON GCU1

302 OFF GCU1

700 ON

700 ON

700 ON

700 ON

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

DVZT/DHZT

DVZT/DHZT

ICZT

ICZT

DVZA/DHZA

DVZA/DHZA

-

-

-

-

DVZH/DHZP

DVZH/DHZP

Console

Console

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

Harddisk

Harddisk

S01 output to ISM

Interface

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

2

2

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

SCS0

SCS0

S0

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

S01 output to ISM S0

TC-02-02 173 32

TC-02-03 173 33

TC-03-01 173 34

TC-03-02 173 35

TC-03-03 173 36

ZG-02 183 13

VC-02

DC-01

184 25

173 38

700 ON GCU1 -

700 ON GCU1 -

700 ON GCU1 -

700 ON GCU1 -

700 ON GCU1 -

109

2

ICU

10A

2

ICU

ICZT

ICZT

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

S01 output to ISM

ACOM

ACOM

10B OFF GCU1 DVZT/DHZT DCF77

S0

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

2

2

ASS2 Port B

CO-12

CO-13

ZG-11

VC-11

ZG-12

VC-12

176 4/5/6

176 7/8/9

176 12

176 14

176 13

176 25

102 ON GCU2 DVZT/DHZT Console

103 OFF GCU2 DVZT/DHZT Console

104 OFF GCU2 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

108 ON GCU2 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

109 OFF GCU2 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

10A OFF GCU2 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

1

2

3 dependent on the "System Console Connected" switch on the computer board (GCU) dependent on the ICU customer data

The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given values are only suggestions.

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

651

Multi-Module I1 (continued)

Multi-module (up to 20 modules) - configuration package I1 ... continued

Device name

LGN Device number

PDN State GCU/

ICU

Device driver Type

CO-22 177

CO-23 177

4/5/6

7/8/9

102

103

ON

ON

GCU3

GCU3

DVZT/DHZT

DVZT/DHZT

Console

Console

ZG-21 177

VC-21 177

ZG-22 177

VC-22 177

12

14

13

25

104

108

109

10A

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

GCU3

GCU3

GCU3

GCU3

DVZA/DHZA

DVZA/DHZA

DVZA/DHZA

DVZA/DHZA

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

CO-32 178

CO-33 178

ZG-31 178

VC-31 178

ZG-32 178

VC-32 178

CO-42 179

CO-43 179

ZG-41 179

VC-41 179

ZG-42 179

VC-42 179

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

102

103

104

108

109

10A

102

103

104

108

109

10A

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

GCU4 DVZT/DHZT

GCU4 DVZT/DHZT

GCU5 DVZT/DHZT

GCU5 DVZT/DHZT

GCU5

GCU5

GCU5

GCU5

DVZA/DHZA

DVZA/DHZA

DVZA/DHZA

DVZA/DHZA

Console

Console

GCU4 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU4 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU4 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU4 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

1

2

3

Interface

Dependent on the "System Console Connected" switch on the computer board (GCU)

Dependent on the ICU customer data

The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given values are only suggestions.

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

652

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

BS Confidata:

Multi-module I2

Multi-module (up to 32 modules) - configuration package I2

Device name

CO-01

CO-02

CO-03

CO-04

CO-05

ZG-01

VC-01

HS-01

HS-02

LGN Device

173

173

173 number

1/2/3

4/5/6

7/8/9

PDN State GCU/

ICU

101

ON

1

Device driver Type

GCU81 DVZT/DHZT System console

102

103

ON

1

OFF

181 19/20/21 105

2

182 22/23/24 106

2

173 12

173 14

171 16

171 17

TC-01-01 173 28

TC-01-02 173 29

TC-01-03 173 30

TC-02-01 173 31

104

108

301

302

700

700

700

700

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

GCU81

GCU81

ICU

ICU

GCU81

GCU81

GCU81

GCU81

GCU81

GCU81

GCU81

GCU81

-

-

-

-

DVZT/DHZT Console

DVZT/DHZT Console

ICZT

ICZT

Console

Console

DVZA/DHZA ACOM

DVZA/DHZA ACOM

DVZH/DHZP Harddisk

DVZH/DHZP Harddisk

S01 output to ISM

Interface

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

2

2

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

SCS0

SCS0

S0

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

S01 output to ISM S0

TC-02-02 173 32

TC-02-03 173 33

TC-03-01 173 34

TC-03-02 173 35

TC-03-03 173 36

ZG-02 183 13

VC-02

DC-01

184

173

25

38

700 ON

700 ON

700 ON

700 ON

700 ON

109

2

10A

2

GCU81 -

GCU81 -

GCU81 -

GCU81 -

GCU81 -

ICU

ICU

ICZT

ICZT

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

S01 output to ISM

ACOM

ACOM

10B OFF GCU81 DVZT/DHZT DCF77

S0

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

2

2

ASS2 Port B

CO-12

CO-13

ZG-11

VC-11

ZG-12

VC-12

174 4/5/6

174 7/8/9

174 12

174 14

174 13

174 25

102 ON GCU82 DVZT/DHZT Console

103 OFF GCU82 DVZT/DHZT Console

104 OFF GCU82 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

108 ON GCU82 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

109 OFF GCU82 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

10A OFF GCU82 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

1

2

3

Dependent on the "System Console Connected" switch on the computer board (GCU)

Dependent on the ICU customer data

The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given values are only suggestions.

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

653

Multi-Module I2 (continued)

Multi-module (up to 32 modules) - configuration package I2 ... continued

VC-22

CO-32

CO-33

ZG-31

VC-31

ZG-32

VC-32

CO-42

Device name

CO-22

CO-23

ZG-21

VC-21

ZG-22

CO-43

ZG-41

VC-41

ZG-42

VC-42

LGN

178

179

179

179

178

178

178

178

177

177

177

177

177

177

178

179

179

179

Device number

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

PDN

102

103

104

108

109

10A

102

103

104

108

109

10A

102

103

104

108

109

10A

State

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

GCU/

ICU

Device driver

GCU3 DVZT/DHZT

Type

Console

GCU3 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU3 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU3 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU3 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU3 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU4 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU4 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU4 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU4 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU4 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU4 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU5 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU5 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU5 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU5 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU5 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU5 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

1

2

3

Interface

Dependent on the "System Console Connected" switch on the computer board (GCU)

Dependent on the ICU customer data

The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given values are only suggestions.

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

654

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

BS Confidata:

Multi-Module I3

Multi-module (up to 32 modules) - configuration package I3

Device name

CO-01

CO-02

CO-03

CO-04

CO-05

ZG-01

VC-01

HS-01

HS-02

LGN Device

173

173

173 number

1/2/3

4/5/6

7/8/9

PDN State GCU/

ICU

101

ON

1

Device driver Type

GCU91 DVZT/DHZT System console

102

103

ON

1

OFF

181 19/20/21 105

2

182 22/23/24 106

2

173 12

173 14

171 16

171 17

TC-01-01 173 28

TC-01-02 173 29

TC-01-03 173 30

TC-02-01 173 31

104

108

OFF

ON

301 ON

GCU91 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU91 DVZT/DHZT Console

ICU

ICU

ICZT

ICZT

Console

Console

GCU91 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU91 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU91 DVZH/DHZP Harddisk

302 OFF GCU91 DVZH/DHZP Harddisk

700

700

700

700

ON

ON

ON

ON

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

S01 output to ISM

Interface

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

2

2

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

SCS0

SCS0

S0

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

S01 output to ISM S0

TC-02-02 173 32

TC-02-03 173 33

TC-03-01 173 34

TC-03-02 173 35

TC-03-03 173 36

ZG-02 183 13

VC-02

DC-01

184

173

25

38

700 ON

700 ON

700 ON

700 ON

700 ON

109

2

10A

2

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

ICU

ICU

ICZT

ICZT

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

S01 output to ISM

ACOM

ACOM

10B OFF GCU91 DVZT/DHZT DCF77

S0

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

2

2

ASS2 Port B

CO-12

CO-13

ZG-11

VC-11

ZG-12

VC-12

174 4/5/6

174 7/8/9

174 12

174 14

174 13

174 25

102 ON GCU92 DVZT/DHZT Console

103 OFF GCU92 DVZT/DHZT Console

104 ON GCU92 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

108 OFF GCU92 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

109 OFF GCU92 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

10A OFF GCU92 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

1

2

3

Dependent on the "System Console Connected" switch on the computer board (GCU)

Dependent on the ICU customer data

The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given values are only suggestions.

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

655

Multi-Module I3 (continued)

Multi-module (up to 32 modules) - configuration package I3 ... continued

Device name

LGN

CO-22 177

CO-23 177

ZG-21 177

VC-21 177

ZG-22 177

VC-22 177

CO-32 178

CO-33 178

ZG-31 178

VC-31 178

ZG-32 178

VC-32 178

CO-42 179

CO-43 179

ZG-41 179

VC-41 179

ZG-42 179

VC-42 179

Device number

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

PDN

102

103

104

108

109

10A

102

103

104

108

109

10A

102

103

104

108

109

10A

State

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

GCU/

ICU

Device driver

Type

GCU81 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU81 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU81 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU81 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU81 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU81 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU82 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU82 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU82 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU82 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU82 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU82 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU1 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU1 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU1 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU1 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU1 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU1 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

1

2

3

Interface

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

Dependent on the "System Console Connected" switch on the computer board (GCU)

Dependent on the ICU customer data

The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given values are only suggestions.

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

656

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

BS Confidata:

Multi-module I4

Multi-module (up to 32 modules) - configuration package I4

Device name

CO-01

CO-02

CO-03

CO-04

CO-05

ZG-01

VC-01

HS-01

HS-02

LGN

173

173

173

Device number

1/2/3

4/5/6

7/8/9

PDN State GCU/

ICU

101

ON

1

Device driver Type

GCU91 DVZT/DHZT System console

102

103

ON

1

OFF

181 19/20/21 105

2

182 22/23/24 106

2

173 12

173 14

171 16

171 17

TC-01-01 173 28

TC-01-02 173 29

TC-01-03 173 30

TC-02-01 173 31

104

108

OFF

ON

301 ON

GCU91 DVZT/DHZT

GCU91 DVZT/DHZT

ICU

ICU

ICZT

ICZT

GCU91 DVZA/DHZA

GCU91 DVZA/DHZA

Console

Console

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

GCU91 DVZH/DHZP Harddisk

302 OFF GCU91 DVZH/DHZP Harddisk

700

700

700

700

ON

ON

ON

ON

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

S01 output to ISM

Interface

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

2

2

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

SCS0

SCS0

S0

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

S01 output to ISM S0

TC-02-02 173 32

TC-02-03 173 33

TC-03-01 173 34

TC-03-02 173 35

TC-03-03 173 36

ZG-02 183 13

VC-02

DC-01

184

173

25

38

700 ON

700 ON

700 ON

700 ON

700 ON

109

2

10A

2

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

ICU

ICU

ICZT

ICZT

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

S01 output to ISM

ACOM

ACOM

10B OFF GCU91 DVZT/DHZT DCF77

S0

Transparent console S0

Transparent console S0

2

2

ASS2 Port B

CO-12

CO-13

ZG-11

VC-11

ZG-12

VC-12

174 4/5/6

174 7/8/9

174 12

174 14

174 13

174 25

102 ON GCU92 DVZT/DHZT Console

103 OFF GCU92 DVZT/DHZT Console

104 ON GCU92 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

108 OFF GCU92 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

109 OFF GCU92 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

10A OFF GCU92 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

1

2

3

Dependent on the "System Console Connected" switch on the computer board (GCU)

Dependent on the ICU customer data

The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given values are only suggestions.

Abbreviations [

→ 659 ]

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

657

Multi-Module I4 (continued)

Multi-module (up to 32 modules) - configuration package I4 ... continued

CO-32

CO-33

ZG-31

VC-31

ZG-32

VC-32

CO-42

CO-43

Device name

CO-22

CO-23

ZG-21

VC-21

ZG-22

VC-22

ZG-41

VC-41

ZG-42

VC-42

LGN

179

179

179

179

178

178

178

178

179

179

177

177

178

178

177

177

177

177

Device number

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

PDN

102

103

104

108

109

10A

102

103

104

108

109

10A

102

103

104

108

109

10A

State

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

GCU/

ICU

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

Device driver Type

GCU81 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU81 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU81 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU81 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU81 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU81 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU82 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU82 DVZT/DHZT Console

GCU82 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU82 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU82 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU82 DVZA/DHZA ACOM

GCU1

GCU1

DVZT/DHZT

DVZT/DHZT

Console

Console

DVZA/DHZA ACOM

DVZA/DHZA ACOM

DVZA/DHZA ACOM

DVZA/DHZA ACOM

1

2

3

Interface

Dependent on the "System Console Connected" switch on the computer board (GCU)

Dependent on the ICU customer data

The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given values are only suggestions.

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port B

ASS2 Port A

ASS2 Port A

For consoles (CO-xx), three devices have been mapped onto each interface:

• CO-xx-1 Fault output level

• CO-xx-2 Control level (for prologue)

• CO-xx-3 Input/Output level (for dialogue)

658

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

BS Confidata:

Abbreviations

FHS

GCU

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF

PRST

UIP

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’

CSF

CSF’

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM

Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

Access Control Task

Automatic Information Call

Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU

Central Switching Functions

Standby CSF

File Handling System

Generic Control Unit

Interface Control Unit

Loading Central Function (IVL)

Man Machine Language (management)

Module Switching Functions (IVG)

Protocol stack

Universal Interface Platform

Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions

Standby OMSF

Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions

Operation and Maintenance Access Data

Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal

Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)

Server task (Hotel communication)

Server task (text communication)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

659

Cable network

Connections from CSI

Connections of connecting device boards and test connections are routed via prefabricated cables in:

• Main distribution frame

• Network termination

• Service block

Main Distribution Frame or Network Termination

The cables running from the cable adapters to the main distribution frame can be supplied in two variations:

• Open end on the main distributor frame

• With champ connector for the panel

Cable with open end

Connect the sheath wires of the connecting cables with the open end to the earth terminals.

Cable for panels

The following panel variants can be mounted in the cabinets:

1) 24-part panel (3x8 WE, 4-wire) : Part no.: 4.999.046.814

660

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Cable network

6

7

8

4

5

2

3

Champ-PIN

WE-PIN

1

1

26

27

2

WE 1

3

28

29

4

WE 2

5

30

31

6

WE 3

7

32

33

8

WE 4

9

34

35

WE 5

10

11

36

37

WE 6

12

13

38

39

WE 7

14

1. Champ 1

2. Champ 2

3. Champ 3

4. WE1

This panel is designed for four-wire connection. This could be the connection of the following modules:

ADM

[

→ 665 ]

DECT21 or DECT22

[

→ 666 ]

DS02 or DS03

[

→ 667 ]

DT0

[

→ 667 ]

UIP

[

→ 668 ]

15

40

41

WE 8

16

2) 48-part panel (3x16 WE, 2-wire) : Part no.: 4.999.046.813

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

661

7

8

3

4

1

2

5

6

Champ-PIN

WE-

PIN

WE

1

WE

2

WE

3

WE

4

WE

5

WE

6

WE

7

WE

8

WE

9

WE

10

WE

11

WE

12

WE

13

WE

14

WE

15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41

WE

16

1. Champ 1

2. Champ 2

3. Champ 3

4. WE1

5. WE2

This panel is designed for two-wire connection. This could be the connection of the following modules:

ADM

[

→ 665 ]

ATB

[

→ 671 ]

DUP03

[

→ 663 ]

ASC2

[

→ 669 ]

ASC21

[

→ 665 ]

ATC

ATLC

[

→ 671 ]

[

→ 672 ]

DUPN

MAC

[

[

→ 663 ]

→ 664 ]

ASCEU

ATA

[

[

→ 669 ]

→ 670 ]

ATA2

[

→ 670 ]

DDID

[

→ 675 ]

JPAT

[

→ 674 ]

MULI

[

→ 664 ]

UIP

[

→ 668 ]

Please note that you may have to use two cables for each connecting device.

The following panel is available for service purposes:

3.) Service panel: Part no.: 49.9904.8477

662

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Cable network

MDF connections of DUP03

MDF

Colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

Panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

MDF connections DUPN

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Patch panel for the 2 wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

via CA1B from the DUP03

A9/B9

A10/B10

A11/B11

A12/B12

A13/B13

A14/B14

A15/B15

A16/B16

A1/B1

A2/B2

A3/B3

A4/B4

A5/B5

A6/B6

A7/B7

A8/B8

via CA2B from DUPN

Cable 1 Cable 2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B17

A18/B18

A3/B3

A4/B4

A5/B5

A6/B5

A19/B19

A20/B20

A21/B21

A22/B22

A7/B7

A8/B8

A9/B9

A10/B10

A11/B11

A12/B12

A13/B13

A14/B14

A15/B15

A16/B16

A23/B23

A24/B24

A25/B25

A26/B26

A27/B27

A28/B28

A29/B29

A30/B30

A31/B31

A32/B32

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

663

MDF connections MAC

The CA6B cable adapter must be used to integrate the MAC into the MG1000 rack.

Colors

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BK

MDF

Panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Using MAC CA6B

UP

0

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

Available

Available

Available

Available

Available

Available

Available

Available

MDF connections of MULI

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

via CA1B from MULI (U

P0

)

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Patch panel for the two wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

A1/B1

A2/B2

A3/B3

A4/B4

A5/B5

A6/B6

A7/B7

A8/B8

A9/B9

A10/B10

A11/B11

A12/B12

A13/B13

A14/B14

A15/B15

A16/B16

664

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Cable network

MDF connections of ASC21

colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16 a7/b7 a8/b8 a9/b9 a10/b10 a11/b11 a12/b12 a13/b13 a14/b14 a15/b15 a16/b16

Cable adapter CA2B or CARUB from ASC21

Cable 1 Cable 2 a1/b1 a2/b2 a17/b17 a18/b18 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a19/b19 a20/b20 a21/b21 a22/b22 a23/b23 a24/b24 a25/b25 a26/b26 a27/b27 a28/b28 a29/b29 a30/b30 a31/b31 a32/b32

MDF connections of ADM

MDF, Cable 1

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for the two wire connection

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

Patch panel for the four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

STSM1

1st slot A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

A2/B2 (T)

C2/D2 (R)

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

via CA2B from

UPSM,

UPSM1

ADM with

UKSM

A1/B1 free

A2/B2 free

A1/B1 free

A2/B2 free

A3/B3 free

A4/B4 free free free free free

ADM with

ABSM,

ABSM1 a1/b1 free a2/b2 free a3/b3 free a4/b4 free

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

665

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

2nd slot A5/B5 (T)

C5/D5 (R)

A6/B6 (T)

C6/D6 (R)

A7/B7 (T)

C7/D7 (R)

A8/B8 (T)

C8/D8 (R)

A5/B5 free

A6/B6 free

A7/B7 free

A8/B8 free

A3/B3 free

A4/B4 free free free free free a5/b5 free a6/b6 free a7/b7 free a8/b8 free

MDF Cable 2

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for the two wire connection

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Patch panel for the four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

STSM1

3rd slot A9/B9 (T)

C9/D9 (R)

via CA2B from

UPSM,

UPSM1

A9/B9 free

ADM with

UKSM

A5/B5 free

ADM with

ABSM,

ABSM1 a9/b9 free

A10/B10 (T) A10/B10 A6/B6 a10/b10

C10/D10 (R) free free free

A11/B11 (T) A11/B11

C11/D11 (R) free

A12/B12 (T) A12/B12

C12/D12 (R) free free free free free a11/b11 free a12/b12 free

4th slot A13/B13 (T) A13/B13 A7/B7 a13/b13

C13/D13 (R) free free free

A14/B14 (T) A14/B14 A8/B8 a14/b14

C14/D14 (R) free free free

A15/B15 (T) A15/B15

C15/D15 (R) free

A16/B16 (T) A16/B16

C16/D16 (R) free free free free free a15/b15 free a16/b16 free

MDF connections of DECT21

MDF

colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

via CA1B from DECT21 or DECT22

Panel for four-wire connection

WE 1 1st Station

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

2nd Station

3rd Station

4th Station

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

666

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Cable network

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

MDF connections of DS02 or DS03

Colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Panel for four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

C2/D2 (R)

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

MDF connections of DT0

5th Station

6th Station

7th Station

8th Station

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

via CA2B from DS02 or DS03

Cable 1 Cable 2

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

A9/B9 (T)

C9/D9 (R)

A2/B2 (T)

C10/D10 (R)

A10/B10 (T)

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

A5/B5 (T)

C5/D5 (R)

A6/B6 (T)

C6/D6 (R)

A7/B7 (T)

C7/D7 (R)

A8/B8 (T)

C8/D8 (R)

A11/B11 (T)

C11/D11 (R)

A12/B12 (T)

C12/D12 (R)

A13/B13 (T)

C13/D13 (R)

A14/B14 (T)

C14/D14 (R)

A15/B15 (T)

C15/D15 (R)

A16/B16 (T)

C16/D16 (R)

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Patch panel for four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

via CA1x from the DT0

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

A2/B2 (T)

C2/D2 (R)

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

667

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

A5/B5 (T)

C6/D5 (R)

A6/B6 (T)

C6/D6 (R)

A7/B7 (T)

C7/D7 (R)

A8/B8 (T)

C8/D8 (R)

MDF connections of UIP

Colors

16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Panel for the two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Panel for the four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

UIP slot

1

2

3

4

via CA1B/3B from the UIP with four CL2M via CA1B/3B from the UIP with four

CL2ME

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

Free

Free

A2/B2 (T)

C2/D2 (R)

Free

Free

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

Free

Free

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

Free

Free

A1/B1 (R)

Free

Free

Free

A2/B2 (R)

Free

Free

Free

A3/B3 (R)

Free

Free

Free

A4/B4 (R)

Free

Free

Free

MDF Connection via CA3B from UIP

V24M sub-modules inserted on slots 1 and 2 can be tapped directly from the Sub-D connectors of the cable adapter.

If slots 1 and 2 contain a mixture of CL2M, CL2ME and V24M then refer to the table above.

668

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Cable network

MDF connections of ASC2

MDF

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for two-wire connection

RD/BU

WH/YE

WE 1

WE 2

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB for ASC2

Cable 1 Cable 2 a1/b1 a2/b2 a17/b17 a18/b18 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a19/b19 a20/b20 a21/b21 a22/b22 a7/b7 a8/b8 a9/b9 a10/b10 a11/b11 a12/b12 a13/b13 a14/b14 a15/b15 a16/b16 a23/b23 a24/b24 a25/b25 a26/b26 a27/b27 a28/b28 a29/b29 a30/b30 a31/b31 a32/b32

MDF connections of ASCxx

MDF

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for two-wire connection

RD/BU

WH/YE

WE 1

WE 2

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter CA1B/CARUB from ASCxx

a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 a9/b9 a10/b10 a11/b11 a12/b12 a13/b13 a14/b14 a15/b15 a16/b16

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

669

MDF connections from ATA

MDF

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for two-wire connection

RD/BU

WH/YE

WE 1

WE 2

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter CA1B for ATA

free free free free free free free free a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8

MDF connections from ATA2

MDF

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for two-wire connection

RD/BU

WH/YE

WE 1

WE 2

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter CA1B from ATA2

free free free free free free free free a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8

670

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Cable network

MDF connections from ATB

MDF

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for two-wire connection

RD/BU

WH/YE

WE 1

WE 2

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter CA1B from ATB

free free free free free free free free a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8

MDF connections from ATC

colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Patch panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter CA1B from ATC

Free

Free

Free

Free

Free

Free

Free

Free a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

671

MDF connections from ATLC

Main distributor

If necessary, connect the sheath wires of the connecting cable (open end and WP plug) with the ground terminals.

Connect the connection cable from the MG1000 Media Gateway to the network (patches).

Mark the cable at both ends using the supplied labels.

Connections from the ATLC

Variants

ATLC without submodules

ATLC without submodules

ATLC without submodules

Port

8 (1 per line)

8 (1 per line)

8 (1 per line)

Interfaces/procedures

2-wire speech path,

E+M signaling

4-wire speech path,

E+M signaling

4-wire speech path,

E+M and S3 signaling in

/S3 out

ATLC with SSSM submodules

ATLC with ACSM submodules

8 (1 per SSSM)

8 (1 per ACSM) a/b ground a/b

50 Hz alternating current a/b

ATLC with ALSM/ALSMF submodules 8 (1 per ALSM/ALSMF) Special facility (e.g.

or ALSMH

ATLC with PLSM submodules

(1 per ALSMH)

8 (1 per PLSM)

Analog DID Hong Kong

Special facility (e.g. door handsfree device) a/b a/b a/b c/d e/f

Connections a/b

S in

/S out a/b

Ka/Kb

S in

/S out a/b

Ka/Kb

S an

/S ab

S3 an

/S3 ab

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC module without submodules

Colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Patch panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB

Cable 1

1a/1b

1Ka/1Kb

2a/2b

2Ka/2Kb

3a/3b

3Ka/3Kb

Cable 2

1S in

/1S out

1S3 in

/1S3 out

2S in

/2S out

2S3 in

/2S3 out

3S in

/3S out

3S3 in

/3S3 out

672

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Cable network

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

4a/4b

4Ka/4Kb

5a/5b

5Ka/5Kb

6a/6b

6Ka/6Kb

7a/7b

7Ka/7Kb

8a/8b

8Ka/8Kb

4S in

/4S out

4S3 in

/4S3 out

5S in

/5S out

5S3 in

/5S3 out

6S in

/6S out

6S3 in

/6S3 out

7S in

/7S out

7S3 in

/7S3 out

8S in

/8S out

8S3 in

/8S3 out

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC module with ACSM or ALSM/ALSMF/ALSMH or

SSSM submodules

Colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

CA2B or CARUB cable adapter

Cable 1 Cable 2

1a/1b free/free

2a/2b free/free

3a/3b free/free

4a/4b free/free

5a/5b free/free

6a/6b free/free

7a/7b free/free

8a/8b free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC module with PLSM submodules

Colors 16x2

RD / BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

MDF

Panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

CA2B or CARUB cable adapter

Cable 1

1a/1b free/free

2a/2b free/free

Cable 2

1c/1d

1f/1e

2c/2d

2f/2e

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

673

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

MDF connections from JPAT

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Patch panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

3a/3b free/free

4a/4b free/free

5a/5b free/free

6a/6b free/free

7a/7b free/free

8a/8b free/free

Cable Adapter CARUB from JPAT

Cable 1 Cable 2 a1/b1 free/free c1/free free/free a2/b2 free/free a3/b3 free/free c2/free free/free c3/free free/free a4/b4 free/free a5/b5 free/free a6/b6 free/free a7/b7 free/free a8/b8 free/free c4/free free/free c5/free free/free c6/free free/free c7/free free/free c8/free free/free

3c/3d

3f/3e

4c/4d

4f/4e

5c/5d

5f/5e

6c/6d

6f/6e

7c/7d

7f/7e

8c/8d

8f/8e

674

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Cable network

MDF connections from DDID

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Patch panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

Cable Adapter CA1B from DDID

free free free free free free free free a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

675

Service panel

General

The service panel provides all connections required for service purposes. It must be installed above or below the rack with the modules ACB/HSCB and CF22/CF2E.

The service panel requires a height unit.

As a standard, the two V.24 interface connections on the AEV24B/AV24B are offered for the first two RJ45 couplings, viewed from the left side. The last (tenth) RJ45 coupling is reserved for the S

0

connection of the service PC (variation main distributor frame with panel cable).

There are eight RJ45 located in the middle of the panel, which are fitted at the rear with 8 LSA Plus connections each on a circuit board. This means that project-specific connections can be brought to the panel from the main distributor frame. This may also be the S

0

connection for the service PC (main distributor frame for cable with open end).

There is an opening on the right hand side to install the error display unit (EDU). This installation is optional.

MG1000 service panel

1. 10 RJ 45 couplings

2. 8 RJ45 with LSA Plus connections (freely wirable)

3. Opening for EDU module

676

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Cable network

V.24 Interfaces

The connections of the V.24 interfaces (GCU Generic Control Unit, ACB/HSCB) are adapted on the adapter module AEV24B/AV24B with the adapters V.24/RJ45 (connect adapter V.24/RJ45 to 9-pin D-sub-connector).

Then connect the RJ45 adapter with the RJ45 service panel using coupling 1 or 2 to 8-wire panel cables.

V.24 Interfaces to the service panel

1. Adapter module AEV24B/AV24B

2. Adapter V.24 RJ45

3. Service block

S0 connection

There are two possibilities, depending on the type of main distributor frame:

Connection via patch cable

In this variant, you must make a connection between the patch panel on the main distributor frame and the service panel

(right RJ45 coupling).

Connection with installation cable via the LSA Plus connections

This is where the appropriate jumpering must be carried out on the main distributor frame.

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

677

Installing the EDU

Optionally, the service panel can be retro-fitted with the submodule EDU.

A ribbon cable us used to connect the EDU.

Connect the EDU to the EDB

1. ESB Adapter

2. Ribbon cable ESB-EDU

3. Sub-module EDU

The EDU is fastened to the service panel using two screws.

678

System Manual Integral Enterprise June 2009

Cable network

Line lengths

When planning the network, it is necessary to take into account the fact that the Ranges of the interfaces

(S

0

, U

P0 etc.) are different.

When connecting the line network, the following instructions must be adhered to:

• The two transmission and receiving line pairs (S

0

) and the double wire for U

P0

, U

PN

and U

K0

must be executed as a twisted wire pair.

• When dealing with cables with four twisted wires, use a four for the joint transmission and reception line of a S0 interface.

• The naked wires of the cable used must be connected to ground potential.

The following diagrams explain the correlations of:

• Ranges

• Interfaces

• Cable types

Cable type

Wire diameter

Installation cable

Outdoor cable

J-Y(ST)Y

J-2Y(St)Y St III BD

A-2YF(L)2Y

0.6 mm

0.6 mm

0.6 mm

Range of the interfaces in metres

S

0

bus S

0

PTP

U

P0

U

PN

U

PD

U

K0

short extended

150 500 1000 1800 1000 1000 4500

2100

3500 2800 2800 8000

CAT.5

CAT.5

CAT.6

CAT.6

CAT.6

CAT.7

CAT.7

Cabling systems

Cable type Wire diameter

Range of the interfaces in metres

S

0

bus

short extended

0.48 mm 150 500

S

0

650

PTP

U

P0

2000

U

PN

2000

U

PD

2000

U

K0

4000 Li-2YCH 4x2x0,48L

J-2YY 4x2x0,51

J-02YS(St)CY 4x2x0,52

0.51 mm 150

0.52 mm 150

J-2YY 4x2x0,52 0.52 mm 150

J-02YSCY 4x2x0,56 PiMF 0.56 mm 150

500

500

500

500

800